G7 Drive Technical Manual

Transcription

1 G7 Drive Technical Manual Models: CIMR-G7U Document Number: TM.G7.0

2 Warnings and Cautions This Section provides warnings and cautions pertinent this product, that if not heeded, may result in personal injury, fatality, or equipment damage. Yaskawa is not responsible for consequences of ignoring these instructions. WARNING YASKAWA manufactures component parts that can be used in a wide variety of industrial applications. The selection and application of YASKAWA products remain the responsibility of the equipment designer or end user. YASKAWA accepts no responsibility for the way its products are incorporated in the final system design. Under no circumstances should any YASKAWA product be incorporated in any product or design as the exclusive or sole safety control. Without exception, all controls should be designed detect faults dynamically and fail safely under all circumstances. All products designed incorporate a component part manufactured by YASKAWA must be supplied the end user with appropriate warnings and instructions as that part s safe use and operation. Any warnings provided by YASKAWA must be promptly provided the end user. YASKAWA offers an express warranty only as the quality of its products in conforming standards and specifications published in the YASKAWA manual. NO OTHER WARRANTY, EXPRESS OR IMPLIED, IS OFFERED. YASKAWA assumes no liability for any personal injury, property damage, losses, or claims arising from misapplication of its products. WARNING Read and understand this manual before installing, operating, or servicing this Drive. All warnings, cautions, and instructions must be followed. All activity must be performed by qualified personnel. The Drive must be installed according this manual and local codes. Do not connect or disconnect wiring while the power is on. Do not remove covers or uch circuit boards while the power is on. Do not remove or insert the digital operar while power is on. Before servicing, disconnect all power the equipment. The internal capacir remains charged even after the power supply is turned off. The charge indicar LED will extinguish when the DC bus voltage is below 50Vdc. To prevent electric shock, wait at least five minutes after all indicars are OFF and measure DC bus voltage level confirm safe level. Do not perform a withstand voltage test on any part of the unit. This equipment uses sensitive devices and may be damaged by high voltage. WARNING The Drive is suitable for circuits capable of delivering not more than 00,000 RMS symmetrical Amperes, 40Vac maximum (00-40V Class) and 480Vac maximum ( V Class). Install adequate branch circuit short circuit protection per applicable codes. Failure do so may result in equipment damage and/or personal injury. Refer Appendix E for further details. Do not connect unapproved LC or RC interference suppression filters, capacirs, or overvoltage protection devices the output of the Drive. These devices may generate peak currents that exceed Drive specifications. i

3 To avoid unnecessary fault displays caused by contacrs or output switches placed between Drive and mor, auxiliary contacts must be properly integrated in the control logic circuit. YASKAWA is not responsible for any modification of the product made by the user; doing so will void the warranty. This product must not be modified. Verify that the rated voltage of the Drive matches the voltage of the incoming power supply before applying power. To meet CE directives, proper line filters and proper installation are required. Some drawings in this manual may be shown with protective covers or shields removed, describe details. These must be replaced before operation. Observe electrostatic discharge procedures when handling circuit boards prevent ESD damage. The equipment may start unexpectedly upon application of power. Clear all personnel from the Drive, mor, and machine area before applying power. Secure covers, couplings, shaft keys, and machine loads before energizing the Drive. Please do not connect or operate any equipment with visible damage or missing parts. The operating company is responsible for any injuries or equipment damage resulting from failure heed the warnings in this manual. Intended Use Drives are intended for installation in electrical systems or machinery. The Drives are designed and manufactured in accordance with applicable UL and cul standards, and CE directives. For use in the European Union, the installation in machinery and systems must conform the following product standards of the Low Voltage Directive: EN 5078: 997-0, Electronic Equipment for Use in Power Installations EN 600-: 997- Machine Safety and Equipping with Electrical Devices Part : General Requirements (IEC 6004-:997) EN 600: 997- Safety Requirements for Information Technology Equipment (IEC 950:99 + A:99 + A:993 + A3:995 + A4:996, modified) The F7 series Drives comply with the provisions of the Low Voltage Directive 73/3/EEC as amended by 93/68/EEC. These Drives conform the following standard: EN 5078: Your supplier or Yaskawa representative must be contacted when using leakage current circuit breaker in conjunction with frequency drives. In certain systems it may be necessary use additional moniring and safety devices in compliance with the relevant safety and accident prevention regulations. The frequency drive hardware must not be modified. ii

4 Safety Precautions Installation CAUTION Always hold the case when carrying the Drive. If the Drive is held by the front cover, the main body of the Drive may fall, possibly resulting in injury. Attach the Drive a metal or other noncombustible material. Fire can result if the Drive is attached a combustible material. Install a cooling fan or other cooling device when installing more than one Drive in the same enclosure so that the temperature of the air entering the Drives is below 45 C. Overheating can result in fires or other accidents. iii

5 Warning Information and Position There is warning information on the Drive in the position shown in the following illustration. Always heed the warnings. Warning information position Warning information position Illustration shows the CIMR-G7U0P4 Illustration shows the CIMR-G7U08 Warning Information iv

6 ! WARNING Risk of electric shock. ŸRead manual before installing. ŸWait 5 minutes for capacir discharge after disconnecting power supply.! AVERTISSEMENT Risque de decharge electrique. ŸLire le manuel avant l' installation. ŸAttendre 5 minutes apres la coupure de l' allmentation. Pour permettre la decharge des condensateurs. ' ' ' '! v

7 Registered Trademarks The following registered trademarks are used in this manual. DeviceNet is a registered trademark of the ODVA ( DeviceNet Vendors Association, Inc.). ControlNet is a registered trademark of ControlNet International, Ltd. LONworks is a registered trademark of the Echelon. MODBUS is a registered trademark of the MODBUS.org. vi

8 Contents Handling Drives... - Varispeed G7 Introduction...- Varispeed G7 Models...- Confirmations upon Delivery...-3 Checks...-3 Nameplate Information...-3 Component Names...-5 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions...-7 Chassis Drives (IP00)...-7 NEMA Type Drives (IP 0)...-8 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site...-0 Installation Site...-0 Controlling the Ambient Temperature...-0 Protecting the Drive from Foreign Matter...-0 Installation Orientation and Space...- Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover...- Removing the Terminal Cover...- Attaching the Terminal Cover...-3 Removing/Attaching the Digital Operar and Front Cover...-4 Models CIMR-G7U0P4 thru 05 and 40P4 thru Models CIMR-G7U08 thru 0 and 408 thru Wiring... - Connection Diagram...- Terminal Block Configuration...-4 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals...-5 Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connecrs...-5 Main Circuit Terminal Functions...-3 Main Circuit Configurations...-4 Standard Connection Diagrams...-5 Wiring the Main Circuits...-6 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals...- Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connecrs...- Control Circuit Terminal Functions...-3 Control Circuit Terminal Connections...-9 vii

9 Control Circuit Wiring Precautions Control Circuit Wire Sizes Wire Checks Installing and Wiring Option Cards Option Card Models and Specifications Installation...-3 PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications Wiring Wiring Terminal Blocks Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses Digital Operar and Modes...3- Digital Operar Digital Operar Display Digital Operar Keys Modes Drive Modes Switching Modes Drive Mode Quick Programming Mode Advanced Programming Mode Verify Mode Autuning Mode Trial Operation...4- Trial Operation Procedure Trial Operation Procedures the Power Supply Voltage Jumper ( V Class Drives of 4055 or Higher) 4-3 Power ON Checking the Display Status Basic s s for the Control Methods Autuning Application s No-load Operation Loaded Operation Check and Recording User Parameters Adjustment Suggestions viii

10 5 User Parameters User Parameter Descriptions...5- Description of User Parameter Tables...5- Digital Operation Display Functions and Levels User Parameters Settable in Quick Programming Mode User Parameter Tables A: Setup s Application Parameters: b...5- Autuning Parameters: C...5- Reference Parameters: d Mor Setup Parameters: E Option Parameters: F Terminal Function Parameters: H Protection Function Parameters: L N: Special Adjustments Digital Operar Parameters: o T: Mor Autuning U: Monir Parameters Facry s that Change with the Control Method (A-0) Facry s that Change with the Drive Capacity (o-04) Parameter s by Function Frequency Reference...6- Selecting the Frequency Reference Source...6- Using Multi-Step Speed Operation Run Command Selecting the Run Command Source Spping Methods Selecting the Spping Method when a Sp Command is Sent Using the DC Injection Brake Using an Emergency Sp Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics Acceleration and Deceleration Times Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function) Preventing the Mor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function) Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration (Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function)...6- Adjusting Frequency References Adjusting Analog Frequency References Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function) Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs ix

11 Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) Limiting Maximum Output Frequency Limiting Minimum Frequency Improved Operating Efficiency Reducing Mor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function) Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Operation (Torque Compensation) Hunting-prevention Function Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function) Machine Protection Reducing Noise and Leakage Current Limiting Mor Torque (Torque Limit Function) Preventing Mor Stalling During Operation Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input Detecting Mor Torque Changing Overrque and Underrque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input Mor Overload Protection Mor Protection Operation Time Mor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermisr Inputs Limiting Mor Rotation Direction Continuing Operation Restarting Aumatically After Power Is Resred Speed Search Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Au Restart Function) Drive Protection Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resisrs Reducing Drive Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels Input Terminal Functions Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operar and Control Circuit Terminals Blocking Drive Outputs (Baseblock Commands) Spping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold) Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/DOWN) Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog References (+/- Speed) Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Circuit Terminals Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands (FJOG/RJOG) Spping the Drive by Notifying Programming Device Errors the Drive (External Fault Function) x

12 Monir Parameterss Using the Analog Monir Parameters Using Pulse Train Monir Contents Individual Functions Using MODBUS Communications Using the Timer Function Using PID Control Energy-saving Mor Parameters the Pattern...6- Torque Control Speed Control (ASR) Structure Droop Control Function Zero-servo Function Digital Operar Functions Digital Operar Functions Copying Parameters Prohibiting Writing Parameters from the Digital Operar a Password Displaying User-set Parameters Only Options Performing Speed Control with PG Using Digital Output Cards Using an Analog Reference Card Using a Digital Reference Card Troubleshooting Protective and Diagnostic Functions...7- Fault Detection...7- Alarm Detection Operation Errors Errors During Autuning Errors when Using the Digital Operar Copy Function Troubleshooting If Parameters Cannot Be Set If the Mor Does Not Operate If the Direction of the Mor Rotation is Reversed...7- If the Mor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow...7- If the Mor Operates Higher Than the Reference...7- If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision...7- If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in -loop Control Mode...7- xi

13 If Mor Deceleration is Slow If the Mor Overheats If There is Noise When the Drive is Started or From an AM Radio If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Drive is Run If There is Mechanical Oscillation If the Mor Rotates Even When Drive Output is Spped If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls If Output Frequency Does Not Rise Frequency Reference Maintenance and Inspection...8- Maintenance and Inspection Outline of Maintenance Daily Inspection Periodic Inspection Periodic Maintenance of Parts Cooling Fan Replacement Outline Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card Specifications...9- Standard Drive Specifications Specifications by Model Common Specifications Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices Appendix...0- Varispeed G7 Control Modes xii Control Modes and Features Control Modes and Applications Drive Application Precautions Selection Installation s Handling Mor Application Precautions Using the Drive for an Existing Standard Mor Using the Drive for Special Mors Power Transmission Mechanism (Speed Reducers, Belts, and Chains) Conformance CE Markings CE Markings Requirements for Conformance CE Markings User Parameters

14 Handling Drives This chapter describes the checks required upon receiving or installing an Drive. Varispeed G7 Introduction...- Confirmations upon Delivery...-3 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions...-7 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site...-0 Installation Orientation and Space... - Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover...- Removing/Attaching the Digital Operar and Front Cover...-4

15 Varispeed G7 Introduction Varispeed G7 Models The Varispeed-G7 Series of Drives included two Drives in two voltage classes: 00-40V and V. Maximum mor capacities vary from 0P4 0 and 40P (4 models). Table. Varispeed G7 Models - Voltage Class 00-40V class V class Maximum Mor Capacity kw Output Capacity kva Varispeed G7 Basic Model Number Specifications (Always specify through the protective structure when ordering.) Chassis (IEC IP00) CIMR-G7 Enclosed Wall-mounted (IEC IP0, NEMA ) CIMR-G CIMR-G7U0P4 0P CIMR-G7U0P7 0P CIMR-G7UP5 P CIMR-G7UP P Remove the p and botm CIMR-G7U3P7 3P7 covers from the Enclosed CIMR-G7U5P5 5P5 Wall-mounted model CIMR-G7U7P5 7P5 9 CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U40P4 40P CIMR-G7U40P7 40P CIMR-G7U4P5 4P CIMR-G7U4P 4P CIMR-G7U43P7 Remove the p and botm 43P CIMR-G7U44P0 covers from the Enclosed 44P0 5.5 CIMR-G7U45P5 Wall-mount model. 45P CIMR-G7U47P5 47P5 CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U

16 Confirmations upon Delivery Confirmations upon Delivery Checks Check the following items as soon as the Drive is delivered. Table. Checks Item Has the correct model of Drive been delivered? Is the Drive damaged in any way? Are any screws or other components loose? Method Check the model number on the nameplate on the side of the Drive. Inspect the entire exterior of the Drive see if there are any scratches or other damage resulting from shipping. Use a screwdriver or other ols check for tightness. If you find any irregularities in the above items, contact the agency from which you purchased the Drive or your Yaskawa representative immediately. Nameplate Information There is a nameplate attached the side of each Drive. The nameplate shows the model number, specifications, lot number, serial number, and other information on the Drive. Example Nameplate The following nameplate is an example for a standard Drive: 3-phase, 00-40Vac, 0.4kW, IEC IP0 and NEMA standards. Drive model Input specifications Output specifications Lot number Serial number GU Drive specifications Mass Fig. Nameplate -3

17 Drive Model Numbers The model number of the Drive on the nameplate indicates the specification, voltage class, and maximum mor capacity of the Drive in alphanumeric codes. AC Drive G7 Family CIMR G7 U 0P4 No. Spec U UL Specification Rating No. Voltage 4 3-phase, 08-40Vac 3-phase, 480Vac Fig. Drive Model Numbers Drive Specifications The SPEC number on the nameplate indicates the voltage, Drive rating, enclosure type, and the revision code of the Drive in alphanumeric codes. The SPEC number for Drives that have cusm features, i.e. CASE software, will have a SPEC number that indicates the cusm features installed. 0P4 No. 4 Voltage AC input, 3-phase, 00-40V AC input, 3-phase, V No. 0P4 0P7 300 Max. Mor Capacity 0.4kW 0.75kW 300kW * P indicates the decimal point No. Enclosure Type 0 chassis (IEC IP00) NEMA Type (IEC IP0) Fig.3 Drive Specifications TERMS Chassis Type (IEC IP00) Protected so that parts of the human body cannot reach electrically charged parts from the front when the Drive is mounted in a control panel. NEMA Type (IEC IP0) The Drive is shielded from the exterior, and can thus be mounted the interior wall of a standard building (not necessarily enclosed in a control panel). The protective structure conforms the standards of NEMA in the USA. Top protective cover must be installed conform with IEC IP0 and NEMA Type requirements. Refer Fig..4 for details. -4

18 NPJT Confirmations upon Delivery Component Names Models CIMR-G7U0P4 thru 05 and 40P4 thru 405 The external appearance and component names of the Drive are shown in Fig.4. The Drive with the terminal cover removed is shown in Fig.5. Top protective cover [Required for NEMA Type (IEC IP0)] Front cover Mounting hole Digital Operar Diecast case Terminal cover Nameplate Botm protective cover Fig.4 Drive Appearance Control circuit terminals Main circuit terminals CAUTION Charge indicar Ground terminal Fig.5 Terminal Arrangement -5

19 Models CIMR-G7U08 thru 0 and 408 thru 4300 The external appearance and component names of the Drive are shown in Fig.6. The Drive with the terminal cover removed is shown in Fig.7. Drive cover Mounting holes Front cover Cooling fan Digital Operar Terminal cover Nameplate Fig.6 Drive Appearance Charge indicar Control circuit terminals Main circuit terminals Ground terminal Fig.7 Terminal Arrangement -6

20 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Chassis Drives (IP00) Exterior diagrams of the Chassis Drives are shown below. W 4-d H H t W H D 3 D Models CIMR-G7U0P4 thru 05 and 40P4 thru 405 H H CHARGE (5) W H (5) D D t Front View Side View Botm View Models CIMR-G7U08 thru 0 and 408 thru 460-7

21 NEMA Type Drives (IP 0) Exterior diagrams of the Enclosed Wall-mounted Drives (NEMA Type ) are shown below. W 4-d W H H H0 H3 4 H D t Models CIMR-G7U0P4 thru 05 and 40P4 thru D 4-d H H0 H CHARGE H3 H W (5)* W (5)* (5) max.0 D D t Front View Side View Botm View Models CIMR-G7U08 thru 075 and 408 thru 460-8

22 Exterior and Mounting Dimensions Voltage Class 00-40V (3-phase) V (3-phase) Voltage Class V (3-phase) Model CIMR- G7U * Same for Chassis and Enclosed Wall-mounted Drives Table.3 Drive Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg) Dimensions (mm) Chassis (IP00) Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA Type ) W H D W H H D t Approx Mass W H D W H0 H H H3 D t Approx Mass Mounting Holes* Heat Generation (W) External Internal 0P P Natural P M P P P P M Fan M M P P Natural 4P M5 4P P P P P M Fan M M See Table Model CIMR- G7U Table.4 480Vac ( kw) Drive Dimensions (mm) and Masses (kg) Chassis (IP00) Dimensions (mm) W H D W W W3 H H D t Approx Mass Enclosed Wall-mounted (NEMA Type) W H D W W W3 H H D t Approx Mass Mounting Holes* Total Heat Heat Generation (W) External Internal M Total Heat Cooling Method Cooling Method Fan -9

23 Checking and Controlling the Installation Site Install the Drive in the installation site described below and maintain optimum conditions. Installation Site Install the Drive a non-combustible surface under the following conditions in UL Pollution Degree environments. This excludes wet locations where pollution may become conductive due moisture, and locations containing conductive foreign matter Table.5 Installation Site Type Ambient Operating Temperature Humidity NEMA Type 4 F-- 04 F ( C) 95% RH or less (no condensation) chassis 4 F-- 3 F ( C) 95% RH or less (no condensation) Protective covers are attached the p and botm of the Drive. It is recommended remove the protective covers before operating a NEMA Type Drive (Models CIMR-G7U05/405 and smaller) in a panel obtain the 3 (45 C) ambient operating temperature. Observe the following precautions when installing the Drive. Make sure install: In a clean location which is free from oil mist and dust. In an environment where metal shavings, oil, water, or other foreign materials do not get in the Drive. In a location free from radioactive materials and combustible materials (e.g. wood). In a location free from harmful gases and liquids. In a location free from excessive vibration. In a location free from chlorides In a location away from direct sunlight. Controlling the Ambient Temperature To enhance the reliability of operation, the Drive should be installed in an environment free from extreme temperature variation. If the Drive is installed in an enclosure, use a cooling fan or air conditioner maintain the internal air temperature below 3 F (45 C). Protecting the Drive from Foreign Matter During Drive installation and project construction, it is possible have foreign matter such as metal shavings or wire clippings fall inside the Drive. To prevent foreign matter from falling in the Drive, place a temporary cover over the Drive. Always remove the temporary cover from the Drive before start-up. Otherwise, ventilation will be reduced, causing the Drive overheat. -0

24 Installation Orientation and Space Installation Orientation and Space Install the Drive vertically so as not reduce the cooling effect. When installing the Drive, always provide the following installation space allow normal heat dissipation..97in * (50mm) minimum 4.7in (0mm) minimum Air.in (30.5mm) minimum.97in (50mm) minimum.in (30.5mm) minimum 4.75in (0mm) minimum Air Horizontal Clearance Vertical Clearance * For Drive model G7U4300, this clearance dimension is.8in (300mm) minimum. All other models require.97in (50mm) minimum. Fig.8 Drive Installation Orientation and Space IMPORTANT. The same space is required horizontally and vertically for both Chassis (IP00) and Enclosed Wallmounted (IP0, NEMA Type ) Drives.. Always remove the protection covers before installing a or V Class Drive with an output of 5 kw or less in a panel. Always provide enough space for suspension eye bolts and the main circuit lines when installing a or V Class Drive with an output of 8.5 kw or more in a panel. -

25 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover Remove the terminal cover wire cables the control circuit and main circuit terminals. Removing the Terminal Cover Models CIMR-G7U0P4 thru 05 and 40P4 thru 405 Loosen the screws at the botm of the terminal cover, press in on the sides of the terminal cover in the directions of arrows, and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow. Fig.9 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-G7U3P7 Shown Above) Models CIMR-G7U08 thru 0 and 408 thru 4300 Loosen the screws on the left and right at the p of the terminal cover, pull out the terminal cover in the direction of arrow and then lift up on the terminal in the direction of arrow. Fig.0 Removing the Terminal Cover (Model CIMR-G7U08 Shown Above) -

26 Removing and Attaching the Terminal Cover Attaching the Terminal Cover After wiring the terminal block, attach the terminal cover by reversing the removal procedure. For Models CIMR-G7U05/405 and smaller, insert the tab on the p of the terminal cover in the groove on the Drive, and press in on the botm of the terminal cover until it clicks in place. For Drives CIMR-G7U08/408 and larger, insert the tab on the p of the terminal cover in the groove on the Drive, and secure the terminal cover by lifting it up ward the p of the Drive. -3

27 Removing/Attaching the Digital Operar and Front Cover The methods of removing and attaching the Digital Operar and Front Cover are described in this section. Models CIMR-G7U0P4 thru 05 and 40P4 thru 405 To attach optional cards or change the terminal card connecr, remove the Digital Operar and front cover in addition the terminal cover. Always remove the Digital Operar from the front cover before removing the terminal cover. The removal and attachment procedures are given below. Removing the Digital Operar Press the lever on the side of the Digital Operar in the direction of arrow unlock the Digital Operar and lift the Digital Operar in the direction of arrow remove the Digital Operar as shown in the following illustration. Fig. Removing the Digital Operar (Model CIMR-G7U43P7 Shown Above) -4

28 Removing/Attaching the Digital Operar and Front Cover Removing the Front Cover Press the left and right sides of the front cover in the directions of arrows and lift the botm of the cover in the direction of arrow remove the front cover as shown in Fig... Fig. Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-G7U43P7 Shown Above) Mounting the Front Cover After wiring the terminals, mount the front cover the Drive by performing in reverse order the steps remove the front cover.. Do not mount the front cover with the Digital Operar attached the front cover; otherwise, Digital Operar may malfunction due improper mating with control board connecr.. Insert the tab of the upper part of the front cover in the groove of the Drive and press the lower part of the front cover on the Drive until the front cover snaps in place. -5

29 Mounting the Digital Operar After attaching the front cover, mount the Digital Operar on thedrive using the following procedure.. Hook the Digital Operar at A (two locations) on the left side of the opening on the front cover in the direction of arrow as shown in the following illustration.. Press the Digital Operar in the direction of arrow until it snaps in place at B (two locations). A B Fig.3 Mounting the Digital Operar IMPORTANT. Do not remove or attach the Digital Operar or mount or remove the front cover using methods other than those described above, otherwise the Drive may break or malfunction due imperfect contact.. Never attach the front cover the Drive with the Digital Operar attached the front cover. Imperfect contact can result. Always attach the front cover the Drive by itself first, and then attach the Digital Operar the front cover. -6

30 Removing/Attaching the Digital Operar and Front Cover Models CIMR-G7U08 thru 0 and 408 thru 4300 For Drive models CIMR-G7U08 thru 0 and 408 thru 4300, remove the terminal cover and then use the following procedures remove the Digital Operar and main cover. Removing the Digital Operar Use the same procedure as for Drives with an output of 8.5 kw or less. Removing the Front Cover Loosen all screws on the front cover. Lift up at the location labelled at the p of the control circuit terminal card and move in the direction of arrow. Fig.4 Removing the Front Cover (Model CIMR-G7U08 Shown Above) Attaching the Front Cover Attach the front cover by reversing the procedure remove it.. Confirm that the Digital Operar is not mounted on the front cover. If the cover is attached while the Digital Operar is mounted it, the Digital Operar may malfunction due improper mating with its connecr.. Insert the tab on the p of the front cover in the slot on the Drive and press in on the cover until it clicks in place on the Drive. Attaching the Digital Operar Use the same procedure as for Drives with an output of 8.5 kw or less. -7

31 -8

32 Wiring This chapter describes wiring terminals, main circuit terminal connections, main circuit terminal wiring specifications, control circuit terminals, and control circuit wiring specifications. Connection Diagram...- Terminal Block Configuration...-4 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals...-5 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals...- Installing and Wiring Option Cards...-3

33 Connection Diagram The connection diagram of the Drive is shown in Fig.. When using the Digital Operar, the mor can be operated by wiring only the main circuits. Pulse Input Terminals R/L, S/L, T/L3 are standard on CIMR-G7U08-0 and CIMR-G7U Branch circuit protection supplied by others. DC Link Choke Standard: CIMR-G7U08 0 CIMR-G7U U X Shorting Bar Standard: CIMR-G7U0P4 05 CIMR-G7U40P4 405 Remove if adding external DC link choke External Braking Terminal + 3 is standard on CIMR-G7U08-0 and CIMR-G7U Braking Terminals B, B are standard on CIMR-G7U0P4-05 and CIMR-G7U40P MCCB B B Mor 3-Phase Power Supply 50/60Hz L L L3 Remove jumpers if using pulse input R/L S/L T/L3 R/L S/L G7 U/T V/T W/T3 T T T3 M T/L3 MA Digital Inputs 4VDC, 8mA Multi-function Digital Inputs 4VDC, 8 ma Foward Run/Sp Reverse Run/Sp External Fault Fault Reset Multi-Step Reference Multi-Step Reference Jog Reference Baseblock Multi-Step Reference3 Multi-Step Reference4 Accel / Decel Time Fast-Sp N.O. S S S3 (H-0) S4 (H-0) S5 (H-03) S6 (H-04) S7 (H-05) S8 (H-06) S9 (H-07) S0 (H-08) S (H-09) S (H-0) SN SC (H-0) (H-0) (H-03) (H-04) (H-05) MB MC M M M3 M4 M5 M6 P3 C3 P4 C4 During Run Zero Speed Digital Output Fault Contact 50VAC, 30VDC, A Frequency Agree Inverter Ready Minor Fault - Alarm Multi-function Digital Outputs -4 50VAC, 30VDC, A Multi-function Digital Outputs VDC, 50mA SP +4VDC E(G) kω +V +5VDC +/-0%, 0mA -V -5VDC +/-0%, 0mA E(G) External Frequency Reference k Ω A 0 +/-0VDC, 0 k Ω * A 4 0mA, 50 Ω * (S- ON) [0 +/-0VDC, 0k Ω **] (S- OFF) Multi-function Analog Input (H3-09) A3 0 +/-0VDC, 0k Ω* Multi-function Analog Input (H3-05) RP 0 3kHz, 5 VDC, 3k Ω *** Multi-function Pulse Input (H6-0) AC (H4-0) FM (H4-04) AM AC (H6-06) MP Output Frequency Output Current Output Frequency Multi-function Analog Output - 0 +/-0VDC, ma 4-0mA, 500 Ω +/-9 Bit Resolution +/- 8% Accuracy Multi-function Pulse Output 0 3kHz 3k Ω +/-% Accuracy Modbus RTU Communications RS-485/4 9. Kbps R+ R- S+ S- IG Terminating Resisr 0 Ω S- Jumper CN5 CH CH V DIP Switch S S- S- OFF ON See Page -5 for details. * +/- Bit Resolution, 0.% Accuracy ** 0 Bit Resolution, 0.% Accuracy *** +/-% Accuracy Fig. Connection Diagram (Model CIMR-G7U08 Shown Above) -

34 Connection Diagram. Control circuit terminals are arranged as shown below. IMPORTANT E(G) S9 SN S S0 SC S S S SP A S3 S4 P3 A S5 C3 +V S6 P4 AC S7 C4 V S8 R+ A3 MP FM R S+ S AC RP AC AM IG M5 M6 MA MB M3 M4 M MC M E(G). The output current capacity of the +V terminal is 0 ma. 3. Disable the stall prevention during deceleration (set parameter L3-04 0) when using a Braking Resisr Unit. If this user parameter is not changed disable stall prevention, the system may not sp during deceleration. 4. Main circuit terminals are indicated with double circles and control circuit terminals are indicated with single circles. 5. The wiring for a mor with a cooling fan is not required for self-cooling mors. 6. PG circuit wiring (i.e., wiring the PG-X Card) is not required for open-loop vecr control. 7. Sequence input signals S S are labeled for sequence connections (0 V common and sinking mode) for no-voltage contacts or NPN transisrs. These are the default settings. For PNP transisr sequence connections (+4V common and sourcing mode) or provide a 4-V external power supply, refer Table The master speed frequency reference can set input either a voltage (terminal A) or current (terminal A) by changing the setting of parameter H3-3. The default setting is for a voltage reference input. 9. The multi-function analog output is a dedicated meter output for an analog frequency meter, ammeter, voltmeter, wattmeter, etc. Do not use this output for feedback control or for any other control purpose. 0.DC reacrs improve the input power facr built in V Class Drives for kw and V Class Drives for kw. A DC reacr is thus an option only for Drives for 5 kw or less..set parameter L8-0 when using a breaking resisr (ERF). When using a Braking Resisr Unit, a shuff sequence for the power supply must be made using a thermal relay trip. -3

35 NPJT Terminal Block Configuration The terminal arrangement for V Class Drives are shown in Fig. and Fig.3. Control circuit terminals Main circuit terminals CAUTION Charge indicar Ground terminal Fig. Terminal Arrangement (00-40 V Class Drive for 0.4 kw Shown Above) Charge indicar Control circuit terminals Main circuit terminals Ground terminal Fig.3 Terminal Arrangement (00-40 V Class Drive for 8.5 kw Shown Above) -4

36 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Applicable Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connecrs Select the appropriate wires and crimp terminals from Table. Table.3. Refer instruction manual TOE-C76- for wire sizes for Braking Resisr Units and Braking Units. -5

37 Table V Class Wire Sizes Drive Model CIMR- Terminal Symbol Terminal Screws Clamping Torque lb in(n m) Terminal Block Acceptable Wire Range AWG(mm ) Recommended Wire Size AWG (mm ) Wire Type G7U0P4 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M (..5) 8 0 ( ) 4 () G7U0P7 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M (..5) 8 0 ( ) 4 () G7UP5 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M (..5) 8 0 ( ) 4 () G7UP R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M (..5) 8 0 ( ) (3.5) G7U3P7 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M (..5) 8 0 ( ) 0 (5.5) G7U5P5 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M (.3.5) 0 6 (5.5 4) 8 (8) G7U7P5 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M (.3.5) 0 6 (5.5 4) 6 (4) G7U0 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M6 B, B M5 M ( ) 0.4. (.3.5) ( ) 8 (8 50) 6 (3.5 4) 4 () Application Dependent *3 *3 Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M ( ) 8 (8 50) 3 (30) G7U05 B, B M (.3.5) 6 (3.5 4) Application Dependent M ( ) *3 *3 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M ( ) 8 /0 (8 60) 3 (30) G7U08 3 M ( ) 8 (8 4) Application Dependent M ( ) *3 *3 R/L, S/L, T/L3,, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M ( ) 8 /0 (50 60) (50) G7U0 3 M ( ) 8 (8 4) Application Dependent M ( ) *3 *3 R/L, S/L, T/L3,, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M (7.6.5) /0 (60) G7U030 3 M8 M ( ) (7.6.5) N/A Application Dependent (30) -6 r/, / M4.4.3 (.3.4) 6 (.5)

38 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Drive Model CIMR- G7U037 G7U045 G7U055 G7U075 G7U090 G7U0 Terminal Symbol R/L, S/L, T/L3,, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 * The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 C M0 3 M8 M0 r/, / M4 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M0 3 M8 M0 r/, / M4, M R/L, S/L, T/L3, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M0 3 M8 M r/, / M4 R/L, S/L, T/L3,, M U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M 3 M8 M r/, / M4 R/L, S/L, T/L3,, M U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M 3 M8 M r/, / M4 R/L, S/L, T/L3,, M U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/ L3 Terminal Screws M 3 M8 M r/, / M4 Clamping Torque lb in(n m) (7.6.5) ( ) (7.6.5).4.3 (.3.4) (7.6.5) ( ) (7.6.5).4.3 (.3.4) ( ) (7.6.5) ( ) (7.6.5).4.3 (.3.4) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ).4.3 (.3.4) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ).4.3 (.3.4) ( ) ( ) ( ) ( ).4.3 (.3.4) Terminal Block Acceptable Wire Range AWG(mm ) N/A N/A N/A N/A Recommended Wire Size AWG (mm ) 3/0 (80) Application Dependent (38) 6 (.5) /0 P (50 P) Application Dependent /0 (50) 6 (.5) 3/0 P (80 P) 3/0 P (80 P) Application Dependent /0 (80) 6 (.5) 50 P (50 P) 4/0 P (00 P) Application Dependent /0 P (60 P) 6 (.5) 350 P, or /0 4P (00 P, or 50 4P) 300 P, or /0 4P (50 P, or 50 4P) Application Dependent 300 P (50 P) 6 (.5) 350 P, or /0 4P (00 P, or 50 4P) 300 P, or /0 4P (50 P, or 50 4P) Application Dependent 300 P (50 P) 6 (.5) Wire Type Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables -7

39 Table V Class Wire Sizes Drive Model CIMR- G7U40P4 Terminal Symbol R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 Terminal Screws M4 Tightening Torque (N m) (..5) Possible Wire Sizes mm (AWG) 8 0 ( ) Recommended Wire Size mm (AWG) 4 () Wire Type G7U40P7 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M (..5) 8 0 ( ) 4 () G7U4P5 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M (..5) 8 0 ( ) 4 () G7U4P R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M (..5) 8 0 ( ) (3.5) 4 () G7U43P7 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M (..5) 8 0 ( ) (3.5) G7U44P0 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M (..5) 8 0 ( ) (3.5) G7U45P5 G7U47P5 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M4 M (..5) 0.4. (.3.5) 0 6 (5.5 4) 0 6 (5.5 4) 0 (5.5) 8 (8) Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables G7U40 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M5 M5 (M6) 0.4. (.3.5) 0.4. (.3.5) ( ) 0 6 (5.5 4) 0 6 (5.5 4) 8 (8) 0 (5.5) R/L, S/L, T/L3,,,, U/T, V/T, W/T3 M ( ) 0 6 (5.5 4) 8 (8) G7U405 B, B M5 M5 (M6) 0.4. (.3.5) ( ) 0 6 (5.5 4) 0 6 (5.5 4) 8 (8) 8 (8) G7U408 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,, 3, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M6 M ( ) ( ) 3 (3.5 30) 6 (4) *3 *3 G7U40 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,, 3, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M6 M ( ) ( ) 3 (3.5 30) 4 () *3 *3-8

40 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Drive Model CIMR- Terminal Symbol Terminal Screws Tightening Torque (N m) Possible Wire Sizes mm (AWG) Recommended Wire Size mm (AWG) Wire Type R/L, S/L, T/L3,,, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M ( ) 8 /0 (8 60) (38) G7U M ( ) (8 4) 8 Application Dependent M ( ) *3 *3 G7U4037 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M ( ) /0 (30 60) (38) R/L, S/L, T/L3,,, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M ( ) 8 /0 (8 60) (50) G7U M6 M ( ) ( ) 8 4 (8 ) Application Dependent *3 *3 R/L, S/L, T/L3,,, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M (7.6.5) /0 (50) G7U M8 M ( ) (7.6.5) Application Dependent (38) r/, 00/ 00, 400/ 400 M4.4.3 (.3.4) 6 (.5) R/L, S/L, T/L3,,, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M (7.6.5) 4/0 (00) G7U M8 M ( ) (7.6.5) r/, 00/ 00, 400/ 400 M4.4.3 (.3.4) Application Dependent (50) 6 (.5) Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables R/L, S/L, T/L3,,, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L33 M (7.6.5) /0 P (50 P) G7U M8 M ( ) (7.6.5) N/A Application Dependent /0 (60) r/, 00/ 00, 400/ 400 M4.4.3 (.3.4) 6 (.5) R/L, S/L, T/L3,,, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L33 M (7.6.5) 3/0 P (80 P) G7U40 3 M8 M ( ) (7.6.5) Application Dependent 4/0 (00) r/, 00/ 00, 400/ 400 M4.4.3 (.3.4) 6 (.5) R/L, S/L, T/L3,,, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M ( ) 3/0 P (80 P) G7U43 3 M ( ) M ( ) r/, 00/ 00, 400/ 400 M4.4.3 (.3.4) Application Dependent /0 P (50 P) 6 (.5) -9

41 Drive Model CIMR- Terminal Symbol Terminal Screws Tightening Torque (N m) Possible Wire Sizes mm (AWG) Recommended Wire Size mm (AWG) Wire Type R/L, S/L, T/L3,,, U/T, V/T, W/T3, R/L, S/L, T/L3 M ( ) 4/0 P (00 P) G7U460 3 M8 M ( ) ( ) r/, 00/ 00, 400/ 400 M4.4.3 (.3.4) R/L, S/L, T/L3, R/L, S/L, T/ L3 Application Dependent /0 P (50 P) 6 (.5) 50 x P (5 x P) G7U485 G7U40 U/T, V/T, W/T3, 3 M ( ) r/, 00/ 00, 400/ 400 M4.4.3 (.3.4) R/L, S/L, T/L3, R/L, S/L, T/ L3 U/T, V/T, W/T3, 3 M ( ) r/, 00/ 00, 400/ 400 M4.4.3 (.3.4) R/L, S/L, T/L3, R/L, S/L, T/ L3 N/A 50 x P (5 x P) 600 x P (35 x P) Application Dependent 3/0 x P (80 x P) 6 (.5) 350 x P (85 x P) 300 x P (50 x P) 50 x 4P (5 x 4P) Application Dependent 4/0 x P (00 x P) 6 (.5) 600 x P (35 x P) Power cables, e.g., 600 V vinyl power cables G7U4300 U/T, V/T, W/T3, 3 M ( ) r/, 00/ 00, 400/ 400 M4.4.3 (.3.4) 500 x P (300 x P) 400 x 4P (00 x 4P) Application Dependent 50 x P (5 x P) 6 (.5) * The wire thickness is set for copper wires at 75 C. * Wire size range provided for Drives using insulated screw-type terminal blocks with a single conducr. Refer applicable codes for proper wire type and size. * Recommended wire sizes are based on the Drive current ratings and NEC Article 30 Table 30.6, 75 Degree Celsius copper or equivalent. * 3 Uses non-insulated screw-type terminals. Refer applicable codes for proper wire type and size. IMPORTANT Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within % of the rated voltage. Line voltage drop is calculated as follows: Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (Ω/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x

42 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Table.3 Closed-loop Connecr Sizes (JIS C805) (00-40 V Class and V Class) Wire Size * AWG mm Terminal Screw Ring Tongue (R-Type) Closed- Connecrs (Lugs) JST Corporation Part Numbers ** M M4.5-4 M M4.5-4 M M4.5-4 M M4-4 4 M5-5 M6-6 M8-8 M / / 5.5 M M M M M6 8-6 M8 8-8 M M6 4-6 M8 4-8 M5-5 4 M6-6 M8-8 3 / 30 / 38 / /0 50 / 60 /0 70 3/0 80 M M M M M M M M

43 Wire Size * Terminal Screw Ring Tongue (R-Type) Closed- Connecrs (Lugs) JST Corporation Part Numbers ** M /0 00 M 00 - M M / 300MCM 5 / 50 M 50 - M MCM 00 M MCM 35 M x 35 - M * Wire sizes are based on 75 degrees Celsius copper wire. ** Equivalent connecr can be used. IMPORTANT Determine the wire size for the main circuit so that line voltage drop is within % of the rated voltage. Line voltage drop is calculated as follows: Line voltage drop (V) = 3 x wire resistance (W/km) x wire length (m) x current (A) x 0-3 -

44 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Main Circuit Terminal Functions Main circuit terminal functions are summarized according terminal symbols in Table.4. Wire the terminals correctly for the desired purposes. Table.4 Main Circuit Terminal Functions (00-40 V Class and V Class) Purpose Main circuit power input Terminal Symbol Model: CIMR-G7U Vac 480 Vac R/L, S/L, T/L3 0P4 0 40P R/L, S/L, T/L Drive outputs U/T, V/T, W/T3 0P4 0 40P DC power input, 0P4 0 40P Braking Resisr Unit connection B, B 0P4 7P5 40P4 405 DC link choke connection, 0P P4 405 Braking Transisr Unit connection 3, Ground 0P4 0 40P

45 Main Circuit Configurations The main circuit configurations of the Drive are shown in Table.5. Table.5 Drive Main Circuit Configurations Vac 480 Vac CIMR-G7U0P4 05 B B CIMR-G7U40P4 405 B B R/L S/L T/L3 U/T V/T W/T3 + R/L S/L T/L3 U/T V/T W/T3 Power supply Control circuits Power supply Control circuits CIMR-G7U08, CIMR-G7U R/L S/L T/L3 R/L S/L T/L3 U/T V/T W/T3 R/L S/L T/L3 R/L S/L T/L3 U/T V/T W/T3 Power supply Control circuits Power supply Control circuits CIMR-G7U CIMR-G7U R/L S/L T/L3 R/L S/L T/L3 U/T V/T W/T3 R/L S/L T/L3 R/L S/L T/L3 U/T V/T W/T3 r/ l r/ l /l Power supply Control circuits 00/ l00 400/ l400 Power supply Control circuits Note Consult your Yaskawa representative before using -phase rectification. -4

46 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Standard Connection Diagrams Standard Drive connection diagrams are shown in Fig.4. These are the same for both Vac and 480 Vac Drives. The connections depend on the Drive capacity. CIMR-G7U0P4 05 and 40P4 405 CIMR-G7U08, 0, and DC link choke (optional) 3-phase 00-40Vac ( Vac) R/L S/L T/L3 + + B B U/T V/T W/T3 Braking Resisr Unit (optional) IM 3-phase Vac( Vac) R/L S/L T/L3 R/L S/L T/L3 U/T V/T W/T3 Braking Resisr Unit (optional) Braking Unit (optional) IM Be sure remove the short-circuit bar before connecting the DC link choke. The DC link choke is built in. CIMR-G7U030 0 CIMR-G7U Braking Resisr Unit (optional) Braking Unit (optional) Braking Resisr Unit (optional) Braking Unit (optional) 3-phase 00-40Vac R/L U/T S/L V/T T/L3 W/T3 R/L S/L T/L3 r/l /l IM R/L U/T S/L V/T T/L3 W/T3 3-phase Vac R/L S/L T/L3 r/l 00/l00 400/l400 IM Control power is supplied internally from the main circuit DC power supply for all Drive models. Fig.4 Main Circuit Terminal Connections -5

47 Wiring the Main Circuits This section describes wiring connections for the main circuit inputs and outputs. Wiring Main Circuit Inputs Observe the following precautions for the main circuit power supply input. Installing a Molded-case Circuit Breaker Always connect the power input terminals (R/L, S/L, and T/L3) and power supply via a molded-case circuit breaker (MCCB) suitable for the Drive. Choose an MCCB with a capacity of.5 times the Drive's rated current. For the MCCB's time characteristics, be sure consider the Drive's overload protection (one minute at 50% of the rated output current). If the same MCCB is be used for more than one Drive, or other devices, set up a sequence so that the power supply will be turned OFF by a fault output, as shown in Fig.5. Power supply 0P4 030: 3-phase, Vac, 50/60 Hz 037 0: 3-phase, Vac, 50/60 Hz 40P4 4300: 3-phase, Vac, 50/60 Hz Drive R/L S/L T/L3 Fault output (NC) * For V class Drives, connect a 460/30 V transformer. Fig.5 MCCB Installation Installing a Ground Fault Interrupter Drive outputs use high-speed switching, so high-frequency leakage current is generated. Therefore, at the Drive primary side, use a ground fault interrupter detect only the leakage current in the frequency range that is hazardous humans and exclude high-frequency leakage current. For the special-purpose ground fault interrupter for Drives, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage of at least 30 ma per Drive. When using a general ground fault interrupter, choose a ground fault interrupter with a sensitivity amperage of 00 ma or more per Drive and with an operating time of 0. s or more. -6

48 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Installing a Magnetic Contacr If the power supply for the main circuit is be shut off during a sequence, a magnetic contacr can be used. When a magnetic contacr is installed on the primary side of the main circuit forcibly sp the Drive, however, the regenerative braking does not work and the Drive will coast a sp. The Drive can be started and spped by opening and closing the magnetic contacr on the primary side. Frequently opening and closing the magnetic contacr, however, may cause the Drive break down. Start and sp the Drive at most once every 30 minutes. When the Drive is operated with the Digital Operar, aumatic operation cannot be performed after recovery from a power interruption. If the Braking Resisr Unit is used, program the sequence so that the magnetic contacr is turned OFF by the contact of the Unit's thermal overload relay. Connecting Input Power Supply the Terminal Block Input power supply can be connected any terminal R/L, S/L, or T/L3 on the terminal block; the phase sequence of input power supply is irrelevant the phase sequence. Installing an AC Reacr If the Drive is connected a large-capacity power transformer (600 kva or more) or the phase advancing capacir is switched, an excessive peak current may flow through the input power circuit, causing the converter unit break down. To prevent this, install an optional AC Reacr on the input side of the Drive or a DC link choke the DC link choke connection terminals. This also improves the power facr on the power supply side. Installing a Surge Absorber Always use a surge absorber or diode for inductive loads near the Drive. These inductive loads include magnetic contacrs, electromagnetic relays, solenoid valves, solenoids, and magnetic brakes. Installing a Noise Filter on Power Supply Side Install a noise filter eliminate noise transmitted between the power line and the Drive. Correct Noise Filter Installation Power supply MCCB Noise filter Drive IM MCCB Other controllers Use a special-purpose noise filter for Drives. Fig.6 Correct Power supply Noise Filter Installation -7

49 Incorrect Noise Filter Installation Power supply MCCB Drive IM MCCB Generalpurpose noise filter Other controllers Power supply MCCB Generalpurpose noise filter Drive IM MCCB Other controllers Do not use general-purpose noise filters. Generalpurpose noise filter can not effectively suppress noise generated from the Drive. Fig.7 Incorrect Power supply Noise Filter Installation Wiring the Output Side of Main Circuit Observe the following precautions when wiring the main output circuits. Connecting the Drive and Mor Connect output terminals U/T, V/T, and W/T3 mor lead wires U/T, V/T, and W/T3, respectively. Check that the mor rotates forward with the forward run command. Switch over any two of the output terminals each other and reconnect if the mor rotates in reverse with the forward run command. Never Connect a Power Supply Output Terminals Never connect a power supply output terminals U/T, V/T, and W/T3. If voltage is applied the output terminals, the internal circuits of the Drive will be damaged. Never Short or Ground Output Terminals If the output terminals are uched with bare hands or the output wires come in contact with the Drive casing, an electric shock or grounding will occur. This is extremely hazardous. Do not short the output wires. Do Not Use a Phase Advancing Capacir or Noise Filter Never connect a phase advancing capacir or LC/RC noise filter an output circuit. The high-frequency components of the Drive output may result in overheating or damage these part or may result in damage the Drive or cause other parts burn. -8

50 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Do Not Use an Electromagnetic Switch Never connect an electromagnetic switch (MC) between the Drive and mor and turn it ON or OFF during operation. If the MC is turned ON while the Drive is operating, a large inrush current will be created and the overcurrent protection in the Drive will operate. When using an MC switch a commercial power supply, sp the Drive and mor before operating the MC. Use the speed search function if the MC is operated during operation. If measures for momentary power interrupts are required, use a delayed release MC. Installing a Thermal Overload Relay This Drive has an electronic thermal protection function protect the mor from overheating. If, however, more than one mor is operated with one Drive or a multi-pole mor is used, always install a thermal relay (THR) between the Drive and the mor and set L-0 0 (no mor protection). The sequence should be designed so that the contacts of the thermal overload relay turn OFF the magnetic contacr on the main circuit inputs. Installing a Noise Filter on Output Side Connect a noise filter the output side of the Drive reduce radio noise and inductive noise. Power supply MCCB Drive Noise filter IM Radio noise Signal line Inductive noise Controller AM radio Inductive Noise: Radio Noise: Electromagnetic induction generates noise on the signal line, causing the controller malfunction. Electromagnetic waves from the Drive and cables cause the broadcasting radio receiver make noise. Fig.8 Installing a Noise Filter on the Output Side Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise As described previously, a noise filter can be used prevent inductive noise from being generated on the output side. Alternatively, cables can be routed through a grounded metal pipe prevent inductive noise. Keeping the metal pipe at least 30 cm (approximately foot) away from the signal line considerably reduces inductive noise. Power supply MCCB Drive Metal pipe IM Signal line Controller 30 cm min. ( ft.) Fig.9 Countermeasures Against Inductive Noise -9

51 Countermeasures Against Radio Interference Radio noise is generated from the Drive as well as from the input and output lines. To reduce radio noise, install noise filters on both input and output sides, and also install the Drive in a tally enclosed steel box. The cable between the Drive and the mor should be as short as possible. Power supply MCCB Noise filter Steel box Drive Noise filter Metal pipe IM Fig.0 Countermeasures Against Radio Interference Cable Length between Drive and Mor If the cable between the Drive and the mor is long, the high-frequency leakage current will increase, causing the Drive output current increase as well. This may affect peripheral devices. To prevent this, adjust the carrier frequency (set in C6-0, C6-0) as shown in Table.6. (For details, refer Chapter 3 User Parameters.) Table.6 Cable Length between Drive and Mor Cable length 50 m max. (64 ft) 00 m max. (38 ft) More than 00 m (> 38 ft) Carrier frequency 5 khz max. 0 khz max. 5 khz max. Ground Wiring Observe the following precautions when wiring the ground line. Always use the ground terminal of the V Drive with a ground resistance of less than 00 Ω and that of the V Drive with a ground resistance of less than 0 Ω. Do not share the ground wire with other devices, such as welding machines or power ols. Always use a ground wire that complies with technical standards on electrical equipment and minimize the length of the ground wire. Leakage current flows through the Drive. Therefore, if the distance between the ground electrode and the ground terminal is o long, potential on the ground terminal of the Drive will become unstable. When using more than one Drive, be careful not loop the ground wire. OK NO Fig. Ground Wiring -0

52 Wiring Main Circuit Terminals Connecting the Braking Resisr (ERF) A Braking Resisr that mounts the Drive can be used with V and V Class Drives with outputs from kw. Connect the braking resisr as shown in Fig.. Table.7 L8-0 (Protect selection for internal DB resisr) (Enables overheat protection) L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration) (Select either one of them.) 0 (Disables stall prevention function) 3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resisr) Drive Braking resisr Fig. Connecting the Braking Resisr IMPORTANT The braking resisr connection terminals are B and B. Do not connect any other terminals. Connecting any terminals other than B or B can cause the resisr overheat, resulting in damage the equipment. Connecting the Braking Resisr Unit (LKEB) and Braking Unit (CDBR) Use the following settings when using a Braking Resisr Unit. Refer User Parameters on page 0-9 for connection methods for a Braking Resisr Unit. A Braking Resisr that mounts the Drive can also be used with Drives with outputs from kw. Table.8 L8-0 (Protect selection for internal DB resisr) 0 (Disables overheat protection) L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration) (Select either one of them.) 0 (Disables stall prevention function) 3 (Enables stall prevention function with braking resisr) L8-0 is used when a braking resisr without thermal overload relay trip contacts (ERF type mounted Drive) is connected. The Braking Resisr Unit cannot be used and the deceleration time cannot be shortened by the Drive if L3-04 is set (i.e., if stall prevention is enabled for deceleration). -

53 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals Wire Sizes and Closed-loop Connecrs For remote operation using analog signals, keep the control line length between the Digital Operar or operation signals and the Drive 50 m (64 ft) or less, and separate the lines from high-power lines (main circuits or relay sequence circuits) reduce induction from peripheral devices. When setting frequencies from an external frequency reference (and not from a Digital Operar), used shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield terminal E (G), as shown in the following diagram. Shield terminal Speed setting power supply, +5 V 0 ma kω kω Master speed reference, -0 0 V Master speed reference, 4 0 ma kω kω Auxiliary reference Pulse input, 3 khz max. Analog common Fig.3 Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table.9. Table.9 Terminal Numbers and Wire Sizes (Same for all Models) Terminals FM, AC, AM, M3, M4, SC, A, A, A3, +V, -V, S, S, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7, S8, MA, MB, MC, M, M, P3, C3, P4, C4, MP, RP, R+, R-, S9, S0, S, S, S+, S-, IG, SN, SP Terminal Screws E (G) M3.5 Tightening Torque lb-in (N m) Phoenix type * ( ) (0.8.0) Possible Wire Sizes AWG (mm ) Stranded wire: 6 6 (0.4.5) 0 4 (0.5 ) Recommended Wire Size AWG (mm ) Wire Type 8 (0.75) Shielded, twisted-pair wire * Shielded, polyethylenecovered, vinyl sheath cable * (.5) - *. Use shielded twisted-pair cables input an external frequency reference. *. Yaskawa recommends using straight solderless terminals on digital inputs simplify wiring and improve reliability. * 3. Yaskawa recommends using a thin-slot screwdriver with a 3.5 mm blade width.

54 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals Control Circuit Terminal Functions The functions of the control circuit terminals are shown in Table.0. Use the appropriate terminals for the correct purposes. Table.0 Control Circuit Terminals Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level S Forward run/sp command Forward run when CLOSED; spped when OPEN. S Reverse run/sp command Reverse run when CLOSED; spped when OPEN. S3 Multi-function input * Facry setting: External fault when CLOSED. S4 Multi-function input * Facry setting: Fault reset when CLOSED. S5 Multi-function input 3 * Facry setting: Multi-speed speed reference effective when CLOSED. Digital input signals S6 Multi-function input 4 * Facry setting: Multi-speed speed reference effective when CLOSED. S7 Multi-function input 5 * Facry setting: Jog frequency selected when CLOSED. S8 Multi-function input 6 * Facry setting: External baseblock when CLOSED. S9 Multi-function input 7 * Facry setting: Multi-speed speed reference 3 effective when CLOSED. Multifunction digital inputs. Functions set by H-0 H-0 4 Vdc, 8 ma Phocoupler isolation S0 Multi-function input 8 * Facry setting: Multi-speed speed reference 4 effective when CLOSED. S Multi-function input 9 * Facry setting: Accel/decel time selected when CLOSED. S Multi-function input 0 * Facry setting: Emergency sp (NO contact) when CLOSED. SC Sequence input common - -3

55 Analog input signals Phocoupler outputs +V +5 V power output -V -5 V power output A A A3 Master speed frequency reference Multi-function analog input Multi-function analog input +5 V power supply for analog input or transmitters -5 V power supply for analog input or transmitters V/-00 00% 0 +0 V/00% 4 0 ma/00%, V/ %, 0 +0 V/00% 4 0 ma/00%, V/ %, 0 +0 V/00% Multifunction analog input. Function set by H3-09 Multifunction analog input 3. Function set by H V (Max. current: 0 ma) -5 V (Max. current: 0 ma) V, 0 +0 V (Input impedance: 0 kω) 4 0 ma (Input impedance: 50 Ω) 4 0 ma (Input impedance: 50 Ω) AC Analog reference common 0 V - E(G) P3 C3 P4 C4 Shield wire, optional ground line connection point Multi-function PHC output 3 Multi-function PHC output 4 Table.0 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued) Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level - - Facry setting: Ready for operation when CLOSED. Facry setting: FOUT frequency detected when CLOSED. 50 ma max. at 48 Vdc * -4

56 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals Relay outputs Analog monir outputs Pulse I/O MA MB MC M M M3 M4 M5 M6 FM AM Fault output signal (NO contact) Fault output signal (NC contact) Relay contact output common Multi-function contact output (NO contact) Multi-function contact output Multi-function contact output 3 Multi-function analog monir Multi-function analog monir MA / MC: Closed during fault condition MB / MC: during fault condition Facry setting: Operating Operating when CLOSED across M and M. Facry setting: Zero speed Zero speed level (b-0) or below when CLOSED. Facry setting: Frequency agreement detection Frequency within Hz of set frequency when CLOSED. 0 +0Vdc / 00% frequency -0 +0Vdc / 00% frequency 4 0mA / 00% frequency AC Analog common - RP Multi-function pulse input *3 Facry setting: Frequency reference MP Multi-function pulse monir Table.0 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued) Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level Facry setting: Output frequency - Multifunction digital output. Function set by H-0 Multifunction digital output. Function set by H-0 Multifunction digital output. Function set by H-03 Multifunction analog output. Function set by H Vdc / 00% Drive's rated output current -0 +0Vdc / 00% Drive's rated output current 4 0mA / 00% Drive's rated output current Multifunction analog output. Function set by H4-04 Function set by H6-0 Function set by H6-06 Form C Dry contacts capacity: A max. at 50 Vac A max. at 30 Vdc Form A Dry contacts capacity: A max. at 50 Vac A max. at 30 Vdc 0 +0 Vdc ±5% ma max. 0 3 khz (3 kω) 0 3 khz (. kω) -5

57 RS- 485/ 4 R+ R- S+ S- MODBUS communications input MODBUS communications output For -wire RS-485, short R+ and S+ as well as R- and S-. *. For a 3-wire sequence, the default settings are a 3-wire sequence for S5, multi-step speed setting for S6 and multi-step speed setting for S7. *. When driving a reactive load, such as a relay coil, always insert a flywheel diode as shown in Fig.4. * 3. Pulse input specifications are given in the following table. Differential input, PHC isolation Differential output, PHC isolation IG Communications shield wire - - Low level voltage High level voltage V V H duty 30% 70% Pulse frequency 0 3 khz Table.0 Control Circuit Terminals (Continued) Type No. Signal Name Function Signal Level Flywheel diode External power: 48 V max. Coil 50 ma max. The rating of the flywheel diode must be at least as high as the circuit voltage. Fig.4 Flywheel Diode Connection Shunt Connecr CN5 and DIP Switch S The shunt connecr CN5 and DIP switch S are described in this section. Analog output switch Voltage output Current output OFF Terminating resistance* ON Analog input switch Facry settings *Note: Refer Table. for S functions and Table.3 for Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals. Fig.5 Shunt Connecr CN5 and DIP Switch S -6

58 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals The functions of DIP switch S are shown in the following table. Table. DIP Switch S Name Function S- RS-485 and RS-4 terminating resistance OFF: No terminating resistance ON: Terminating resistance of 0 Ω S- Input method for analog input A OFF: 0 0 V (internal resistance: 0 kω) ON: 4 0 ma (internal resistance: 50 Ω) The functions and positions of CN5 are shown in the following table. Table. Jumper CN5 Configuration Options Jumper CN5 Configuration Analog Output Monir Configuration Voltage Output (0-0Vdc) for terminals FM-AC (CH) and AM-AC (CH) Current Output (4-0mA) for terminals FM-AC (CH) and AM-AC (CH) Voltage Output (0-0Vdc) for terminals FM-AC (CH) Current Output (4-0mA) for terminals AM-AC (CH) Current Output (4-0mA) for terminals FM-AC (CH) Voltage Output (0-0Vdc) for terminals AM-AC (CH) -7

59 Sinking/Sourcing Mode The multi-function input terminal logic can be switched between sinking mode (0 Vdc common) and sourcing mode (+4 Vdc common) by using the terminals SN, SC, and SP. An external 4 Vdc power supply is also supported, providing more freedom in signal input methods. Table.3 Sinking/Sourcing Mode and Input Signals Internal Power Supply External Power Supply S S Sinking Mode S SN S SN SC SP IP4V(+4V) External +4V SC SP IP4V(+4V) S S Sourcing Mode S S SN External +4V SN SC SP IP4V(+4V) SC SP IP4V(+4V) -8

60 Wiring Control Circuit Terminals Control Circuit Terminal Connections Connections Drive control circuit terminals are shown in Fig.6. Pulse Input Terminals R/L, S/L, T/L3 are standard on CIMR-G7U08-0 and CIMR-G7U Branch circuit protection supplied by others. DC Link Choke Standard: CIMR-G7U08 0 CIMR-G7U U X Shorting Bar Standard: CIMR-G7U0P4 05 CIMR-G7U40P4 405 Remove if adding external DC link choke External Braking Terminal + 3 is standard on CIMR-G7U08-0 and CIMR-G7U Braking Terminals B, B are standard on CIMR-G7U0P4-05 and CIMR-G7U40P MCCB B B Mor 3-Phase Power Supply 50/60Hz L L L3 Remove jumpers if using pulse input R/L S/L T/L3 R/L S/L G7 U/T V/T W/T3 T T T3 M T/L3 MA Digital Inputs 4VDC, 8mA Multi-function Digital Inputs 4VDC, 8 ma Foward Run/Sp Reverse Run/Sp External Fault Fault Reset Multi-Step Reference Multi-Step Reference Jog Reference Baseblock Multi-Step Reference3 Multi-Step Reference4 Accel / Decel Time Fast-Sp N.O. S S S3 (H-0) S4 (H-0) S5 (H-03) S6 (H-04) S7 (H-05) S8 (H-06) S9 (H-07) S0 (H-08) S (H-09) S (H-0) SN SC (H-0) (H-0) (H-03) (H-04) (H-05) MB MC M M M3 M4 M5 M6 P3 C3 P4 C4 During Run Zero Speed Digital Output Fault Contact 50VAC, 30VDC, A Frequency Agree Inverter Ready Minor Fault - Alarm Multi-function Digital Outputs -4 50VAC, 30VDC, A Multi-function Digital Outputs VDC, 50mA SP +4VDC E(G) kω +V +5VDC +/-0%, 0mA -V -5VDC +/-0%, 0mA E(G) External Frequency Reference k Ω A 0 +/-0VDC, 0 k Ω * A 4 0mA, 50 Ω * (S- ON) [0 +/-0VDC, 0k Ω **] (S- OFF) Multi-function Analog Input (H3-09) A3 0 +/-0VDC, 0k Ω* Multi-function Analog Input (H3-05) RP 0 3kHz, 5 VDC, 3k Ω *** Multi-function Pulse Input (H6-0) AC (H4-0) FM (H4-04) AM AC (H6-06) MP Output Frequency Output Current Output Frequency Multi-function Analog Output - 0 +/-0VDC, ma 4-0mA, 500 Ω +/-9 Bit Resolution +/- 8% Accuracy Multi-function Pulse Output 0 3kHz 3k Ω +/-% Accuracy Modbus RTU Communications RS-485/4 9. Kbps R+ R- S+ S- IG Terminating Resisr 0 Ω S- Jumper CN5 CH CH V DIP Switch S S- S- OFF ON See Page -5 for details. * +/- Bit Resolution, 0.% Accuracy ** 0 Bit Resolution, 0.% Accuracy *** +/-% Accuracy Fig.6 Control Circuit Terminal Connections -9

61 Control Circuit Wiring Precautions Observe the following precautions when wiring control circuits. Separate control circuit wiring from main circuit wiring (terminals R/L, S/L, T/L3, B, B, U/T, V/T, W/T3,,,, and 3) and other high-power lines. Separate wiring for control circuit terminals MA, MB, MC, M, M, M3, M4, M5, and M6 (contact outputs) from wiring other control circuit terminals. Use twisted-pair or shielded twisted-pair cables for control circuits prevent operating faults. Process cable ends as shown in Fig.7. Connect the shield wire terminal E (G). Insulate the shield with tape prevent contact with other signal lines and equipment. Shield sheath Armor Connect shield sheath terminal at Drive (terminal E (G)) Insulate with tape Do not connect here. Fig.7 Processing the Ends of Twisted-pair Cables Control Circuit Wire Sizes For remote operation, keep the length of the control wiring 50m or less. Separate the control wiring from highpower lines (input power, mor leads or relay sequence circuits) reduce noise induction from peripheral devices. When setting speed commands from an external speed potentiometer, use shielded twisted-pair wires and ground the shield terminal E(G), as shown above. Terminal numbers and wire sizes are shown in Table.9. Wiring Checks Check all wiring after wiring has been completed. Do not perform a buzzer check on control circuits. Perform the following checks on the wiring. Is all wiring correct? Have any wire clippings, screws, or other foreign material been left? Are all screws tight? Are any wire ends contacting other terminals? -30

62 Installing and Wiring Option Cards Installing and Wiring Option Cards Option Card Models and Specifications Up three Option Cards can be mounted in the Drive. You can mount up one card in each of the three places on the controller card (A, C, and D) shown in Fig.8. Table.4 lists the type of Option Cards and their specifications. Table.4 Option Card Specifications Card Model Specifications PG Speed Control Cards Speed Reference Cards DeviceNet Communications Card Profibus-DP Communications Card Analog Monir Card Digital Output Card Mounting Location PG-A Serial open-collecr/complimentary inputs A PG-B Phase A/B complimentary inputs A PG-D Single line-driver inputs A PG-X Phase A/B line-driver inputs A AI-4U AI-4B Input signal levels 0 0 V DC (0 kω), channel 4 0 ma (50 Ω), channel Input resolution: 4-bit Input signal levels 0 0 V DC (0 kω) 4 0 ma (50 Ω), 3 channels Input resolution: 3-bit with sign bit DI-08 8-bit digital speed reference setting C DI-6H 6-bit digital speed reference setting C SI-N DeviceNet communications support C SI-P Profibus-DP communications support C AO-08 8-bit analog outputs, channels D AO- -bit analog outputs, channels D DO-08 Six phocoupler outputs and relay outputs D DO-0C relay outputs D C C -3

63 Installation Before mounting an Option Board, remove power from the Drive and wait for the CHARGE LED go out. Remove the Digital Operar, front cover, and option clip. Option Clip can be easily removed by squeezing the protruding portions of the clip and then pulling it out. Then, mount the Option Board(s). The A Option Board uses a mounting spacer secure the board the control board. Insert the mounting spacer as shown in Fig.8. After installing an Option Board in slot C or D, insert the Option Clip prevent the side with the connecr from rising. Refer documentation provided with the Option Board for detailed mounting instructions for option slots A, C, and D. A Option Card mounting spacer hole 4CN A Option Card connecr CN C Option Card connecr A Option Card mounting spacer (Provided with A Option Card.) C Option Card mounting spacer Option Clip (To prevent raising of C and D Option Cards) 3CN D Option Card connecr C Option Card D Option Card D Option Card mounting spacer A Option Card A Option Card mounting spacer Fig.8 Mounting Option Cards -3

64 Installing and Wiring Option Cards PG Speed Control Card Terminals and Specifications The terminal specifications for the PG Speed Control Cards are given in the following tables. PG-A The terminal specifications for the PG-A are given in the following table. Table.5 PG-A Terminal Specifications Terminal No. Contents Specifications TA Vdc (±5%), 00 ma max. Power supply for pulse generar 0 Vdc (GND for power supply) 3 Terminal for switching between Vdc voltage input + V/open collecr switching terminal and open collecr input. For open collecr input, 4 short across 3 and 4. H: +4 Vdc; L: + Vdc max. (Maximum response 5 Pulse input terminal frequency: 30 khz) 6 Pulse input common 7 Vdc (±0%), 0 ma max. Pulse mor output terminal 8 Pulse monir output common TA (E) Shield connection terminal - -33

65 PG-B The terminal specifications for the PG-B are given in the following table. Table.6 PG-B Terminal Specifications Terminal No. Contents Specifications TA TA Vdc (±5%), 00 ma max. Power supply for pulse generar 0 Vdc (GND for power supply) 3 A-phase pulse input terminal H: +8 Vdc L: + Vdc max. (Maximum response frequency: 30 khz) 4 Pulse input common 5 B-phase pulse input terminal H: +8 Vdc L: + Vdc max. (Maximum response frequency: 30 khz) 6 Pulse input common collecr output, 4 Vdc, 30 ma max. A-phase monir output terminal A-phase monir output common 3 collecr output, 4 Vdc, 30 ma max. B-phase monir output terminal 4 B-phase monir output common TA3 (E) Shield connection terminal - PG-D The terminal specifications for the PG-D are given in the following table. Table.7 PG-D Terminal Specifications Terminal No. Contents Specifications Vdc (±5%), 00 ma max.* Power supply for pulse generar 0 Vdc (GND for power supply) 3 5 Vdc (±5%), 00 ma max.* TA 4 Pulse input + terminal Line driver input (RS-4 level input) 5 Pulse input - terminal Maximum response frequency: 300 khz 6 Common terminal - 7 Pulse monir output + terminal Line driver output (RS-4 level output) 8 Pulse monir output - terminal TA (E) Shield connection terminal - * 5 Vdc and Vdc cannot be used at the same time. -34

66 Installing and Wiring Option Cards PG-X The terminal specifications for the PG-X are given in the following table. * 5 Vdc and Vdc cannot be used at the same time. Table.8 PG-X Terminal Specifications Terminal No. Contents Specifications TA TA Vdc (±5%), 00 ma max.* Power supply for pulse generar 0 Vdc (GND for power supply) 3 5 Vdc (±5%), 00 ma max.* 4 A-phase + input terminal 5 A-phase - input terminal 6 B-phase + input terminal 7 B-phase - input terminal 8 Z-phase + input terminal 9 Z-phase - input terminal Line driver input (RS-4 level input) Maximum response frequency: 300 khz 0 Common terminal 0 Vdc (GND for power supply) A-phase + output terminal A-phase - output terminal 3 B-phase + output terminal 4 B-phase - output terminal 5 Z-phase + output terminal 6 Z-phase - output terminal Line driver output (RS-4 level output) 7 Control circuit common Control circuit GND TA3 (E) Shield connection terminal - -35

67 Wiring Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the Control Cards. Wiring the PG-A Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-A. Three-phase, Vac ( Vac) Drive R/L U/T V/T V/T W/T3 W/T3 4CN E PG-A 4CN 3 4 TA 5 6 E 7 TA (E) 8 + Vdc power supply 0 Vdc power supply Vdc voltage input (A/B phase) Pulse 0 Vdc Pulse monir output Fig.9 Wiring a V Voltage Input Three-phase, Vac ( Vac) Drive R/L V/T U/T V/T W/T3 W/T3 4CN E PG-A 4CN 3 4 TA 5 6 E 7 TA (E) 8 + Vdc power supply 0 Vdc power supply collecr output (A/B phase) Pulse 0 Vdc Pulse monir output Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines. Do not use the pulse generar's power supply for anything other than the pulse generar (encoder). Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due noise. The length of the pulse generar's wiring must not be more than 00 meters (38 ft). Fig.0 Wiring an -collecr Input -36

68 Installing and Wiring Option Cards PG power supply + Vdc Pulse input Short for opencollecr input Pulse input Pulse monir output Fig. I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-A -37

69 Wiring the PG-B Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-B. Three-phase Vac ( Vac) Drive Power supply + Vdc Power supply 0 Vdc A-phase pulse output (+) A-phase pulse output (-) B-phase pulse output (+) B-phase pulse output (-) A-phase pulse monir output B-phase pulse monir output Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines. Do not use the pulse generar's power supply for anything other than the pulse generar (encoder). Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due noise. The length of the pulse generar's wiring must not be more than 00 meters (38 ft). The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F-05. The facry preset if for forward rotation, A-phase advancement. Fig. PG-B Wiring PG power supply + Vdc A-phase pulse input B-phase pulse input A-phase pulses B-phase pulses Division rate circuit A-phase pulse monir output B-phase pulse monir output When connecting a voltage-output-type PG (encoder), select a PG that has an output impedance with a current of at least ma the input circuit phocoupler (diode). The pulse monir dividing ratio can be changed using parameter F-06. A-phase pulses B-phase pulses Fig.3 I/O Circuit Configuration of the PG-B -38

70 Installing and Wiring Option Cards Wiring the PG-D Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-D. Three-phase Vac ( Vac) Drive Power supply + Vdc Power supply 0 Vdc Power supply +5 Vdc Pulse input + (A/B phase) Pulse input - (A/B phase) Pulse monir output Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines. Do not use the pulse generar's power supply for anything other than the pulse generar (encoder). Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due noise. The length of the pulse generar's wiring must not be more than 00 meters. Fig.4 PG-D Wiring Wiring the PG-X Wiring examples are provided in the following illustrations for the PG-X. Three-phase Vac ( Vac) Drive R/L U/T S/L T/L3 V/T W/T3 Power supply + Vdc Power supply 0 Vdc Power supply +5 Vdc A-phase pulse input (+) A-phase pulse input (-) B-phase pulse input (+) B-phase pulse input (-) A-phase pulse monir output B-phase pulse monir output Z-phase pulse monir output Shielded twisted-pair wires must be used for signal lines. Do not use the pulse generar's power supply for anything other than the pulse generar (encoder). Using it for another purpose can cause malfunctions due noise. The length of the pulse generar's wiring must not be more than 00 meters (38 ft). The direction of rotation of the PG can be set in user parameter F-05 (PG Rotation). The facry preset if for mor forward rotation, A-phase advancement. Fig.5 PG-X Wiring -39

71 Wiring Terminal Blocks Use no more than 00 meters (38 ft) of wiring for PG (encoder) signal lines, and keep them separate from power lines. Use shielded, twisted-pair wires for pulse inputs and pulse output monir wires, and connect the shield the shield connection terminal. Wire Sizes (Same for All Models) Terminal wire sizes are shown in Table.9. Table.9 Wire Sizes Terminal Pulse generar power supply Pulse input terminal Pulse monir output terminal Terminal Screws - Wire Thickness (mm ) Stranded wire: Single wire: Shield connection terminal M Wire Type Shielded, twisted-pair wire Shielded, polyethylene-covered, vinyl sheath cable Straight Solderless Terminals for Control Circuit Terminals We recommend using straight solderless terminals on signal lines simplify wiring and improve reliability. Closed-loop Connecr Sizes and Tightening Torque The closed-loop connecrs and tightening rques for various wire sizes are shown in Table.0. Wire Thickness [mm ] 0.5 Table.0 Closed-loop Connecrs and Tightening Torques Terminal Screws Crimp Terminal Size Tightening Torque (N m) M Wiring Method and Precautions Observe the following precautions when wiring. Separate the control signal lines for the PG Speed Control Card from main circuit lines and power lines. Connect the shield when connecting a PG. The shield must be connected prevent operational errors caused by noise. Also, do not use any lines that are more than 00 m (38 ft) long. Refer Fig.7 for details on connecting the shield. Connect the shield the shield terminal (E). Do not solder the ends of wires. Doing so may cause contact faults. When not using straight solderless terminals, strip the wires a length of approximately 5.5 mm (0. in). -40

72 Installing and Wiring Option Cards Selecting the Number of PG (Encoder) Pulses The setting for the number of PG pulses depends on the model of PG Speed Control Card being used. Set the correct number for your model. PG-A/PG-B The maximum response frequency is 3,767 Hz. Use a PG that outputs a maximum frequency of approximately 0 khz for the rotational speed of the mor. f PG (Hz) = Mor speed at maximum frequency output (RPM) 60 PG rating (ppr) Some examples of PG output frequency (number of pulses) for the maximum frequency output are shown in Table.. Mor's Maximum Speed (RPM) Table. PG Pulse Selection Examples PG Rating (ppr) PG Output Frequency for Maximum Frequency Output (Hz) , , , ,000 Note. The mor speed at maximum frequency output is expressed as the sync rotation speed.. The PG power supply is Vdc. 3. A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 00 ma. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup capacir or other method.) PG power supply Capacir for momentary power loss Signals Fig.6 PG-B Connection Example -4

73 PG-D/PG-X There are 5 Vdc and Vdc PG power supplies. Check the PG power supply specifications before connecting. The maximum response frequency is 300 khz. Use the following equation computer the output frequency of the PG (f PG ). f PG (Hz) = Mor speed at maximum frequency output (RPM) 60 PG rating (ppr) A separate power supply is required if the PG power supply capacity is greater than 00 ma. (If momentary power loss must be handled, use a backup capacir or other method.) PG-X TA IP IG IP5 3 A (+) 4 A (-) 5 B (+) 6 B (-) 7 Z (+) 8 Z (-) 9 IG 0 PG power supply AC 0V +V 0 V Capacir for + V momentary power loss PG TA3 Fig.7 PG-X Connection Example (for Vdc PG power supply) -4

74 3 Digital Operar and Modes This chapter describes Digital Operar displays and functions, and provides an overview of operating modes and switching between modes. Digital Operar...3- Modes...3-5

75 Digital Operar The Digital Operar is used for programming, operating, moniring, and copying the Drive s parameters. To copy parameters, G7 Drives must have the same software version, model, and control method. The various items included on the Digital Operar are described below. Menu Display -DRIVE- Rdy Frequency Ref U-0= 60.00Hz U-0= 60.00Hz U-03= 0.05A Drive Mode Indicars See Table 3. Ready Display Drive can operate when a Drive command is input Data Display Displays monir data, parameter data and settings line x 3 characters 3 lines x 6 characters Key Descriptions See Table 3. RUN & STOP Indicars See Tables 3.5 and 3.6 Facry Default -QUICK- C o n t r o l M e t ho d A-0= 3 *3* Flux Currently Programmed Value Present Selection (User adjusts) 3-

76 Digital Operar Digital Operar Keys The names and functions of the Digital Operar Keys are described in Table 3.. Table 3. Key Functions Key Name Function LOCAL/REMOTE Key Switches between operation via the Digital Operar (LOCAL) and control circuit terminal operation (REMOTE). This Key can be enabled or disabled by setting user parameter o-0. MENU Key Selects menu items (modes). ESC Key Returns the status before the DATA/ENTER Key was pressed. JOG Key Enables jog operation when the Drive is being operated from the Digital Operar. FWD/REV Key Selects the rotation direction of the mor when the Drive is being operated from the Digital Operar. Shift/RESET Key Increment Key Decrement Key DATA/ENTER Key Sets the number of digits for user parameter settings. Also acts as the Reset Key when a fault has occurred. Selects menu items, sets user parameter numbers, and increments set values. Used move the next item or data. Selects menu items, sets user parameter numbers, and decrements set values. Used move the previous item or data. Pressed enter menu items, user parameters, and set values. Also used switch from one display another. RUN Key STOP Key Starts the Drive operation when the Drive is being controlled by the Digital Operar. Sps Drive operation. This Key can be enabled or disabled when operating from the control circuit terminal by setting user parameter o-0. Note Except in diagrams, Keys are referred using the Key names listed in the above table. 3-3

77 Drive Mode Indicars The definition of the Drive mode indicars are shown in Table 3.. Table 3. Drive Mode Indicars Indicar Definition FWD REV Lit when a forward run command is input. Lit when a reverse run command is input. REMOTE SEQ See Table 3.3. REMOTE REF See Table 3.4. ALARM Lit when a fault has occurred. Flashes when an Alarm has occurred. REMOTE Sequence (SEQ) Indicar The status of the REMOTE Sequence (SEQ) indicar is shown in Table 3.3. This indicar is always Off when the Drive is in the LOCAL mode. When the Drive is in the REMOTE mode, the SEQ indicar status is dependent on the setting of parameter b-0 (Run Command Selection). See Table 3.3. Table 3.3 REMOTE Sequence (SEQ) Indicar Indicar Status On Off Condition Parameter b-0 (Run Command Selection) is set terminal strip, communications, or an option board as indicated below: b-0 = (Terminals) = (Communications) =3 (Option PCB) Parameter b-0 (Run Command Selection) is set Digital Operar as indicated below: b-0=0 (Operar) REMOTE Reference (REF) Indicar The status of the REMOTE Reference (REF) indicar is shown in Table 3.4. This indicar is always Off when the Drive is in the LOCAL mode. When the Drive is in the REMOTE mode, the REF indicar status is dependent on the setting of parameter b-0 (Frequency Reference Selection). See Table 3.4. Table 3.4 REMOTE Reference (REF) Indicar 3-4 Indicar Status On Off Condition Parameter b-0 (Frequency Reference Selection) is set terminal strip, communications, option board, or pulse train as indicated below: b-0 = (Terminals) = (Communications) =3 (Option PCB) =4 (Pulse Train) Parameter b-0 (Frequency Reference Selection) is set digital operar as indicated below: b-0=0 (Operar)

78 Drive Mode Indicars Run Indicar The status of the RUN indicar is shown in Table 3.5 when the Drive is in either the LOCAL or REMOTE mode. Table 3.5 RUN Indicar Indicar Status Condition On Blinking Off Drive is running. Drive is decelerating a sp. Drive is spped. Sp Indicar The status of the STOP indicar is shown in Table 3.6 when the Drive is in either the LOCAL or REMOTE mode. Table 3.6 STOP Indicar Indicar Status On Blinking Off Drive is decelerating a sp or spped. Condition Drive is in a run condition but the frequency reference is less than the minimum output frequency E-09, or the Drive is running in REMOTE mode and the STOP key on has been pressed. Drive is running. Modes This section describes the Drive's modes and switching between modes. Drive Modes The Drive's user parameters and moniring functions are organized in groups called modes that make it easier read and set user parameters.the Drive is equipped with 5 modes. The 5 modes and their primary functions are shown. Table 3.7 Modes Drive mode Mode Quick programming mode Advanced programming mode Verify mode Autuning mode* Primary function(s) The Drive can be run in this mode. Use this mode when moniring values such as frequency references or output current, displaying fault information, or displaying the fault hisry. Use this mode reference and set the minimum user parameters operate the Drive (e.g., the operating environment of the Drive and Digital Operar). Use this mode reference and set all user parameters. Use this mode read/set user parameters that have been changed from their facry-set values. Use this mode when running a mor with unknown mor parameters in the vecr control mode. The mor parameters are calculated and set aumatically. This mode can also be used measure only the mor line--line resistance. * Always perform autuning with the mor before operating using vecr control. Autuning mode will not be displayed during operation or when an error has occurred. The default setting of the Drive is for open-loop vecr control (A-0 = ). 3-5

79 Switching Modes The mode selection display will appear when the MENU Key is pressed from a monir or setting display. Press the MENU Key from the mode selection display switch between the modes. Press the DATA/ENTER Key from the mode selection key monir data and from a monir display access the setting display. Display at Startup -DRIVE- Rdy Frequency Ref U- 0=60.00Hz U-0=60.00Hz U-03=0.05A Mode Selection Display MENU Monir Display Display DATA ENTER DATA ENTER -DRIVE- ** Main Menu ** Operation MENU ESC -DRIVE- Rdy Monir U - 0=60.00Hz U-0=60.00Hz U-03=0.05A RESET ESC -DRIVE- Rdy Reference Source U- 0=60.00Hz U-0=60.00Hz U-03=0.05A DATA ENTER ESC -DRIVE- Rdy Frequency Ref U- 0=060.00Hz -QUICK- ** Main Menu ** Quick DATA ENTER -QUICK- Control Method A-0= ** DATA ENTER -QUICK- Control Method A-0= ** ESC ESC MENU DATA ENTER -ADV- ** Main Menu ** Programming DATA ENTER ESC -ADV- Initialization A - 00= Select Language RESET ESC -ADV- Select Language A- 00 =0 ** English DATA ENTER ESC -ADV- Select Language A- 00= 0 ** English MENU -VERIFY- ** Main Menu ** Modified Consts DATA ENTER -VERIFY- None Modified The constant number will be displayed if a constant has been changed. Press the DATA/ENTER Key enable the change. ESC MENU -A.TUNE- ** Main Menu ** Au-Tuning DATA ENTER ESC DATA ENTER -A.TUNE- -A.TUNE- Tuning Mode Sel Tuning Mode Sel T- 0=0 *0* T- 0= 0 *0* Standard Tuning "0" ESC Standard Tuning "0" Fig 3. Mode Transitions IMPORTANT When running the Drive after using Digital Operar, press the MENU Key select the drive mode (displayed on the LCD screen) and then press the DATA/ENTER Key from the drive mode display bring up the monir display. Run commands can't be received from any other display. (Monir display in the drive mode will appear when the power is turned ON.) 3-6

80 Drive Mode Indicars Drive Mode Drive mode is the mode in which the Drive can be operated. The following monir displays are possible in drive mode: The frequency reference, output frequency, output current, and output voltage, as well as fault information and the fault hisry. When b-0 (Reference selection) is set 0, the frequency can be changed from the frequency setting display. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys change the frequency. The user parameter will be written and the monir display will be returned when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting. 3-7

81 Example Operations Key operations in drive mode are shown in the following figure. Display at Startup -DRIVE- Rdy Frequency Ref U- 0=60.00Hz U-0=60.00Hz U-03=0.05A Mode Selection Display MENU DATA ENTER A Monir Display B DATA ENTER Frequency Display -DRIVE- ** Main Menu ** Operation MENU ESC RESET ESC DATA ENTER ESC -DRIVE- Rdy Monir U - 0=60.00Hz U-0=60.00Hz U-03=0.05A -DRIVE- Rdy Frequency Ref U- 0=60.00Hz U-0=60.00Hz U-03=0.05A -DRIVE- Rdy Frequency Ref U-0= Hz -QUICK- ** Main Menu ** Quick -DRIVE- Rdy Monir U - 0=60.00Hz U-03=0.05A U-04= RESET ESC -DRIVE- Rdy Output Freq U- 0=60.00Hz U-03=0.05A U-04= The Frequency Display will not be displayed when using an analog reference. MENU -ADV- ** Main Menu ** Programming MENU -DRIVE- Rdy Monir U -40 = 0H U-0=60.00Hz U-0=60.00Hz RESET ESC -DRIVE- Rdy FAN Elapsed Time U- 40 = 0H U-0=60.00Hz U-0=60.00Hz The fault name will be displayed if the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed while a constant is being displayed for which a fault code is being displayed. -VERIFY- ** Main Menu ** Modified Consts MENU -DRIVE- Rdy Fault Trace U - 0=OC U-0= OV U-03=60.00Hz RESET ESC 3 4 -DRIVE- Rdy Current Fault U - 0 = OC U-0=OV U-03=60.00Hz DATA ENTER ESC U - 0= OC Over Current -A.TUNE- ** Main Menu ** Au-Tuning -DRIVE- Rdy Fault Trace U - 0 = OV U3-03=60.00Hz U3-04=60.00Hz RESET ESC -DRIVE- Rdy Last Fault U - 0 = OV U3-03=60.00Hz U3-04=60.00Hz DATA ENTER ESC Rdy U - 0= OV DC Bus Overvolt DATA ENTER -DRIVE- Rdy Fault Hisry U3-0= OC U3-0= OV U3-03= OH RESET ESC -DRIVE- Rdy Last Fault U3-0 = OC U3-0=OV U3-03=OH DATA ENTER ESC Rdy U3-0= OC Over Current -DRIVE- Rdy Fault Message U3-0 = OV U3-03= OH U3-04= UV RESET ESC -DRIVE- Rdy Fault Message U3-0 = OV U3-03= OH U3-04= UV DATA ENTER ESC Rdy U3-0= OV DC Bus Overvolt A B 5 6 Fig 3. Operations in Drive Mode Note When changing the display with the Increment and Decrement Keys, the next display after the one for the last parameter number will be the one for the first parameter number and vise versa. For example, the next display after the one for U-0 will be U-40. This is indicated in the figures by the letters A and B and the numbers IMPORTANT The display for the first monir parameter (frequency reference) will be displayed when power is turned ON. The monir item displayed at startup can be set in o-0 (Monir Selection after Power Up). Operation cannot be started from the mode selection display.

82 Drive Mode Indicars Quick Programming Mode In quick programming mode, the parameters required for Drive trial operation can be monired and set. Parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys change the frequency. The user parameter will be written and the monir display will be returned when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting. Refer Chapter 5 User Parameters for details on the parameters displayed in quick programming mode. Example Operations Key operations in quick programming mode are shown in the following figure. Mode Selection Display MENU Monir Display Frequency Display -DRIVE- ** Main Menu ** Operation MENU A B -QUICK- ** Main Menu ** Quick DATA ENTER ESC -QUICK- Control Method A-0= ** DATA ENTER ESC -QUICK- Control Method A-0= ** MENU -ADV- ** Main Menu ** Programming -QUICKb-0= ** Reference Source Terminals DATA ENTER ESC -QUICKb-0= ** Reference Source Terminals MENU -VERIFY- ** Main Menu ** -QUICKb-0= ** Run Source Terminals DATA ENTER ESC -QUICKb-0= ** Run Source Terminals Modified Consts MENU -QUICK- Terminal AM Gain H4-05=0.50 DATA ENTER -QUICK- Terminal AM Gain H4-05= A.TUNE- ** Main Menu ** ESC Au-Tuning -QUICK- MOL Fault Select L-0= ** Std Fan Cooled DATA ENTER ESC -QUICK- MOL Fault Select L-0= ** Std Fan Cooled -QUICK- StallP Decel Sel L3-04= ** Enabled DATA ENTER ESC -QUICK- StallP Decel Sel L3-04= ** Enabled A B Fig 3.3 Operations in Quick Programming Mode 3-9

83 Advanced Programming Mode In advanced programming mode, all Drive parameters can be monired and set. Parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys change the frequency. The user parameter will be written and the monir display will be returned when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting. Refer Chapter 5 User Parameters for details on the parameters. Example Operations Key operations in advanced programming mode are shown in the following figure. Mode Selection Display Monir Display Display A B DATA ENTER -ADV- ** Main Menu ** Programming DATA ENTER -ADV- Initialization A-00= Select Language RESET -ADV- Select Language A- 00 =0 ** English -ADV- Select Language A- 00= 0 ** English ESC ESC ESC MENU -VERIFY- ** Main Menu ** Modified Consts -ADV- Initialization A-0 = Control Method RESET -ADV- Control Method A- 0 = ** DATA ENTER ESC -ADV- Control Method A- 0= ** ESC MENU -A.TUNE- ** Main Menu ** Au-Tuning MENU -ADVb5-0=0 PID Control PID Mode RESET ESC 3 4 -ADVb5-0 =0 PID Mode Disabled DATA ENTER ESC -ADV- PID Mode *0* b5-0= 0 *0* Disabled -DRIVE- ** Main Menu ** Operation MENU -ADVb5-4=.0Sec PID Control Fb los Det Time RESET ESC -ADVb5-4= Fb los Det Time.0Sec DATA ENTER ESC -ADVb5-4=0.0Sec Fb los Det Time -QUICK- ** Main Menu ** Quick MENU -ADV- Torque Limit L7-0=00% Fwd Torque Limit RESET ESC -ADV- Fwd Torque Limit L7-0= 00% DATA ENTER ESC -ADV- Fwd Torque Limit L7-0= 00% -ADV- Torque Limit L7-04= 00% Fwd Torque Limit RESET ESC -ADV- Fwd Torque Limit L7-04= 00% DATA ENTER ESC -ADV- Torq Lmt Rev Rgn L7-04= 00% A B 5 6 Fig 3.4 Operations in Advanced Programming Mode 3-0

84 Drive Mode Indicars User Parameters Here, the procedure is shown change C-0 (Acceleration Time ) from 0 s 0 s. Table 3.8 User Parameters in Advanced Programming Mode Step No. Digital Operar Display Description -DRIVE- Rdy Frequency Ref U- 0=60.00Hz Power supply turned ON. U-0=60.00Hz U-03=0.05A -DRIVE- ** Main Menu ** Operation MENU Key pressed enter drive mode. -QUICK- 3 ** Main Menu ** Quick MENU Key pressed enter quick programming mode. -ADV- 4 ** Main Menu ** Programming MENU Key pressed enter advanced programming mode. -ADV- 5 Initialization A-00= DATA/ENTER pressed access monir display. Select Language -ADV- Accel Time 6 C-00= 0.0Sec ( ) Increment or Decrement Key pressed display C-0 (Acceleration Time ). 0.0Sec 7 -ADV- Accel Time C-0= Sec DATA/ENTER Key pressed access setting display. The setting of C-0 (0.00) is displayed. -ADV- Accel Time 8 C-0= Sec Shift/RESET Key pressed move the flashing digit the right. -ADV- Accel Time 9 C-0= Sec Increment Key pressed change set value 0.00 s. -ADV- Accel Time 0 C-0= Sec DATA/ENTER Key pressed enter the set data. -ADV- Entry Accepted Entry Accepted is displayed for.0 s after the data setting has been confirmed with the DATA/ENTER Key. -ADV- Accel Time C- 0= 0.0Sec The monir display for C-0 returns. 3-

85 External Fault Procedure Examples of the Digital Operar displays that appear when setting an eternal fault for a multi-function contact input in Advanced Programming Mode are shown in the following diagram. Mode Selection Display Monir Display Display DATA ENTER A B DATA ENTER 3 4 -ADV- ** Main Menu ** Programming DATA ENTER ESC -ADV- Digital Inputs H-0=4 Terminal S3 Sel RESET ESC -ADV- Terminal S3 Sel H- 0 =4*4* External Fault "4" ESC -ADV- Terminal S3 Sel *4* H- 0= 4 NO/Always Det Coast Sp MENU -VERIFY- ** Main Menu ** Modified Consts -ADV- Digital Inputs H-0 =4 Terminal S4 Sel RESET ESC -ADV- Terminal S4 Sel H- 0 =4 *4* Fault Reset "4" -ADV- Terminal S3 Sel H- 0= 5 NC/Always Det *4* Coast Sp MENU -A.TUNE- ** Main Menu ** Au-Tuning -ADV- Digital Inputs H-08 =08 Terminal S8 Sel RESET ESC -ADV- Terminal S8 Sel H- 08 =08*08* Ext BaseBlk N.O. "08" -ADV- Terminal S3 Sel H- 0= 6 *4* NO/During RUN Coast Sp MENU -DRIVE- ** Main Menu ** Operation -ADV- Digital Inputs H-0= 0 Term M-M Sel -ADV- Terminal S3 Sel H- 0= 7 NC/During RUN *4* Coast Sp MENU -QUICK- ** Main Menu ** Quick -ADV- Pulse I/O Setup H6-0= 0 Pulse Input Sel MENU A B -ADV- Terminal S3 Sel H- 0= F NC/During RUN *4* Alarm Only 3 4 Fig 3.5 External Fault Function Example 3-

86 Drive Mode Indicars Verify Mode Verify mode is used display any parameters that have been changed from their default settings in a programming mode or by autuning. None will be displayed if no settings have been changed. Of the environment mode settings, only A-0 will be displayed if it has been changed. Other environment modes settings will not be displayed even if they have been changed from their default settings. Even in verify mode, the same procedures can be used change settings as are used in the programming modes. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys change the frequency. The user parameter will be written and the monir display will be returned when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting. Example Operations An example of key operations is given below for when the following settings have been changed from their default settings: b-0 (Reference Selection), C-0 (Acceleration Time ), E-0 (Input Voltage ), and E-0 (Mor Rated Current). Mode Selection Display Monir Display Display DATA ENTER -ADV- ** Main Menu ** Programming MENU A B -VERIFY- ** Main Menu ** Modified Consts DATA ENTER ESC -VERIFYb-0=0 *0* Reference Source Terminals "" DATA ENTER ESC -VERIFYb-0= 0 *0* Reference Source Terminals "" MENU -A.TUNE- ** Main Menu ** -VERIFY- Accel Time C-0=00.0Sec DATA ENTER -VERIFY- Accel Time C-0=000.0Sec Au-Tuning ESC MENU -VERIFY- Input Voltage E-0=00VAC DATA ENTER -VERIFY- Input Voltage E-0= 00VAC -DRIVE- ** Main Menu ** ESC Operation MENU -VERIFY- Mor Rated FLA E-0=.00A DATA ENTER -VERIFY- Mor Rated FLA E-0=.00A -QUICK- ** Main Menu ** Quick A B ESC MENU Fig 3.6 Operations in Verify Mode 3-3

87 Autuning Mode Autuning aumatically tunes and sets the required mor parameters when operating in the vecr control modes. Always perform autuning before starting operation. When control has been selected, stationary autuning for only line--line resistance can be selected. When the mor cannot be disconnected from the load, perform stationary autuning. Contact your Yaskawa representatives set mor parameters by calculation. The Drive's autuning function aumatically determines the mor parameters, while a servo system's autuning function determines the size of a load, the drives autuning functions are fundamentally different. The default setting of the Drive is for open-loop vecr control. Example of Operation Set the mor output power (in kw), rated voltage, rated current, rated frequency, rated speed, and number of poles specified on the nameplate on the mor and then press the RUN Key. The mor is aumatically run and the mor parameters measured based on these settings and autuning will be set. Always set the above items. Autuning cannot be started otherwise, e.g., it cannot be started from the mor rated voltage display. Parameters can be changed from the setting displays. Use the Increment, Decrement, and Shift/RESET Keys change the frequency. The user parameter will be written and the monir display will be returned when the DATA/ENTER Key is pressed after changing the setting. The following example shows autuning for open-loop vecr control while operating the mor without switching mor. 3-4

88 Drive Mode Indicars Mode Selection Display Monir Display Display DATA ENTER -VERIFY- ** Main Menu ** Modified Consts MENU A -A.TUNE- ** Main Menu ** Au-Tuning MENU -DRIVE- ** Main Menu ** Operation DATA ENTER ESC -A.TUNE- Tuning Mode Sel T- 0 =0 *0* Standard Tuning DATA ENTER -A.TUNE- Tuning Mode Sel 0 = 0 *0* Standard Tuning "0" "0" ESC -A.TUNE- Rated Frequency T- 05 = 60.0Hz DATA ENTER ESC -A.TUNE- Rated Frequency T- 05 = Hz MENU -QUICK- ** Main Menu ** -A.TUNE- Number of Poles T- 06 = 4 DATA ENTER ESC -A.TUNE- Number of Poles T- 06 = 04 -A.TUNE- Tune Proceeding 48.0Hz/0.5A START GOAL Quick MENU -A.TUNE- Rdy Au-Tuning 0.0Hz/0.0A Tuning Ready? Press RUN key RUN -A.TUNE- Tune Proceeding 48.0Hz/0.5A START GOAL -A.TUNE- Tune Proceeding Tune Successful -ADV- ** Main Menu ** Programming MENU A The display will aumatically change depending on the status of autuning. -A.TUNE- Tune Aborted STOP key STOP -A.TUNE- Tune Successful * TUn0 will be displayed during rotational autuning and TUn will be displayed during stationary autuning. The DRIVE indicar will light when autuning starts. Fig 3.7 Operation in Autuning Mode The setting displays in for autuning depend on the control mode (, with PG, open-loop vecr, openloop vecr, or flux vecr). If a fault occurs during autuning, refer Chapter Troubleshooting. IMPORTANT 3-5

89 3-6

90 4 Trial Operation This chapter describes the procedures for trial operation of the Drive and provides an example of trial operation. Trial Operation Procedure...4- Trial Operation Procedures Adjustment Suggestions...4-7

91 Trial Operation Procedure Perform trial operation according the following flowchart. START Installation Wiring Set power supply voltage. * Turn ON power. Confirm status. Select operating method. Basic settings (Quick programming mode) control? YES (Default: A-0 = 0) PG? (A-0 =, 3, or 4)*5 with PG (A-0 = ) Set E-03. default: 00 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz) Set E-03, E-04, and F-0. default: 00 V/60 Hz (400 V/60 Hz) * s according control mode Mor cable over 50 m or heavy load possibly causing mor stall or overload? YES OK operate mor during autuning? *3 NO NO Stationary autuning for *4 line--line resistance only YES Rotational autuning Stationary autuning *6 *6 Application settings (Advanced programming mode) * Set for 400 V Class Inverter for 55 kw or more. 4- No-load operation Loaded operation Optimum adjustments and constant settings Check/record constants. END * If there is a reduction gear between the mor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F- and F-3 in advanced programming mode. *3 Use rotational autuning increase autuning accuracy whenever it is okay for the mor be operated. *4 If the mor cable changes 50 m or longer for the actual installation, perform stationary autuning for the line--line resistance only on-site. *5 The default control mode is open-loop vecr control (A-0 = ). *6 If the maximum output frequency and base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency (E- 04) after autuning. Fig 4. Trial Operation Flowchart

92 Trial Operation Procedures Trial Operation Procedures The procedure for the trial operate is described in order in this section. the Power Supply Voltage Jumper ( V Class Drives of 55 kw or Higher) Set the power supply voltage jumper after setting E-0 (Input Voltage ) for V Class Drives of 55 kw or higher. Insert the jumper in the voltage connecr nearest the actual power supply voltage. The jumper is facry-set 440 V when shipped. If the power supply voltage is not 440 V, use the following procedure change the setting.. Turn OFF the power supply and wait for at least 5 minutes.. Confirm that the CHARGE indicar has gone out. 3. Remove the terminal cover. 4. Insert the jumper at the position for the voltage supplied the Drive (see Fig 4.). 5. Return the terminal cover its original position. Power tab V class power supply V class power supply Power supply input terminals Jumper (facry-set position) CHARGE indicar Fig 4. Power Supply Voltage Jumper Power ON Confirm all of the following items and then turn ON the power supply. Check that the power supply is of the correct voltage V class: 3-phase Vdc, 50/60Hz V class: 3-phase Vdc, 50/60Hz Make sure that the mor output terminals (U/T, V/T, W/T3) and the mor are connected correctly. Make sure that the Drive control circuit terminal and the control device are wired correctly. Set all Drive control circuit terminals OFF. When using a PG Speed Control Card, make sure that it is wired correctly. Make sure that the mor is not connected the mechanical system (no-load status) 4-3

93 Checking the Display Status If the Digital Operar's display at the time the power is connected is normal, it will read as follows: Display for normal operation The frequency reference monir is displayed in the data display section. When an fault has occurred, the details of the fault will be displayed instead of the above display. In that case, refer Chapter 7 Troubleshooting. The following display is an example of a display for faulty operation. Display for fault operation -DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Frequency Frequency Ref Ref U- 0= Hz U-0= Hz U-0=60.00Hz U-03=0.05A -DRIVE- UV Frequency Ref DC Bus Undervolt The display will differ depending on the type of fault. A low voltage alarm is shown at left. 4-4

94 Trial Operation Procedures Basic s Switch the quick programming mode ( QUICK will be displayed on the LCD screen) and then set the following user parameters. Refer Chapter 3 Digital Operar and Modes for Digital Operar operating procedures and Chapter 5 User Parameters and Chapter 6 Parameter s by Function for details on the user parameters. Parameters that must be set are listed in Table 4. and those that are set according the application are listed in Table 4.. Table 4. Parameters that Must Be Set Parameter Number A-0 b-0 b-0 C-0 C-0 E-0 E-0 L-0 Name Control method selection Reference selection Operation method selection Acceleration time Deceleration time Input voltage setting Mor rated current Mor protection selection Description Set the control method for the Drive. 0: control : control with PG : -loop vecr control 3: Flux vecr 4: -loop vecr control Set the frequency reference input method. 0: Digital Operar : Control circuit terminal (analog input) : MODBUS communications 3: Option Card 4: Pulse train input Set the run command input method. 0: Digital Operar : Control circuit terminal (sequence input) : MODBUS communications 3: Option Card Set the acceleration time in seconds for the output frequency climb from 0% 00%. Set the deceleration time in seconds for the output frequency fall from 00% 0%. Set the Drive's nominal input voltage in volts. Set the mor rated current. Set enable or disable the mor overload protection function using the electronic thermal relay. 0: Disabled : General mor protection : Drive mor protection 3: mor protection Range Facry s s V (00-40 V class) V ( V class) 0% 00% of Drive's rated current 00 V (00-40 V class) 400 V ( V class) for generalpurpose mor of same capacity as Drive

95 Table 4. Parameters that Are Set as Required Parameter Number Name Description Range Facry b-03 Spping method selection Select spping method when sp command is sent. 0: Deceleration sp : Coast sp : DC braking sp 3: Coast sp with timer C6-0 C6- Carrier frequency selection Carrier frequency selection for open-loop vecr control The carrier frequency is set low if the mor cable is 50 m or longer or reduce radio noise or leakage current. F 4 Depends on capacity, voltage, and control mode. Depends on kva setting. d-0 d-04 and d-7 H4-0 and H4-05 L3-04 Frequency references 4 and jog frequency reference FM and AM terminal output gain Stall prevention selection during deceleration Set the required speed references for multi-step speed operation or jogging. Adjust when an instrument is connected the FM or AM terminal. If using the dynamic brake option (braking resisr, Braking Resisr Units, and Braking Units), be sure set parameter L (disabled) or 3 (enabled with braking resisr) Hz d-0 d-04: 0.00Hz d-7: 6.00Hz H4-0: 00% H4-05: 50%

96 Trial Operation Procedures s for the Control Methods Autuning methods depend on the control method set for the Drive. Make the settings required by the control method. Overview of s Make the required settings in quick programming mode and autuning mode according the following flowchart. START control? NO (A-0 =, 3, or 4)*3 YES (A-0 = 0 or ) NO (Default: A-0 = 0) PG? YES (A-0 = ) Control mode selection Set E-03. default: 00 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz) Set E-03, E-04, and F-0. default: 00 V/60 Hz(400 V/60 Hz) * Mor cable over 50 m or heavy load possibly causing mor stall or overload? YES OK operate mor during autuning?* NO NO YES Stationary autuning for line--line resistance only Rotational autuning*4 Stationary autuning*4 END Note If the mor cable changes 50 m or longer for the actual installation, perform stationary autuning for the line--line resistance only on-site. *. Use rotational autuning increase autuning accuracy whenever it is okay for the mor be operated. Always perform rotational autuning when using open-loop vecr control. *. If there is a reduction gear between the mor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F- and F-3. * 3. The default setting of the Drive is for open-loop vecr control (A-0 = ). * 4. If the maximum output frequency and base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency (E-04) after autuning. Fig 4.3 s According the Control Method 4-7

97 the Control Method Any of the following five control methods can be set. Control Mode Parameter Basic Control control A-0 = 0 Voltage/frequency ratio fixed control Main Applications Variable speed control, particularly control of multiple mors with one Drive and replacing existing drives control with PG A-0 = Voltage/frequency ratio fixed control with speed compensation using a PG Applications requiring high-precision speed control using a PG on the machine side -loop vecr control A-0 = (facry setting) Current vecr control without a PG Variable speed control, applications requiring speed and rque accuracy using vecr control without a PG Flux vecr control A-0 = 3 Flux vecr control Very high-performance control with a PG (simple servo drives, high-precision speed control, rque control, and rque limiting) -loop vecr control A-0 = 4 Current vecr control without a PG with an ASR (speed controller) (Always perform rotational autuning.) Very high-performance control without a PG (rque control without a PG, rque limiting, applications requiring a :00 speed control range without a PG) Note With vecr control, the mor and Drive must be connected :. The mor capacity for which stable control is possible is 50% 00% of the capacity of the Drive. PG Control without PG (A-0 = 0) Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 E) in E-03 ( Pattern Selection) or set F in E-03 specify a user-set pattern as required for the mor and load characteristics in E-04 E-3 in advanced programming mode. Simple operation of a general-purpose mor at 50Hz: E-03 = 0 Simple operation of a general-purpose mor at 60Hz: E-03 = F (default) or If E-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from E-04 E-3 are for 60Hz Perform stationary autuning for the line--line resistance only if the mor cable is 50 m or longer for the actual installation or the load is heavy enough produce stalling. Refer the following section on Autuning for details on stationary autuning. Control with PG (A-0 = ) Set either one of the fixed patterns (0 E) in E-03 ( Pattern Selection) or set F in E-03 specify a user-set pattern as required for the mor and load characteristics in E-04 E-3 in advanced programming mode. Simple operation of a general-purpose mor at 50Hz: E-03 = 0 Simple operation of a general-purpose mor at 60Hz: E-03 = F (default) or If E-03 = F, the default setting in the user setting from E-04 E-3 are for 60Hz Set the number of mor poles in E-04 (Number of Mor Poles) 4-8

98 Trial Operation Procedures Set the number of rotations per pulse in F-0 (PG Constant). If there is a reduction gear between the mor and PG, set the reduction ratio in F- and F-3 in advanced programming mode. Perform stationary autuning for the line--line resistance only if the mor cable is 50 m or longer for the actual installation or the load is heavy enough produce stalling. Refer the following section on Autuning for details on stationary autuning. -loop Control (A-0 = ) Perform autuning. If the mor can be operated, perform rotational autuning. If the mor cannot be operated, perform stationary autuning. Refer the following section on Autuning for details on autuning. Flux Control (A-0 = 3) Perform autuning. If the mor can be operated, perform rotational autuning. If the mor cannot be operated, perform stationary autuning. Refer the following section on Autuning for details on autuning. -loop Control (A-0 = 4) Perform autuning. Be sure perform rotational autuning. Refer the following section on Autuning for details on autuning. Autuning Use the following procedure perform autuning aumatically set mor parameters when using the vecr control method, when the cable length is long, etc. the Autuning Mode One of the following three autuning modes can be set. Rotational autuning Stationary autuning Stationary autuning for line--line resistance only Always confirm the precautions before autuning before performing autuning. Rotational Autuning (T-0 = 0) Rotational autuning is used only for open-vecr control. Set T-0 0, input the data from the nameplate, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operar. The Drive will sp the mor for approximately minute and then set the required mor parameters aumatically while operating the mor for approximately minute. Stationary Autuning (T-0 = ) Stationary autuning is used for open-vecr control or flux vecr control. Set T-0, input the data from the nameplate, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operar. The Drive will supply power the stationary mor for approximately minute and some of the mor parameters will be set aumatically. The remaining mor parameters will be set aumatically the first time operation is started in drive mode. 4-9

99 Stationary Autuning for Line--Line Resistance Only (T-0 = ) Stationary autuning for line--line resistance only can be used in any control method. This is the only autuning possible for control and control with PG modes. Autuning can be used prevent control errors when the mor cable is long (50 m or longer) or the cable length has changed since installation or when the mor and Drive have different capacities. Set T-0 for open-loop vecr control, and then press the RUN Key on the Digital Operar. The Drive will supply power the stationary mor for approximately 0 seconds and the Mor Line--Line Resistance (E-05) and cable resistance will be aumatically measured. Precautions Before Using Autuning Read the following precautions before using autuning. Autuning the Drive is fundamentally different from autuning the servo system. Drive autuning aumatically adjusts parameters according detected mor parameters, whereas servo system autuning adjusts parameters according the detected size of the load. When speed precision or rque precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), use a mor with a rated voltage that is 0 V less than the input power supply voltage of the Drive for 00-40V-class Drives and 40 V less for V-class Drives. If the rated voltage of the mor is the same as the input power supply voltage, the voltage output from the Drive will be unstable at high speeds and sufficient performance will not be possible. Use stationary autuning whenever performing autuning for a mor that is connected a load. Use rotational autuning whenever performing autuning for a mor that has fixed output characteristics, when high precision is required, or for a mor that is not connected a load. If rotational autuning is performed for a mor connected a load, the mor parameters will not be found accurately and the mor may exhibit abnormal operation. Never perform rotational autuning for a mor connected a load. If the wiring between the Drive and mor changes by 50 m or more between autuning and mor installation, perform stationary autuning for line--line resistance only. If the mor cable is long (50 m or longer), perform stationary autuning for line--line resistance only even when using control. The status of the multi-function inputs and multi-function outputs will be as shown in the following table during autuning. When performing autuning with the mor connected a load, be sure that the holding brake is not applied during autuning, especially for conveyor systems or similar equipment. Tuning Mode Multi-function Inputs Multi-function Outputs Rotational autuning Do not function. Same as during normal operation Stationary autuning Stationary autuning for line-line resistance only Do not function. Do not function. Maintain same status as when autuning is started. Maintain same status as when autuning is started. To cancel autuning, always use the STOP Key on the Digital Operar. 4-0 IMPORTANT. Power will be supplied the mor when stationary autuning is performed even though the mor will not turn. Do not uch the mor until autuning has been completed.. When performing stationary autuning connected a conveyor or other machine, ensure that the holding brake is not activated during autuning.

100 Trial Operation Procedures Precautions for Rotational and Stationary Autuning Lower the base voltage based on Fig 4.4 prevent saturation of the Drive s output voltage when the rated voltage of the mor is higher than the voltage of the power supply the Drive. Use the following procedure perform autuning.. Input the voltage of the input power supply T-03 (Mor rated voltage).. Input the results of the following formula T-05 (Mor base frequency): (Base frequency from the mor s nameplate setting of T-03)/(Rated voltage from mor s nameplate) 3. Perform autuning. After completing autuning, set E-04 (Max. output frequency) the base frequency from the mor s nameplate. Output voltage Rated voltage from mor nameplate T-03 0 Base frequency from mor nameplate T-03 Rated voltage from mor nameplate Output frequency Base frequency from mor nameplate Fig 4.4 Mor Base Frequency and Drive Input Voltage IMPORTANT. When speed precision is required at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), set T-03 (Mor rated voltage) the input power supply voltage When operating at high speeds (i.e., 90% of the rated speed or higher), the output current will increase as the input power supply voltage is reduced. Be sure provide sufficient margin in the Drive current. Precautions after Rotational and Stationary Autuning If the maximum output frequency and base frequency are different, set the maximum output frequency (E- 04) after autuning. 4-

101 Parameter s for Autuning The following parameters must be set before autuning. Table 4.3 Parameter s before Autuning Parameter Number T-00 T-0 Name Display Mor / selection * Select Mor Autuning mode selection Tuning Mode Sel Display When switching mor is selected, set the mor for which autuning is be performed. (This parameter is ignored if mor is not selected.) : Mor : Mor Set the autuning mode. 0: Rotational autuning : Stationary autuning : Stationary autuning for line--line resistance only Range Facry Data Displays during Autuning with PG loop Flux loop or Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 () 0 () Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes *4 T-0 Mor output power Mtr Rated Power Set the output power of the 0.00 *5 *7 mor in kilowatts kw 0.40 kw * Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes T-03 Mor rated voltage Rated Voltage Set the rated voltage of the mor in volts. *5 * V (00-40 V class) V ( V class) 00.0 V (00-40 V class) V ( V class) - - Yes Yes Yes T-04 Mor rated current Rated Current Set the rated current of the 0.3 *5 *7 mor in amps A *3.90 A * Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes T-05 Mor base frequency Rated Frequency Set the base frequency of the 0 *3 *4 *5 *6 mor in hertz Hz 60.0Hz - - Yes Yes Yes 4-

102 Trial Operation Procedures Table 4.3 Parameter s before Autuning(Continued) Name Data Displays during Autuning Parameter Number Display Display Range Facry with PG loop Flux loop T-06 Number of mor poles Set the number of mor poles. 48 poles 4 poles - - Yes Yes Yes Number of Poles T-07 Mor base speed Rated Speed Set the base speed of the mor in min. *3 * min - - Yes Yes Yes T-08 Number of PG pulses when turning PG Pulses/ Rev Set the number of pulses for the PG (pulse generar or encoder). Set the number of pulses per mor revolution without a multiplication facr Yes - Yes - *. Not normally displayed. Displayed only when a mor switch command is set for a multi-function digital input (one of H-0 H-05 set 6). *. The facry setting depends on the Drive capacity. Values are given for a V class, 0.4 kw Drive. * 3. The setting range is 0% 00% of the Drive capacity. * 4. For control, the only setting that is possible is (stationary autuning for line--line resistance only). * 5. For fixed output mors, set the base speed value. * 6. For drive mors or for specialized vecr mors, the voltage or frequency may be lower than for general-purpose mors. Always confirm the information on the nameplate or in test reports. If the no-load values are known, input the no-load voltage in T-03 and the no-load current in T-05 ensure accuracy. * 7. The settings that will ensure stable vecr control are between 50% and 00% of the Drive rating. Refer page 3-5 for Digital Operar displays during autuning. 4-3

103 Application s User parameters are set as required in advanced programming mode ( ADV will be displayed on the LCD screen). All the parameters that can be set in quick programming mode can also be displayed and set in advanced programming mode. Examples The following are examples of settings for applications. When using an Drive-mounted braking resisr (ERF), set L8-0 enable ERF braking resisr overheating protection. To prevent the machine from being operated in reverse, set b-04 disable reverse operation. To increase the speed of a 60Hz mor by 0%, set E Hz. To use a 0 0-V analog signal for a 60Hz mor for variable-speed operation between 0 and 54Hz (0% 90% speed deduction), set H %. To control speed between 0% and 80% ensure smooth gear operation and limit the maximum speed of the machine, set d % and set d-0 0.0%. No-load Operation To being no-load operation (without connecting the machine and the mor), press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operar change LOCAL mode (the SEQ and REF indicars on the Digital Operar should be OFF). Always confirm safety around the mor and machine before starting Drive operation from the Digital Operar. Confirm that the mor works normally and that no errors are displayed at the Drive. Jog Frequency Reference (d-7, default: 6.00Hz) can be started and spped by pressing and releasing the JOG Key on the Digital Operar. If the external sequence prevent operation from the Digital Operar, confirm that emergency sp circuits and machine safety mechanisms are functioning, and then start operation in REMOTE mode (i.e., with a signal from the control signal terminals). The safety precautions must always be taken before starting the Drive with the mor connected the machine. INFO Both a RUN command (forward or reverse) and a frequency reference (or multi-step speed reference) must be provided start Drive operation. Input these commands and reference regardless of the operation method (i.e., LOCAL of REMOTE). 4-4

104 Trial Operation Procedures Loaded Operation Connect the machine the mor and then start operation as described for no-load operation (i.e., from the Digital Operar or by using control circuit terminal signals). Connecting the Load After confirming that the mor has spped completely, connect the mechanical system. Be sure tighten all the screws when securing the mor shaft the mechanical system. Operation using the Digital Operar Use the Digital Operar start operation in LOCAL mode in the same way as in no-load operation. If fault occurs during operation, make sure the STOP Key on the Digital Operar is easily accessible. At first, set the frequency reference a low speed of one tenth the normal operating speed. Checking Operating Status Having checked that the operating direction is correct and that the machine is operating smoothly at slow speed, increase the frequency reference. After changing the frequency reference or the rotation direction, check that there is no oscillation or abnormal sound from the mor. Check the monir display ensure that U-03 (Output Current) is not o high. Refer Adjustment Suggestions on page 4-7 if hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur. 4-5

105 Check and Recording User Parameters Use verify mode ( VERIFY will be displayed on the LCD screen) check user parameters that have been changed for trial operation and record them in a user parameter table. Any user parameters that have been change by autuning will also be displayed in verify mode. If required, the copy function in parameters o3-0 and o3-0 displayed in advanced programming mode can be used copy the changed settings from the Drive a recording area in the Digital Operar. If changed settings are saved in the Digital Operar, they can be easily copied back the Drive speed up system recovery if for any reason the Drive has be replaced. The following functions can also be used manage user parameters. Recording user parameters access levels for user parameters a password Recording User Parameters (o-03) If o-03 is set after completing trial operation, the settings of user parameters will be saved in a separate memory area in the Drive. Later, after Drive settings have been changed, the user parameters can be initialized the settings saved in the separate memory area when o-03 was set by setting A-03 (Initialize) 0. User Parameter Access Levels (A-0) A-0 can be set 0 (moniring-only) prevent user parameters from being changed. A-0 can also be set (User-specified Parameters) and used along with A parameters display only parameters required by the machine or application in a programming mode. Password (A-04 and A-05) When the access level is set moniring-only (A-0 = 0), a password can be set so that user parameters will be displayed only when the correct password is input. 4-6

106 Adjustment Suggestions Adjustment Suggestions If hunting, vibration, or other problems originating in the control system occur during trial operation, adjust the parameters listed in the following table according the control method. This table lists only the most commonly used user parameters. Table 4.4 Adjusted User Parameters Control Method control (A-0 = 0 or ) Name (Parameter Number) Hunting-prevention gain (N-0) Carrier frequency selection (C6-0) Torque compensation primary delay time constant (C4-0) Torque compensation gain (C4-0) Middle output frequency voltage (E-08) Minimum output frequency voltage (E-0) Performance Controlling hunting and vibration in middle-range speeds (0 40 Hz) Reducing mor magnetic noise Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds Increasing rque and speed response Controlling hunting and vibration Improving rque at low speeds (0 Hz or lower) Controlling hunting and vibration Improving rque at low speeds Controlling shock at startup Facry Recommended Depends on capacity Depends on capacity 0 default ms Depends on capacity and voltage Default Default V * Adjustment Method Reduce the setting if rque is insufficient for heavy loads. Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads. Increase the setting if mor magnetic noise is high. Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at low middle-range speeds. Reduce the setting if rque or speed response is slow. Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs. Increase the setting if rque is insufficient at low speeds. Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs for light loads. Increase the setting if rque is insufficient at low speeds. Reduce the setting if shock at startup is large. 4-7

107 Table 4.4 Adjusted User Parameters (Continued) Control Method -loop vecr control (A-0 = ) -loop vecr control (A-0 = ) Name (Parameter Number) Speed feedback detection control (AFR) gain (N-0) Torque compensation primary delay time constant (C4-0) Slip compensation primary delay time (C3-0) Slip compensation gain (C3-0) Carrier frequency selection (C6-0) Middle output frequency voltage (E-08) Minimum output frequency voltage (E-0) Performance Increasing rque and speed response Controlling hunting and vibration in middle-range speeds (0 40 Hz) Increasing rque and speed response Controlling hunting and vibration Increasing speed response Improving speed stability Improving speed accuracy Reducing mor magnetic noise Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds (0Hz or less) Improving rque at low speeds Controlling shock at startup Facry ms 00ms 0 00ms ms Depends on capacity Depends on capacity and voltage Recommended 0 default Default Default + or V * Adjustment Method Reduce the setting if rque or speed response is slow. Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs. Reduce the setting if rque or speed response is slow. Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs. Reduce the setting if speed response is slow. Increase the setting if the speed is not stable. Increase the setting if speed response is slow. Reduce the setting if the speed is o fast. Increase the setting if mor magnetic noise is high. Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at low speeds. Increase the setting if rque or speed response is slow. Reduce the setting if shock at startup is large. 4-8

108 Adjustment Suggestions Table 4.4 Adjusted User Parameters (Continued) Control Method Flux vecr control (A-0 = 3) Name (Parameter Number) ASR proportional gain (C5-0) and ASR proportional gain (C5-03) ASR integral time (high-speed) (C5-0) and ASR integral time (low-speed) (C5-04) ASR switching frequency (C5-07) ASR primary delay time (C5-06) Carrier frequency selection (C6-0) Performance Torque and speed response Controlling hunting and vibration Torque and speed response Controlling hunting and vibration Switching the ASR proportional gain and integral time according the output frequency Controlling hunting and vibration Reducing mor magnetic noise Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds (3Hz or less) Facry sec 0.0Hz sec 0.0 max. output frequency 0.004sec Depends on the capacity. Recommended.0 khz default Adjustment Method Increase the setting if rque or speed response is slow. Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs. Reduce the setting if rque or speed response is slow. Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs. Set the output frequency at which change the ASR proportional gain and integral time when the same values cannot be used for both high-speed and low-speed operation. Increase the setting if machine rigidity is low and the system vibrates easily. Increase the setting if mor magnetic noise is high. Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at low middle-range speeds. 4-9

109 Table 4.4 Adjusted User Parameters (Continued) Control Method -loop vecr control (A-0 = 4) Name (Parameter Number) ASR proportional gain (C5-0) and ASR proportional gain (C5-03) ASR integral time (high-speed) (C5-0) and ASR integral time (low-speed) (C5-04) ASR switching frequency (C5-07) ASR primary delay time (C5-06) Carrier frequency selection (C6-) Performance Torque and speed response Controlling hunting and vibration Torque and speed response Controlling hunting and vibration Switching the ASR proportional gain and integral time according the output frequency Controlling hunting and vibration Reducing mor magnetic noise Controlling hunting and vibration at low speeds (3Hz or less) Facry * The setting is given for V Class Drives. Double the voltage for V Class Drives sec 0.0Hz sec 0.0 max. output frequency 0.00sec Depends on the capacity. Recommended Default value Adjustment Method Increase the setting if rque or speed response is slow. Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs. Reduce the setting if rque or speed response is slow. Increase the setting if hunting or vibration occurs. Set the output frequency at which change the ASR proportional gain and integral time when the same values cannot be used for both high-speed and low-speed operation. Increase the setting if machine rigidity is low and the system vibrates easily. Increase the setting if mor magnetic noise is high. Reduce the setting if hunting or vibration occurs at low middle-range speeds. Do not change the Torque Compensation Gain (C4-0) from its default setting of.00 when using openloop vecr control. If speeds are inaccurate during regeneration in open-loop vecr control, enable Slip Compensation During Regeneration (C3-04 = ). Use slip compensation improve speed precision during control (A-0 = 0). Set the Mor Rated Current (E-0), Mor Rated Slip (E-0), and Mor No-load Current (E-03), and then adjust the Slip Compensation Gain (C3-0) between 0.5 and.5. The default setting for control is C3-0 = 0.0 (slip compensation disabled). To improve speed response and stability in control with a PG (A-0 = ), set the ASR parameters (C5-0 C5-05) between 0.5 and.5 times the default. (It is not normally necessary adjust this setting.) ASR for control with a PG will only control the output frequency; a high gain, such as is possible for open-loop vecr control or flux vecr control, cannot be set. The following user parameters will also indirectly affect the control system. 4-0

110 Adjustment Suggestions Table 4.5 Parameters Indirectly Affecting Control and Applications Name (Parameter Number) Dwell function (b6-0 b6-04) Droop function (b7-0 b7-0) Acceleration/deceleration times (C-0 C-) S-curve characteristics (C-0 C-04) Jump frequencies (d3-0 d3-04) Analog input filter time constant (H3-) Stall prevention (L3-0 L3-06) Torque limits (L7-0 L7-04) Feed forward control (N5-0 N5-03) Application Used for heavy loads or large machine backlashes. Used soften the rque or balance the load between two mors. Can be used when the control mode (A-0) is set 3 or 4. Adjust rque during acceleration and deceleration. Used prevent shock when completing acceleration. Used avoid resonance points during operation. Used prevent fluctuations in analog input signals caused by noise. Used prevent 0 V (overvoltage errors) and mor stalling for heavy loads or rapid acceleration/deceleration. Stall prevention is enabled by default and the setting does not normally need be changed. When using a braking resisr, however, disable stall prevention during deceleration by setting L Set the maximum rque during vecr control. If a setting is increased, use a mor with higher capacity than the Drive. If a setting is reduced, stalling can occur under heavy loads. Used increase response for acceleration/deceleration or reduce overshooting when there is low machine rigidity and the gain of the speed controller (ASR) cannot be increased. The inertia ratio between the load and mor and the acceleration time of the mor running alone must be set. 4-

111 4-

112 5 User Parameters This chapter describes all user parameters that can be set in the Drive. User Parameter Descriptions...5- Digital Operar Display Functions and Levels User Parameter Tables...5-0

113 User Parameter Descriptions This section describes the contents of the user parameter tables. Description of User Parameter Tables User parameter tables are structured as shown below. Here, b-0 (Frequency Reference Selection) is used as an example. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG -loop Flux MODBUS Register b-0 Reference selection Reference Source Selects the frequency reference input source. 0: Operar - Digital preset speed U-0 or d-0 d-7. : Terminals - Analog input terminal A (or terminal A based on parameter H3-09). : Serial Com - Modbus RS- 4/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-. 3: Option PCB - Option board connected on CN. 4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP) 0 4 No Q Q Q Q Q 80H Parameter Number: Parameter Name: Description: Range: Facry : Change during Operation: Control Methods: MODBUS Address: Page: The number of the user parameter. The name of the user parameter. Details on the function or settings of the user parameter. The setting range for the user parameter. The facry setting (each control method has its own facry setting. Therefore the facry setting changes when the control method is changed.) Refer page 5-96 for facry settings by control method. Indicates whether or not the parameter can be changed while the Drive is in operation. Yes: Changes possible during operation. No: Changes not possible during operation. Indicates the control methods in which the user parameter can be monired or set. Q: Items which can be monired and set in either quick programming mode or advanced programming mode. A: Items which can be monired and set only in advanced programming mode. No: Items which cannot be monired or set for the control method. The register number used for MODBUS communications. Reference page for more detailed information on the parameter. 5-

114 Digital Operar Display Functions and Levels5-3 Digital Operar Display Functions and Levels The following figure shows the Digital Operar display hierarchy for the Drive. No. Function Display MENU Drive Mode Drive can be operated and its status can be displayed. Quick Programming Mode Minimum parameters required for operation can be monired or set. Advanced Programming Mode All parameters can be monired or set. Verify Mode Parameters changed from the default settings can be monired or set. Autuning Mode Aumatically sets mor parameters if autuning data (from mor nameplate) is input for open-loop vecr control or measure the line-line resistance for control. U Status Monir Parameters Monir U Fault Trace Fault Trace U3 Fault Hisry Fault Hisry A Initialize Mode Initialization A User-specified Mode User Parameters b Operation Mode Selections Sequence b DC Injection Braking DC Braking b3 Speed Search Speed Search b4 Timer Function Delay Timers b5 PID Control PID Control b6 Dwell Functions PID Control b7 Droop Control Droop Control b8 Energy Saving Energy Saving b9 Zero Servo Zero Servo C Acceleration/Deceleration Accel/Decel C S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration S-Curve Accel C3 Mor Slip Compensation Mor-Slip Comp C4 Torque Compensation Torque Comp C5 Speed Control (ASR) ASR Tuning C6 Carrier Frequency Carrier Freq d Preset Reference Preset Reference d Reference Limits Reference Limits d3 Jump Frequencies Jump Frequencies d4 Reference Frequency Hold Sequence d5 Torque Control Torque Control d6 Field Control Fieldweakening E Pattern Pattern E Mor Setup Mor Setup E3 Mor Pattern Pattern E4 Mor Setup Mor Setup F PG Option Setup PG Option Setup F Analog Reference Card AI-4 Setup F3 Digital Reference Card DI-08, 6 Setup F4 Analog Monir Cards AO-08, Setup F5 Digital Output Card DO-0,08 Setup F6 Communications Option Card CP-96 Setup H Multi-function Contact Inputs Digital Inputs H Multi-function Contact Outputs Digital Outputs H3 Analog Inputs Analog Inputs H4 Multi-function Analog Outputs Analog Outputs H5 MODBUS Communications Serial Com Setup H6 Pulse Train Pulse I/O Setup L Mor Overload Mor Overload L Power Loss Ridethrough PwrLoss Ridethru L3 Stall Prevention Stall Prevention L4 Reference Detection Ref Detection L5 Fault Restart Fault Restart L6 Torque Detection Torque Detection L7 Torque Limits Torque Limit L8 Hardware Protection Hdwe Protection n Hunting Prevention Function Hunting Prev n Speed Feedback Protection Control AFR n3 High-slip Braking High Slip n4 Speed Estimation Observer n5 Feed Forward Feedfoward Cont o Monir Select Monir Select o Multi-function Selections Key Selections o3 Copy Function COPY Function T Mor Autuning Au-Tuning 5-3

115 User Parameters Settable in Quick Programming Mode The minimum user parameters required for Drive operation can be monired and set in quick programming mode. The user parameters displayed in quick programming mode are listed in the following table. These, and all other user parameters, are also displayed in advanced programming mode. Refer the overview of modes on page 3-5 for an overview of quick programming mode. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG -loop Flux MODBUS Register A-0 Control Method Selection Control Method Selects the Control Method of the Drive. 0: V/F control without PG : V/F control with PG : 3: Flux (Closed ) 4: wo/pg Note: Does not return facry setting when drive is initialized. 0 4 No Q Q Q Q Q 0H b-0 Frequency Reference Selection Reference Source Selects the frequency reference input source. 0: Operar - Digital preset speed U- 0 or d-0 d-7. : Terminals - Analog input terminal A (or terminal A based on parameter H3-09). : Serial Com - Modbus RS-4/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-. 3: Option PCB - Option board connected on CN. 4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP) 0 4 No Q Q Q Q Q 80H b-0 Run Command Selection Run Source Selects the run command input source. 0: Operar - RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operar. : Terminals - Contact closure on terminals S or S. : Serial Com - Modbus RS-4/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-. 3: Option PCB - Option board connected on CN. 0 3 No Q Q Q Q Q 8H b-03 Spping Method Selection Spping Method Selects the spping method when the run command is removed. 0: Ramp Sp : Coast Sp : DC Injection Sp 3: Coast with Timer (A new run command is ignored if received before the timer expires). 0 3 *3 0 No Q Q Q Q Q 8H C-0 C-0 Acceleration Time Accel Time Deceleration Time Decel Time Sets the time accelerate from zero maximum frequency. Sets the time decelerate from maximum frequency zero * 0.0 s Yes Q Q Q Q Q 00H Yes Q Q Q Q Q 0H 5-4

116 Digital Operar Display Functions and Levels Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG -loop Flux MODBUS Register C6-0 Carrier Frequency Selection Carrier Freq Sel Selects the number of pulses per second of the output voltage waveform. range determined by C6-0 setting. 0: Low noise : Fc =.0 khz : Fc = 5.0 khz 3: Fc = 8.0 khz 4: Fc = 0.0 khz 5: Fc =.5 khz 6: Fc = 5.0 khz OF: Program (Determined by the settings of C6-03 thru C6-05) 0 F 6 * No Q Q Q Q - * 4H C6- Carrier Frequency for -loop Control Carrier Freq Sel Selects the carrier frequency during Control wo/pg. : khz (3-phase modulation) : 4kHz (3-phase modulation) 3: 6kHz (3-phase modulation) 4: 8kHz (3-phase modulation) 4 4 * No - * - * - * - * Q DH d-0 Frequency Reference units are affected by o Hz Yes A A A A A 80H Reference d-0 Frequency Reference Reference Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference " is ON. units are affected by o Hz Yes A A A A A 8H d-03 d-04 Frequency Reference 3 Reference 3 Frequency Reference 4 Reference 4 Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference " is ON. units are affected by o-03. Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference, " is ON. units are affected by o *9 0.00Hz Yes A A A A A 8H 0.00Hz Yes A A A A A 83H d-7 Jog Frequency Reference Jog Reference Frequency reference when: "Jog frequency reference" is selected via multi-function input terminals. "Jog frequency reference" has priority over "multi-step speed reference 4". Parameter d-7 is also the reference for the JOG key on the Digital Operar, and the multi-function inputs "forward jog" and "reverse jog". units are affected by o Hz Yes Q Q Q Q Q 9H 5-5

117 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG -loop Flux MODBUS Register E-0 Input Voltage Input Voltage Set the nominal voltage of the incoming line. Sets the maximum and base voltage used by preset V/F patterns (E-03 = 0 E), adjusts the levels of Drive protective features (e.g. Overvoltage, braking resisr turn-on, stall prevention, etc.). NOTE: DRIVE INPUT VOLTAGE (NOT MOTOR VOLTAGE) MUST BE SET IN E-0 FOR THE PROTECTIVE FEATURES OF THE DRIVE TO FUNCTION PROPERLY. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY. Set the type of mor being used and the type of application. The Drive operates utilizing a set V/F pattern determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed. There are 5 different preset V/F patterns select from (E-03 = 0 E) with varying voltage profiles, base levels (base level = frequency at which maximum voltage is reached), and maximum frequencies. There are also settings for Cusm V/F patterns that will use the settings of parameters E-04 through E-3. E-03 = F selects a cusm V/F pattern with an upper voltage limit and E-03 = FF selects a cusm V/F pattern without an upper voltage limit. 0: 50Hz : 60Hz Saturation : 50Hz Saturation 3: 7Hz (60Hz Base) 4: 50Hz VT 5: 50Hz VT 6: 60Hz VT 7: 60Hz VT 8: 50Hz HST 9: 50Hz HST A: 60Hz HST B: 60Hz HST C: 90Hz (60Hz Base) D: 0Hz (60Hz Base) E: 80Hz (60Hz Base) F: Cusm V/F FF: Cusm w/o limit (40V) * V *3 No Q Q Q Q Q 300H E-03 Pattern Selection V/F Selection 0 FF F No Q Q No No No 30H 5-6

118 Digital Operar Display Functions and Levels Parameter Number E-04 E-05 E-06 E-09 E-3 E-0 E-04 E- F-0 Name Display Max. Output Frequency (FMAX) Max Frequency Max. Output Voltage (VMAX) Max Voltage Base Frequency (FA) Base Frequency Min. Output Frequency (FMIN) Min Frequency Base Voltage (VBASE) Base Voltage Mor Rated Current Mor Rated FLA Number of Mor Poles Number of Poles Mor Rated Output Mtr Rated Power PG Parameter PG Pulses/Rev Description These parameters are only applicable when Pattern Selection is set Cusm (E-03 = F or FF). To set characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E-07 and E-09. In this case, the setting for E-08 will be disregarded. Be sure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner or else an OPE0 fault will occur: E-04 E- E-06 > E-07 E-09 Note: parameter E-0 zero is also acceptable. Set only when the V/F pattern is finely adjusted in the constant power (HP) area above base speed. Adjustment is not normally required. If E-3 = 0.0, then value in E-05 is used for E-3. Au-Tuning sets this value. Sets the mor nameplate full load current in amperes (A). This value is aumatically set during Au-Tuning. Sets the number of mor poles. This value is aumatically set during Autuning. Sets the mor rated power in kilowatts (kw). This value is aumatically set during Au-Tuning. HP = 0.746kW Sets the number of pulses per revolution of the encoder (pulse generar). (Do not set as a multiple.) Range * * * * (40V) * *7 60.0Hz * V *3*4 60.0Hz *4 0.5Hz *4 0.0 V *5.90 A *6 No Q Q Q Q Q 303H No Q Q Q Q Q 304H No Q Q Q Q Q 305H No Q Q Q A Q 308H No A A Q Q Q 30CH No Q Q Q Q Q 30EH 48 4 No No Q No Q Q 3H Facry 0.40 *0 Change during Operation Control Methods with PG -loop Flux MODBUS Register No Q Q Q Q Q 38H 600 No No Q No Q No 380H 5-7

119 Parameter Number H4-0 H4-05 L-0 Name Display Terminal FM Gain Terminal FM Gain Terminal AM Gain Terminal AM Gain Mor Overload Protection Selection MOL Fault Select Description Sets terminal FM output level when selected monir is at 00%.In order adjust the meter, 00% of the appropriate output is multiplied for the gain setting, the bias amount is added and then output. See H4-0 when spped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 03 appears on the setting screen, then terminal FM is used. See H4-04 when spped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 06 appears on the setting screen, then terminal AM is used. Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 0Vdc) when selected monir is at 00% output. In order adjust the meter, 00% of the appropriate output is multiplied for the gain setting, the bias amount is added and then output. See H4-0 when spped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 03 appears on the setting screen, then terminal FM is used. See H4-04 when spped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 06 appears on the setting screen, then terminal AM is used. Sets the mor thermal overload protection (OL) based on the cooling capacity of the mor. 0: Disabled : Standard Fan Cooled (< 0: mor) : Standard Blower Cooled ( 0: mor) 3: Mor ( 000: mor) Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG -loop Flux MODBUS Register 00% Yes Q Q Q Q Q 4EH 50% Yes Q Q Q Q Q 4H 0 3 No Q Q Q Q Q 480H 5-8

120 Digital Operar Display Functions and Levels Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG -loop Flux MODBUS Register L3-04 Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration StallP Decel Sel When using a braking resisr, use setting "0". "3" is used in specific applications. 0: Disabled - The Drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate. If the load is o large or the deceleration time is o short, an OV fault may occur. : General Purpose - The Drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate, but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level (380/760Vdc), deceleration will sp. Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level. : Intelligent - The active deceleration rate is ignored and the Drive decelerates as fast as possible w/o hitting OV fault level. Range: C-0 / 0. 3: Stall Prevention w/ Braking Resisr - Stall prevention during deceleration is enabled in coordination with dynamic braking. 0 3 * No Q Q Q Q Q 49H *. The setting ranges for acceleration/deceleration times depends on the setting of C-0 (Acceleration/deceleration Time Unit). If C-0 is set 0, the setting range is (s). *. The facry setting depends on the Drive capacity. * 3. These are values for a 00-40V class Drive. Values for a V class Drive are double. * 4. The facry setting will change when the control method is changed. (-loop vecr facry settings are given.) * 5. After autuning, E-3 will contain the same value as E-05. * 6. The facry setting depends on the Drive capacity. (The value for a 00-40V Class Drive for 0.4 kw is given.) * 7. The setting range is from 0% 00% of the Drive rated output current. (The value for a 00-40V Class Drive for 0.4 kw is given.) * 8. L3-04 cannot be set 3 for flux vecr control or open-loop vecr control. * 9. The setting range is for open-loop vecr control. The upper limit for the setting range also depends on the upper limit in E-04. The maximum setting is * 0.The same capacity as the Drive will be set by initializing the parameters. *.The setting range is 0 for flux vecr control and open-loop vecr control. *.Quick s are used if Multi-Function Input is set for two mors. * 3. range changes {,} when operating in Flux and in. 5-9

121 User Parameter Tables A: Setup s The following settings are made with the environment parameters (A parameters): Language displayed on the Digital Operar, access level, control method, initialization of parameters. Initialize Mode: A User parameters for the environment modes are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register A-00 Language Selection Select Language Language selection for the Digital Operar. This parameter is not reset the facry setting by A-03. 0: English : Japanese : German 3: French 4: Italian 5: Spanish 6: Portuguese Yes A A A A A 00H A-0 Access Level Selection Access Level Selects which parameters are accessible via the Digital Operar. 0: Operation Only : User Level (only available if A parameters have been set) : Advanced Level 0 Yes A A A A A 0H A-0 Control Method Selection Control Method Selects the Control Method of the Drive. 0: V/F control without PG : V/F control with PG : 3: Flux (Closed ) 4: wo/pg Note: Does not return facry setting when the drive is initialized. 0 4 No Q Q Q Q Q 0H 5-0

122 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register A-03 Initialize Parameters Init Parameters Used return all parameters their facry or user default settings. (Initializes and then returns A-03 zero.) 0: No Initialize 0: User Initialize (The user must first set their own parameter values and then sre them using parameter o-03.) 0: -Wire Initialization 3330: 3-Wire Initialization No A A A A A 03H A-04 Password Enter Password When the value set in A-04 does NOT match the value set in A-05, parameters A-0 thru A-03 and A-0 thru A-3 cannot be changed. All other parameters as determined by A-0 can be changed. Parameter A-05 can be accessed by pressing the MENU key while holding the RESET key No A A A A A 04H A-05 Password Select Password When the value set in A-04 does NOT match the value set in A-05, parameters A-0 thru A-03 and A-0 thru A-3 cannot be changed. All other parameters as determined by A-0 can be changed. Parameter A-05 can be accessed by pressing the MENU key while holding the RESET key No A A A A A 05H User-set Parameters: A The parameters set by the user are listed in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register A-0 A-3 User Parameter 3 User Param 3 Selects the parameters be available in the User Access Level (A-0 = ). These parameters are not related the User Initialize function. b-0 o-08 - No A A A A A 06H 5H 5-

123 Application Parameters: b The following settings are made with the application parameters (B parameters): Operation method selection, DC injection braking, speed searching, timer functions, dwell functions, and energy saving functions. Operation Mode Selections: b User parameters for operation mode selection are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register b-0 Frequency Reference Selection Reference Source Selects the frequency reference input source. 0: Operar - Digital preset speed U-0 or d-0 d-7. : Terminals - Analog input terminal A (or terminal A based on parameter H3-09). : Serial Com - Modbus RS-4/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-. 3: Option PCB - Option board connected on CN. 4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP) 0 4 No Q Q Q Q Q 80H b-0 Run Command Selection Run Source Selects the run command input source. 0: Operar - RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operar. : Terminals - Contact closure on terminals S or S. : Serial Com - Modbus RS- 4/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-. 3: Option PCB - Option board connected on CN. 0 3 No Q Q Q Q Q 8H b-03 Spping Method Selection Spping Method Selects the spping method when the run command is removed. 0: Ramp Sp : Coast Sp : DC Injection Sp 3: Coast with Timer (A new run command is ignored if received before the timer expires). 0 3 * 0 No Q Q Q Q Q 8H b-04 Reverse Operation Selection Reverse Oper Determines the forward rotation of the mor, and if reverse operation is disabled. 0: Reverse enabled : Reverse disabled 0 or 0 No A A A A A 83H 5-

124 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register b-05 Minimum Output Frequency (E-09) or Less Operation Selection Zero-Speed Oper Used set the method of operation when the frequency reference input is less than the minimum output frequency (E-09). 0: Run at frequency reference (E-09 not effective). : STOP (Frequencies below E-09 in the coast sp state.) : Run at min. frequency. (E-09) 3: Run at zero speed (Frequencies below E-09 are zero) No No No No A No 84H b-06 Digital Input Scan Time Cntl Input Scans Sets the scan rate of digital input terminals. 0: ms - scans (for quick response) : 5ms - scans (for noisy environments) 0 or No A A A A A 85H b-07 Local/ Remote Run Selection LOC/REM RUN Sel 0: Cycle External RUN - If the run command is closed when switching from local mode remote mode, the Drive will not run. : Accept External RUN - If the run command is closed when switching from local mode remote mode, the Drive WILL run. (same as setting "0" except drive will not run) 0 or 0 No A A A A A 86H b-08 Run Command Selection During Program RUN CMD at PRG 0: Disabled - Run command accepted only in the operation menu. : Enabled - Run command accepted in all menus (except when b-0 = 0). 0 or 0 No A A A A A 87H b-0 Zero-speed Operation Selection 0: Disabled. : Enabled. Should be enabled when using devices that require mor speed reference as well as both forward and reverse rotation. Allows for more stability related controls at zero speed. 0 or 0 No No No No No A DEH * The setting range is or for flux vecr control and open-loop vecr control. 5-3

125 DC Injection Braking: b User parameters for injection braking are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register b-0 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency DCInj Start Freq Sets the frequency at which DC injection braking starts when ramp sp (b-03 = 0) is selected. If b-0< E-09, DC Injection braking starts at E-09. Note: Zero Speed restrictions are active in Flux Mode Hz No A A A A A 89H b-0 DC Injection Braking Current DCInj Current Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Drive rated current. Note: The DC excitation current is determined by the setting in E-03 when operating in flux loop vecr control mode % No A A A No No 8AH b-03 DC Injection Braking Time/DC Excitation Time at Start Sets the time of DC injection braking at start in units of 0.0 seconds s No A A A A A 8BH DCInj Time@Start b-04 DC Injection Braking Time at Sp DCInj Time@Sp Sets the time length of DC injection braking at sp in units of 0.0 seconds. : When b-03 =, actual DC Injection time is calculated as follows: (b-04) x 0 x (OutputFreq) / (E-04) : When b-03 = 0, this parameter determines the amount of time DC Injection is applied the mor at the end of the decel ramp. 3: This should be set a minimum of 0.50 seconds when using HSB. This will activate DC injection during the final portion of HSB and help ensure that the mor sps completely s No A A A A A 8CH b-08 Magnetic Flux Compensation Capacity Field Comp Sets the magnetic flux compensation as a percentage of the no-load current value (E-03) % No No No A No No 90H 5-4

126 User Parameter Tables Speed Search: b3 User parameters for the speed search are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register b3-0 Speed Search Selection SpdSrch at Start Enables/disables and selects the speed search function at start. 0: Speed Estimation Speed Search Disable - Speed search at start is disabled (however the estimated speed method is used for multi-function input, power loss ridethrough, au fault retry) : Speed Estimation Speed Search Enable - The speed estimation method of speed search is enabled at run command. : Current Detection Speed Search Disable - Speed search at start is disabled (however the current detection method is used for multi-function input, power loss ride through, au fault retry) 3: Current Detection Speed Search Enable - The current detection method of speed search is enabled at run command. Speed Estimation Method: Mor speed and direction are measured using residual mor flux. Current Detection Method: Mor speed is measured using current feedback levels (unidirectional only). 0 3 * No A A A No A 9H b3-0 Speed Search Deactivation Current SpdSrch Current Used only when b3-0 = or 3. Sets speed search operating current in units of percent, with drive rated current as 00%. Note: Normally not necessary change. If the drive won't run after a restart, lower this value % ** No A No A No A 9H b3-03 Speed Search Deceleration Time SpdSrch Dec Time Used only when b3-0 = or 3. Sets the deceleration time during speed search s No A No A No No 93H 5-5

127 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register b3-05 Speed Sarch Delay Time Search Delay Delays the speed search operation after a momentary power loss allow time for an external output contacr re-energize s No A A A A A 95H b3-0 Speed Sarch Detection Compensation Gain Srch Detect Comp Sets the gain for the frequency at which the Drive starts speed estimation speed search. Use only when b3-0 = 0 or No A No A No A 9AH b3-3 Proportional Gain of Observer During Speed Search Srch Est P Gain Sets n4-08 in units of.0 for P-gain (PI Controls) as the Observer during Speed Search. Note: Normally this parameter need not be changed, although a low setting is needed when OV occurs during speed search with a large amount of load inertia. Set larger values when working with speed agree % No No No No No A 9DH b3-4 Bi-directional Speed Search Selection Bidir Search Sel This parameter enables the Drive detect the direction of rotation of the mor during speed search. 0: Disable - Drive uses frequency reference direction. :Enable - Drive uses detected direction 0 No A A A No A 9EH * Facry settings will change when the control method is changed. (-loop vecr facry settings are given.) Set 3 in w/pg. ** Facry settings will change when the control method is changed. 5-6

128 User Parameter Tables Timer Function: b4 User parameters for timer functions are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register b4-0 Timer Function ON-delay Time Delay-ON Timer Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital input and a multi-function digital output programmed for the timer function. This sets the amount of time between when the digital input is closed, and the digital output is energized s No A A A A A A3H b4-0 Timer Function OFF-delay Time Delay-OFF Timer Used in conjunction with a multi-function digital input and a multi-function digital output programmed for the timer function. This sets the amount of time the output stays energized after the digital input is opened s No A A A A A A4H PID Control: b5 User parameters for PID control are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register b5-0 PID Function PID Mode This parameter determines the function of the PID control. 0: Disabled : D= Feedback : D= Feed-Forward 3: Freq. Ref. + PID output (D = Feedback) 4: Freq. Ref. + PID output (D = Feed-Forward) No A A A A A A5H b5-0 Proportional Gain PID Gain Sets the proportional gain of the PID controller Yes A A A A A A6H b5-03 Integral Time PID I Time Sets the integral time for the PID controller. A setting of zero disables integral control s Yes A A A A A A7H b5-04 Integral Limit PID I Limit Sets the maximum output possible from the integrar. Set as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency % Yes A A A A A A8H b5-05 Derivative Time PID D Time Sets D-control derivative time. A setting of 0.00 disables derivative control s Yes A A A A A A9H 5-7

129 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register b5-06 PID Output Limit PID Limit Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PID controller. Set as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency % Yes A A A A A AAH b5-07 PID Offset Adjustment PID Offset Sets the amount of offset of the output of the PID controller. Set as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency. The offset is summed with the PID output. This can be used artificially kick-start a slow starting PID loop % Yes A A A A A ABH b5-08 PID Primary Delay Time Constant PID Delay Time Sets the amount of time for the filter on the output of the PID controller. Note: The offset is summed with the PID output. This can be used artifically kick-start a slow starting PID loop. Note: Normally, change is not required s Yes A A A A A ACH b5-09 PID Output Level Selection Output Level Sel Determines whether the PID controller will be direct or reverse acting. 0: Normal Output (direct acting) : Reverse Output (reverse acting) 0 or 0 No A A A A A ADH b5-0 PID Output Gain Output Gain Sets the output gain of the PID controller No A A A A A AEH b5- PID Output Reverse Selection Output Rev Sel 0: Zero Limit (when PID output goes negative, Drive sps). Zero Limit is aumatic when reverse prohibit is selected using b-04. : Reverse (when PID goes negative, Drive reverses). 0 or 0 No A A A A A AFH b5- PID Feedback Reference Missing Detection Selection Fb los Det Sel 0: Disabled (no detection of loss of PID feedback) : Alarm (detection of loss of PID feedback, operation continues during detection with the fault contact not energized) : Fault (detection of loss of PID feeedback, coast sp during detection and fault contact energizes) 0 0 No A A A A A B0H 5-8

130 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register b5-3 PID Feedback Loss Detection Level Fb los Det Lvl Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency (E-04) % No A A A A A BH b5-4 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Sets the PID feedback loss detection delay time in terms of seconds s No A A A A A BH Fb los Det Time b5-5 PID Sleep Function Start level PID Sleep Level Sets the sleep function start frequency. Note: Enabled even when PID control mode has not been selected Hz No A A A A A B3H b5-6 PID Sleep Delay Time PID Sleep Time Sets the sleep function delay time in terms of 0. seconds s No A A A A A B4H b5-7 PID Accel/decel Time PID Acc/Dec Time Applies an accel/decel time the PID setpoint reference. The Drive's standard softstarter (C-xx and S-curve) still affects the output of the PID algorithm s No A A A A A B5H b5-8 PID Setpoint Selection PID Setpoint Sel Allows the b5-9 setting be the PID target setpoint value. 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 0 No A A A A A DCH b5-9 PID Setpoint PID Setpoint Sets the PID target value. Use only when b5-8 = % No A A A A A DDH 5-9

131 Dwell Functions: b6 User parameters for dwell functions are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register b6-0 Dwell Reference at Start Dwell Hz No A A A A A B6H b6-0 b6-03 b6-04 Dwell Time at Run command ON Start OFF 0.0 Dwell Dwell Frequency at Sp Dwell The dwell function is used temporarily hold the frequency when driving a mor with heavy load Dwell Time at Sp 0.0 Dwell Output frequency b6-0 b6-03 Time b6-0 b s No A A A A A B7H 0.0Hz No A A A A A B8H 0.0 s No A A A A A B9H DROOP Control: b7 User parameters for droop functions are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register b7-0 Droop Control Level Droop Quantity Sets the speed decrease as a percentage of mor base speed (E-06) when the mor is at 00% load rque. of 0.0 disables droop control % Yes No No No A A CAH b7-0 Droop Control Delay Time Droop Delay Time Determines the droop control delay time in response a load change s Yes No No No A A CBH 5-0

132 User Parameter Tables Energy Saving: b8 User parameters for energy-saving control functions are shown in the following table. Parameter Number b8-0 b8-0 b8-03 b8-04 b8-05 b8-06 Name Display Energy Saving Control Selection Energy Save Sel Energy Saving Gain Energy Save Gain Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant Energy Saving F.T Energy Saving Coefficient Value Energy Save COEF Power Detection Filter Time kw Filter Time Search Operation Voltage Limit Search V Limit Description Energy Savings function enable/disable selection. 0: Disabled : Enabled Sets energy savings control gain when in vecr control mode. Sets energy saving control filter time constant when in vecr control mode. Used fine-tune the energy savings function when in Control Mode. Used fine-tune the energy savings function when in Control Mode. Used fine-tune the energy savings function when in Control Mode. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0 or 0 No A A A A A CCH * 0.50 s * Yes No No A A A CDH Yes No No A A A CEH *3 No A A No No No CFH 0ms No A A No No No D0H 0% No A A No No No DH *. The facry setting is.0 when using control with PG. *. Initial settings vary based on drive capacity and control mode. * 3. Caution: Initial settings will vary based on mor capacity. Zero Servo: b9 User parameters for dwell functions are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register b9-0 Zero-servo Gain Zero Servo Gain Sets the position loop gain for Zero Servo command. This function is effective when multi-function input "zero- servo command" is set No No No No A No DAH b9-0 Zero-servo Completion Width Zero Servo Count Sets number of pulses used for the multi-function output of "zero servo completion" No No No No A No DBH 5-

133 Autuning Parameters: C The following settings are made with the autuning parameters (C parameters): Acceleration/deceleration times, s-curve characteristics, slip compensation, rque compensation, speed control, and carrier frequency functions. Acceleration/Deceleration: C User parameters for acceleration and deceleration times are shown in the following table. Parameter Number C-0 C-0 C-03 C-04 C-05 C-06 C-07 C-08 C-09 C-0 Name Display Acceleration Time Accel Time Deceleration Time Decel Time Acceleration Time Accel Time Deceleration Time Decel Time Acceleration Time 3 Accel Time 3 Deceleration Time 3 Decel Time 3 Acceleration Time 4 Accel Time 4 Deceleration Time 4 Decel Time 4 Emergency Sp Time Fast Sp Time Accel/decel Time Unit Acc/Dec Units Description Sets the time accelerate from zero maximum frequency. Sets the time decelerate from maximum frequency zero. Sets the time accelerate from zero maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input. Sets the time decelerate from maximum frequency zero when selected via a multi-function input. Sets the time accelerate from zero maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input. Sets the time decelerate from maximum frequency zero when selected via a multi-function input. Sets the time accelerate from zero maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input. Sets the time decelerate from maximum frequency zero when selected via a multi-function input. Sets the time decelerate from maximum frequency zero for the multi-function input "Fast Sp" function. Note: This parameter is also used by selecting "Fast Sp" as a Sp Method when a fault is detected. Sets the setting resolution of C-0 C-09: 0: 0.0sec ( sec) : 0.sec ( sec) Range Facry * 0.0 s Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux Vec-r MODBUS Register Yes Q Q Q Q Q 00H Yes Q Q Q Q Q 0H Yes A A A A A 0H Yes A A A A A 03H No A A A A A 04H No A A A A A 05H No A A A A A 06H No A A A A A 07H No A A A A A 08H 0 or No A A A A A 09H 5-

134 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Accel/decel Switch Frequency Description Sets the frequency for aumatic switching of accel / decel times. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux Vec-r MODBUS Register Fout < C-: Accel/Decel Time 4 C- Acc/Dec SW Freq Fout C-: Accel/Decel Time Multi-function inputs "Multi-Acc/Dec " and "Multi-Acc/Dec " have priority over C ** 0.0Hz No A A A A A 0AH Note: With Multi-Function Input, Accel/Decel Time and will take precedence. * The setting range for accel/decel time will differ depending on C-0 (Accel/Decel Time Units). If C-0 is set "0", then the setting range will change 0.00sec sec. ** Varies by Duty Rating. S-curve Acceleration/Deceleration: C User parameters for S-curve characteristics are shown in the following table. Parameter Number C-0 C-0 C-03 C-04 Name Display S-curve Characteristic at Accel Start SCrv Start S-curve Characteristic at Accel End SCrv End S-curve Characteristic at Decel Start SCrv Start S-curve Characteristic at Decel End SCrv End Description S-curve is used further soften the starting and spping ramp. The longer the S-curve time, the softer the starting and spping ramp. Note:With this setting, accel/decel times will be exactly half of the start and finish times of the S-curve characteristic time. Run command OFF Output frequencyon C-0 C-03 C-0 C-04 Time Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux Vec-r MODBUS Register 0.0 s No A A A A A 0BH 0.0 s No A A A A A 0CH 0.0 s No A A A A A 0DH 0.00 s No A A A A A 0EH 5-3

135 Mor Slip Compensation: C3 User parameters for slip compensation are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register C3-0 Slip Compensation Gain Slip Comp Gain This parameter is used increase mor speed account for mor slip by boosting the output frequency. If the speed is lower than the frequency reference, increase C3-0. If the speed is higher than the frequency reference, decrease C3-0. Note: Adjustment is not normally required. When operating in, this parameter works as a function set the proper amount of gain * Yes A No A A A 0FH C3-0 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Slip Comp Time This parameter adjusts the filter on the output of the slip compensation function. Increase add stability, decrease improve response ms* No A No A No No 0H C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit Slip Comp Limit This parameter sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function. It is set as a percentage of mor rated slip (E-0) % No A No A No No H C3-04 Slip Compensation Selection During Regeneration Slip Comp Regen Determines whether slip compensation is enabled or disabled during regenerative operation. 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 or 0 No A No A No No H C3-05 Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection Slip Cmp Sel Determines if the mor magnetic flux is aumatically decreased when output voltage saturation occurs. 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 or 0* No No No A A A 3H * The display shows the facry settings for. Default settings will change in accordance with the control mode. 5-4

136 User Parameter Tables Torque Compensation: C4 User parameters for are rque compensation shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register C4-0 Torque Compensation Gain Torq Comp Gain This parameter sets the gain for the Drive's aumatic rque boost function match the Drive's output voltage the mor load. This parameter helps produce better starting rque. It determines the amount of rque or voltage boost based upon mor current, mor resistance, and output frequency. Note: Adjustment is not normally required Yes A A A No No 5H C4-0 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Torq Comp Time This parameter adjusts the filter on the output of the rque compensation function. Increase add stability, decrease improve response. Note: Adjustment is not normally required ms* No A A A No No 6H C4-03 Torque Compensation at Forward Start F TorqCmp@ start Sets rque compensation at forward start as a percentage of mor rque % No No No A No No 7H C4-04 Torque Compensation at Reverse Start R TorqCmp@ start Sets rque compensation at reverse start as a percentage of mor rque % No No No A No No 8H C4-05 Torque Compensation Time Constant TorqCmp Delay T Sets the time constant for rque compensation at forward start and reverse start (C4-03 and C4-04). The filter is disabled if the time is set 4ms or less ms No No No A No No 9H * The display shows the facry settings for loop vecr (OLV). Default settings will change in accordance with the control mode. 5-5

137 Speed Control (ASR): C5 User parameters for speed control are shown in the following table. Parameter Number C5-0 Name Display ASR Proportional Gain ASR P Gain Description Sets the proportional gain of the speed control loop (ASR.) Range * Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0.00 * Yes No A No A A BH C5-0 ASR Integral Time ASR I Time Sets the integral time of the speed control loop (ASR) s * Yes No A No A A CH C5-03 C5-04 ASR Proportional Gain ASR P Gain ASR Integral Time ASR I Time Usually setting is not necessary. Set change the rotational speed gain. P, I P=C5-0 I=C5-0 P=C5-03 I=C E-04 Mor speed (Hz) * * Yes No A No A A DH 0.500s * Yes No A No A A EH C5-05 ASR Limit ASR Limit Sets the upper limit for the speed control loop (ASR) as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E-04) % No No A No No No FH C5-06 ASR Primary Delay Time Constant ASR Delay Time Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop the rque command output s * No No No No A A 0H C5-07 ASR Switching Frequency ASR Gain SW Freq Sets the frequency for switching between Proportional Gain, and Integral Time, Hz No No No No A A H C5-08 ASR Integral Limit ASR I Limit Sets the ASR integral upper limit and rated load as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E-04) % No No No No A A H C5-0 ASR Primary Delay Time Constant ASR Delay Time Sets the Filter Time Constant when the rque command is output from the Speed Control (ASR). Enabled only with a speed range of max 35Hz while in Control Mode without PG. Note: Adjustment is not normally required s No No No No No A 3H *. Facry settings will change depending on the control mode. *. The setting range becomes when using controls modes Flux or. 5-6

138 User Parameter Tables Carrier Frequency: C6 User parameters for the carrier frequency are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register C6-0 Carrier Frequency Selection Carrier Freq Sel Selects the number of pulses per second of the output voltage waveform. range determined by C6-0 setting. 0: Low noise : Fc =.0 khz : Fc = 5.0 khz 3: Fc = 8.0 khz 4: Fc = 0.0 khz 5: Fc =.5 khz 6: Fc = 5.0 khz OF: Program (Determined by the settings of C6-03 thru C6-05) 0 F 6 * No Q Q Q Q No *5 4H C6-03 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit Carrier Freq Max Sets the relationship of output frequency carrier frequency when C6-0 = OF. Note: Carrier frequency is set C6-03 (upper limit) when operating in Control Mode *3 *4 5.0 khz * No A A A A No 5H C6-04 C6-05 Carrier Frequency Lower Limit Carrier Freq Min Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain Carrier Freq Gain Carrier frequency Output frequency x (C6-05) x K Output frequency (Max. output frequency) K is a coefficient that depends on the setting of C6-03. C khz: K = khz > C khz: K = 5.0 khz > C6-03: K = *3 * *4 5.0 khz * No A A No No No 6H 0 No A A No No No 7H C6- Carrier Frequency Selection for -loop Carrier Freq Sel Selects the carrier frequency during Control wo/pg. : khz (3-phase modulation) : 4kHz (3-phase modulation) 3: 6kHz (3-phase modulation) 4: 8kHz (3-phase modulation) 4 4 * No No *5 No *5 No *5 No *5 Q DH *. The setting range depends on the control method of the Drive. *. Initial values vary depending on drive capacity. * 3. range varies based on drive capacity. * 4. This parameter can be monired or set only when is set for C6-0 and F is set for C6-0. * 5. Quick s are used if Multi-Function Input is set for two mors. 5-7

139 Reference Parameters: d The following settings are made with the reference parameters (d parameters): Frequency references. Preset Reference: d User parameters for frequency references are shown in the following table. Name Parameter Number d-0 d-0 d-03 d-04 d-05 d-06 d-07 d-08 d-09 Display Frequency Reference Reference Frequency Reference Reference Frequency Reference 3 Reference 3 Frequency Reference 4 Reference 4 Frequency Reference 5 Reference 5 Frequency Reference 6 Reference 6 Frequency Reference 7 Reference 7 Frequency Reference 8 Reference 8 Frequency Reference 9 Reference 9 Description units are affected by o-03. Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference " is ON. units are affected by o-03. Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference " is ON. units are affected by o-03. Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference, " is ON. units are affected by o-03. Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference 3" is ON. units are affected by o-03. Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference, 3" is ON. units are affected by o-03. Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference, 3" is ON. units are affected by o-03. Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference,, 3" is ON. units are affected by o-03. Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference 4" is ON. units are affected by o-03. Range * Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0.00Hz Yes Q Q Q Q Q 80H 0.00Hz Yes A A A A A 8H 0.00Hz Yes A A A A A 8H 0.00Hz Yes A A A A A 83H 0.00Hz Yes A A A A A 84H 0.00Hz Yes A A A A A 85H 0.00Hz Yes A A A A A 86H 0.00Hz Yes A A A A A 87H 0.00Hz Yes A A A A A 88H 5-8

140 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register d-0 Frequency Reference 0 Reference 0 Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference, 4" is ON. units are affected by o Hz Yes A A A A A 8BH d- Frequency Reference Reference Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference, 4" is ON. units are affected by o Hz Yes A A A A A 8CH d- Frequency Reference Reference Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference,, 4" is ON. units are affected by o Hz Yes A A A A A 8DH d-3 Frequency Reference 3 Reference 3 Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference 3, 4" is ON. units are affected by o Hz Yes A A A A A 8EH d-4 d-5 Frequency Reference 4 Reference 4 Frequency Reference 5 Reference 5 Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference, 3, 4" is ON. units are affected by o-03. Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference, 3, 4" is ON. units are affected by o * 0.00Hz Yes A A A A A 8FH 0.00Hz Yes A A A A A 90H d-6 Frequency Reference 6 Reference 6 Frequency reference when multi-function input "Multi-step speed reference,, 3, 4" is ON. units are affected by o Hz Yes A A A A A 9H d-7 Jog Frequency Reference Jog Reference Frequency reference when: "Jog frequency reference" is selected via multi-function input terminals. "Jog frequency reference" has priority over "multi-step speed reference 4". Parameter d-7 is also the reference for the JOG key on the Digital Operar, and the multi-function inputs "forward jog" and "reverse jog". units are affected by o Hz Yes Q Q Q Q Q 9H Note The unit is set in o-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monir). The default for o-03 is 0 (increments of 0.0Hz). * range changes 0 thru 66.0 when operating in wo/pg. The upper limit for the setting range also depends on the upper limit in E-04. The max setting is

141 Reference Limits: d User parameters for frequency reference limits are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register d-0 Frequency Reference Upper Limit Ref Upper Limit Determines maximum frequency reference, set as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E-04). If the frequency reference is above this value, actual Drive speed will be limited this value. This parameter applies all frequency reference sources % No A A A A A 89H d-0 Frequency Reference Lower Limit Ref Lower Limit Sets the output frequency lower limit as a percentage of the maximum output frequency % No A A A A A 8AH d-03 Master Speed Reference Lower Limit Ref Lower Limit Set the master speed reference lower limit as a percent, taking the max. output frequency be 00% % No A A A A A 93H Jump Frequencies: d3 User parameters for jump frequencies are shown in the following table. Parameter Number d3-0 d3-0 d3-03 Name Display Jump Frequency Jump Freq Description This parameter allow programming of up three prohibited frequency reference points for eliminating problems with resonant vibration of the mor / machine. This feature does not actually eliminate the selected frequency values, but will accelerate and decelerate the mor through the prohibited bandwidth. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0.0Hz No A A A A A 94H Jump Frequency Hz No A A A A A 95H Jump Freq Jump Frequency 3 0.0Hz No A A A A A 96H Jump Freq 3 d3-04 Jump Frequency Width Jump Bandwidth This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each selected prohibited frequency reference point. A setting of ".0" will result in a deadband of +/-.0Hz Hz No A A A A A 97H 5-30

142 User Parameter Tables Reference Frequency Hold: d4 User parameters for the reference frequency hold function are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register d4-0 Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection MOP Ref Memory This parameter is used retain the held frequency reference in U-0 (d-0) when power is removed. This function is available when the multi-function inputs accel/ decel ramp hold or up/down commands are selected (H-XX = A or 0 and ). 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 or 0 No A A A A A 98H d4-0 Trim Control Lvl Trim Control Lvl Sets the amount of frequency reference be added or subtracted as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E-04) when multi-function inputs trim control increase and trim control decrease are selected (H-XX = C and D) % No A A A A A 99H Torque Control: d5 User parameters for the rque control are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register d5-0 Torque Control Selection Torq Control Sel Selects speed or rque control. The rque reference is set via analog input A or A3 when it is set for "rque reference" (H3-05 or H3-09 = 3). Torque reference is set as a percentage of mor rated rque. To use this function for switching between speed and rque control, set 0 and set a multifunction input "speed/rque control change" (H-xx = 7). 0: Speed Control (controlled by C5-0 C5-07) : Torque Control 0 or 0 No No No No A A 9AH d5-0 Torque Reference Delay Time Torq Ref Filter Sets the rque reference delay time in milliseconds. This function can be used correct for noise in the rque control signal or the responsiveness with the host controller. When oscillation occurs during rque control, increase the set value ms * No No No No A A 9BH 5-3

143 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register d5-03 Speed Limit Selection Speed Limit Sel Sets the speed limit command method for the rque control method. : Analog Input - Limited by the output of the soft starter (b-0 selection and active acceleration/ deceleration and S-curve settings). : Program - Limited by d5-04 setting value. or No No No No A A 9CH d5-04 Speed Limit Speed Lmt Value Sets the speed limit during rque control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E-04). This function is enabled when d5-03 is set. Directions are as follows. +: run command direction -: run command opposite direction % No No No No A A 9DH d5-05 Speed Limit Bias Speed Lmt Bias Set the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E-04). Bias is given the specified speed limit. It can be used adjust the margin for the speed limit % No No No No A A 9EH d5-06 Speed/rque Control Switchover Timer Ref Hold Time Set the delay time from inputting the multi-function input speed/rque control change (from On OFF or OFF ON) until the control is actually changed, inms units. This function is enabled when the multi-function input speed/rque control change is set. While in the speed/rque control switching timer, the analog inputs hold the value present when the "speed/rque control change" is received ms No No No No A A 9FH d5-07 Rotational Direction Limit Selection Drctn SpdLmt Sel 0: Disabled. : Enabled. Normally set "" (enabled). This parameter should be enabled when mor control values are set the same for both rotational directions (such as machinery for winding or rewinding). 0 No No No No No A A6H * Facry setting will change according the control mode (facry settings for Flux Control are shown here). 5-3

144 User Parameter Tables Field Control: d6 User parameters for the field weakening command are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register d6-0 Magnetic Field Weakening Level Field-Weak Lvl Sets the Drive output voltage when the multi-function input "field weakening command" is input (H-xx = 63). Sets as a percentage taking the voltage set in the pattern as 00% % No A A No No No A0H d6-0 Magnetic Field Frequency Field-Weak Freq Sets the lower limit (in Hz) of the frequency range where field weakening control is valid. The field weakening command is valid only at frequencies above this setting and only when output frequency is in agreement with the current output frequency (speed agree) HzH z No A A No No No AH d6-03 Magnetic Field Forcing Function Selection Field Force Sel Set the magnetic field forcing function. 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 or 0 No No No A A A AH AφR Time Constant Sets the A-phase-R time constant in relation the mor secondary circuit time constant by the amount of increase. d6-05 A PHI R Filter Note: A-phase-R Time Constant = (Secondary Circuit Time Constant) x (d6-05). When d6-05 = 0, then A-phase-R is inactive No No No No No A A4H When d6-05 = 0, it becomes the lower limit for 00ms internal the drive. d6-06 Magnetic Field Forcing Limit Field Force Limit Sets the upper limit of the excitation current command during magnetic field forcing. A setting of 00% is equal mor no-load current, E % No No No A A A A5H 5-33

145 Mor Setup Parameters: E The following settings are made with the mor setup parameters (E parameters): characteristics and mor setup parameters. Pattern: E User parameters for characteristics are shown in the following table. Parameter Number E-0 Name Display Input Voltage Input Voltage Description Set the nominal voltage of the incoming line. Sets the maximum and base voltage used by preset V/F patterns (E-03 = 0 E), adjusts the levels of Drive protective features (e.g. Overvoltage, braking resisr turn-on, stall prevention, etc.). NOTE: DRIVE INPUT VOLTAGE (NOT MOTOR VOLTAGE) MUST BE SET IN E-0 FOR THE PROTECTIVE FEATURES OF THE DRIVE TO FUNCTION PROP- ERLY. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAM- AGE AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY. Range (40V) (480V) Facry 30.0V or V Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register No Q Q Q Q Q 300H E-03 Pattern Selection V/F Selection Set the type of mor being used and the type of application. The Drive operates utilizing a set V/F pattern determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed. There are 5 different preset V/F patterns select from (E-03 = 0 E) with varying voltage profiles, base levels (base level = frequency at which maximum voltage is reached), and maximum frequencies. There are also settings for Cusm V/F patterns that will use the settings of parameters E-04 through E-3. E-03 = F selects a cusm V/F pattern with an upper voltage limit and E-03 = FF selects a cusm V/F pattern without an upper voltage limit. 0: 50Hz : 60Hz Saturation : 50Hz Saturation 3: 7Hz (60Hz Base) 4: 50Hz VT 5: 50Hz VT 6: 60Hz VT 7: 60Hz VT 8: 50Hz HST 9: 50Hz HST A: 60Hz HST B: 60Hz HST C: 90Hz (60Hz Base) D: 0Hz (60Hz Base) E: 80Hz (60Hz Base) F: Cusm V/F FF: Cusm w/o limit 0 FF F No Q Q No No No 30H 5-34

146 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register E-04 Maximum Output Frequency Max Frequency *5 60.0Hz * No Q Q Q Q Q 303H E-05 Maximum Output Voltage Max Voltage Output voltage (V) (40V) (480V) 30.0V or 460.0V No Q Q Q Q Q 304H E-06 Base Frequency Base Frequency *5 60.0Hz * No Q Q Q Q Q 305H E-07 E-08 Mid. Frequency (Hz) Output Frequency A These parameters are only applicable 0.0 when Pattern Selection is set Mid Cusm (E-03 = F or FF). To set Frequency characteristics in a straight line, set A the same values for E-07 and E-09. In this case, the setting for E-08 will Mid. 0.0 be disregarded. Be sure that the four Output frequencies are set in the following 55.0 Voltage A manner or else an OPE0 fault will (40V) occur: Mid Voltage A E-04 (FMAX) E- E-06 (FA) > E-07 (FB) E-09 (FMIN) (480V) 3.0Hz *.6 Vac or 5.3 Vac * No A A A No No 306H No A A A No No 307H E-09 Minimum Output Frequency Min Frequency Note: parameter E-0 zero is also acceptable *5 0.5Hz * No Q Q Q A Q 308H E-0 Minimum Output Voltage Min Voltage (40V) (480V).3 Vac or 4.6 Vac * No A A A No No 309H E- E- Mid. Output Frequency B Mid Frequency B Mid. Output Voltage B Mid Voltage B Set only when the V/F pattern is finely adjusted in the constant power (HP) area above base speed. Adjustment is not normally required * (40V) (480V) 0.0Hz *3 0.0 Vac *3 No A A A A A 30AH No A A A A A 30BH 5-35

147 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register E-3 Base Voltage Base Voltage Set only when the V/F pattern is finely adjusted in the constant power (HP) area above base speed. Adjustment is not normally required.if E-3 = 0.0, then value in E-05 is used for E-3. Au-Tuning sets this value (40V) (480V) 0.0 Vac *4 No A A Q Q Q 30CH *. The facry setting will change when the control method is changed. (-loop vecr facry settings are given.) * 3. E- and E- are disregarded when set 0.0. * 4. E-3 is set the same value as E-05 by Autuning. * 5. range changes 0 thru 66.0 when operating in wo/pg. The upper limit for the setting range also depends on the upper limit in E-04. Mor Setup: E Parameter Number E-0 Name Display Mor Rated current Mor Rated FLA Description Sets the mor nameplate full load current in amperes (A). This value is aumatically set during Au-Tuning. Range * Facry.90 A * Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register No Q Q Q Q Q 30EH E-0 Mor Rated Slip Mor Rated Slip Sets the mor rated slip in hertz (Hz). This value is aumatically set during rotational Au-Tuning Hz * No A A A A A 30FH E-03 Mor Noload Current No-Load Current Sets the magnetizing current of the mor as a percentage of full load amps (E-0). This value is aumatically set during rotational Au- Tuning *3.0 A * No A A A A A 30H E-04 Number of Mor Poles Number of Poles Sets the number of mor poles. This value is aumatically set during Au-Tuning poles No No Q No Q Q 3H E-05 Mor Line--line Resistance Term Resistance Sets the phase--phase mor resistance in ohms. This value is aumatically set by Au-Tuning Ω * No A A A A A 3H E-06 Mor Leak Inductance Leak Inductance Sets the voltage drop due mor leakage inductance as a percentage of the mor rated voltage. This parameter is aumatically set during Au-Tuning % * No No No A A A 33H E-07 Mor Iron-core Saturation Coefficient Saturation Comp Sets the mor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux. This value is aumatically set during rotational Au-Tuning No No No A A A 34H 5-36 E-08 Mor Iron-core Saturation Coefficient Saturation Comp Sets the mor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux. This value is aumatically set during rotational Au-Tuning No No No A A A 35H

148 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number E-09 E-0 E- E- Name Display Mor Mechanical Loss Mechanical Loss Mor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Tcomp Iron Loss Mor Rated Output Mtr Rated Power Mor Iron-core Saturation Coefficient 3 Saturation Comp3 Description Sets the mor mechanical loss as a percentage of mor rated power (kw) capacity. Adjust in the following circumstances: -when rque loss is large due mor bearing friction. -when the rque loss in the load is large. Sets the mor iron loss in watts (W). Sets the mor rated power in kilowatts (kw). This value is aumatically set during Au-Tuning. HP = 0.746kW Sets the mor iron saturation coefficient at 30% of magnetic flux. This value is aumatically set during rotational Au-Tuning. Range User parameters for mor are shown in the following table. *. The facry setting depends upon the Drive capacity. The value for a 00-40V class Drive of 0.4 kw is given. *. The setting range is 0% 00% of the Drive's rated output current. The value for a 00-40V class Drive of 0.4 kw is given. * 3. The facry setting depends upon the Drive capacity. The value for a 00-40V class Drive of 0.4 kw is given Facry 0.0% No No No A A A 36H 4 W * 0.40 kw * Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register No A A No No No 37H No Q Q Q Q Q 38H.30 No No No A A A 38H Mor Pattern: E3 User parameters for mor characteristics are shown in the following table. Parameter Number E3-0 Name Display Mor Control Method Selection Control Method Description 0: control : control with PG : -loop vecr control 3: Flux vecr control 4: -loop vecr control Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0 4 No A A A A A 39H 5-37

149 Parameter Number E3-0 E3-03 E3-04 E3-05 E3-06 E3-07 E3-08 Name Display Mor Maximum Output Frequency (FMAX) Max Frequency Mor Maximum Output Voltage (VMAX) Max Voltage Mor Base Frequency (FA) Base Frequency Mor Mid. Output Frequency (FB) Mid Frequency Mor Mid. Output Voltage (VA) Mid Voltage Mor Minimum Output Frequency (FMIN) Min Frequency Mor Minimum Output Voltage (VMIN) Min Voltage Output voltage (V) Description Frequency (Hz) To set characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E3-05 and E3-07. In this case, the setting for E3-06 will be disregarded. Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner or else an OPE0 fault will occur: E3-0 (FMAX) E3-04 (FA) E3-05 (FB) E3-07 (FMIN) Range * (40V) (480V) (40V) (480V) (40V) (480V) Facry 60.0Hz No A A A A A 3AH 30.0V or 460.0V * No A A A A A 3BH 60.0Hz No A A A A A 3CH 3.0Hz *.6 Vac or 5.3 Vac * 0.5Hz *.3 Vac or 4.6 Vac * Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register No A A A No No 3DH No A A A No No 3EH No A A A A A 3FH No A A A No No 30H *. These are values for a 00-40V class Drive. Values for a V class Drive are double. *. The facry setting will change when the control method is changed. ( control facry settings are given.) * 3. The setting range is for open-loop vecr control. 5-38

150 User Parameter Tables Mor Setup: E4 User parameters for mor are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register E4-0 Mor Rated Current Mor Rated FLA Sets the mor name plate full load current in amperes (A). This value is aumatically set during Au-Tuning *.90 A * No A A A A A 3H E4-0 Mor Rated Slip Mor Rated Slip Sets the rated slip of mor in hertz (Hz). This value is aumatically set during rotational Au-Tuning Hz * No A A A A A 3H E4-03 Mor Noload Current No-Load Current Sets the magnetizing current of mor in percentage of full load current (E4-0). This value is aumatically set during rotational Au-Tuning *3.0 A * No A A A A A 33H E4-04 Mor Number of Poles (number of poles) Number of Poles Sets the number of poles of mor. This value is aumatically set during Au-Tuning poles No No A No A A 34H E4-05 Mor Line--line Resistance Term Resistance Sets the phase--phase resistance of mor in ohms. This value is aumatically set by the Au-Tuning Ω * No A A A A A 35H E4-06 Mor Leak Inductance Leak Inductance Sets the voltage drop due mor leakage inductance as a percentage of rated voltage of mor. This value is aumatically set during Au-Tuning % * No No No A A A 36H E4-07 Mor Rated Output Mtr Rated Power Sets the rated power of mor in kilowatts (kw). This value is aumatically set during Au-Tuning kW * No A A A A A 37H E4-08 Slip Compensation Gain - Mor SlpCmp Gain Mtr This parameter can help increase speed precision when working on a load, although normally adjustment is not required. - When speed is less than that desired value, increase the set value. - When speed is higher than the desired value, decrease the set value *This parameter functions as gain suppression when in flux vecr mode * Yes A No A A A 33EH 5-39

151 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register E4-09 ASR Proportional Gain - Mor ASR P Gain Mtr Sets the proportional gain for the speed control loop (ASR.) * 0.00 * 3 Yes No A No A A 33FH E4-0 ASR Integral Time - Mor ASR I Time Mtr Sets the speed control loop (ASR) integral time in seconds s * 3 Yes No A No A A 340H E4- Torque Compensation Gain Mor TrqCmp Gain Mtr Magnifies the rque compensation gain. Normally this parameter does not require change, however adjustments can be made as follows: - When the mor cable is long, increase the setting. - When using a mor with a smaller capacity than the drive (the largest mor being used), increase this setting. If the mor begins vibrate, adjust the value set so that the output current doesn't exceed the drive's rated output current when operating at low speeds Yes A A A No No 34H *. The facry setting depends upon the Drive capacity. The value for a 00-40V class Drive of 0.4 kw is given. *. The setting range is 0% 00% of the Drive's rated output current. The values for a 00-40V class Drive of 0.4 kw is given. * 3. If a multi-function input is set for mor (H- = 6), the facry setting will depend upon the Drive capacity. The value for a 00-40V class Drive of 0.4 kw is given. 5-40

152 User Parameter Tables Option Parameters: F The following settings are made with the option parameters (F parameters): s for Option Cards. PG Option Setup: F User parameters for the PG Speed Control Card are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register F-0 PG Parameter PG Pulses/ Rev Sets the number of pulses per revolution (PPM) of the encoder (pulse generar) No No Q No Q No 380H F-0 Operation Selection at PG Circuit (PGO) PG Fdbk Loss Sel Sets spping method when a PG open circuit fault (PGO) occurs. See parameter F-4. 0: Ramp sp - Decelerate sp using the active deceleration time. : Coast sp : Fast - Sp - Decelerate sp using the deceleration time in C-09. 3: Alarm Only - Drive continues operation. 0 3 No No A No A No 38H F-03 Operation Selection at Overspeed (OS) PG Overspeed Sel Sets the spping method when an overspeed (OS) fault occurs. See F-08 and F-09. 0: Ramp sp - Decelerate sp using the active deceleration time. : Coast sp : Fast - Sp - Decelerate sp using the deceleration time in C-09. 3: Alarm Only - Drive continues operation. 0 3 No No A No A A 38H F-04 Operation Selection at Deviation PG Deviation Sel Sets the spping method when a speed deviation (DEV) fault occurs. See F-0 and F-. 0: Ramp sp - Decelerate sp using the active deceleration time. : Coast sp : Fast - Sp - Decelerate sp using the deceleration time in C-09. 3: Alarm Only - Drive continues operation No No A No A A 383H 5-4

153 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register F-05 PG Rotation Selection PG Rotation Sel 0: Fwd=C.C.W. - Phase A leads with forward run command. (Phase B leads with reverse run command.) : Fwd=C.W. - Phase B leads with forward run command. (Phase A leads with reverse run command.) 0 or 0 No No A No A No 384H F-06 PG division rate (PG pulse monir) PG Output Ratio Sets the division ratio for the pulse monir of the PG-B encoder feedback option board. This function is not available with the PG-X option board. Division ratio = (+ n) /m (where n=0 or & m= 3) The first digit of the value of F-06 stands for n, the second and the third stand for m. (from left right). The possible division ratio settings are: /3 F No No A No A No 385H F-07 Integral Function During Accel/decel Selection PG Ramp PI/I Sel Sets integral control during acceleration/deceleration either enabled or disabled. 0: Disabled (The integral function is not used while accelerating or decelerating.) : Enabled (The integral function is used at all times.) 0 or 0 No No A No No No 386H F-08 F-09 Overspeed Detection Level PG Overspd Level Overspeed Detection Delay Time PG Overspd Time Configures the overspeed fault (OS) detection. OS fault will occur, if the mor speed feedback is greater than the F-08 setting for a time longer than F-09. F-08 is set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E-04). See F % No No A No A A 387H 0.0 s * No No A No A A 388H 5-4

154 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register F-0 F- Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Level PG Deviate Level Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Delay Time PG Deviate Time Configures the speed deviation fault (DEV) detection. DEV fault will occur if the speed deviation is greater than the F-0 setting for a time longer than F-. F-0 is set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E-04). Speed deviation is the difference between actual mor speed and the frequency reference command. See F % No No A No A A 389H s No No A No A A 38AH F- F-3 Number of PG Gear Teeth Sets the gear ratio between the mor shaft and the encoder (PG). 0 No No A No No No 38BH PG # Gear Teeth 0 Number of A gear ratio of will be used 000 PG Gear if either of these parameters is Teeth set 0. This function is not 0 No No A No No No 38CH PG # Gear available in flux vecr control. Teeth F-4 PG -circuit Detection Time PGO Detect Time Configures the PG open (PGO) function. PGO will be detected if no PG pulses are detected for a time longer than F-4. See F s No No A No A No 38DH F- PG Parameter PG Pulses/ Rev Sets the PG pulse count for Mor- (pulse selecr, encoder). Set a value that is not significantly less than the pulse count per rotation in Mor * No No Q No Q No 3B0H F- PG Rotational Direction PG Rotation Sel Sets the direction of rotation for the PG connected Mor-. 0: From phase-a when rotating forwards (from phase-b when in reverse). : From phase-b when rotating forwards (from phase-a when in reverse). 0 0 No No Q No Q No 3BH * The facry setting will change when the control method is changed. (Flux vecr control facry settings are given.) * Default settings changed based on the initialization mode (o-09). 5-43

155 Parameter Number F-3 F-4 Name Display PG Gear Teeth Count Description Range Sets the number of gear teeth (deceleration ratio) between PG Gear Mor- and the pulse generar. Teeth [(RPMs x 60)/PGpulseCount] PG Gear Teeth x (F-4)/(F-3) Count If either value is zero, then 0 the decleration ratio will equal "". PGO Gear Teeth Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0 No No A No No No 3BH 0 No No A No No No 3B3H F-5 F-6 Hardware Disconnected Detection Selection CH HW PGO ch Hardware Disconnected Detection Selection CH HW PGO ch Enables or disables the drive from detecting when the PG option on CH has been disconnected. 0: Disabled. : Enabled. When using PG-T or Z, this setting is enabled. 0 No No A No A No 3B4H 0 No No A No A No 3B5H Analog Reference Card: F User parameters for the Analog Reference Card are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register F-0 AI-4 Input Selection AI-4 Input Sel Sets the function for channel 3 of the AI-4B analog input reference option board. 0: 3-channel individual (Channel : terminal A, Channel : terminal A, Channel 3: terminal A3) : 3-channel addition (Summed values of channels 3 is the frequency reference) When set 0, select for b-0. In this case, the multi-function input "Option/ Inverter selection" cannot be used. 0 or 0 No A A A A A 38FH 5-44

156 User Parameter Tables Digital Reference Card: F3 User parameters for the Digital Reference Card are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register F3-0 DI-08 / DI-6H Input Selection DI Input Sets the function of the DI-08 or the DI-6H digital input option board. 0: BCD % unit : BCD 0.% unit : BCD 0.0% unit 3: BCD Hz unit 4: BCD 0.Hz unit 5: BCD 0.0Hz unit 6: BCD (5-digit) 0.0Hz unit (only effective when DI-6H is used.) 7: Binary input When o-03 is set or higher, the input will be BCD, and the units will change the o-03 setting No A A A A A 390H Analog Monir Cards: F4 User parameters for the Analog Monir Card are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register F4-0 AO-08/ AO- Channel Monir Selection AO Ch Sel Sets the number of the monir item be output. (U-oo). The following settings cannot be used: 4, 0 4, 5, 8, 9, 30, 34, 35, 39, 40, No A A A A A 39H F4-0 AO-08/ AO- Channel Gain AO Ch Gain Sets the channel gain. Ex: Set F4-0 = 50% output 00% at 5.0V output % Yes A A A A A 39H F4-03 AO-08/ AO- Channel Monir Selection AO Ch Select Sets the number of the monir item be output. (U-xx). The following settings cannot be set: 4, 0 4, 5, 8, 9, 30, 34, 39, 40, No A A A A A 393H 5-45

157 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register F4-04 AO-08/ AO- Channel Gain AO Ch Gain Sets the channel gain. In order adjust the meter, 00% of the appropriate output is multiplied for the gain setting, and the bias amount is added and then output. See F4-0 when spped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. -If 05 appears on the setting screen, then CH is used. See F4-04 when spped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. -If 06 appears on the setting screen, then CH is used. Ex: Set F4-04 = 50% output 00% at 5.0V output % Yes A A A A A 394H F4-05 AO-08/AO- Channel Output Bias AO Ch Bias Sets the channel bias (00%/0V). Ex: Set F4-05 = 50% output 0% at 5.0V output % Yes A A A A A 395H F4-06 AO-08/AO- Channel Output Bias AO Ch Bias Sets the channel bias (00%/0V). Ex: Set F4-06 = 50% output 0% at 5.0V output % Yes A A A A A 396H F4-07 F4-08 AO- Channel Signal Level AO Opt Level Ch Sets the range of the voltage output. 0 or 0 No A A A A A 397H AO- 0: 0 0Vdc Channel Signal Level : -0 +0Vdc 0 or 0 No A A A A A 398H AO Opt Level Ch 5-46

158 User Parameter Tables Digital Output Card (DO-0 and DO-08): F5 User parameters for the Digital Output Card are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register F5-0 DO-0/ DO-08 Channel Output Selection DO Ch Select Sets the digital output function number for channel. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used No A A A A A 399H F5-0 DO-0/ DO-08 Channel Output Selection DO Ch Select Sets the digital output function number for channel. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used No A A A A A 39AH F5-03 DO-08 Channel 3 Output Selection DO Ch3 Select Sets the digital output function number for channel 3. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used No A A A A A 39BH F5-04 DO-08 Channel 4 Output Selection DO Ch4 Select Sets the digital output function number for channel 4. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used No A A A A A 39CH F5-05 DO-08 Channel 5 Output Selection DO Ch5 Select Sets the digital output function number for channel 5. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used No A A A A A 39DH F5-06 DO-08 Channel 6 Output Selection DO Ch6 Select Sets the digital output function number for channel 6. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used No A A A A A 39EH F5-07 DO-08 Channel 7 Output Selection DO Ch7 Select Sets the digital output function number for channel 7. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used F No A A A A A 39FH 5-47

159 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register F5-08 DO-08 Channel 8 Output Selection DO Ch8 Select Sets the digital output function number for channel 8. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used F No A A A A A 3A0H F5-09 DO-08 Output Mode Selection DO-08 Selection Sets the function of the DO-08 digital output option board. 0: 8-channel individual outputs. : Binary code output. : 8-channel Selected - Output according F5-0 F5-08 settings. 0 0 No A A A A A 3AH Communications Option Cards: F6 User parameters for a Communications Option Card are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register F6-0 Operation Selection after Communication Error Comm BUS Flt Sel Selects the spping method for a communication option board fault (BUS). Active only when a communication option board is installed and b-0 or b-0 = 3. 0: Ramp Sp : Coast Sp : Fast-Sp 3: Alarm Only 0 3 No A A A A A 3AH F6-0 Selection of External Fault from Communication Option Board EF0 Detection Selects the condition in which an EF0 fault is detected from a communication option board. Active only when a communication option board is installed and b-0 or b-0 = 3. 0: Always detected. : Detected only during operation. 0 or 0 No A A A A A 3A3H F6-03 Spping Method for External Fault from Communication Option Board EF0 Fault Action Selects the spping method for an external fault from a communication option board (EF0). Active only when a communication option board is installed and b-0 or b-0 = 3. 0: Ramp Sp : Coast Sp : Fast-Sp 3: Alarm Only 0 3 No A A A A A 3A4H 5-48

160 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register F6-04 Trace Sampling from Communication Option Board Sets the sample trace for the CP-96 option board No A A A A A 3A5H Trace Sample Tim F6-05 Current Monir Unit Display Selection Current Unit Sel Selects the current monir scaling when using a communication option board. 0: Displayed in Amps : 00% / 89 ( bit binary number with 89=00% Drive s rated current) 0 or 0 No A A A A A 3A6H F6-06 Torque Reference/ rque Limit Selection from Communication Option Torq Ref/Lmt Sel Selects rque reference/ limit when using communications option board. 0: Disabled - Torque reference/limit from option board disabled : Enabled - Torque reference/limit from option board enabled. 0 or 0 No No No No A A 3A7H 5-49

161 Terminal Function Parameters: H The following settings are made with the terminal function parameters (H parameters): s for external terminal functions. Multi-function Contact Inputs: H User parameters for multi-function contact inputs are shown in the following tables. Name Control Methods Parameter Number H-0 Display Multi- Function Digital Input Terminal S3 Function Selection Terminal S3 Sel Description Range Facry Change during Operation with PG Flux MODBUS Register No A A A A A 400H H-0 Multi- Function Digital Input Terminal S4 Function Selection No A A A A A 40H Terminal S4 Sel H-03 Multi- Function Digital Input Terminal S5 Function Selection (0) * No A A A A A 40H H-04 Terminal S5 Sel Multi- Function Digital Input Terminal S6 Function Selection [Refer table "Multi-function Contact Input Functions" for multi-function selections] (3) * No A A A A A 403H Terminal S6 Sel H-05 Multi- Function Digital Input Terminal S7 Function Selection (4) * No A A A A A 404H Terminal S7 Sel H-06 Multi- Function Digital Input Terminal S8 Function Selection (6)* No A A A A A 405H 5-50 Terminal S8 Sel

162 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number H-07 Name Display Multi- Function Digital Input Terminal S9 Function Selection Description Range Facry Change during Operation Multi-Function Relay Input No A A A A A 406H Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register H-08 H-09 H-0 Terminal S9 Sel Multi- Function Digital Input Terminal S0 Function Selection Terminal S0 Sel Multi- Function Digital Input Terminal S Function Selection Terminal S Sel Multi- Function Digital Input Terminal S Function Selection Terminal S Sel Multi-Function Relay Input No A A A A A 407H Multi-Function Relay Input No A A A A A 408H Multi-Function Relay Input No A A A A A 409H * Number in parenthesis indicates the initial value when using a 3-wire sequence. Multi-function Contact Input Functions Value Function Control Methods with PG Flux 0 3-wire sequence (Forward/Reverse Run command) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Local/Remote selection (ON: Operar, OFF: Parameter setting) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Option/Inverter selection (ON: Option Card) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 Multi-step speed reference When H3-05 is set, this function is combined with the master/auxiliary speed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes switch. 4 Multi-step speed reference Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 5 Multi-step speed reference 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 Jog frequency command (higher priority than multi-step speed reference) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 7 Accel/decel time Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A Acceleration/deceleration ramp hold (ON: Acceleration/deceleration spped, frequency on hold) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B OH alarm signal input (ON: OH will be displayed) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 5-5

163 5-5 Value C Multi-function analog input selection (ON: Enable) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes D No control with PG (ON: Speed feedback control disabled,) (normal control) No Yes No No No E Speed control integral reset (ON: Integral control disabled) No Yes No Yes Yes F Not used (Set when a terminal is not used) Up command (Always set with the down command) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Down command (Always set with the up command) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d-7) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d-7) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 Fault reset (Reset when turned ON) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 5 Emergency sp. (Normally open condition: Deceleration sp in deceleration time set in C-09 when ON.) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 Mor switch command (Mor selection) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 7 Emergency sp (Normally closed condition: Deceleration sp in deceleration time set in C-09 when OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 Timer function input (Functions are set in b4-0 and b4-0 and the timer function outputs are set in H- and H-.) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A Accel/Decel time Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B Parameters write enable (ON: All parameters can be written-in. OFF: All parameters other than frequency monir are write protected.) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes C Trim control increase (ON: d4-0 frequency is added analog frequency reference.) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes D Trim control decrease (ON: d4-0 frequency is subtracted from analog frequency reference.) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes E Analog frequency reference sample/hold Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 F 30 Function External fault (Desired settings possible) Input mode: NO contact/nc contact, Detection mode: Normal/during operation PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when spped during PID control) Control Methods Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 PID control integral hold (ON: Hold) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 Multi-step speed reference 4 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 34 PID soft starter Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 35 PID input characteristics switch Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 60 DC injection braking command (ON: Performs DC injection braking) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 External search command (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency) Yes No Yes No Yes 6 External search command (ON: Speed search from set frequency) Yes No Yes No Yes 63 Field weakening command (ON: Field weakening control set for d6-0 and d6-0) Yes Yes No No No 64 External speed search command 3 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 65 KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 66 KEB (deceleration at momentary power loss) command (NO contact) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 67 Communications test mode ( Pass is displayed when the communications test is passed.) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 68 High-slip braking (HSB) Yes Yes No No No 69 Jog Closed = Drive runs at frequency reference entered in parameter d-7. No Yes Yes Yes Yes Direction is determined by FWD/REV input. Three-wire control only 6A Drive Enable Closed = Drive will accept run command. = Drive will not run. If running, drive will sp per b-03. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes with PG Flux

164 User Parameter Tables Value 7 Speed/rque control change (ON: Torque control) No No No Yes Yes 7 Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo) No No No Yes No 77 Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (ON: C5-03) No No No Yes Yes 78 Polarity reversing command for external rque reference No No No Yes Yes 79 Closed Brake Signal* Closed = Reverse polarity. Function Control Methods with PG Flux No No No No Yes Multi-function Contact Outputs: H User parameters for multi-function outputs are shown in the following tables. Parameter Number H-0 Name Display Terminal M-M Function Selection (relay) Term M-M Sel Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register No A A A A A 40BH H-0 Terminal M3-M4 Function Selection (relay) 0 38 No A A A A A 40CH Term M3-M4 Sel H-03 Terminal M5-M6 Function Selection (Relay) [Refer table "H-0 thru H-05 s" for multi-function selections] 0 38 No A A A A A 40DH Term M5-M6 Sel H-04 Terminal P3 Function Selection ( Collecr) No A A A A A 40EH Term P3 Sel H-05 Terminal P4 Function Selection ( Collecr) No A A A A A 40FH Term P4 Sel 5-53

165 Multi-function Contact Output Functions Value Function Control Methods with PG Flux 0 During run (ON: run command is ON or voltage is being output) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Zero-speed Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Frequency agree (L4-0 used.) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Desired frequency agree (ON: Output frequency = ±L4-0, L4-0 used and during frequency agree) Frequency (FOUT) detection (ON: +L4-0 output frequency -L4-0, L4-0 used) Frequency (FOUT) detection (ON: Output frequency +L4-0 or output frequency -L4-0, L4-0 used) Drive operation ready READY: After initialization, no faults Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 7 During DC bus undervoltage (UV) detection Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 During baseblock (ON: during baseblock) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 Frequency reference selection (ON: Frequency reference from Operar) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A Run command selection status (ON: Run command from Operar) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B Overrque/underrque detection NO (NO contact: Overrque/underrque detection at ON) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes C Loss of frequency reference (Effective when is set for L4-05) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes D Braking resisr fault (ON: Resisr overheat or braking transisr fault) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes E Fault (ON: Digital Operar communications error or fault other than CPF00 and CPF0 has occurred.) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes F Not used. (Set when the terminals are not used.) Minor fault (ON: Alarm displayed) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Fault reset command active Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Timer function output Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 Frequency agree (L4-04 used) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 4 Desired frequency agree (ON: Output frequency = L4-03, L4-04 used, and during frequency agree) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 5 Frequency detection 3 (ON: Output frequency -L4-03, L4-04 used) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 Frequency detection 4 (ON: Output frequency -L4-03, L4-04 used) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 7 Overrque/underrque detection NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 Overrque/underrque detection NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 Overrque/underrque detection NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A During reverse run (ON: During reverse run) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B During baseblock (OFF: During baseblock) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes C Mor selection (Mor selected) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes D During regenerative operation (ON: During regenerative operation) No No No Yes Yes E Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes F Restart enabled (ON: Restart enabled) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 5-54

166 User Parameter Tables Value F Function Mor overload (OL, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level) Control Methods with PG Flux Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 Drive overheat (OH) pre-alarm (ON: Temperature exceeds L8-0 setting) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 30 During rque limit (current limit) (ON: During rque limit) No No Yes Yes Yes 3 During speed limit (ON: During speed limit) No No No Yes Yes 3 Speed control circuit operating for rque control (except when spped). The external rque reference will be limited if rque control is selected (internal rque reference < external rque reference). Output when the mor is rotating at the speed limit. No No No Yes Yes 33 Zero-servo end (ON: Zero-servo function completed) No No No Yes No During run (ON: Frequency output, OFF: Base block, DC injection braking, initial excitation, operation sp) Drive is Enabled Closed = During drive enable, when the Drive Enable input is closed. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Analog Inputs: H3 User parameters for analog inputs are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register H3-0 Terminal A Signal Level Selection Term A Signal Sets the signal level of terminal A. 0: 0 0Vdc : -0 +0Vdc [-bit plus polarity sign] 0 0 No A A A A A 40H H3-0 Terminal A Gain Terminal A Gain Sets the output level when 0V is input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E-04) % Yes A A A A A 4H H3-03 Terminal A Bias Terminal A Bias Sets the output level when 0V is input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E-04) % Yes A A A A A 4H H3-04 Terminal A3 Signal Level Selection Term A3 Signal Sets the signal level of terminal A3. 0: 0 0Vdc : -0 +0Vdc 0 0 No A A A A A 43H H3-05 Terminal A3 Function Selection Terminal A3 Sel [Refer table "H3-05, H3-09 s" for multi-function selections] 0 F No A A A A A 44H 5-55

167 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register H3-06 Terminal A3 Gain Terminal A3 Gain Sets the output level when 0V is input % Yes A A A A A 45H H3-07 Terminal A3 Bias Terminal A3 Bias Sets the frequency reference when 0V is input % Yes A A A A A 46H H3-08 Terminal A Signal Level Selection Term A Signal Selects the signal level of terminal A. 0: 0 0Vdc (switch S- must be in the OFF position). : -0 +0Vdc (switch S- must be in the OFF position). :4 0mA (switch S- must be in the ON position) Note:Switch between current or voltage inputs by using (S-) switch on the terminal board. 0 No A A A A A 47H H3-09 Terminal A Function Selection Terminal A Sel Selects the function of terminal A. Same choices as Terminal A3 Function Selection (H3-05). 0 F 0 No A A A A A 48H H3-0 Terminal A Gain Terminal A Gain Sets the output level when 0V is input % Yes A A A A A 49H H3- Terminal A Bias Terminal A Bias Sets the output level when 0V is input % Yes A A A A A 4AH H3- Analog Input Filter Time Constant Filter Avg Time This parameter adjusts the filter on all 3 analog inputs. Increase add stability, decrease improve response sec No A A A A A 4BH 5-56

168 User Parameter Tables H3-05,H3-09 s Value Function Contents (00%) Control Methods with PG Flux 0 Frequency Bias 00% = Maximum output frequency (E-04) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Frequency Reference Gain (FGAIN) 00% = Frequency reference command value A Total gain = Internal gain (H3-0) x FGAIN Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Aux Frequency Reference 3 Aux Frequency Reference 4 Output Voltage Bias Used in conjunction with multi-function inputs "multi-step frequency reference -4" (d-6). 00% = Maximum output frequency (E-04) Used in conjunction with multi-function inputs "multi-step frequency reference -4" (d-6). 00% = Maximum output frequency (E-04) 00% = Mor rated voltage (E-05). Voltage boost after V/F pattern Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes No No No 5 Accel / Decel Time Coefficient 00% = Active accel / decel time (C-0 thru C-08) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 DC Injection Braking Current 00% = Drive rated current. Parameter b-0 is disabled. Yes Yes Yes No No 7 Overrque / Underrque Detection Level Used for multi-function digital output for "overrque/underrque". 00% = mor rated rque (OLV, FV) or Drive rated current (V/F, V/F w/pg). Internal overrque detection level (C6-0) disabled. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 Stall Prevention Level During Run 00% = L3-06. Yes Yes No No No 9 Frequency Reference Lower Limit 00% = Maximum output frequency (E-04). Either the setting in d-0 or the A3 input level is enabled, whichever is larger. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes A Jump Frequency 00% = Maximum output frequency (E-04). Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes B PID Feedback 00% = Maximum output frequency (E-04). Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes C PID Set Point 00% = Maximum output frequency (E-04). Frequency reference no longer acts as a PID setpoint. Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes D Frequency Reference Bias 00% = Maximum output frequency (E-04). Total bias = Internal bias (H3-03) + FBIAS (H3-07) + A3 input level Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes E Mor Temperature Input 0V = 00% See parameters L-03 and L-04 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 0 FWD Torque Limit (Quadrant ) 00% = Mor rated rque. No No Yes Yes Yes REV Torque Limit (Quadrant 3) 00% = Mor rated rque. No No Yes Yes Yes Regenerative Torque Limit (Quadrants and 4) 00% = Mor rated rque. No No Yes Yes Yes 3 Torque Reference (in Torque Control); Torque Limit (in Speed Control) 00% = Mor rated rque. No No No Yes Yes 4 Torque Compensation 00% = Mor rated rque. No No No Yes Yes 5 FWD / REV Torque Limit 00% = Mor rated rque. No No Yes Yes Yes F Analog input not used. - Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6 E Not used

169 Multi-function Analog Outputs: H4 User parameters for multi-function analog outputs are shown in the following table. Parameter Number H4-0 H4-0 H4-03 H4-04 H4-05 H4-06 H4-07 H4-08 Name Display Terminal FM Monir Selection Terminal FM Sel Terminal FM Gain Terminal FM Gain Terminal FM Bias Terminal FM Bias Terminal AM Monir Selection Terminal AM Sel Terminal AM Gain Terminal AM Gain Terminal AM Bias Terminal AM Bias Terminal FM Signal Level Selection AO Level Select Terminal AM Signal Level Selection AO Level Select Description Selects the monir output (U-xx) function for terminals FM and FC. Refer "U-xx" monirs for available settings. Unavailable settings: 4, 0,,, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 30, 3, 34, 35, 39, 40, 4, 4, 47, 49, 50 Sets terminal FM output level when selected monir is at 00%.* Sets terminal FM output level when selected monir is at 0%.* Selects which monir will be the output on terminals AM and FC. Same function choices as H4-0. Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 0Vdc) when selected monir is at 00% output.* Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 0Vdc) when selected monir is at 0% output.* Selects the signal level of terminal FM. 0: 0 0Vdc : -0 +0Vdc : 4 0mA* *Set the analog output jumper CN5 in the proper position. Selects the signal level of terminal AM. 0: 0 0Vdc : -0 +0Vdc : 4 0mA* *Set the analog output jumper CN5 in the proper position. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods * In order adjust the meter, 00% of the appropriate output is multiplied for the gain setting, the bias amount is added and then output. See H4-0 when spped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 03 appears on the setting screen, then terminal FM is used. See H4-04 when spped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 06 appears on the setting screen, then terminal AM is used. with PG Flux MODBUS Register 48 No A A A A A 4DH Yes Q Q Q Q Q 4EH 0.0% Yes A A A A A 4FH 48 3 No A A A A A 40H Yes Q Q Q Q Q 4H 0.0% Yes A A A A A 4H 0 0 No A A A A A 43H 0 0 No A A A A A 44H 5-58

170 User Parameter Tables MODBUS Communications: H5 User parameters for MODBUS communications are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register H5-0 Drive Node Address Serial Comm Adr Selects Drive station node number (address) for Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+, S-. The Drive's power must be cycled for the setting take effect. 0 0 * F No A A A A A 45H H5-0 Communication Speed Selection Serial Baud Rate Selects the baud rate for Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-. The Drive's power must be cycled for the setting take effect. 0: 00 bps : 400 bps : 4800 bps 3: 9600 bps 4: 900 bps No A A A A A 46H H5-03 Communication Parity Selection Serial Com Sel Selects the communication parity for Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-. The Drive's power must be cycled for the setting take effect. 0: No Parity : Even Parity : Odd Parity 0 0 No A A A A A 47H H5-04 Spping Method After Communication Error Serial Fault Sel Selects the spping method when a communication timeout fault (CE) is detected. 0: Ramp Sp : Coast Sp : Fast-Sp 3: Alarm Only No A A A A A 48H H5-05 Communication Fault Detection Selection Serial Flt Dtct Enables or disables the communications timeout fault (CE). 0: Disabled - A communication loss will not cause a communication fault. : Enabled - If communication is lost for more than seconds, a CE fault will occur. 0 No A A A A A 49H H5-06 Drive Transmit Wait Time Transmit WaitTIM Set the delay time from when the Drive receives data when the Drive sends data ms No A A A A A 4AH H5-07 RTS Control Selection RTS Control Sel Enables or disables "request send" (RTS) control: 0: Disabled - RTS is always on : Enabled - RTS turns on only when sending 0 No A A A A A 4BH * If H5-0 is set zero, then the drive will be unable respond Modbus communication. 5-59

171 Pulse Train I/O: H6 User parameters for pulse I/O are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register H6-0 Terminal RP Pulse Train Input Function Selection Pulse Input Sel Selects the function of pulse train terminal RP. 0: Frequency reference : PID feedback value : PID setpoint value 0 0 No A A A A A 4CH H6-0 Pulse Train Input Scaling Pulse In Scaling Sets the number of pulses (in Hz) that is equal the maximum output frequency E Hz Yes A A A A A 4DH H6-03 Pulse Train Input Gain Pulse Input Gain Sets the output level when the pulse train input is at 00% as a percentage of maximum output frequency E % Yes A A A A A 4EH H6-04 Pulse Train Input Bias Pulse Input Bias Sets the output level when the pulse train input is 0Hz as a percentage of maximum output frequency E % Yes A A A A A 4FH H6-05 Pulse Train Input Filter Time Pulse In Filter Sets the pulse train input filter time constant in seconds sec Yes A A A A A 430H H6-06 Terminal MP Pulse Train Monir Selection Pulse Moni Sel Select the pulse train monir output terminal MP function (value of the xx part of U-xx). See Table A for the list of U monirs.,, 5, 0, 4, 36 Yes A A A A A 43H H6-07 Pulse Train Monir Scaling Pulse Moni Scale Sets the number of output pulses when the monir is 00% (in Hz). Set H6-06, and H6-07 0, make the pulse train monir output synchronous the output frequency Hz Yes A A A A A 43H 5-60

172 User Parameter Tables Protection Function Parameters: L The following settings are made with the protection function parameters (L parameters): Mor selection function, power loss ridethrough function, stall prevention function, frequency detection, rque limits, and hardware protection. Mor Overload: L User parameters for mor overloads are shown in the following table. Parameter Number L-0 Name Display Mor Overload Protection Selection MOL Fault Select Description Sets the mor thermal overload protection (OL) based on the cooling capacity of the mor. 0: Disabled : Standard Fan Cooled (< 0: mor) : Standard Blower Cooled ( 0: mor) 3: Mor ( 000: mor) Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0 3 No Q Q Q Q Q 480H L-0 Mor Overload Protection Time MOL Time Const Sets the mor thermal overload protection (OL) time. A larger L-0 time will increase the time before an OL fault will occur min No A A A A A 48H L-03 Mor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection Mtr OH Alarm Sel Sets operation selection when the mor temperature analog input (H3-09 = E) exceeds the OH3 alarm level (.7V) 0: Ramp Sp : Coast Sp : Fast-Sp 3: Alarm Only No A A A A A 48H L-04 Mor Overheat Fault Operation Selection Mtr OH Fault Sel Sets spping method when the mor temperature analog input (H3-09 = E) exceeds the OH4 fault level (.34V). 0: Ramp Sp : Coast Sp : Fast-Sp 0 No A A A A A 483H L-05 Mor Temperatur e Input Filter Time Mtr Temp Filter This parameter adjusts the filter on the mor temperature analog input (H3-09 = E). Increase add stability, decrease improve response sec No A A A A A 484H 5-6

173 Power Loss Ridethrough: L User parameters for power loss ridethroughs are shown in the following table. Parameter Number L-0 Name Display Momentary Power Loss Detection Selection PwrL Selection Description Enables and disables the momentary power loss function. 0: Disabled - Drive trips on (UV) fault when power is lost. : Power Loss Ride Thru Time - Drive will restart if power returns within the time set in L-0.* : CPU Power Active - Drive will restart if power returns prior control power supply shut down.* * In order for a restart occur, the run command must be maintained throughout the ride thru period. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0 0 No A A A A A 485H L-0 Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Time PwrL Ridethru t Sets the power loss ride-thru time. This value is dependent on the capacity of the Drive. Only effective when L-0 = sec * No A A A A A 486H L-03 Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time PwrL Baseblock t Sets the minimum time wait allow the residual mor voltage decay before the Drive output turns back on during power loss ride thru. After a power loss, if L-03 is greater than L-0, operation resumes after the time set in L sec * No A A A A A 487H L-04 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time PwrL V/F Ramp t Sets the time it takes the output voltage return the preset pattern after speed search (current detection mode) is complete sec * No A A A A A 488H L-05 Undervoltage Detection Level PUV Det Level Sets the Drive's DC Bus undervoltage trip level. If this is set lower than the facry setting, additional AC input reactance or DC bus reactance may be necessary. Consult the facry before changing this parameter setting * 90 V * No A A A A A 489H 5-6

174 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number L-06 Name Display KEB Deceleration Rate KEB Decel Time Description Sets the time required decelerate zero speed when a KEB command is input from a multi-function input. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0.0sec No A A A A A 48AH L-07 Momentary Recovery Time UV Return Time Set the time (in seconds) accelerate the set speed after recovery from a momentary power loss. If setting = 0.0, then active acceleration time is used instead sec *3 No A A A A A 48BH L-08 Frequency Reduction Gain at KEB Start KEB Frequency Sets the percentage of output frequency reduction at the beginning of deceleration when a KEB command is input from multi-function input. Reduction = (SlipFreqBeforeKEB) x L-08 x % No A A A A A 48CH *. Facry settings will vary based on drive capacity (values given here are for 08-40Vac, 0.4kW). *. value for 08-40Vac. Double the value when working with Vac drives. * 3. When set zero, the mor will accelerate the speed set acceleration time (C-0 thru C-08). Stall Prevention: L3 User parameters for the stall prevention function are shown in the following table. Parameter Number L3-0 Name Display Stall Prevention Selection During Accel StallP Accel Sel Description Selects the stall prevention method used prevent excessive current during acceleration. 0: Disabled - Mor accelerates at active acceleration rate. The mor may stall if load is o heavy or accel time is o short. : General Purpose - When output current exceeds L3-0 level, acceleration sps. Acceleration will continue when the output current level falls below the L3-0 level. : Intelligent - The active acceleration rate is ignored. Acceleration is completed in the shortest amount of time without exceeding the current value set in L3-0. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0 No A A A No No 48FH 5-63

175 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register L3-0 Stall Prevention Level During Acceleration StallP Accel Lvl This function is enabled when L3-0 is "" or "". Drive rated current is 00%. Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs with facry setting % No A A A No No 490H L3-03 Stall Prevention Limit During Acceleration StallP CHP Lvl Sets the lower limit for stall prevention during acceleration, as a percentage of the Drive's rated current, when operation is in the frequency range above E-06 (constant power region) % No A A A No No 49H L3-04 Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration StallP Decel Sel When using a braking resisr, use setting "0". "3" is used in specific applications. 0: Disabled - The Drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate. If the load is o large or the deceleration time is o short, an OV fault may occur. : General Purpose - The Drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate, but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level (380/760Vdc), deceleration will sp. Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level. : Intelligent - The active deceleration rate is ignored and the Drive decelerates as fast as possible w/o hitting OV fault level. Range: C-0 / 0. 3: Stall Prevention w/ Braking Resisr - Stall prevention during deceleration is enabled in coordination with dynamic braking. 0 3 * No Q Q Q Q Q 49H 5-64

176 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number L3-05 Name Display Stall Prevention Selection During Running StallP Run Sel Description Selects the stall prevention method use prevent Drive faults during run. 0: Disabled - Drive runs a set frequency. A heavy load may cause the Drive trip on an OC or OL fault. : Decel Time - In order avoid stalling during heavy loading, the Drive will decelerate at Decel time (C-0) if the output current exceeds the level set by L3-06. Once the current level drops below the L3-06 level, the Drive will accelerate back its frequency reference at the active acceleration rate. : Decel Time - Same as setting except the Drive decelerates at Decel Time (C-04). When output frequency is 6Hz or less, stall prevention during run is disabled regardless of the setting in L3-05. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0 No A A No No No 493H L3-06 Stall Prevention Level During Running StallP Run Level This parameter is enabled when L3-05 is set "" or "". Drive rated current is set as 00%. Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs with the facry settings % No A A No No No 494H L3- OV Suppression Function Selection OV Inhibit Sel Enables or disables OV suppression function, which allows the Drive change the output frequency as the load changes, prevent an OV fault. 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 0 No No No A A A 4C7H L3- OV Suppression Function Voltage Level OV Inhbt VoltLvl Sets the DC bus voltage level at which the OV suppression function is active. Normally, this setting does not require adjustment. Decrease the value if overvoltage occurs even when OV suppression is enabled * 380V * No No No A A A 4C8H * In Flux or in, the setting range becomes 0. * * Values shown here are for 08-40V drives. Double the value when working with V drives. 5-65

177 Reference Detection: L4 User parameters for the reference detection function are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register L4-0 Speed Agreement Detection Level Spd Agree Level These parameters configure the multi-function output (H-oo) settings "Fref/Fout Agree ", "Fref/Set Agree ", "Frequency Detection," and "Frequency detection ". Parameter L4-0 sets the level while parameter L4-0 sets the hysteresis for the Speed Detection Output Function Hz No A A A A A 499H L4-0 Speed Agreement Detection Width Spd Agree Width These parameters configure the multi-function output (H-oo) settings "Fref/Fout Agree ", "Fref/Set Agree ", "Frequency Detection," and "Frequency detection ". Parameter L4-0 sets the level while parameter L4-0 sets the hysteresis for the Speed Detection Output Function Hz No A A A A A 49AH L4-03 Speed Agreement Detection Level (+/-) Spd Agree Lvl+- These parameters configure the Multi-Function Output (H-oo) settings "Fref/Fout Agree ", "Fref/Set Agree ", "Frequency Detection 3," or "Frequency Detection 4". Parameter L4-03 sets the level while parameter L4-04 sets the hysteresis for the Speed Detection Output Function Hz No A A A A A 49BH L4-04 Speed Agreement Detection Width (+/-) Spd Agree Wdth+- These parameters configure the Multi-Function Output (H-oo) settings "Fref/Fout Agree ", "Fref/Set Agree ", "Frequency Detection 3," or "Frequency Detection 4". Parameter L4-03 sets the level while parameter L4-04 sets the hysteresis for the Speed Detection Output Function Hz No A A A A A 49CH L4-05 Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection Ref Loss Sel Determines how the Drive will react when the frequency reference is lost. The frequency reference is considered lost when reference drops 90% or more of its current value for 400ms. 0: Sp - Drive will sp. : Run at L4-06 PrevRef - Drive will run at the percentage set in L4-06 of the frequency reference level at the time frequency reference was lost. 0 0 No A A A A A 49DH 5-66

178 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register L4-06 Frequency Reference at Reference Loss Fref at Floss If the frequency reference loss function is enabled (L4-05=) and frequency reference is lost, the Drive will run at a reduced frequency reference determined by the following formula: Fref = Fref at time of loss * L % 80% No A A A A A 4CH L4-07 Torque Limit Control Method During Accel/ Decel Torque Limit Sel Selects the control method for the rque limit during acceleration and deceleration. 0: Proportional Control (integral control at fixed speeds) : Normal integral control, no need change settings. 0 0 No No No A No No 4C9H Fault Restart: L5 User parameters for restarting faults are shown in the following table. Parameter Number L5-0 Name Display Number of Au Restart Attempts Num of Restarts Description Sets the counter for the number of times the Drive will perform an aumatic restart on the following faults: GF, LF, OC, OV, PF, PUF, RH, RR, OL, OL, OL3, OL4, UV. Au restart will check see if the fault has cleared every 5ms. When no fault is present, the Drive will attempt an au restart. If the Drive faults after an au restart attempt, the counter is incremented. When the Drive operates without fault for 0 minutes, the counter will reset the value set in L5-0. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register No A A A A A 49EH L5-0 Au Restart Operation Selection Restart Sel Determines if the fault contact activates during an aumatic restart attempt. 0: No Fault Relay - fault contact will not activate during an aumatic restart attempt. : Fault Relay Active - fault contact will activate during an aumatic restart attempt. 0 0 No A A A A A 49FH 5-67

179 Torque Detection: L6 User parameters for the rque detection function are shown in the following table. Parameter Number L6-0 Name Display Torque Detection Selection Torq Det Sel Description Determines the Drive's response an Overrque/ Underrque condition. Overrque and Underrque are determined by the settings in parameters L6-0 and L6-03. The multi-function output settings "B" and "7" in the H-oo parameter group are also active if programmed. 0: Disabled : OL3 at Speed Agree - Alarm (Overrque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection). : OL3 at RUN - Alarm (Overrque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection). 3: OL3 at Speed Agree - Fault (Overrque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault). 4: OL3 at RUN - Fault (Overrque Detection is always active and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault). 5: UL3 at Speed Agree - Alarm (Underrque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after detection). 6: UL3 at RUN - Alarm (Underrque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection). 7: UL3 at Speed Agree - Fault (Underrque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault). 8: UL3 at RUN - Fault (Underrque Detection is always active and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault). Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register No A A A A A 4AH 5-68

180 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register L6-0 Torque Detection Level Torq Det Lvl Sets the Overrque/ Underrque detection level as a percentage of Drive rated current or rque for Torque Detection. Current detection for A-0 = 0 or. Torque detection for A-0 = or % No A A A A A 4AH L6-03 Torque detection time Torq Det Time Sets the length of time an Overrque/Underrque condition must exist before Torque Detection is recognized by the Drive sec No A A A A A 4A3H 5-69

181 Parameter Number L6-04 Name Display Torque Detection Selection Torq Det Sel Description Determines the Drive's response an Overrque/ Underrque condition. Overrque and Underrque are determined by the settings in parameters L6-05 and L6-06. The multi-function output settings "8" and "9" in the H-oo parameter group are also active if programmed. 0: Disabled : OL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm (Overrque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection). : OL4 at RUN - Alarm (Overrque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection). 3: OL4 at Speed Agree - Fault (Overrque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault). 4: OL4 at RUN - Fault (Overrque Detection is always active and Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault). 5: UL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm (Underrque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after detection). 6: UL4 at RUN - Alarm (Underrque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection). 7: UL4 at Speed Agree - Fault (Underrque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault). 8: UL4 at RUN - Fault (Underrque Detection is always active and Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault). Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register No A A A A A 4A4H L6-05 Torque Detection Level Torq Det Lvl Sets the Overrque/ Underrque detection level as a percentage of Drive rated current or rque for Torque Detection. Current detection for A-0 = 0 or. Torque detection for A-0 = or % No A A A A A 4A5H 5-70 L6-06 Torque Detection Time Torq Det Time Sets the length of time an Overrque/Underrque condition must exist before rque detection is recognized by the Drive sec No A A A A A 4A6H

182 User Parameter Tables Torque Limits: L7 User parameters for rque limits are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register L7-0 Forward Torque Limit Torq Limit Fwd % No No No A A A 4A7H L7-0 L7-03 Reverse Torque Limit Torq Limit Rev Forward Regenerative Torque Limit Torq Lmt Fwd Rgn Sets the rque limit value as a percentage of the mor rated rque. Four individual quadrants can be set. Reverse Output rque Positive rque Regenerative state Regenerative state Negative rque No. of mor rotations Forward % No No No A A A 4A8H 00% No No No A A A 4A9H L7-04 Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit Torq Lmt Rev Rgn % No No No A A A 4AAH L7-06 Torque Limit Integral Time Constant Sets the rque limit value as a percentage of the mor rated rque. Four individual quadrants can be set ms No No No A No No 4ACH Torq Det Time L7-07 Torque Limit Control Method Selection During Accel/ Decel Torq Lmt Sel Selects the method of rque limit controls during accel/decel 0: Proportional Controls (uses integral controls at fixed speeds). : Integral Controls Adjustment is not normally required. With applications that require rque limits during accel/decel, integral controls (setting value = ) are used when rque controls take precedence. When rque limit is applied the mor, accel/decel time may increase and mor speed may not run at the indicated speed reference. 0 0 No No No A No No 4C9H 5-7

183 Hardware Protection: L8 User parameters for hardware protection functions are shown in the following table. Parameter Number L8-0 Name Display Internal Dynamic Braking Resisr Protection Selection DB Resisr Prot Description Selects the DB protection only when using 3% duty cycle heatsink mount Yaskawa braking resisr. This parameter does not enable or disable the DB function of the Drive. 0: Not Provided : Provided Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0 0 No A A A A A 4ADH L8-0 Overheat Alarm Level OH Pre- Alarm Lvl When the cooling fin temperature exceeds the value set in this parameter, an Overheat Alarm (OH) will occur C* No A A A A A 4AEH L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection OH Pre- Alarm Sel Selects the Drive operation upon an OH pre-alarm detection. 0: Ramp Sp : Coast Sp : Fast-Sp 3: Alarm Only No A A A A A 4AFH L8-05 Input Phase Loss Protection Selection Ph Loss In Sel Selects the detection of input current phase loss, power supply voltage imbalance, or main circuit electrostatic capacir deterioration. 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 0 No A A A A A 4BH L8-07 Output Phase Loss Protection Ph Loss Out Sel Selects the detection method for output phase loss. When applied mor capacity is o small for Drive capacity, output phase loss may be detected inadvertently. In this case, set 0. 0: Disabled : Single Phase Loss Detection : /3-phase Loss Detection 0 0 No A A A A A 4B3H L8-09 Output Ground Fault Detection Selection Ground Fault Sel Enables and disables the Drive's output ground fault detection. 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 No A A A A A 4B5H 5-7

184 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number L8-0 Name Display Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Selection Fan On/Off Sel Description Controls the heatsink cooling fan operation. 0: Fan On-Run Mode - Fan will operate only when the Drive is running and for L8- seconds after RUN is removed. : Fan always on - Cooling fan operates whenever the Drive is powered up. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0 0 No A A A A A 4B6H L8- Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Delay Time Fan Delay Time This parameter sets the delay time for the cooling fan turn off after the run command is removed when L8-0 = sec No A A A A A 4B7H L8- Ambient Temperature Ambient Temp When the Drive is installed in an ambient temperature exceeding its rating, the Drive overload (OL) protection level is adjusted C No A A A A A 4B8H L8-5 OL Characteristic Selection at Low Speeds OL L-Spd This parameter assists in protecting the output transisrs from overheating when output current is high and output frequency is low (6Hz and less). 0: Disabled - L8-6 and L8-7 are disabled. : Enabled - L8-6 and L8-7 are active. 0 No A A A A A 4BBH L8-8 Soft CLA Selection Soft CLA Sel Enables and disables the software current limit function. Consult the facry before disabling. 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 No A A A A A 4BFH * Facry settings will vary based on drive capacity. 5-73

185 n: Special Adjustments The following settings are made with the special adjustments parameters (n parameters): Hunting prevention and speed feedback detection control. Hunting Prevention Function: n User parameters for hunting prevention are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register n-0 Hunting Prevention Selection Hunt Prev Select If the mor vibrates while lightly loaded, hunting prevention may reduce the vibration. 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 No A A No No No 580H n-0 Hunting Prevention Gain Hunt Prev Gain Sets the gain for the Hunting Prevention Function. - If the mor vibrates while lightly loaded and n-0=, increase the gain by 0. until vibration ceases. - If the mor stalls while n-0=, decrease the gain by 0. until the stalling ceases No A A No No No 58H 5-74

186 User Parameter Tables Speed Feedback Protection Control Functions: n User parameters for speed feedback protection control functions are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register n-0 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain AFR Gain Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain in the aumatic frequency regular (AFR). Normally, there is no need change this setting. Adjust this parameter as follows: - If hunting occurs, increase the set value. - If response is low, decrease the set value. Adjust the setting by 0.05 units at a time, while checking the response No No No A No No 584H n-0 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant Sets the time constant control the rate of change in the speed feedback detection control ms No No No A No No 585H AFR Time n-03 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant Sets the time constant control the amount of change in the speed at low speed ms No No No A No No 586H AFR Time High-slip Braking: n3 User parameters for high-slip braking are shown in the following table. Parameter Number n3-0 Name Display High Slip Braking Deceleration Frequency Width HSB Down Freq Description Sets how aggressively the Drive decreases the output frequency as it sps the mor using high slip braking (HSB). If Overvoltage (OV) faults occur during HSB, this parameter may need be increased. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0 5% No A A No No No 588H n3-0 High Slip Braking Current Limit HSB Current Sets the maximum current be drawn during an HSB sp. Higher n3-0 settings will shorten mor spping times but cause increased mor current, and therefore increased mor heating % No A A No No No 589H 5-75

187 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register n3-03 High Slip Braking Dwell Time at Sp HSB Dwell Time Sets the amount of time the Drive will dwell at E-09 (Minimum Frequency) at the end of deceleration. If this time is set o low, the machine inertia can cause the mor rotate slightly after the HSB sp is complete and the Drive output is shut off sec No A A No No No 58AH n3-04 High Slip Braking Overload Time HSB OL Time Sets the time required for an HSB overload fault (OL7) occur when the Drive output frequency does not change for some reason during an HSB sp. Normally this does not need be adjusted sec No A A No No No 58BH Speed Estimation: n4 User parameters for speed estimation are shown in the following table. Parameter Number n4-07 Name Display Observer Integral Time SPD EST I Time Description Set the integral time of the speed estimar for PI control. Range Facry 0.030m s Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register No No No No No A 59AH n4-08 Observer Proportional Gain SPD EST P GAIN Set the proportional gain of the speed estimar for PI control No No No No No A 59BH n4-0 High-speed Observer Proportional Gain OBS Gain H- SPD Sets the P-gain on the hispeed side of the Observer (PI Controls). Operates at the same proportional gain as N4-07 when set zero No No No No No A 59DH n4- Observer Switching Frequency Speed Change F Sets the switching frequency for the high and low speed Observer Hz No No No No No A 59EH n4-5 Lo-Speed + Regen Stability Coefficient PH Comp Lim Gain Use a large setting if load lerance needs be increased during low-speed regeneration. If the setting is o high, then rque command monir and the actual rque system will be weakened No No No No No A 5AH 5-76

188 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register n4-7 Torque Adjustment Gain TRQ adjust gain Sets the rque adjustment gain for low-speed power No No No No No A 5A4H n4-8 Gain for Feeder Resistance Adjustment Sets the gain for the feeder resistance in the speed estimar No No No No No A 5A5H Feeder R gain n4-8 Observer Switching Frequency Speed Change F Sets the frequency at which the Observer switches between high and low speeds during deceleration Hz 50Hz No No No No No A 5AFH n4-9 Torque Adjustment Gain TRQ adjust gain Slowly increase the setting value when load lerance rises at low speeds. If set o high, the load lerance will be reduced. Note: Adjustment is not normally required No No No No No A 5B4H n4-30 Low Speed + Regen Stability Coefficient LowSpd Rgn Coef Set a larger value stabilize the mor when running at extremely low speeds and/or regen. When the setting is increased, the mor will accelerate as the regen load increases. When tuning, adjust in units as large as No No No No No A 5B5H n4-3 Observer Gain Modulation Frequency SpdEst Gain Frq Set the lower limit of the P- gain modulation frequency on the low-speed side of the Observer (PI Controls) in Hertz Hz 5.0Hz No No No No No A 5B7H n4-33 Observer Gain Modulation Frequency SpdEst Gain Frq Set the upper limit of the P-gain modulation frequency on the low-speed side of the Observer (PI Controls) in Hertz Hz 0.0Hz No No No No No A 5B8H n4-34 Observer Gain Modulation Rate SpdEst Gain Rate Sets the percentage of modulation allowed for P-gain on the low-speed side of the Observer (PI Controls) % 00.0% No No No No No A 5B9H 5-77

189 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register n4-35 U-48 Gain Reduction Coefficient U-48 Reduce Gain this parameter a low value can improve operation when acceleration during low speeds or regeneration needs be suppress. Be sure keep this setting high enough avoid causing a CF error No No No No No A 5BAH n4-39 Flux Level at Low Frequency Flux Set this parameter a small value if the rque value is relatively high compared the actual load that has been set. Used during low speed operation. (The magnitude of the rated flux level as 00% ) 50 50% 90% No No No No No A 5BEH n4-40 Current Stability Coefficient at Low Speed I Stabilize Gain Reduce this setting if the mor oscillates when spped with rque reference at zero. Do not adjust this setting more than is necessary, verify the results as changes are made No No No No No A 5BFH n4-43 Speed Estimation Compensation Gain SpdEst Comp Gain Adjust this parameter improve accuracy of speed estimation under these conditions.. Drive in rque control mode.. Speed control is set d Set b-0=0 4. Make the following adjustment: Increase the value when attempting estimate the speed of the mor No No No No No A 5CH Caution: The mor may have difficulty spping with small friction loads. (even if the rque reference is set zero). 5-78

190 User Parameter Tables Feed Forward: n5 User parameters for the feed forward control are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register n5-0 Feed Forward Control Selection Feedfoward Sel Selects the feed forward controls. 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 or 0 * No No No No A A 5B0H n5-0 Mor Acceleration Time Mor Accel Time Sets the time required accelerate the mor at the rated rque (T00) the rated speed (Nr). J: (GO^) / 4 P: Mor rated output s * No No No No A A 5BH n5-03 Feedfoward Gain Feedfoward Gain Sets the proportional gain for feed forward controls. Response the speed reference will increase as the setting of n5-03 is increased No No No No A A 5BH *. Initial values differ based on the control mode (when operating in Mode w/pg, the initial value is set zero (disabled), and in wo/pg the initial value is, or "enabled"). *. Facry settings will vary based on drive capacity (values given here are for 08-40Vac, 0.4kW). 5-79

191 Digital Operar Parameters: o The following settings are made with the Digital Operar parameters (o parameters): Multi-function selections and the copy function.monir Select: o User parameters for Digital Operar Displays are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register o-0 User Monir Selection User Monir Sel Selects which monir will be displayed in the operation menu upon power-up when o-0 = Yes A A A A A 500H o-0 User Monir Selection After Power-Up Power-On Monir Selects which monir will be displayed upon power-up. : Frequency Reference (U-0) : Output Frequency (U-0) 3: Output Current (U-03) 4: User Monir (set by o-0) 4 Yes A A A A A 50H Digital Operar Display Selection Sets the units of the Frequency References (d-0 d-7), the Frequency Reference Monirs (U-0, U-0, U-05), and the Modbus communication frequency reference. 0: Hz : % (00% = E-04) o-03 Display Scaling RPM (Enter the number of mor 39: poles). 40 User display. Set the number 39999:desired at maximum output frequency. 4 digit number. Number of digits from the right of the decimal point No A A A A A 50H Example : o-03 = 000, will result in frequency reference from (00.0 = Fmax). Example : o-03 = 34, will result in frequency reference from (.34 = Fmax). 5-80

192 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number o-04 Name Display unit for frequency parameters related V/F characteristics Display Unit Description Sets the setting units related V/F pattern frequency related parameters (E-04, -06, -09, -) 0: Hertz : RPM Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0 or 0 No No No No A A 503H o-05 LCD Brightness Adjustment LCD Contrast Sets the contrast of the Digital Operar LCD. A setting of "" is the lightest contrast and a setting of "5" is the darkest contrast Yes A A A A A 504H Multi-function Selections: o User parameters for Digital Operar key functions are shown in the following table. Parameter Number o-0 Name Display Local/ Remote Key Function Selection Local/ Remote Key Description Determines if the Digital Operar Local/Remote key is functional. 0: Disabled : Enabled Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0 No A A A A A 505H o-0 STOP Key Function Selection Oper STOP Key Determines if the STOP key on the Digital Operar will sp the Drive when Drive is operating from external terminals or serial communication. 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 No A A A A A 506H o-03 User Parameter Default Value User Defaults Allows sring of parameter settings as a User Initialization Selection. 0: No Change : Set Defaults - Saves current parameter settings as user initialization. A-03 now allows selecting <0> for user initialization and returns o-03 zero. : Clear All - Clears the currently saved user initialization. A-03 no longer allows selecting <0> and returns o-03 zero. 0 0 No A A A A A 507H 5-8

193 Parameter Number o-04 Name Display Drive/kVA Selection Drive Model # Description Sets the kva of the Drive. Enter the number based on Drive model number. Use the last four digits of the model number. CIMR-F7Uxxxx. This parameter only needs be set when installing a new control board. Do not change for any other reason. Refer Table B.. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0 FF 0 * No A A A A A 508H o-05 Frequency Reference Method Selection Operar M.O.P. Determines if the Data/Enter key must be used input a frequency reference from the Digital Operar. 0: Disabled - Data/Enter key must be pressed enter a frequency reference. : Enabled - Data/Enter key is not required. The frequency reference is adjusted by the up and down arrow keys on the Digital Operar without having press the data/enter key. 0 0 No A A A A A 509H o-06 Operation Selection when Digital Operar is Disconnected Oper Detection Determines if the Drive will sp when the Digital Operar is removed when in LOCAL mode or b-0=0. 0: Disabled - The Drive will not sp when the Digital Operar is removed. : Enabled - The Drive will fault (OPR) and coast sp when the Digital Operar is removed. 0 0 No A A A A A 50AH o-07 Cumulative Operation Time Elapsed Time Set Sets the initial value of the elapsed operation timer U hr No A A A A A 50BH o-08 Cumulative Operation Time Selection Elapsed Time Run Sets how time is accumulated for the elapsed operation timer U-3. 0: Power-On Time - Time accumulates when the Drive is powered. : Running Time - Time accumulates only when the Drive is running. 0 0 No A A A A A 50CH o-0 Cumulative Cooling Fan Operation Time Fan ON Time Set Sets the initial value of the heatsink fan operation time monir U hr No A A A A A 50EH 5-8

194 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number o- Name Display Fault Trace/ Fault Hisry Clear Function Fault Trace Init Description Clears the fault memory contained in the U and U3 monirs. 0: Disabled - no effect : Enabled - resets U and U3 monirs, and returns o- zero. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0 0 No A A A A A 50H o-4 kwh User Monir Initialization kwh MonirClear Used reset the kilowatthour monir U-9 zero. 0: Disabled - no change : Enabled - Resets U-9 zero and returns o-4 zero. 0 0 No A A A A A 5H * Facry settings will vary based on drive capacity (values given here are for 08-40Vac, 0.4kW). Copy Function: o3 User parameters for the copy function are shown in the following table. Parameter Number o3-0 Name Display Copy Function Selection Copy Function Sel Description This parameter controls the copying of parameters and from the Digital Operar. 0: COPY SELECT (no function) : INV --> OP READ - All parameters are copied from the Drive the Digital Operar. : OP --> INV WRITE - All parameters are copied from the Digital Operar the Drive. 3: OP<-->INV VERIFY - Parameter settings in the Drive are compared those in the Digital Operar. Note:When using the copy function, the Drive model number (o-04), software number (U-4), and control method (A-0) must match or an error will occur. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register No A A A A A 55H o3-0 Copy Allowed Selection Copy Allowable Enables and disables the Digital Operar copy functions. 0: Disabled - No Digital Operar copy functions are allowed. : Enabled - Copying allowed. 0 0 No A A A A A 56H 5-83

195 T: Mor Autuning The following settings are made with the mor autuning parameters (T parameters): s for autuning. Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register T-00 Mor Selection / Select Mor Selects which set of mor parameters are be used and set during Au-Tuning. If Mor selection (H-xx=6) is not selected, this parameter will not be displayed. : st Mor - E E : nd Mor - E3 E4 No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 700H T-0 Au-Tuning Mode Selection Tuning Mode Sel Selects the Au-Tuning mode. 0: Rotational Au-Tuning (A-0 = or 3) : Stationary Au-Tuning (A-0 = or 3) : Terminal resistance only, (stationary) Au-Tuning (A-0 = 0,,, or 3) 3: Au-tuning for the amount of On-Delay Compensation (open loop vecr and flux vecr modes are enabled). *6 0 * 0 No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 70H T-0 Mor Rated Power Mtr Rated Power Sets the mor rated power in kilowatts (kw). Note: If mor power is given in horsepower, power in kw can be calculated using the following formula: kw = Hp X kw No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 70H T-03 Mor Rated Voltage Rated Voltage Sets the mor rated voltage in Volts (V) * 00.0 V * No No No Yes Yes Yes 703H T-04 Mor Rated Current Rated Current Sets the mor rated current in Amperes (A) *4.90 A *3 No Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 704H T-05 Mor Base Frequency Rated Frequency Sets the base frequency of the mor in Hertz (Hz) * H z No No No Yes Yes Yes 705H T-06 Number of Mor Poles Number of Poles Sets the number of mor poles. 48 poles 4 poles No No No Yes Yes Yes 706H 5-84

196 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register T-07 Mor Base Speed Rated Speed Sets the base speed of the mor in revolutions per minute (RPM) min No No No Yes Yes Yes 707H T-08 Number of PG Pulses PG Pulses/ Rev Sets the number of pulses per revolution (PPR) for the encoder (pulse generar) being used without any multiplication facr No No Yes No Yes No 708H *. Set T-0 and T-04 when is set for T-0. Only set value is possible for control or control with PG. *. value for 08-40Vac. Double the value when working with Vac drives. * 3. Facry settings will vary based on drive capacity (values given here are for 08-40Vac, 0.4kW). * 4. range is 0% 00% of the drive's rated output current (values given here are for 08-40Vac, 0.4kW). * 5. The upper setting limit will be 50.0Hz when C6-0 is set 0. * 6. Use this type of au-tuning only if having problems with precision when tuning. 5-85

197 U: Monir Parameters The following settings are made with the monir parameters (U parameters): parameters for moniring in drive mode. Status Monir Parameters: U The parameters used for moniring status are listed in the following table. Parameter Number U-0 Name Display Frequency Reference Frequency Ref Description Frequency reference (speed command) monir when in REMOTE mode, frequency reference (speed command) setting location when in local mode or b-0 = 0.* Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output 0V: Maximum Frequency (possible for -0V thru +0V) Min. Unit 0.0 Hz Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register A A A A A 40H U-0 Output Frequency Output Freq Output frequency.* 0V: Maximum Frequency (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0.0 Hz A A A A A 4H U-03 Output Current Output Current Output current 0V: Drive Rated Output Current (output of absolute value of 0V thru +0V possible) 0. A A A A A A 4H U-04 Control Method Control Method Control method set in A-0. 0 = V/F without PG = V/F with PG = 3 = Flux 4 = No output possible. - A A A A A 43H U-05 Mor Speed Mor Speed Mor speed feedback* 0V: Maximum Frequency (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0.0 Hz No A A A A 44H U-06 Output Voltage Output Voltage Output voltage 0V: AC00V (AC400V) (output of 0V thru +0V) 0. V A A A A A 45H U-07 DC bus Voltage DC Bus Voltage DC Bus Voltage 0V: DC400V (DC800V) (output of 0V thru +0V) V A A A A A 46H U-08 Output Power Output kwatts Output power 0V: Drive Capacity in kw (Largest Application Mor Capacity) (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0. kw A A A A A 47H 5-86

198 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number U-09 Name Display Torque Reference Torque Reference Description Torque reference Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output 0V: Mor Rated Torque (possible for -0V thru +0V) Min. Unit Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register 0.% No No A A A 48H * The unit is set in o-03 (frequency units of reference setting and monir). Parameter Number U-0 Name Display Input Terminal Status Input Term Sts Description Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output Min. Unit Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register Input terminal status. U-0= : FWD command (S) is ON. : REV command (S) is ON. : Multi input (S3) is ON. : Multi input (S4) is ON. No output possible. - A A A A A 49H : Multi input 3 (S5) is ON. : Multi input 4 (S6) is ON. : Multi input 5 (S7) is ON. :Multi input 6 (S8) is ON. U- Output Terminal Status Output Term Sts Output terminal status. U-= : Multi-function contact output (M-M) is ON. : Multi-funtion contact output (P) is ON. : Multi-funtion contact output 3 (P) is ON. Not used (always 0). : Error output (MA/AB-MC) is ON. No output possible. - A A A A A 4AH U- Drive Operation Status Int Ctl Sts Input terminal status.. U-= : Run : Zero speed : Reverse : Reset signal input : Speed agree : Inverter ready : Minor fault No output possible. - A A A A A 4BH : Major fault 5-87

199 Parameter Number Name Display Description Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output Min. Unit Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register U-3 Cumulative Operation Time Elapsed Time Total operating or power-on time of the Drive. No output possible. hr A A A A A 4CH U-4 Software Number FLASH ID Last 5 digits of the Drive's software number. No output possible. - A A A A A 4DH U-5 Terminal A Input Voltage Input voltage on Terminal A, as a percentage of ±0Vdc. Term A Level 0V: 00% (when input is 0V) (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0. % A A A A A 4EH U-6 Terminal A Input Voltage Term A Level Displays the input current (or voltage) on Terminal A, as a percentage of ±0Vdc. 0V: 00% (when input is 0V) (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0. % A A A A A 4FH U-7 Terminal A3 Input Voltage Input voltage on Terminal A3, as a percentage of ±0Vdc. Term 6 Level 0V: 00% (when input is 0V) (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0. % A A A A A 050H U-8 Mor Secondary Current (Iq) Mot SEC Current Current being used by the mor produce rque (Iq). 0V: Mor Rated Secondary Current (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0. % A A A A A 5H U-9 Mor Excitation Current (Id) Mot EXC Current Current being used by the mor for excitation (Id). 0V: Mor Rated Secondary Current (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0. % No No A A A 5H U-0 Output Frequency After Soft Start SFS Output Frequency reference (speed command) after the accel and decel ramps and S-curve. 0V: Maximum Frequency (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0.0 Hz A A A A A 53H U- ASR Input ASR Input Input error the speed control loop (ASR). The maximum output frequency E-04 corresponds 00%. 0V: Maximum Frequency (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0.0 % No A No A A 54H U- ASR Output ASR Output Output from the speed control loop (ASR). The mor rated secondary current corresponds 00%. 0V: Mor Rated Secondary Current (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0.0 % No A No A A 55H 5-88

200 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output Min. Unit Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register U-4 PI Feedback Value PID Feedback Feedback signal level when PID control is used. 0V: Maximum Frequency (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0.0 % A A A A A 57H U-5 DI-6H Input Status DI-6 Reference Reference value from a DI- 6H Digital Reference Card. The value will be displayed in binary or BCD depending on user constant F3-0. No output possible. - A A A A A 58H U-6 Output Voltage Reference (Vq) Voltage Ref (Vq) Internal voltage reference for mor secondary current control. 0V: AC00V (AC400) (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0. V No No A A A 59H U-7 Output Voltage Reference (Vd) Voltage Ref (Vd) Internal voltage reference for mor excitation current control. 0V: AC00V (AC400) (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0. V No No A A A 5AH U-8 CPU Number CPU ID Control board hardware revision. No output possible. - A A A A A 5BH U-9 kwh kwh Lower 4 dig Accumulated kilowatt-hours. No output possible. 0. KW H A A A A A 5CH U-30 MWh kwh Upper 5 dig Accumulated megawatt-hours. No output possible. M WH A A A A A 5DH U-3 ACR Output of q Axis ACR(q) Output Current control output value for the mor secondary current. 0V: 00% (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0. % No No A A A 5FH U-33 ACR Output of d Axis ACR(d) Output Current control output value for the mor excitation current. 0V: 00% (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0. % No No A A A 60H 5-89

201 Parameter Number Name Display Description Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output Min. Unit Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register U-34 First Parameter Causing an OPE OPE Detected Parameter number causing an "OPE" fault. No output possible. - A A A A A 6H U-35 Zero Servo Pulse Count Number of PG pulses times 4 Zero Servo Pulse for the movement range when spped at zero servo. No No No A No 6H U-36 PID Input PID Input Input error the PID regular (PID Setpoint - PID Feedback). 0V: Maximum Frequency (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0.0 % A A A A A 63H U-37 PID Output PID Output Output of the PID regular as a percentage of maximum frequency (E-04). 0V: Maximum Frequency (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0.0 % A A A A A 64H U-38 PID Setpoint PID Setpoint Setpoint of the PID regular (PID reference + PID bias). 0V: Maximum Frequency 0.0 % A A A A A 65H U-39 Modbus Communication Error Code Transmit Err Modbus serial communication error codes. U-40= : CRC error : Data length error Not used (always 0). : Parity error : Overrun error : Framing error : Timeout Not used (always 0). No output possible. - A A A A A 66H U-40 Heatsink Cooling Fan Operation Time FAN Elapsed Time Total operating time of the heatsink cooling fan. No output possible. hr A A A A A 68H U-4 Mor Flux Calculation Values Mot Flux EST Monirs the calculated mor flux. 0V: Monir rated flux. 0. % No No No No A 69H U-43 Mor Flux Current Compensation Id Comp Value Shows 00% when the mor rated secondary current monir for mor flux current compensation is active. 0V: Mor Rated Secondary Current (0V ±0V) 0. % No No No No A 6AH 5-90

202 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output Min. Unit Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register U-44 ASR Output without Filter ASR Output w Fil Output from the speed control loop (ASR) before the ASR primary delay filter (C5-06). 00% is displayed for rated secondary current of the mor. 0V: Mor Rated Secondary Current (0V ±0V) 0.0 % No No No A A 6BH U-45 Feed Forward Control Output FF Cout Output Output from feed forward control. 00% is displayed for rated secondary current of the mor. 0V: Mor Rated Secondary Current (0V ±0V) 0.0 % No No No A A 6CH U-50 CF Fault Error Code CF Error Code Displays the code for a CF fault: 00: No deceleration for 3sec after reaching the sp frequency. 0: Flux estimation fault. 0: Start status error. 04: Observer gain adjustment error. 08: Regeneration error at low speeds. 0: Zero Speed error. 0: Rotational Direction Limit error. 80: control status error Range (0 thru FFFFFH) - No No No No A 7H 5-9

203 Fault Trace: U User parameters for error tracing are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output Min. Unit Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register U-0 Current Fault Current Fault Description of current fault. - A A A A A 80H U-0 Previous Fault Desscription of most recent fault. - A A A A A 8H Last Fault U-03 Frequency Reference at Previous Fault Gives the frequency reference at the most recent fault. 0.0 Hz A A A A A 8H Frequency Ref U-04 Output Frequency at Previous Fault Shows the output frequency at the most recent fault. 0.0 Hz A A A A A 83H Output Freq U-05 Output Current at Previous Fault Gives the output current at the most recent fault. 0. A A A A A A 84H Output Current No output possible. U-06 Mor Speed at Previous Fault Shows the mor speed at the most recent fault. 0.0 Hz No A A A A 85H Mor Speed U-07 Output Voltage at Previous Fault Gives the output voltage at the most recent fault. 0. V A A A A A 86H Output Voltage U-08 DC Bus Voltage at Previous Fault Shows the DC BUS voltage at the most recent fault. V A A A A A 87H DC Bus Voltage U-09 Output Power at Previous Fault Output kwatts Gives the output power at the most recent fault. 0. kw A A A A A 88H 5-9

204 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output Min. Unit Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register U-0 Torque Reference at Previous Fault Gives the rque reference at the most recent fault. 0.% No No A No A 89H Torque Reference U- Input Terminal Status at Previous Fault Shows the input terminal status at the most recent fault. - A A A A A 8AH Input Term Sts U- Output Terminal Status at Previous Fault Gives the output terminal status at the most recent fault. No output possible. - A A A A A 8BH Output Term Sts U-3 Drive Operation Status at Previous Fault Displays the Drive Operation Status at the most recent fault. - A A A A A 8CH Inverter Status U-4 Cumulative Operation Time at Previous Fault Gives the cumulative operation time at the previous fault. hr A A A A A 8DH Elapsed time Note The following errors are not included in the error trace: CPF00, 0, 0, 03, UV, and UV. 5-93

205 Fault Hisry: U3 User parameters for the error log are shown in the following table. Parameter Number Name Display Description Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output Min. Unit Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register U3-0 Most Recent Fault Shows the most recent fault. - A A A A A 90H Last Fault U3-0 nd Most Recent Fault Fault Message Shows the second most recent fault. - A A A A A 9H U3-03 3rd Most Recent Fault Fault Message 3 Shows the third most recent fault. - A A A A A 9H U3-04 4th Most Recent Fault Fault Message 4 Shows the fourth most recent fault. - A A A A A 93H U3-05 Cumulative Operation Time at Most Recent Fault Gives the cumulative operation time at the most recent fault. hr A A A A A 94H Elapsed Time U3-06 Cumulative Operation Time at nd Most Recent Fault Gives the cumulative operation time at the second most recent fault. No output possible. hr A A A A A 95H Elapsed Time U3-07 Cumulative Operation Time at 3rd Most Recent Fault Gives the cumulative operation time at the third most recent fault. hr A A A A A 96H Elapsed Time 3 U3-08 Cumulative Operation Time at 4th Most Recent Fault Gives the cumulative operation time at the fourth most recent fault. hr A A A A A 97H Elapsed Time 4 U3-09 5th Most Recent Fault Fault Message 5 Shows the fifth most recent fault. - A A A A A 804H U3-0 6th Most Recent Fault Fault Message 6 Shows the sixth most recent fault. - A A A A A 805H 5-94

206 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Description Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output Min. Unit Control Methods with PG Flux MODBUS Register U3-7th Most Recent Fault Fault Message 7 Shows the seventh most recent fault. - A A A A A 806H U3-8th Most Recent Fault Fault Message 8 Shows the eighth most recent fault. - A A A A A 807H U3-3 9th Most Recent Fault Fault Message 9 Shows the ninth most recent fault. - A A A A A 808H U3-4 0th Most Recent Fault Fault Message 0 Shows the tenth most recent fault. - A A A A A 809H U3-5 Cumulative Operation Time at 5th Most Recent Fault Gives the cumulative operation time at the fifth most recent fault. hr A A A A A 80EH Elapsed Time 5 U3-6 Cumulative Operation Time at 6th Most Recent Fault Gives the cumulative operation time at the sixth most recent fault. hr A A A A A 80FH Elapsed Time 6 No output possible. U3-7 Cumulative Operation Time at 7th Most Recent Fault Gives the cumulative operation time at the seventh most recent fault. hr A A A A A 80H Elapsed Time 7 U3-8 Cumulative Operation Time at 8th Most Recent Fault Gives the cumulative operation time at the eighth most recent fault. hr A A A A A 8H Elapsed Time 8 U3-9 Cumulative Operation Time at 9th Most Recent Fault Gives the cumulative operation time at the ninth most recent fault. hr A A A A A 8H Elapsed Time 9 U3-0 Cumulative Operation Time at 0th Most Recent Fault Gives the cumulative operation time at the tenth most recent fault. hr A A A A A 83H Elapsed Time 0 Note The following errors are not recorded in the error log: CPF00, 0, 0, 03, UV, and UV. 5-95

207 Facry s that Change with the Control Method (A-0) The facry settings of the following user parameters will change if the control method (A-0) is changed. Parameter Number b3-0 b3-0 b8-0 Name Display Speed Search Selection SpdSrch at Start Speed Search Deactivation Current SpdSrch Current Energy Saving Gain Energy Save Gain Range Unit Control Facry with PG Flux % b8-03 Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant s Energy Save F.T C3-0 C3-0 Slip Compensation Gain Slip Comp Gain Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Slip Comp Time ms C4-0 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time ms Torq Comp Time C5-0 C5-0 C5-03 C5-04 C5-06 d5-0 ASR Proportional Gain ASR P Gain ASR Integral Time ASR I Time ASR Proportional Gain ASR P Gain ASR Integral Time ASR I Time ASR Primary Delay Time Constant ASR Delay Time Torque Reference Delay Time Torq Ref Filter sec sec ms E-04 E3-0 Maximum Output Frequency Max Frequency Hz 60.0 * * E-05 E3-03 Maximum Output Voltage Max Voltage V 00.0 * * E-06 E3-04 Base Frequency Base Frequency Hz 60.0 * *

208 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Display Range Unit Control Facry with PG Flux E-07 E3-05 Mid Output Frequency A Mid Frequency A Hz 3.0 *3 3.0 * E-08 E3-06 Mid Output Voltage A * Mid Voltage A ( ) 0. V 5.0 *3 5.0 * E-09 E3-07 Minimum Output Frequency Min Frequency Hz.5 *3.5 * E-0 E3-08 Minimum Output Voltage * Min Voltage ( ) 0. V 9.0 *3 9.0 * F-09 n5-0 Overspeed Detection Delay Time PG Overspd Time Feed Forward Control Selection Feedfoward Sel s , *. The settings will be 0.05 (Flux vecr)/.00 (-loop vecr) for drives of 55kW or larger. *. The settings shown are for 08-40Vac Drives. The values will double for Vac Drives. * 3. s vary as shown in the following tables depending on the Drive capacity and E-03. * 4. The setting range is for open-loop vecr control. 5-97

209 08-40Vac and Vac Drives of kw Table 5. V/F Pattern for Drive Capacities G7U0P4 - P5 for 08-40V Class Parameter No. Name Unit Facry E-03 V/F Pattern Selection E-04 Max. Output Frequency Hz E-05 Max. Output Voltage V E-06 Base Frequency Hz E-07 Mid. Output Frequency V E-08 Mid. Output Voltage V E-09 Min. Output Frequency Hz E-0 Min. Output Voltage V The setting shown are for 08-40Vac Drives. The values will double for Vac Drives... These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A-0 = 0 or ) 08-40Vac and Vac Drives of kw Table 5.3 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity G7U0P4 - P5 for 08-40V Class (continued) Parameter No. Name Unit Facry E-03 V/F Pattern Selection 8 9 A B C D E F & FF E-04 Max. Output Frequency Hz E-05 Max. Output Voltage V E-06 Base Frequency Hz E-07 Mid. Output Frequency V E-08 Mid. Output Voltage V E-09 Min. Output Frequency Hz E-0 Min. Output Voltage V The setting shown are for 08-40Vac Drives. The values will double for Vac Drives... These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A-0 = 0 or ) 5-98

210 User Parameter Tables 08-40Vac and Vac Drives of. 45 kw Table 5.4 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity G7UP for 08-40V Class Parameter No. Name Unit Facry E-03 V/F Pattern Selection E-04 Max. Output Frequency Hz E-05 Max. Output Voltage V E-06 Base Frequency Hz E-07 Mid. Output Frequency V E-08 Mid. Output Voltage V E-09 Min. Output Frequency Hz E-0 Min. Output Voltage V The setting shown are for 08-40Vac Drives. The values will double for Vac Drives.. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A-0 = 0 or ) Table 5.4 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity G7UP for 08-40V Class (continued) Parameter No. Name Unit Facry E-03 V/F Pattern Selection 8 9 A B C D E F & FF E-04 Max. Output Frequency Hz E-05 Max. Output Voltage V E-06 Base Frequency Hz E-07 Mid. Output Frequency V E-08 Mid. Output Voltage V E-09 Min. Output Frequency Hz E-0 Min. Output Voltage V For 400V class units, the voltage values are twice that of 00V class units.. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A-0 = 0 or ) 5-99

211 08-40Vac Drives of 55 0 kw and Vac Drives of kw Parameter No. E-03 E-04 E-05 E-06 E-07 E-08 E-09 E-0 Table 5.5 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity G7U055 and higher for 08-40V Class V/F Pattern Selection Max. Output Frequency Max. Output Voltage Max. Voltage Frequency Mid. Output Frequency Mid. Output Voltage Min. Output Frequency Min. Output Voltage Name Unit Facry Hz V Hz V V Hz The setting shown are for 08-40Vac Drives. The values will double for Vac Drives... These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A-0 = 0 or ) V Table 5.5 V/F Pattern for Drive Capacity G7U055 and higher for 08-40V Class (continued) Parameter No. Name Unit Facry E-03 E-04 E-05 V/F Pattern Selection Max. Output Frequency Max. Output Voltage 8 9 A B C D E F & FF Hz V E-06 Base Frequency Hz E-07 Mid. Output Frequency V E-08 E-09 E-0 Mid. Output Voltage Min. Output Frequency Min. Output Voltage V Hz V The setting shown are for 08-40Vac Drives. The values will double for Vac Drives.. These default values are for V/F or V/F with PG control methods (A-0 = 0 or ) 5-00

212 User Parameter Tables Table 5.6 lists the facry settings of V/F patterns when open loop vecr or flux vecr control method is selected (A-0 = or 3). Table 5.6 V/F Pattern for 08-40V Class Drives Parameter No. Name Unit Facry Flux E-04 Max. Output Frequency Hz E-05 Max. Output Voltage V E-06 Base Frequency Hz E-07 Mid. Output Frequency V E-08 Mid. Output Voltage V E-09 Min. Output Frequency Hz E-0 Min. Output Voltage V The setting shown are for 08-40Vac Drives. The values will double for Vac Drives.. These default values are for open loop vecr or flux vecr control methods (A-0 = or 3) Max Voltage E-05 Voltage Mid Voltage B E- Base Voltage E-3 Mid Voltage A E-08 Min Voltage E-0 E-09 E-07 E-06 E- E-04 Min Freq Mid Freq Freq A A Base Freq Mid Freq B Max Freq Frequency Fig 5.9 V/F Pattern Parameters Parameters E-07, E-08, E-0, E-, and E- are accessible through the Programming Menu. To set up a cusm V/F pattern, program the points shown in the diagram below using parameters E-04 through E-3. Be sure that the following condition is true: E-09 Ε 07 < Ε 06 Ε Ε

213 Facry s that Change with the Drive Capacity (o-04) The facry settings of the following user parameters will change if the Drive capacity (o-04) is changed Vac Drives Parameter Number Name Unit Facry - Drive Capacity kw o-04 kva selection b8-03 Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant s 0.50 (-loop vecr control) b8-04 C6-0 Energy Saving Coefficient Value Carrier Frequency Selection * C6- Carrier Frequency Selection for * Carrier frequency selection upper limit E-0 (E4-0) E-0 (E4-0) E-03 (E4-03) Mor Rated Current A Mor Rated Slip Hz Mor No-Load Current A E-05 (E4-05) Mor Line--Line Resistance Ω E-06 (E4-06) Mor Leakage Inductance % E-0 L-0 L-03 L-04 Mor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Time Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time W s s s L8-0 Overheat Alarm Level C n5-0 Mor Acceleration Time s

214 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Unit Facry - Drive Capacity kw o-04 kva selection - 9 A B C D E F 0 b8-03 Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant s 0.50 (-loop vecr control).00 (-loop vecr control) b8-04 C6-0 Energy Saving Coefficient Value Carrier Frequency Selection * C6- Carrier Frequency Selection for * Carrier frequency selection upper limit E-0 (E4-0) E-0 (E4-0) E-03 (E4-03) Mor Rated Current A Mor Rated Slip Hz Mor No-Load Current A E-05 (E4-05) Mor Line--Line Resistance Ω E-06 (E4-06) Mor Leakage Inductance % E-0 L-0 L-03 L-04 Mor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Time Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time W s s s L8-0 Overheat Alarm Level C n5-0 Mor Acceleration Time s Note Attach a Momentary Power Interruption Compensation Unit if compensation for power interruptions of up.0 seconds is required for 08-40Vac Drives with outputs of kw. *. The initial settings for C6-0 are as follows: 0: Low noise PWM, :.0 khz, : 5.0 khz, 3: 8.0 khz, 4: 0 khz, 5:.5 khz, and 6: 5 khz. If the carrier frequency is set higher than the facry setting for Drives with outputs of 5.5 kw or more, the Drive rated current will need be reduced. *. The initial settings for C6- are as follows: :.0 khz, : 4.0 khz, 3: 6.0 khz, 4: 8.0 khz. 5-03

215 Vac Drives Parameter Number Name Unit Facry - Drive Capacity kw o-04 kva selection b8-03 Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant s 0.50 (-loop vecr control) b8-04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value C6-0 C6- Carrier Frequency Selection * Carrier Frequency Selection for * - Carrier frequency selection upper limit E-0 (E4-0) E-0 (E4-0) E-03 (E4-03) Mor Rated Current A Mor Rated Slip Hz Mor No-Load Current A E-05 (E4-05) E-06 (E4-06) E-0 L-0 L-03 L-04 Mor Line--Line Resistance Mor Leakage Inductance Mor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Time Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time Ω % W s s s L8-0 Overheat Alarm Level C n5-0 Mor Acceleration Time s

216 User Parameter Tables Parameter Number Name Unit Facry - Drive Capacity kw o-04 kva selection - A B C D E b8-03 Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant s 0.50 (-loop vecr control) b8-04 C6-0 Energy Saving Coefficient Value Carrier Frequency Selection * C6- Carrier Frequency Selection for * Carrier frequency selection upper limit E-0 (E4-0) E-0 (E4-0) E-03 (E4-03) Mor Rated Current A Mor Rated Slip Hz Mor No-Load Current A E-05 (E4-05) Mor Line--Line Resistance Ω E-06 (E4-06) Mor Leakage Inductance % E-0 L-0 L-03 L-04 Mor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Time Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time W s s s L8-0 Overheat Alarm Level C n5-0 Mor Acceleration Time s

217 Parameter Number Name Unit Facry - Drive Capacity kw o-04 kva selection - F b8-03 Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant s.00 (-loop vecr control) b8-04 C6-0 Energy Saving Coefficient Value Carrier Frequency Selection * F F C6- Carrier Frequency Selection for * - - Carrier frequency selection upper limit E-0 (E4-0) E-0 (E4-0) E-03 (E4-03) Mor Rated Current A Mor Rated Slip Hz Mor No-Load Current A E-05 (E4-05) Mor Line--Line Resistance Ω E-06 (E4-06) Mor Leakage Inductance % E-0 L-0 L-03 L-04 Mor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Time Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time W s s s L8-0 Overheat Alarm Level C n5-0 Mor Acceleration Time s Note Drives with a capacity of 85 kw or more are under development. *. The initial settings for C6-0 are as follows: :.0 khz, : 5.0 khz, 3: 8.0 khz, 4: 0 khz, 5:.5 khz, 6: 5 khz, and F: User-set (Initial setting for 400-V Drives with a capacity of 90-kW or 0-kW: 3 khz.). *. The initial settings for C6- are as follows: :.0 khz, : 4.0 khz, 3: 6.0 khz, 4: 8.0 khz. 5-06

218 6 Parameter s by Function Frequency Reference...6- Run Command Spping Methods Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics Adjusting Frequency References Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) Improved Operating Efficiency Machine Protection Continuing Operation Drive Protection Input Terminal Functions Monir Parameters Individual Functions Digital Operar Functions Options...6-5

219 Frequency Reference This section explains how input the frequency reference. Selecting the Frequency Reference Source Set parameter b-0 select the frequency reference source. Related Parameters Parameter Number b-0 Name Display Frequency Reference Selection Reference Source Description Selects the frequency reference input source. 0: Operar - Digital preset speed U-0 or d-0 d-7. : Terminals - Analog input terminal A (or terminal A based on parameter H3-09). : Serial Com - Modbus RS-4/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-. 3: Option PCB - Option board connected on CN. 4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP) Range Facry Change during Operation with PG Control Methods loop Flux 0 4 No Q Q Q Q Q H6-0 Terminal RP Pulse Train Input Function Selection Pulse Input Sel Selects the function of pulse train terminal RP. 0: Frequency reference : PID feedback value : PID setpoint value 0 0 No A A A A A H6-0 Pulse Train Input Scaling Pulse In Scaling Sets the number of pulses (in Hz) that is equal the maximum output frequency E Hz Yes A A A A A Input the Reference Frequency from the Digital Operar When b-0 is set 0, you can input the reference frequency from the Digital Operar. Input the reference frequency from the Digital Operar's reference frequency setting display. For details on setting the reference frequency, refer Chapter 3 Digital Operar and Modes. -DRIVE- Rdy -DRIVE- Frequency Frequency Ref Ref U-0= U-0= Hz 0Hz "0.00Hz" 6- Fig 6. Frequency Display

220 Frequency Reference Inputting the Frequency Reference Using Voltage (Analog ) When b-0 is set, you can input the frequency reference from control circuit terminal A (voltage input), or control circuit terminal A (voltage or current input). Inputting Master Speed Frequency Reference Only When inputting a voltage for the master speed frequency reference, input the voltage control circuit terminal A. Inverter kω +V Power supply: 5 V, 0 ma A Master speed frequency reference (voltage input) A Master speed frequency reference (current input) A3 Auxiliary speed frequency reference AC Analog common Fig 6. Voltage Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference When inputting a current for the master speed frequency reference, input the current control circuit terminal A, input 0V terminal A, set H3-08 (Multi-function analog input terminal A signal level selection) (current input), and set H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A function selection) 0 (add terminal A). Inverter 4 0-mA input +V Power supply: 5 V, 0 ma Master speed frequency A reference (voltage input) A Master speed frequency reference (current input) A3 Auxiliary speed frequency reference AC Analog common DIP switch S V I Fig 6.3 Current Input for Master Speed Frequency Reference IMPORTANT Turn ON pin of DIP switch SW (ward I), the voltage/current switch, when inputting a current terminal A. Turn OFF pin of DIP switch SW (ward V), the voltage/current switch, when inputting a voltage terminal A. Set H3-08 the correct setting for the type of input signal being used. 6-3

221 Switch between Step Speeds: Master/Auxiliary Speeds When switching between the master and auxiliary speeds, connect the master speed frequency reference control circuit terminal A or A and connect the auxiliary speed frequency reference terminal A3. The reference on terminal A or A will be used for the Drive frequency reference when the multi-function input allocated multi-speed command is OFF and the reference on terminal A3 will be used when it is ON. When switching between the master and auxiliary speeds, set H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal A3) (auxiliary frequency reference, nd step analog) and set on of the multi-function input terminals multi-step speed reference. When inputting a current terminal A for the master speed frequency reference, set H3-08 (Multi-function analog input terminal A signal level selection) (current input), and set H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A function selection) 0 (add terminal A). Inverter S5 Multi-step speed reference +V Power supply: 5 V, 0 ma kω A Master speed frequency reference (voltage input) kω 4 0 ma Master speed A frequency reference (current input) A3 Auxiliary speed frequency reference AC Analog common Fig 6.4 Switching between Master and Auxiliary Frequencies Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Signals When b-0 is set 4, the pulse train input control circuit terminal RP is used as the frequency reference. Set H6-0 (Pulse Train Input Function Selection) 0 (frequency reference), and then set the 00% reference pulse frequency H6-0 (Pulse Train Input Scaling). Pulse Input Specifications Drive Low level voltage V High level voltage V Heavy duty 30 70% Pulse frequency 0 3 khz 3 khz max V Pulse input RP(Pulse train input terminal) AC (Analog common) Fig 6.5 Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Input 6-4

222 Frequency Reference Using Multi-Step Speed Operation With Varispeed-G7 series Drives, you can change the speed a maximum of 7 steps, using 6 frequency references, and one jog frequency reference. The following example of a multi-function input terminal function shows a 9-step operation using multi-step references 3 and jog frequency selection functions. Related Parameters To switch frequency references, set multi-step speed references 3 and the jog reference selection in the multi-function contact inputs. Multi-function Contact Inputs (H-0 H-0) Terminal Parameter Number Set Value S5 H-03 3 Details Multi-step speed reference (Also used for master speed/auxiliary speed switching when multi-function analog input H3-09 is set (auxiliary frequency reference).) S6 H-04 4 Multi-step speed reference S7 H-05 5 Multi-step speed reference 3 S8 H-06 6 Jog frequency selection (given priority over multi-step speed reference) Combining Multi-Function References and Multi-Function Contact Inputs You can change the selected frequency reference by combining the ON/OFF status of S4 S7 (multi-function contact input terminals) set multi-step speed references 3 and the jog frequency selection. The following table shows the possible combinations. Speed TerminalS5 TerminalS6 TerminalS7 TerminalS8 Multi-step Speed Reference Multi-step Speed Reference Multi-step Speed Reference 3 Jog Frequency Selection * Terminal S8's jog frequency selection is given priority over multi-step speed references. Selected Frequency OFF OFF OFF OFF Frequency reference d-0, master speed frequency ON OFF OFF OFF Frequency reference d-0, auxiliary frequency 3 OFF ON OFF OFF Frequency reference 3 d-03, auxiliary frequency 4 ON ON OFF OFF Frequency reference 4 d-04 5 OFF OFF ON OFF Frequency reference 5 d-05 6 ON OFF ON OFF Frequency reference 6 d-06 7 OFF ON ON OFF Frequency reference 7 d-07 8 ON ON ON OFF Frequency reference 8 d ON * Jog frequency d-7 6-5

223 Precautions When setting analog inputs step step 3, observe the following precautions. When setting terminal A's analog input step, set b-0, and when setting d-0 (Frequency Reference ) step, set b-0 0. When setting terminal A's analog input step, set H3-09 (auxiliary frequency reference). When setting d-0 (Frequency Reference ) step, set H3-09 F (do not use analog inputs). When setting terminal A3's analog input step 3, set H (auxiliary frequency reference ). When setting d-03(frequency Reference 3) step 3, set H3-05 F (Analog input not used). Connection Example and Time Chart The following diagram shows a time chart and control circuit terminal connection example during a 9-step operation. Drive S Forward/sp S Reverse/sp S3 External fault S4 Fault reset S5 Multi-step speed reference S6 Multi-step speed reference S7 Multi-step speed reference 3 S8 Jog frequency SC Sequence common Fig 6.6 Control Circuit Terminal During 9-step Operation Frequency reference Frequency reference : Auxiliary speed frequency Frequency reference : Master speed frequency Frequency reference 8 Frequency reference 7 Frequency reference 6 Frequency reference 5 Frequency reference 4 Frequency reference 3 Jog frequency Forward/sp Multi-step speed reference Multi-step speed reference Multi-step speed reference 3 Jog frequency selection 6-6 Fig 6.7 Multi-step speed reference/jog Frequency Selection Time Chart

224 Run Command Run Command This section explains input methods for the run command. Selecting the Run Command Source Set parameter b-0 select the source for the run command. Related Parameters Parameter Number b-0 Name Display Run Command Selection Run Source Description Selects the run command input source. 0: Operar - RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operar. : Terminals - Contact closure on terminals S or S. : Serial Com - Modbus RS-4/485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-. 3: Option PCB - Option board connected on CN. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG loop Flux 0 3 No Q Q Q Q Q Performing Operations Using a Digital Operar When b-0 is set 0, you can perform Drive operations using the Digital Operar keys (RUN, STOP, JOG, and FWD/REV). For details on the Digital Operar, refer Chapter 3 Digital Operar and Modes. Performing Operations Using Control Circuit Terminals When b-0 is set, you can perform Drive operations using the control circuit terminals. Performing Operations Using a -wire Sequence The facry setting is set a -wire sequence. When control circuit terminal S is set ON, forward operation will be performed, and when S is turned OFF, the Drive will sp. In the same way, when control circuit terminal S is set ON, reverse operation will be performed, and when S is turned OFF, the Drive will sp. Forward/sp Drive Reverse/sp Sequence common Fig 6.8 -wire Sequence Wiring Example 6-7

225 Performing Operations Using a 3-wire Sequence When any parameter from H-0 H-0 (multi-function contact input terminals S3 S) is set 0, terminals S and S are used for a 3-wire sequence, and the multi-function input terminal that has been set functions as a forward/reverse run command terminal. When the Drive is initialized for 3-wire sequence control with A-03, multi-function input 3 becomes the input terminal for the forward/reverse run command. Sp switch (NC contact) Operation switch (NO contact) Run command (operates when ON) Sp command (spped when ON) Forward/reverse command (multi-function input) Sequence input common Fig wire Sequence Wiring Example 50ms min. Run command Sp command Forward/reverse command OFF (forward) Can be either ON or OFF OFF (spped) ON (reverse) Mor speed Sp Forward Reverse Sp Forward Fig 6.0 Three-wire Sequence Time Chart Use a sequence that turns ON terminal S for 50ms or longer for the run command. This will make the run command self-holding in the Drive. INFO 6-8

226 Spping Methods Spping Methods This section explains methods of spping the Drive. Selecting the Spping Method when a Sp Command is Sent There are four methods of spping the Drive when a sp command is sent: Deceleration sp Coast sp DC braking sp Coast sp with timer Set parameter b-03 select the Drive spping method. A DC braking sp and coasting a sp with a timer cannot be set for flux vecr control. Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation with PG Control Methods - Flux b-03 Spping Method Selection Spping Method Selects the spping method when the run command is removed. 0: Ramp Sp : Coast Sp : DC Injection Sp 3: Coast with Timer (A new run command is ignored if received before the timer expires). 0 3 * 0 No Q Q Q Q Q b-05 Minimum Output Frequency (E-09) or Less Operation Selection Zero-Speed Oper Operation method when frequency reference is less than minimum output frequency set in E-09. 0: Operates according frequency reference (E-09 is disabled). : Output shuts off (coast sp if less than E-09). : Operates according E-09 (frequency reference set E-09). 3: Zero speed (frequency reference becomes zero when less than E-09) No No No No A No b-0 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency DCInj Start Freq Sets the frequency at which DC injection braking starts when ramp sp (b-03 = 0) is selected. If b-0< E-09, DC Injection braking starts at E-09. Note: Zero Speed restrictions are active in Flux Mode Hz No A A A A A 6-9

227 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation with PG Control Methods - Flux b-0 DC Injection Braking Current DCInj Current Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Drive rated current. Note: The DC excitation current is determined by the setting in E-03 when operating in flux loop vecr control mode % No A A A No No b-03 DC Injection Braking Time/DC Excitation Time at Start Sets the time of DC injection braking at start in units of 0.0 seconds sec No A A A A A DCInj Time@Start b-04 DC Injection Braking Time at Sp DCInj Time@Sp Sets the time length of DC injection braking at sp in units of 0.0 seconds. : When b-03 =, actual DC Injection time is calculated as follows: (b-04) x 0 x (OutputFreq) / (E-04) : When b-03 = 0, this parameter determines the amount of time DC Injection is applied the mor at the end of the decel ramp. 3: This should be set a minimum of 0.50 seconds when using HSB. This will activate DC injection during the final portion of HSB and help ensure that the mor sps completely sec No A A A A A * The setting range is 0 or for flux vecr control and open-loop vecr control. Deceleration Sp If the sp command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b-03 is set 0, the mor decelerates a sp according the deceleration time that has been set. (Facry setting: C-0 (Deceleration Time )) If the output frequency when decelerating a sp falls below b-0, the DC injection brake will be applied using the DC current set in b-0 only for the time set in b-04. For deceleration time settings, refer page 6-6 Acceleration and Deceleration Times. Accel Time -ADV- C-0= Sec Fig 6. Deceleration Sp 6-0

228 Spping Methods The operation after spping depends on the setting of b-05 when flux vecr control is selected (A-0 = 3). Run command OFF ON OFF Frequency reference via analog input E-09 0 b-05=0 (frequency reference) Injection brake time at start Run command turns OFF and zero speed control start when mor speed drops b-0. Zero speed control b-05= (Coast) Baseblock b-03 Injection brake time at start Zero speed control Baseblock b-04 Frequency reference drops less than E-09 and zero speed control starts when mor speed drops b-0. Baseblock b-05= (Run on E-09) Injection brake time at start b-03 b-04 Baseblock Run command turns OFF and zero speed control start when mor speed drops b-0. Zero speed control Baseblock b-05=3 (Zero speed) b-03 Baseblock b-04 Run command turns OFF and zero speed control start Injection brake when mor speed drops b-0. time at start Zero speed control Baseblock b-03 b-04 Baseblock Fig 6. Deceleration Sp (for Flux Control) Coast Sp If the sp command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b-03 is set, the Drive output voltage is interrupted. The mor coasts a sp at the deceleration rate that counterbalances damage the machine and inertia including the load. Run command Output frequency ON OFF Inverter output freqeuencty interrupted. Fig 6.3 Coast Sp After the sp command is input, run commands are ignored until the Minimum Baseblock Time (L-03) has elapsed. INFO 6-

229 DC Braking Sp If the sp command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b-03 is set, a wait is made for the time set in L-03 (Minimum Baseblock (BB) Time) and then the DC injection brake current set in b-0 is sent the mor apply a DC injection brake sp the mor. The DC injection brake time is determined by the set value in b-04 and the output frequency when the sp command is input. Run command ON OFF DC injection brake time Output frequency Inverter output voltage interrupted DC injection brake Minimum baseblock time (L-03) DC injection brake time b-04 Output frequency at sp command input 0% 00% (maximum output frequency) Fig 6.4 DC Injection Braking (DB) Sp Lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L-03) when an overcurrent (OC) occurs during spping. INFO Coast Sp with Timer If the sp command is input (i.e., the run command is turned OFF) when b-03 is set 3, the Drive output is interrupted coast the mor a sp. After the sp command is input, run commands are ignored until the time T has elapsed. The time T depends upon the output frequency when the sp command is input and the deceleration time. Run command Output frequency ON OFF ON OFF ON Operation wait time T Deceleration time (e.g., C-0) Inverter output voltage interrupted Operation wait time T Minimum baseblock time (L-03) Minimum output frequency Output frequency at sp command input 00% (Maximum output frequency) Fig 6.5 Coast Sp with Timer 6-

230 Spping Methods Using the DC Injection Brake Set parameter b-03 apply the DC injection brake voltage the mor while it is coasting a sp, sp the mor and then restart it. Set b-03 0 disable the DC injection brake at start. Set the DC injection brake current using b-0. DC injection braking is used at startup for flux vecr control with the current set in E-03 (Mor no-load current). Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux b-0 DC Injection Braking Current DCInj Current Sets the DC injection braking current as a percentage of the Drive rated current. Note: The DC excitation current is determined by the setting in E- 03 when operating in flux loop vecr control mode % No A A A No No b-03 DC Injection Braking Time/ DC Excitation Time at Start DCInj Time@Start Sets the time of DC injection braking at start in units of 0.0 seconds sec No A A A A A Inputting the DC Injection Brake Command from Control Circuit Terminals If you set a multi-function contact input terminal (H- ) 60 (DC injection brake command), you can apply the DC injection brake the mor by turning ON the terminal for which the DC injection brake command has been set when the Drive is being spped. DC injection braking is used at startup for flux vecr control. The time chart for the DC injection brake is shown below. DC injection brake command FRUN Output frequency DC injection brake (DC injection braking at startup is used for flux vecr control.) E-09 b-0 DC injection brake (DC injection braking at startup is used for flux vecr control.) If you input the DC injection brake command from an external terminal, or if the run command and jog command are input, the DC injection brake will be disabled, and operation will resume. Fig 6.6 DC Injection Brake Time Chart 6-3

231 Changing the DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) 6 (DC injection brake current), you can change the DC injection brake current level using the analog input. At 0Vinput (voltage) or 0mA input (current), 00% of the Drive rated current will be applied. DC injection brake voltage level Drive rated current Fig 6.7 DC Injection Brake Current Using an Analog Input Using an Emergency Sp Set a multi-function input terminal (H- ) 5 or 7 (emergency sp) decelerate a sp at the deceleration time set in C-09. If inputting the emergency sp with an NO contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H- ) 5, and if inputting the emergency sp with an NC contact, set the multi-function input terminal (H- ) 7. After the emergency sp command has been input, operation cannot be restarted until the Drive has spped. To cancel the emergency sp, turn OFF the run command and emergency sp command. Related parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux C-09 Fast Sp Time Fast Sp Time Sets the time decelerate from maximum frequency zero for the multi-function input "Fast Sp" function. Note: this parameter is also used by selecting "Fast Sp" as a Sp Method when a fault is detected * 0.0sec No A A A A A * The setting range for accel/decel time will differ depending on C-0 (Accel/Decel Time Units). If C-0 is set "0", then the setting range will change 0.00sec sec. 6-4

232 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics This section explains the acceleration and deceleration characteristics of the Drive. Acceleration and Deceleration Times Acceleration time indicates the time taken for the output frequency climb from 0% 00%. Deceleration time indicates the time taken for the output frequency reduce 0%. The facry setting of the acceleration time is C-0, and the facry setting of the deceleration time is C-0. Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux C-0 Acceleration Time Accel Time Sets the time accelerate from zero maximum frequency. Yes Q Q Q Q Q C-0 Deceleration Time Decel Time Sets the time decelerate from maximum frequency zero. Yes Q Q Q Q Q C-03 Acceleration Time Accel Time Sets the time accelerate from zero maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input. Yes A A A A A C-04 C-05 Deceleration Time Decel Time Acceleration Time 3 Accel Time 3 Sets the time decelerate from maximum frequency zero when selected via a multi-function input. Sets the time accelerate from zero maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input * 0.0sec Yes A A A A A No A A A A A C-06 Deceleration Time 3 Decel Time 3 Sets the time decelerate from maximum frequency zero when selected via a multi-function input. No A A A A A C-07 Acceleration Time 4 Accel Time 4 Sets the time accelerate from zero maximum frequency when selected via a multi-function input. No A A A A A C-08 Deceleration Time 4 Decel Time 4 Sets the time decelerate from maximum frequency zero when selected via a multi-function input. No A A A A A C-0 Accel/Decel Time Units Acc/Dec Units Sets the setting resolution of C-0 C-09 0: 0.0sec ( sec) : 0.sec ( sec) 0 or No A A A A A 6-5

233 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux C- Accel/Decel Switch Frequency Acc/Dec SW Freq Sets the frequency for aumatic switching of accel / decel times. Fout < C-: Accel/Decel Time 4 Fout C-: Accel/Decel Time Multi-function inputs "Multi-Acc/Dec " and "Multi-Acc/Dec " have priority over C-. Note: with Multi-Function Input, Accel/Decel Time and will take precedence * 0.0Hz No A A A A A C-0 C-0 C-03 C-04 S-Curve Characteristic at Accel Start SCrv Start S-Curve Characteristic at Accel End SCrv End S-Curve Characteristic at Decel Start SCrv Start S-Curve Characteristic at Decel End SCrv End S-curve is used further soften the starting and spping ramp. The longer the S- curve time, the softer the starting and spping ramp. Note: With this setting, accel/ decel times will be exactly half of the start and finish times of the S- curve characteristic time. Run command OFF Output frequency ON C-0 C-03 C-0 C-04 Time sec No A A A A A 0.0sec No A A A A A 0.0sec No A A A A A 0.00sec No A A A A A * The setting range for accel/decel time will differ depending on C-0 (Accel/Decel Time Units). If C-0 is set "0", then the setting range will change 0.00sec sec. *. Varies by Duty Rating Acceleration and Deceleration Time Units Set the acceleration/deceleration time units using C-0. Parameter C-0 is set at the facry. Set value Details 0 The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is in units of 0.0 s. The acceleration/deceleration time settings range is in units of 0. s. 6-6

234 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using Multi-Function Input Terminal Commands Using the Drive, you can set four acceleration times and four deceleration times. When the multi-function input terminals (H- ) are set 7 (acceleration/deceleration time selection ) and A (acceleration/deceleration time selection ), you can switch the acceleration/deceleration time even during operation by combining the ON/OFF status of the terminals. The following table shows the acceleration/deceleration time switching combinations. Acceleration/Deceleration Time Selection Terminal Acceleration/Deceleration Time Selection Terminal Acceleration Time Deceleration Time OFF OFF C-0 C-0 ON OFF C-03 C-04 OFF ON C-05 C-06 ON ON C-07 C-08 Switching Acceleration and Deceleration Time Aumatically Use this setting when you want switch acceleration/deceleration time aumatically using the set frequency. When the output frequency reaches the set value in C-, the Drive switches the acceleration/deceleration time aumatically as shown in the following diagram. Set C- a value other than 0.0Hz. If C- is set 0.0Hz, the function will be disabled. Output frequency Acceleration/ deceleration time switching frequency (C-) C-07 rate C-0 rate C-0 rate C-08 rate When output frequency C-, acceleration and deceleration are performed using Acceleration/deceleration Time (C-0, C-0). When output frequency < C-, acceleration and deceleration are performed using Acceleration/deceleration Time 4 (C-07, C-08). Fig 6.8 Acceleration/deceleration Time Switching Frequency Adjusting Acceleration and Deceleration Time Using an Analog Input If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) 5 (acceleration/deceleration time gain), you can adjust the acceleration/deceleration time using terminal A's input voltage. The Drive's acceleration time when the acceleration time has been set in C-0 is as follows: Acceleration time = C-0 set value x acceleration/deceleration time gain 6-7

235 Acceleration/deceleration time gain (set value: 5) (Acceleration/deceleration gain from 0 V) = 0 V/Input voltage (V) x 0 (%) Fig 6.9 Acceleration/Deceleration Time Gain Using an Analog Input Entering S-curve Characteristics in the Acceleration and Deceleration Time By performing acceleration and deceleration using an S-curve pattern, you can reduce shock when starting and spping the machine. Using the Drive, you can set an S-curve characteristic time for each of the following: Acceleration start time, deceleration start time, acceleration end time, and deceleration end time. INFO Set the S-curve characteristic time lengthen acceleration/deceleration time as follows: Acceleration time = Selected acceleration time + (Acceleration start time S-curve characteristic time + Acceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / Deceleration time = Selected deceleration time + (Deceleration start time S-curve characteristic time + Deceleration end time S-curve characteristic time) / Example The S-curve characteristic when switching operation (forward/reverse) is shown in the following diagram. Forward Reverse C-0 C-03 C-04 Output frequency C-0 C-0 C-04 C-0 C-03 Fig 6.0 S-curve Characteristic during Operation Switching 6-8

236 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics Accelerating and Decelerating Heavy Loads (Dwell Function) The dwell function sres the output frequency when starting or spping heavy loads. By temporarily sring the output frequency, you can prevent the mor from stalling. When using the dwell function, you must select a deceleration sp. Set b-03 (Spping Method Selection) 0. Related Parameters Parameter Number b6-0 b6-0 Name Display Dwell Reference at Start Dwell Description Range Run command ON Dwell Time OFF at Start 0.0 Output frequency Dwell 0.0 Time@Start Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0.0Hz No A A A A A 0.0sec No A A A A A b6-03 b6-04 Dwell Frequency at Sp Dwell The dwell function is used temporarily hold the frequency when driving a mor with heavy load Dwell Time at Sp 0.0 Dwell b6-0 b6-03 Time b6-0 b Hz No A A A A A 0.0sec No A A A A A 6-9

237 Preventing the Mor from Stalling During Acceleration (Stall Prevention During Acceleration Function) The Stall Prevention During Acceleration function prevents the mor from stalling if a heavy load is placed on the mor, or sudden rapid acceleration is performed. If you set L3-0 (enabled) and the Drive output current exceeds the -5% level of the set value in L3-0, the acceleration rate will begin slow down. When L3-0 is exceeded, acceleration will sp. If you set L3-0 (optimum adjustment), the mor current accelerates the value set in L3-0. With this setting, the acceleration time setting is ignored. Related Parameters Parameter Number L3-0 Name Display Stall Prevention Selection During Accel StallP Accel Sel Description Selects the stall prevention method used prevent excessive current during acceleration. 0: Disabled - Mor accelerates at active acceleration rate. The mor may stall if load is o heavy or accel time is o short. : General Purpose - When output current exceeds L3-0 level, acceleration sps. Acceleration will continue when the output current level falls below the L3-0 level. : Intelligent - The active acceleration rate is ignored. Acceleration is completed in the shortest amount of time without exceeding the current value set in L3-0. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 No A A A No No L3-0 Stall Prevention Level During Acceleration StallP Accel Lvl This function is enabled when L3-0 is "" or "". Drive rated current is 00%. Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs with facry setting % No A A A No No L3-03 Stall Prevention Limit During Acceleration StallP CHP Lvl Sets the lower limit for stall prevention during acceleration, as a percentage of the Drive's rated current, when operation is in the frequency range above E-06 (constant power region) % No A A A No No 6-0

238 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics Time Chart The following figure shows the frequency characteristics when L3-0 is set. Output current Stall level during acceleration Output frequency Time Output frequency is controlled prevent the mor stalling. Time Fig 6. Time Chart for Stall Prevention During Acceleration Precautions If the mor capacity is small compared the Drive capacity, or if the mor is operated using the facry settings, resulting in the mor stalling, lower the set value of L3-0. If using the mor in the constant output range, L3-0 will be aumatically lowered prevent stalling. L3-03 is the limit value prevent the stall prevention level in the constant output range from being reduced more than necessary. Set the parameters as a percent taking the drive rated voltage be 00%. Stall prevention level during acceleration L3-0 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) L3-0 x L3-03 (Stall Prevention Limit during Acceleration) E-06 Base Frequency (FA) Output frequency Fig 6. Stall Prevention Level and Limit During Acceleration 6-

239 Preventing Overvoltage During Deceleration (Stall Prevention During Deceleration Function) The Stall Prevention During Deceleration function makes the rate of deceleration more gentle suppress increases in DC bus voltage when the DC bus voltage exceeds the set value during mor deceleration. This function aumatically lengthens the deceleration time with respect the bus voltage, even if the deceleration time has been set a considerably small value. If L3-04 is set or, when the main circuit DC voltage approaches the stall prevention level during deceleration, deceleration sps, and when deceleration falls below the level, is restarted. Using this operation, deceleration time is aumatically lengthened. If L3-04 is set, deceleration time returns the set value, and if L3-04 is set, deceleration is aumatically adjusted a faster deceleration time within the range of the stall prevention level during deceleration. Related Parameters Parameter Number L3-04 Name Display Stall Prevention Selection During Deceleration StallP Decel Sel Description When using a braking resisr, use setting "0". "3" is used in specific applications. 0: Disabled - The Drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate. If the load is o large or the deceleration time is o short, an OV fault may occur. : General Purpose - The Drive decelerates at the active deceleration rate, but if the main circuit DC bus voltage reaches the stall prevention level (380/ 760Vdc), deceleration will sp. Deceleration will continue once the DC bus level drops below the stall prevention level. : Intelligent - The active deceleration rate is ignored and the Drive decelerates as fast as possible w/o hitting OV fault level. Range: C-0 / 0. 3: Stall Prevention w/ Braking Resisr - Stall prevention during deceleration is enabled in coordination with dynamic braking. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 3 * No Q Q Q Q Q * In Flux or in, the setting range becomes 0. 6-

240 Acceleration and Deceleration Characteristics Example An example of stall prevention during deceleration when L3-04 is set as shown below. Output frequency Deceleration time controlled prevent overvoltage Time Deceleration time (set value) Fig 6.3 Stall Prevention During Deceleration Operation Precautions The stall prevention level during deceleration differs depending on the Drive capacity. Refer the following table for details. Drive Capacity Stall Prevention Level during Deceleration (V) 00-40Vclass Vclass E V 760 E-0 < 400 V 660 When using the braking option (braking resisr, Braking Resisr Units, and Braking Units), be sure set parameter L or 3. To decelerate at a shorter time than the deceleration time set when L3-04 is set 0 with the braking option enabled, set L The setting of L3-04 is ignored for flux vecr control or open-loop vecr control. 6-3

241 Adjusting Frequency References This section explains methods of adjusting frequency references. Adjusting Analog Frequency References Gain and bias are among the parameters used adjust analog inputs. Related Parameters Parameter Number H3-0 Name Display Terminal A Signal Level Selection Term A Lvl Sel Description Sets the signal level of terminal A. 0: 0 0Vdc : -0 +0Vdc [-bit plus polarity sign] Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 or 0 No A A A A A H3-0 Terminal A Gain Terminal A Gain Sets the output level when 0V is input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E-04) % Yes A A A A A H3-03 Terminal A Bias Terminal A Bias Sets the output level when 0V is input, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E-04) % Yes A A A A A H3-04 Terminal A3 Signal Level Selection Term A3 Signal Sets the signal level of terminal A3. 0: 0 0Vdc : -0 +0Vdc 0 or 0 No A A A A A H3-05 Terminal A3 Function Selection Terminal A3 Sel [Refer table "H3-05, H3-09 s" for multi-function selections] 0 F No A A A A A H3-06 Terminal A3 Gain Terminal A3 Gain Sets the output level when 0V is input % Yes A A A A A H3-07 Terminal A3 Bias Terminal A3 Bias Sets the frequency reference when 0V is input % Yes A A A A A 6-4

242 Adjusting Frequency References Parameter Number H3-08 Name Display Terminal A Signal Level Selection Term A Signal Description Selects the signal level of terminal A. 0: 0 0Vdc (switch S- must be in the OFF position). : -0 +0Vdc (switch S- must be in the OFF position). : 4 0mA (switch S- must be in the ON position) Note: Switch between current or voltage inputs by using (S-) switch on the terminal board. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 No A A A A A H3-09 Terminal A Function Selection Terminal A Sel Selects the function of terminal A. Same choices as Terminal A3 Function Selection (H3-05). 0 F 0 No A A A A A H3-0 Terminal A Gain Terminal A Gain Sets the output level when 0V is input % Yes A A A A A H3- Terminal A Bias Terminal A Bias Sets the output level when 0V is input % Yes A A A A A H3- Analog Input Filter Time Constant Filter Avg Time This parameter adjusts the filter on all 3 analog inputs. Increase add stability, decrease improve response sec No A A A A A Adjusting Analog Frequency Reference Using Parameters The frequency reference is input from the control circuit terminals using analog voltage and current. If using frequency reference terminal A as an input terminal, perform adjustments using parameters H3-0 and H3-03. If using multi-function analog input terminal A as a frequency reference terminal, perform adjustments using H3-0 and H3-. Adjustment can be made using H3-06 and H3-07 when multi-function analog input terminal A3 is used as a frequency reference terminal. Frequency reference Frequency reference (H3-06) (H3-07) Terminal A (A3) input voltage Terminal A input voltage (current) Terminal A, A3 input Terminal A input Fig 6.4 Terminals A and A Inputs 6-5

243 Adjusting Frequency Gain Using an Analog Input When H3-09 or H3-05 is set (frequency gain), you can adjust the frequency gain using the analog input terminal A or A3. Frequency gain Multi-function analog input terminal A input level Fig 6.5 Frequency Gain Adjustment (Terminal A Input) The frequency gain for terminal A is the sum of H3-0 and terminal A gain. For example, when H3-0 is set 00% and terminal A is set 5 V, the terminal A frequency reference will be 50%. Frequency reference 00% H3-0 50% 0 0 V Terminal A input voltage Precautions H3-05 cannot be set 0. Adjusting Frequency Bias Using an Analog Input When parameter H3-09 or H3-05 is set 0 (add terminal A), the frequency equivalent the terminal A or A3 input voltage is added A as a bias. Frequency bias Multi-function analog input terminal A or A3 input level Fig 6.6 Frequency Bias Adjustment (Terminal A or A3 Input) 6-6

244 Adjusting Frequency References For example, if H3-0 is 00%, H3-03 is 0%, and terminal A is set V, the frequency reference from terminal A when 0Vis input A will be 0%. Frequency reference H3-0 0% Bias 0 V 0 V Terminal A input voltage Operation Avoiding Resonance (Jump Frequency Function) The jump frequency function operates the mor while avoiding resonance caused by characteristic frequencies in the machinery. This function is effective in creating a frequency reference dead band. During constant-speed operation, operation within the jump frequency range is prohibited. Smooth operation still used during acceleration and deceleration, i.e., jumps are not performed. Related Parameters Parameter Number d3-0 d3-0 d3-03 Name Display Jump Frequency Jump Freq Description This parameter allows programming of up three prohibited frequency reference points for eliminating problems with resonant vibration of the mor / machine. This feature does not actually eliminate the selected frequency values, but will accelerate and decelerate the mor through the prohibited bandwidth. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux Jump Frequency Hz No A A A A A Jump Freq Hz No A A A A A Jump Frequency 3 0.0Hz No A A A A A Jump Freq 3 d3-04 Jump Frequency Width Jump Bandwidth This parameter determines the width of the deadband around each selected prohibited frequency reference point. A setting of ".0" will result in a deadband of +/-.0Hz Hz No A A A A A The relationship between the output frequency and the jump frequency reference is as follows: 6-7

245 Output frequency Frequency reference descending Jump frequency width d3-04 Jump frequency width d3-04 Frequency reference ascending Jump frequency width d3-04 Jump frequency 3 (d3-03) Jump frequency (d3-0) Jump frequency (d3-0) Jump frequency reference Fig 6.7 Jump Frequency Jump Frequency Reference Using an Analog Input When parameter H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) is set A (jump frequency), you can change the jump frequency using the terminal A input level. Max. output frequency E-04 Jump frequency 0 V (4 ma) Multi-function analog input terminal A or A3 input level 0 V (0 ma) Fig 6.8 Jump Frequency Using an Analog Input Precautions Set the jump frequency according the following formula: d3-0 d3-0 d3-03 > Analog input. When parameters d3-0 d3-03 are set 0Hz, the jump frequency function is disabled. 6-8

246 Adjusting Frequency References Adjusting Frequency Reference Using Pulse Train Inputs The frequency reference can be adjusted when b-0 (Reference Selection) is set 4 (Pulse Train Input). Set the pulse frequency in parameter H6-0 00% reference, and then adjust the gain and bias accordingly using H6-03 and H6-04. Related Parameters Parameter Number H6-0 Name Display Terminal RP Pulse Train Input Function Selection Pulse Input Sel Description Selects the function of pulse train terminal RP. 0: Frequency reference : PID feedback value : PID setpoint value Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 0 No A A A A A H6-0 Pulse Train Input Scaling Pulse In Scaling Sets the number of pulses (in Hz) that is equal the maximum output frequency E Hz Yes A A A A A H6-03 Pulse Train Input Gain Pulse Input Gain Sets the output level when the pulse train input is at 00% as a percentage of maximum output frequency E % Yes A A A A A H6-04 Pulse Train Input Bias Pulse Input Bias Sets the output level when the pulse train input is 0Hz as a percentage of maximum output frequency E % Yes A A A A A H6-05 Pulse Train Input Filter Time Pulse In Filter Sets the pulse train input filter time constant in seconds sec Yes A A A A A The following diagram shows the method for adjusting the frequency reference using pulse inputs. Gain and bias Pulse RP Cycle measurement Filter +st H6-05 H6-03 H6-04 0% 00% =0 = = Master speed frequency PID feedback PID target value H6-0 Scaling using H6-0 Fig 6.9 Frequency Reference Adjustments Using Pulse Train Inputs 6-9

247 Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) This section explains how limit the mor speed. Limiting Maximum Output Frequency If you do not want the mor rotate above a given frequency, use parameter d-0. Set the upper limit value of the Drive output frequency as a percent, taking E-04 (Maximum Output Frequency) be 00%. Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux d-0 Frequency Reference Upper Limit Ref Upper Limit Determines maximum frequency reference, set as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E-04). If the frequency reference is above this value, actual Drive speed will be limited this value. This parameter applies all frequency reference sources % No A A A A A 6-30

248 Speed Limit (Frequency Reference Limit Function) Limiting Minimum Frequency If you do not want the mor rotate at below a given frequency, use parameters d-0 or d-03. There are two methods of limiting the minimum frequency, as follows: Adjust the minimum level for all frequencies. Adjust the minimum level for the master speed frequency (i.e., the lower levels of the jog frequency, multistep speed frequency, and auxiliary frequency will not be adjusted). Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux d-0 Frequency Reference Lower Limit Ref Lower Limit Determines maximum frequency reference, set as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E-04). If the frequency reference is above this value, actual Drive speed will be limited this value. This parameter applies all frequency reference sources % No A A A A A d-03 Master Speed Reference Lower Limit Ref Lower Limit Determines maximum frequency reference, set as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E- 04). If the frequency reference is above this value, actual Drive speed will be limited this value. This parameter applies all frequency reference sources % No A A A A A Adjusting Frequency Lower Limit Using an Analog Input If you set parameter H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multifunction Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) 9 (output frequency lower level), you can adjust the frequency lower level using the terminal A input level. Output frequency lower level Max. output frequency E-04 0 V (4 ma) Multi-function analog input terminal A or A3 input level 0 V (0 ma) Fig 6.30 Output Frequency Lower Level for Multi-function Analog Input If parameter d-0 and terminal A output frequency lower level have been set at the same time, the larger set value will become the frequency lower limit. INFO 6-3

249 Improved Operating Efficiency This section explains functions for improving mor operating efficiency. Reducing Mor Speed Fluctuation (Slip Compensation Function) When the load is large, the amount of mor slip also grows large and the mor speed decreases. The slip compensation function controls the mor at a constant speed, regardless of changes in load. When the mor is operating at the rated load, parameter E-0 (Mor Rated Slip) the frequency in parameter C3-0 is added the output frequency. Related Parameters Parameter Number C3-0 Name Display Slip Compensation Gain Slip Comp Gain Description This parameter is used increase mor speed account for mor slip by boosting the output frequency. If the speed is lower than the frequency reference, increase C3-0. If the speed is higher than the frequency reference, decrease C3-0. Note: Adjustment is not normally required. When operating in, this parameter works as a function set the proper amount of gain. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux.0* Yes A No A A A C3-0 Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Slip Comp Time This parameter adjusts the filter on the output of the slip compensation function. Increase add stability, decrease improve response. Reduce the setting when slip compensation response is slow. When speed is not stabilized, increase the setting ms * No A No A No No C3-03 Slip Compensation Limit Slip Comp Limit This parameter sets the upper limit for the slip compensation function. It is set as a percentage of mor rated slip (E-0) % No A No A No No C3-04 Slip Compensation Selection During Regeneration Slip Comp Regen Determines whether slip compensation is enabled or disabled during regenerative operation. 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 or 0 No A No A No No 6-3 C3-05 Output Voltage Limit Operation Selection Output V limit Determines if the mor magnetic flux is aumatically decreased when output voltage saturation occurs. 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 or 0 * No No No A A A * The display shows the facry settings for. Default settings will change in accordance with the control mode. *. Facry default changes based on mor control mode.

250 Improved Operating Efficiency Adjusting Slip Compensation Gain You can switch the C3-0 parameter settings as shown below by changing the control method. control without PG: 0.0 -loop vecr control:.0 Flux vecr control:.0 Set C3-0.0 compensate the rated slip set using the rated rque output status. Adjust the slip compensation gain using the following procedure.. Set E-0 (Mor Rated Slip) and E-03 (Mor No-load Current) correctly. You can calculate the mor rated slip from the values on the mor nameplate using the following formula. Amount of mor rated slip (Hz) = Mor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (min.) No. of mor poles / 0 Set the values for rated voltage, rated frequency, and no-load current in the mor unladen current. The mor rated slip is set aumatically in the vecr control using autuning.. In control, set C this parameter 0.0 disables slip compensation. 3. Apply a load, and measure the speed adjust the slip compensation gain. Adjust the slip compensation gain by 0. at a time. If the speed is less than the target value, increase the slip compensation gain, and if the speed is greater than the target value, reduce the slip compensation gain. For flux vecr control, the slip compensation gain is used as the mor temperature compensation gain. When the mor temperate increases, the mor s internal constant increases, resulting in an increase in slip. If C3-0 is set, the amount of slip is adjusted as the temperature rises. Set C3-0 if the amount of rque varies with the temperature when using rque control or a rque limit. The larger the value of C3-0, the larger the compensation. Adjusting Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant Set the slip compensation primary delay time constant in ms. You can switch the facry settings as follows by changing the control method. control without PG: 000ms -loop vecr control: 00ms Normally, there is no need make these settings. When the slip compensation response is low, lower the set value. When the speed is unstable, increase the set value. Adjusting Slip Compensation Limit Set the upper limit for the slip compensation amount as a percent, taking the mor rated slip amount as 00%. If the speed is lower than the target value but does not change even when you adjust the slip compensation gain, the mor may have reached the slip compensation limit. Increase the limit, and check the speed again. Make the settings, however, make sure that the value of the slip compensation limit and reference frequency does not exceed the lerance of the machine. The following diagram shows the slip compensation limit for the constant rque range and fixed output range. 6-33

251 Slip compensation limit Output frequency E-06: Base frequency E-04: Maximum output frequency Fig 6.3 Slip Compensation Limit Selecting Slip Compensation Function During Regeneration Set whether enable or disable the slip compensation function during regeneration. If the slip compensation function operates during regeneration, you might have use the braking option (braking resisr, Braking Resisr Unit, and Braking Unit) momentarily increase the regenerative amount. Selecting Output Voltage Limit Operation If output voltage saturation occurs while the output voltage limit operation is disabled, the output current will not change, but rque control accuracy will be lost. If rque control accuracy is required, change the settings enable the output voltage limit operation. If the output voltage limit operation is enabled, mor magnetic flux current is controlled aumatically, and rque control accuracy is maintained limit the output voltage references. Consequently, the output current will increase by approximately 0% maximum (with rated load) compared with when the output voltage limit operation is disabled, so check the Drive current margin. Precautions If using the device at medium low speed only, if the power supply voltage is 0% or more higher than the mor rated voltage, or if the rque control accuracy at high speeds is insufficient, it is not necessary change the output voltage limit operation. If the power supply voltage is o low compared with the mor rated voltage, rque control accuracy may be lost even if the output voltage limit operation is enabled. 6-34

252 Improved Operating Efficiency Compensating for Insufficient Torque at Startup and Low-speed Operation (Torque Compensation) The rque compensation function detects that the mor load has increased, and increases the output rque. control calculates and adjusts the mor primary loss voltage according the output voltage (V), and compensates for insufficient rque at startup and during low-speed operation. Calculate the compensation voltage as follows: Mor primary voltage loss parameter C4-0. control separates the mor excitation current and the rque current by calculating the mor primary current, and controlling each of the two separately. Calculate the rque current as follows: Calculated rque reference C4-0 Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux C4-0 Torq Comp Gain Torq Comp Gain This parameter sets the gain for the Drive's aumatic rque boost function match the Drive's output voltage the mor load. This parameter helps produce better starting rque. It determines the amount of rque or voltage boost based upon mor current, mor resistance, and output frequency. Note: Adjustment is not normally required Yes A A A No No C4-0 Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Torq Comp Time This parameter adjusts the filter on the output of the rque compensation function. Increase add stability, decrease improve response. Note: Adjustment is not normally required ms * No A A A No No * The display shows the facry settings for loop vecr (OLV). Default settings will change in accordance with the control mode. 6-35

253 Adjusting Torque Compensation Gain Normally, there is no need make this adjustment. Do not adjust the rque compensation gain when using open-loop vecr control. Adjust the rque compensation gain using control in the following circumstances. If the cable is very long, increase the set value. If the (maximum applicable) mor capacity is smaller than the Drive capacity, increase the set value. If the mor is vibrating, reduce the set value. Adjust this parameter so that the output current during low-speed rotation does not exceed the Drive rated output current range. Adjusting the Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant Set the rque compensation function primary delay in ms. You can switch the facry settings as follows by changing the control method settings: control without PG: 00ms control with PG: 00ms -loop vecr control: 0ms Normally, there is no need make this setting. Adjust the parameter as shown below. If the mor is vibrating, increase the set value. If the mor response is low, decrease the set value. 6-36

254 Improved Operating Efficiency Hunting-prevention Function The hunting-prevention function suppresses hunting when the mor is operating with a light load. This function can be used in without PG and with PG. Related Parameters Parameter Number n-0 Name Display Hunting Prevention Selection Hunt Prev Select Description If the mor vibrates while lightly loaded, hunting prevention may reduce the vibration. 0: Disabled : Enabled Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 or No A A No No No n-0 Hunting Prevention Gain Hunt Prev Gain Sets the gain for the Hunting Prevention Function. If the mor vibrates while lightly loaded and n-0=, increase the gain by 0. until vibration ceases. If the mor stalls while n-0=, decrease the gain by 0. until the stalling ceases No A A No No No 6-37

255 Stabilizing Speed (Speed Feedback Detection Function) The speed feedback detection control (AFR) function measures the stability of the speed when a load is suddenly applied, by calculating the amount of fluctuation of the rque current feedback value, and compensating the output frequency with the amount of fluctuation. Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux n-0 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Gain AFR Gain Sets the internal speed feedback detection control gain in the aumatic frequency regular (AFR). Normally, there is no need change this setting. Adjust this parameter as follows: - If hunting occurs, increase the set value. - If response is low, decrease the set value. Adjust the setting by 0.05 units at a time, while checking the response No No No A No No n-0 Speed Feedback Detection Control (AFR) Time Constant Sets the time constant control the rate of change in the speed feedback detection control ms No No No A No No AFR Time 6-38

256 Machine Protection Machine Protection This section explains functions for protecting the machine. Reducing Noise and Leakage Current The switching frequency of the Drive s output transisr can be changed reduce carrier noise and leakage current from the mor. Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux C6-0 Carrier Frequency Selection CarrierFreq Sel Selects the number of pulses per second of the output voltage waveform. range determined by C6-0 setting. 0: Low noise : Fc =.0 khz : Fc = 5.0 khz 3: Fc = 8.0 khz 4: Fc = 0.0 khz 5: Fc =.5 khz 6: Fc = 5.0 khz OF: Program (Determined by the settings of C6-03 thru C6-05) F 6 * No Q Q Q A No *5 C6-03 C6-04 C6-05 Carrier Frequency Upper Limit CarrierFreq Max Carrier Frequency Lower Limit CarrierFreq Min Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain CarrierFreq Gain Sets the carrier frequency upper limit and lower limit in khz units. The carrier frequency gain is set as follows: Carrier frequency Output frequency x (C6-05) x K Output frequency (Max. output frequency) K is a coefficient that depends on the setting of C6-03. C khz: K = khz > C khz: K = 5.0 khz > C6-03: K = Maximum carrier frequency allowed when C6-0 = F. Note: Carrier frequency is set C6-03 (upper limit) when operating in Control Mode *3 * *3 * *4 5.0 khz * 5.0 khz * No A A A A No No A A No No No 00 No A A No No No C6-05 Sets the relationship of output frequency carrier frequency when C6-0 = OF. C6- Carrier Frequency Selection for Carrier Freq Sel Selects the carrier frequency during Control wo/pg. : khz (3-phase modulation) : 4kHz (3-phase modulation) 3: 6kHz (3-phase modulation) 4: 8kHz (3-phase modulation) 4 4 * No No *5 No *5 No *5 No *5 Q *. The setting range depends on the control method of the Drive. *. The facry setting depends on the capacity of the Drive. * 3. The setting range depends on the capacity of the Drive. * 4. This parameter can be monired or set only when is set for C6-0 and F is set for C6-0. * 5. Displayed in Quick Programming Mode when mor is set for a multi-function input. 6-39

257 Control Mode and Carrier Frequency s Carrier frequency settings are restricted as listed in the following table according the control mode selection. Control Mode Carrier Frequency :.0 khz : 5.0 khz 3: 8.0 khz 4: 0.0 khz control with or without a PG 5:.5 khz 6: 5.0 khz F: Any setting* Detailed settings are available in C6-03, C6-04, and C loop vecr control or Flux vecr control -loop vecr control * The upper limit of the carrier frequency depends on the Drive capacity. :.0 khz : 5.0 khz 3: 8.0 khz 4: 0.0 khz 5:.5 khz 6: 5.0 khz F: Any setting* The upper limit of the carrier frequency is determined by C6-03. :.0 khz : 4.0 khz 3: 6.0 khz 4: 8.0 khz Carrier Frequency Precautions When selecting the carrier frequency, observe the following precautions. Adjust the carrier frequency according the cases shown below. If the wiring distance between Drive and mor is long: Set the carrier frequency low. (Use the following values as guidelines.) Wiring Length 50 m or less 00 m or less Over 00 m C6-0 (carrier frequency selection) setting 6 (5 khz) 4 (0 khz) (5 khz) If speed and rque are inconsistent at low speeds: Set the carrier frequency low. If leakage current from the Drive is large: Set the carrier frequency low. If metallic noise from the mor is large: Set the carrier frequency high. When using control or control with PG, you can vary the carrier frequency according the output frequency, as shown in the following diagram, by setting C6-03 (Carrier Frequency Upper Limit), C6-04 (Carrier Frequency Lower Limit), and C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain). Carrier Frequency C6-03 C6-04 Output frequency C6-05 K* * K is the coefficient determined by the set value in C6-03. C khz: K=3 0.0 khz > C khz: K= 5.0 khz > C6-03: K= Output frequency E-04 Max. Output Frequency 6-40 Fig 6.3

258 Machine Protection With vecr control, the carrier frequency is fixed the Carrier Frequency Upper Limit in C6-03 if userset or by the carrier frequency set in C6-0. To fix the carrier frequency, set C6-03 and C6-04 the same value, or set C If the settings are as shown below, OPE (Parameter setting error) will occur. If Carrier Frequency Proportional Gain (C6-05) > 6 and C6-03 < C6-04. Depending on the carrier frequency setting, the Drive s overload level may be reduced. Even when the overload current falls below 50%, OL (Drive overload) will be detected. The Drive overload current reduction level is shown below. Overload reduction level 00% 80% 00V 級 kw V, kw 50% 0 0kHz 5kHz Carrier frequency Fig 6.33 Overload Reduction Level for Control, Control with PG, -loop Control, and Flux Control Overload reduction level 00% 87% V, kw 50% 0 4kHz 8kHz Carrier frequency Fig 6.34 Overload Reduction Level for -loop Control 6-4

259 Limiting Mor Torque (Torque Limit Function) The mor rque limit function is enabled only with open-loop rque control. In the open-loop vecr control method, the user-set value is applied the rque limit by calculating internally the rque output by the mor. Enable this function if you do not want a rque above a specified amount be applied the load, or if you do not want a regeneration value above a specified amount occur. Related Parameters Parameter Number L7-0 Name Forward Torque Limit Torq Limit Fwd Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux % No No No A A A L7-0 L7-03 L7-04 Reverse Torque Sets the rque limit value as a percentage Limit of the mor rated rque. Four individual quadrants can be set % No No No A A A Torq Limit Rev Output rque Positive rque Forward Regenerative Torque Reverse state rotations No. of Regenerative mor Limit Forward % No No No A A A Torq Lmt Fwd Rgn Regenerative state Negative rque Reverse Regenerative Torque Limit % No No No A A A Torq Lmt Rev Rgn Multi-function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09) Value Function Contents (00%) Control Methods Note The forward rque limit is the limit value when the analog input signal generates forward rque. This rque limit setting is enabled even when the analog input signal generates forward rque while the mor is operating (regeneration). with PG Flux 0 Positive rque limit Mor's rated rque No No Yes Yes Yes Negative rque limit Mor's rated rque No No Yes Yes Yes Regenerative rque limit Mor's rated rque No No Yes Yes Yes 5 Positive/negative rque limit Mor's rated rque No No Yes Yes Yes 6-4

260 Machine Protection the Torque Limit in Parameters Using L7-0 L7-04, you can set individually four rque limits in the following directions: Forward drive, reverse drive, forward regeneration, and reverse regeneration. Set the Torque Limit Value Using an Analog Input You can change the analog input level rque limit value by setting the rque limit in multi-function analog input terminals A and A3. The analog input terminal signal level is facry-set as follows: Multi-function analog input terminal A: 4 0mA Multi-function analog input terminal A3: 0 0 The following diagram shows the relationship between the rque limits. Output rque Positive Positive/negative rque limits Forward rque limit Regenerative rque limit Reverse operation Negative rque limit Negative No. of mor rotations Forward operation Regenerative rque limit Positive/negative rque limits Fig 6.35 Torque Limit by Analog Input Torque Limits Using Parameters and an Analog Input The following block diagram shows the relationship between rque limit using parameters and rque limit using an analog input. Multi-function analog input Forward rque limit Terminal (set value = 0) A or A3 Negative rque limit (set value = ) Regenerative rque limit (set value = ) Positive/negative rque limit (set value = 5) Forward rque limit (L7-0) Positive forward drive rque Reverse drive reverse rque Reverse positive regenerative rque Forward negative regenerative rque Min: Minimum value priority circuit Forward rque limit Parame- Reverse rque limit (L7-0) Forward regenerative rque limit (L7-03) Reverse regenerative rque limit (L7-04) 75% of Drive rated current Reverse rque limit Forward regenerative rque limit Reverse regenerative rque limit Fig 6.36 Torque Limit Using Parameters and an Analog Input 6-43

261 Precautions When the rque limit function is operating, control and compensation of the mor speed is disabled because rque control is given priority. When using the rque limit raise and lower loads, do not carelessly lower the rque limit value, as this may result in the mor falling or slipping. Torque limits using an analog input are the upper limit value (during 0Vor 0mA input) of 00% of the mor rated rque. To make the rque limit value during 0Vor 0mA input 50% of the rated rque, set the input terminal gain 50.0 (%). Adjust the gain for multi-function analog input terminal A using H3-0 and for multi-function analog input terminal A3 using H3-06. The rque limit accuracy is ±5% at the output frequency of 0Hz or above. When output frequency is less than 0Hz, accuracy is lowered. Preventing Mor Stalling During Operation Stall prevention during operation prevents the mor from stalling by aumatically lowering the Drive's output frequency when a transient overload occurs while the mor is operating at a constant speed. Stall prevention during operation is enabled only during control. If the Drive output current continues exceed the setting in parameter L3-06 for 00ms or longer, the mor speed is reduced. Set whether enable or disable deceleration time using parameter L3-05. Set the deceleration time using C-0 (Acceleration time ) or C-04 (Acceleration Time ). If the Drive output current reaches the set value in L % (Drive Rated Output Current), the mor will accelerate again at the frequency set or the acceleration time set. Related Parameters Parameter Number L3-05 Name Display Stall Prevention Selection During Running StallP Run Sel Description Selects the stall prevention method use prevent Drive faults during run. 0: Disabled - Drive runs a set frequency. A heavy load may cause the Drive trip on an OC or OL fault. : Decel Time - In order avoid stalling during heavy loading, the Drive will decelerate at Decel time (C-0) if the output current exceeds the level set by L3-06. Once the current level drops below the L3-06 level, the Drive will accelerate back its frequency reference at the active acceleration rate. : Decel Time - Same as setting except the Drive decelerates at Decel Time (C-04). When output frequency is 6Hz or less, stall prevention during run is disabled regardless of the setting in L3-05. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 No A A No No No 6-44 L3-06 Stall Prevention Level During Running StallP Run Level This parameter is enabled when L3-05 is set "" or "". Drive rated current is set as 00%. Decrease the set value if stalling or excessive current occurs with the facry settings % No A A No No No

262 Machine Protection Changing Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input If you set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) 8 (stall prevention level during run), you can change the stall level during operation by setting H3-0 (Gain (Terminal A)) and H3- (Bias (Terminal A)) or H3-06 (Gain (Terminal A3)) and H3-07 (Bias (Terminal A3). The stall prevention level during operation enabled is the multi-function analog input terminal A or A3 input level or the set value in parameter L3-06, whichever is the smaller. Stall prevention level during operation (4 ma)(8.8 ma) (0 ma) Multi-function analog input terminal A, A3 input level Fig 6.37 Stall Prevention Level during Operation Using an Analog Input If the mor capacity is smaller than the Drive capacity or the mor stalls when operating at the facry settings, lower the stall prevention level during operation. INFO Detecting Mor Torque If an excessive load is placed on the machinery (overrque) or the load is suddenly lightened (underrque), you can output an alarm signal multi-function output terminal M-M, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, or P4-C4. To use the overrque/underrque detection function, set B, 7, 8, 9 (overrque/underrque detection NO/ NC) in one of the following parameters: H-0 H-05 (multi-function output terminals M-M, P-PC, P- PC, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection). The overrque/underrque detection level is the current level (Drive rated output current 00%) in control, and the mor rque (mor rated rque 00%) in vecr control. 6-45

263 Related Parameters Parameter Number L6-0 Name Display Torque Detection Selection Torq Det Sel Description Determines the Drive's response an Overrque/Underrque condition. Overrque and Underrque are determined by the settings in parameters L6-0 and L6-03. The multi-function output settings "B" and "7" in the H-oo parameter group are also active if programmed. 0: Disabled : OL3 at Speed Agree - Alarm (Overrque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection). : OL3 at RUN - Alarm (Overrque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection). 3: OL3 at Speed Agree - Fault (Overrque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault). 4: OL3 at RUN - Fault (Overrque Detection is always active and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault). 5: UL3 at Speed Agree - Alarm (Underrque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after detection). 6: UL3 at RUN - Alarm (Underrque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection). 7: UL3 at Speed Agree - Fault (Underrque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault). 8: UL3 at RUN - Fault (Underrque Detection is always active and Drive output will shut down on an OL3 fault). Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux No A A A A A L6-0 Torque Detection Level Torq Det Lvl Sets the Overrque/Underrque detection level as a percentage of Drive rated current or rque for Torque Detection. Current detection for A-0 = 0 or. Torque detection for A-0 = or % No A A A A A 6-46

264 Machine Protection Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux L6-03 Torque Detection Time Torq Det Time Sets the length of time an Overrque/Underrque condition must exist before Torque Detection is recognized by the Drive sec No A A A A A L6-04 Torque Detection Selection Torq Det Sel Determines the Drive's response an Overrque/Underrque condition. Overrque and Underrque are determined by the settings in parameters L6-05 and L6-06. The multi-function output settings "8" and "9" in the H-oo parameter group are also active if programmed. 0: Disabled : OL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm (Overrque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Operation continues after detection). : OL4 at RUN - Alarm (Overrque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection). 3: OL4 at Speed Agree - Fault (Overrque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault). 4: OL4 at RUN - Fault (Overrque Detection is always active and Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault). 5: UL4 at Speed Agree - Alarm (Underrque Detection is only active during Speed Agree and operation continues after detection). 6: UL4 at RUN - Alarm (Underrque Detection is always active and operation continues after detection). 7: UL4 at Speed Agree - Fault (Underrque Detection only active during Speed Agree and Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault). 8: UL4 at RUN - Fault (Underrque Detection is always active and Drive output will shut down on an OL4 fault) No A A A A A L6-05 Torque Detection Level Torq Det Lvl Sets the Overrque/Underrque detection level as a percentage of Drive rated current or rque for Torque Detection. Current detection for A-0 = 0 or. Torque detection for A-0 = or % No A A A A A 6-47

265 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux L6-06 Torque Detection Time Torq Det Time Sets the length of time an Overrque/Underrque condition must exist before rque detection is recognized by the Drive sec No A A A A A Multi-function Output (H-0 H-05) Value B Function Overrque/underrque detection NO (NO contact: Overrque/underrque detection at ON) Control Methods with PG Flux Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 7 Overrque/underrque detection NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 8 Overrque/underrque detection NO (NO Contact: Torque detection at ON) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 Overrque/underrque detection NC (NC Contact: Torque detection at OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes L6-0 and L6-04 Set Values and LCD Indications The relationship between alarms displayed by the Digital Operar when overrque or underrque is detected, and the set values in L6-0 and L6-04, is shown in the following table. Set Value Function LCD Indications Overrque/ Underrque Detection Overrque/ Underrque Detection 0 Overrque/underrque detection disabled. - - Overrque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after overrque (warning). OL3 flashes OL4 flashes Overrque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overrque (warning). Overrque detection only with speed matching; output spped upon detection (protected operation). Overrque detected continuously during operation; output spped upon detection (protected operation). Underrque detection only with speed matching; operation continues after overrque (warning). Underrque detected continuously during operation; operation continues after overrque (warning). Underrque detection only with speed matching; output spped upon detection (protected operation). Underrque detected continuously during operation; output spped upon detection (protected operation). OL3 flashes OL3 lit OL3 lit UL3 flashes UL3 flashes UL3 lit UL3 lit OL4 flashes OL4 lit OL4 lit UL4 flashes UL4 flashes UL4 lit UL4 lit 6-48

266 Machine Protection Example The following diagram shows the time chart for overrque and underrque detection. Overrque Detection Mor current (output rque) L6-0 or L6-05 * * Overrque detection NO or overrque detection NO L6-03 or L6-06 ON L6-03 or L6-06 ON Underrque Detection * Overrque detection disabled band is approximately 0% of the Inverter rated output current (or mor rated rque). Mor current (output rque) L6-0 or L6-05 * Underrque detection NO or Underrque detection NO L6-03 or L6-06 ON L6-03 or L6-06 ON * The underrque detection disabled margin is approximately 0% of the Inverter rated output current (or mor rated rque) 6-49

267 Changing Overrque and Underrque Detection Levels Using an Analog Input If you set parameter H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multifunction Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) 7 (overrque/underrque detection level), you can change the overrque/underrque detection level. If you change the overrque/underrque detection level using the multi-function analog input, only overrque/underrque detection level will be enabled. The following diagram shows the overrque/underrque detection level using an analog input. Detection level (4 ma) (0 ma) Multi-function analog input terminal A, A3 input level Fig 6.38 Overrque/Underrque Detection Level Using an Analog Input Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09) Value 7 Function Contents (00%) Overrque/underrque detection level Mor rated rque for vecr control Drive rated output current for control Control Methods with PG Flux Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-50

268 Machine Protection Mor Overload Protection You can protect the mor from overload using the Drive's built-in electronic thermal overload relay. Related Parameters Parameter Number E-0 E4-0 L-0 L-0 Name Display Mor Rated Current Mor Rated FLA Mor Rated Current Mor Rated FLA Mor Overload Protection Selection MOL Fault Select Mor Overload Protection Time MOL Time Const Description Sets the mor nameplate full load current in amperes (A). This value is aumatically set during Au- Tuning. Sets the mor name plate full load current in amperes (A). This value is aumatically set during Au-Tuning. Sets the mor thermal overload protection (OL) based on the cooling capacity of the mor. 0: Disabled : Standard Fan Cooled (< 0: mor) : Standard Blower Cooled ( 0: mor) 3: Mor ( 000: mor)in some applications when the Drive power supply is turned off, the thermal value is reset, so even if this parameter is set, protection may not be effective. When several mors are connected one Drive, set 0 and ensure that each mor is installed with a protection device. Sets the mor thermal overload protection (OL) time. A larger L-0 time will increase the time before an OL fault will occur. Range * * Facry.90 A *.90 A * Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux No Q Q Q Q Q No A A A A A 0 3 No Q Q Q Q Q min No A A A A A *. Facry settings will vary based on drive capacity (values given here are for 00-40V class, 0.4kW). *. range is 0% 00% of the drive's rated output current (values given here are for 00-40V class, 0.4kW). Multi-Function Outputs (H-0 H-05) Value F Function Mor overload (OL, including OH3) pre-alarm (ON: 90% or more of the detection level) Control Methods with PG Flux Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-5

269 Mor Rated Current Set the rated current value on the mor nameplate in parameters E-0 (for mor ) and E4-0 (for mor ). This set value is the electronic thermal base current. Mor Overload Protection Characteristics Set the overload protection function in L-0 according the applicable mor. The induction mor's cooling abilities differ according the speed control range. Consequently, you must select the electronic thermal protection characteristics match the applicable mor's lerance load characteristics. The following table shows the mor type and lerance load characteristics. L-0 Set Value Mor Type Tolerance Load Characteristics Cooling Ability Electronic Thermal Operation (at 00% Mor Load) Short time 60 s. Rated rotation speed = 00% speed General-purpose mor (standard mor) Torque (%) 3.7 kw max kw 8.5 kw min. 80% ED or Frame number Max. 30 min. speed of 00 LJ min. 50% ED or 30 min. Continuous Frame number Max. speed of Frame number Max. 00 LJ speed of 60 MJ 60 LJ min. Frame number Max. speed of 3 MJ Use this mor for operations using a commercial power supply. This mor construction yields best cooling effect when operating at 50/ 60 Hz. When operating continuously at 50/60Hz or less, mor overload detection (OL) is detected. The Drive outputs the error contact, and the mor coasts a sp. Rotation speed (%) Short time 60 Rated rotation speed = 00% speed Drive mor (constant rque) (:0) Torque (%) Continuous Frame number Max. speed of 00 LJ min. Frame number Max. speed of 60 MJ 80 LJ Frame number Max. speed of 3 MJ This mor yields a cooling effect even when operating at low speeds (approx. 6Hz). Operates continuously at 6 50/60Hz. Rotation speed (%) Short time 60 s. Rated rotation speed = 00% speed 3 mor (:00) Torque (%) Continuous Frame number Max. speed of 00 LJ min. Frame number Max. speed of 60 MJ 80 LJ Frame number Max. speed of 3 MJ This mor yields a cooling effect even when operating at extremely low speeds (approx. 0.6Hz). Operates continuously at Hz. 6-5 Rotation speed (%)

270 Machine Protection Mor Protection Operation Time Set the mor protection operation time in L-0. If, after operating the mor continuously at the rated current, a 50% overload is experienced, set the (hot start) electronic thermal protection operation time. The facry setting is resistance 50% for 60 seconds. The following diagram shows an example of the characteristics of the electronic thermal protection operation time (L-0 =.0 min., operation at 60Hz, general-purpose mor characteristics, when L-0 is set ) Operating time (min.) Cold start Hot start Mor current (%) E-0 is set 00% Fig 6.39 Mor Protection Operation Time Precautions If multiple mors are connected one Drive, set parameter L-0 0 (disabled). To protect the mor, install a thermal relay in the mor power cable, and perform overload protection on each mor. With applications where the power supply is often turned ON and OFF, there is a risk that the circuit cannot be protected even if this parameter has been set (enabled), because the thermal value will be reset. To detect overloads in good time, set the set value in parameter L-0 a low setting. When using a general-purpose mor (standard mor), the cooling ability will be lowered by f /4 (frequency). Consequently, the frequency may cause mor overload protection (OL) occur, even below the rated current. If operating using the rated current at a low frequency, use a special mor. the Mor Overload Pre-Alarm If the mor overload protection function is enabled (i.e., L-0 is set other than 0) and you set H-0 H-05 (multi-function output terminals M-M, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) F (mor overload OL pre-alarm), the mor overload pre-alarm will be enabled. If the electronic thermal value reaches minimum 90% of the overload detection level, the output terminal that has been set will be turned ON. 6-53

271 Mor Overheating Protection Using PTC Thermisr Inputs Perform mor overheating protection using the thermisr temperature resistance characteristics of the PTC (Positive Temperature Coefficient) built in the windings of each mor phase. Related Parameters Parameter Number L-03 Name Display Mor Overheat Alarm Operation Selection MOL Thm Input Description Sets operation selection when the mor temperature analog input (H3-09 = E) exceeds the OH3 alarm level (.7V) 0: Ramp Sp : Coast Sp : Fast-Sp 3: Alarm Only Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux No A A A A A L-04 Mor Overheat Fault Operation Selection MOL Filter Time Sets spping method when the mor temperature analog input (H3-09 = E) exceeds the OH4 fault level (.34V). 0: Ramp Sp : Coast Sp : Fast-Sp 0 No A A A A A L-05 Mor Temperature Input Filter Time MOL Filter Time This parameter adjusts the filter on the mor temperature analog input (H3-09 = E). Increase add stability, decrease improve response sec No A A A A A 6-54

272 Machine Protection PTC Thermisr Characteristics The following diagram shows the characteristics of the PTC thermisr temperature the resistance value. Resistance (ohms) Class F 50 C Class H 80 C Tr: Temperature threshold value Temperature Tr Tr+5 Fig 6.40 PTC Thermisr Temperature-Resistance Value Characteristics Operation during Mor Overheating Set the operation if the mor overheats in parameters L-03 and L-04. Set the mor temperature input filter time parameter in L-05. If the mor overheats, the OH3 and OH4 error codes will be displayed on the Digital Operar. Error Codes If the Mor Overheats Error Code OH3 OH4 Details Drive sps or continues operate, according the setting in L-03. Drive sps according the setting in L-04. By setting H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A Function Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) E (Mor temperature input), you can detect alarm OH3 or OH4 using the PTC temperature-resistance characteristics, and protect the mor. The terminal connections are shown in the following diagram. 6-55

273 Drive Multi-function contact input Multi-function contact output Fault contact output Branch resistance 8 kω PTC thermisr P3 C3 P4 Multi-function PHC output C4 Fig 6.4 Mutual Connections During Mor Overheating Protection Limiting Mor Rotation Direction If you set mor reverse rotation prohibited, a reverse run command will not be accepted even if it is input. Use this setting for applications in which reverse mor rotation can cause problems (e.g., fans, pumps, etc.) Related Parameters Parameter Number b-04 Name Display Reverse Operation Selection Reverse Oper Description Determines the forward rotation of the mor, and if reverse operation is disabled. 0: Reverse enabled. : Reverse disabled. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 0 No A A A A A 6-56

274 Continuing Operation Continuing Operation This section explains functions for continuing or aumatically restarting Drive operation even if an error occurs. Restarting Aumatically After Power Is Resred Even if a temporary power loss occurs, you can restart the Drive aumatically after power is resred continue mor operation. To restart the Drive after power is resred, set L-0 or. If L-0 is set, when power is resred within the time set in L-0, the Drive will restart. If the time set in L-0 is exceeded, alarm UV (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected. If L-0 is set, when the main power supply is resred while the control power supply (i.e., power supply the control panel) is backed up, the Drive will restart. Consequently, alarm UV (main circuit undervoltage) will not be detected. 6-57

275 Related Parameters Parameter Number L-0 Name Display Momentary Power Loss Detection Selection PwrL Selection Description Enables and disables the momentary power loss function. 0: Disabled - Drive trips on (UV) fault when power is lost. : Power Loss Ride Thru Time - Drive will restart if power returns within the time set in L-0.* : CPU Power Active - Drive will restart if power returns prior control power supply shut down.* Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 0 No A A A A A L-0 Momentary Power Loss Ride-thru Time PwrL Ridethru t Sets the power loss ride-thru time. This value is dependent on the capacity of the Drive. Only effective when L-0 = sec * No A A A A A L-03 Momentary Power Loss Minimum Base Block Time PwrL Baseblock t Sets the minimum time wait allow the residual mor voltage decay before the Drive output turns back on during power loss ride thru. After a power loss, if L-03 is greater than L-0, operation resumes after the time set in L sec * No A A A A A L-04 Momentary Power Loss Voltage Recovery Ramp Time PwrL V/F Ramp t Sets the time it takes the output voltage return the preset pattern after speed search (current detection mode) is complete sec * No A A A A A L-05 Undervoltage Detection Level PUV Det Level Sets the Drive's DC Bus undervoltage trip level. If this is set lower than the facry setting, additional AC input reactance or DC bus reactance may be necessary. Consult the facry before changing this parameter setting *3 90Vdc *3 No A A A A A * In order for a restart occur, the run command must be maintained throughout the ride thru period. * Facry settings will vary based on drive capacity (values given here are for 00-40V class, 0.4kW). *3 value for 00-40V class. Double the value when working with V class drives Precautions Error output signals are not output during momentary power loss recovery. To continue Drive operation after power has been resred, make settings so that run commands from the control main circuit terminal are sred even while power is suspended. If the momentary power loss operation selection is set 0 (Disabled), when the momentary power loss exceeds 5ms during operation, alarm UV (main circuit undervoltage) will be detected.

276 Continuing Operation Speed Search The speed search function finds the actual speed of the mor that is rotating using inertia, and then starts smoothly from that speed. When resring power after a temporary power loss, the speed search function switches connection from the commercial power supply, and then restarts the fan that is rotating using inertia. Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux Speed search selection (current detection or speed calculation) Enables/disables the speed search function for the run command and sets the speed search method. 0:Disabled, speed calculation : Enabled, speed calculation : Disabled, current detection 3: Enabled, current detection b3-0 SpdSrch at Start Speed Calculation: When the search is started, the mor speed is calculated and acceleration/deceleration is performed from the calculated speed the specified frequency (mor direction is also searched). 0 3 * No A A A No A Current Detection: The speed search is started from the frequency when power was momentarily lost and the maximum frequency, and the speed is detected at the search current level. b3-0 Speed search operating current (current detection) SpdSrch Current Sets the speed search operation current as a percentage, taking the Drive rated current as 00%. Not usually necessary set. When restarting is not possible with the facry settings, reduce the value % * No A No A No A b3-03 Speed search deceleration time (current detection) SpdSrch Dec Time Sets the output frequency deceleration time during speed search in -second units. Set the time for deceleration from the maximum output frequency the minimum output frequency sec No A No A No No b3-05 Speed search wait time (current detection or speed calculation) Search Delay Sets the contacr operating delay time when there is a contacr on the output side of the Drive. When a speed search is performed after recovering from a momentary power loss, the search operation is delayed by the time set here sec No A A A A A 6-59

277 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux L-03 Min. baseblock time PwrL Baseblock t Sets the Drive's minimum baseblock time in units of one second, when the Drive is restarted after power loss ridethrough. Sets the time approximately 0.7 times the mor secondary circuit time parameter. When an overcurrent or overvoltage occurs when starting a speed search or DC injection braking, increase the set values sec *3 No A A A A A L-04 Voltage recovery time PwrL V/F Ramp t Sets the time required return the Drive output voltage normal voltage at the completion of a speed search, in units of one second. Sets the time required recover from 0V the maximum voltage sec *3 No A A A A A *. The facry setting will change when the control method is changed (-loop vecr control facry settings are given). *. The facry setting will change when the control method is changed. Set 3 in with PG. * 3. Facry settings depend on Drive capacity (The values shown are for a 00-40V Class Drive for 0.4kW). Multi-function Contact Inputs (H-0 H-0) Value Function Control Methods with PG Flux 6 External search command (ON: Speed search from maximum output frequency) Yes No Yes No Yes 6 External search command (ON: Speed search from set frequency) Yes No Yes No Yes 6-60

278 Continuing Operation Precautions When both external search commands and are set for the multi-function contact terminals, an OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selection) operation error may occur. Set either external search command or external search command. If speed search during startup is selected when using control with PG, the Unit will start from the frequency detected by PG. If performing speed search using external search commands, add an external sequence so that the period when the run command and external search command are both ON is at the very least the Minimum Baseblock Time (L-03). If the Drive output is equipped with a contact, set the contact operation delay time in the Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05). The facry setting is 0. s. When not using the contact, you can reduce the search time by making the setting 0.0 s. After waiting for the speed search wait time, the Drive starts the speed search. Parameter b3-0 is a current detection speed search (current detection level for search completion). When the current falls below the detection level, the speed search is viewed as completed, and the mor accelerates or decelerates the set frequency. If the mor cannot restart, lower the set value. If an overcurrent (OC) is detected when using speed search after recovery following a power loss, lengthen the Minimum Baseblock Time (L-03). Application Precautions for Speed Searches Using Estimated Speed When using control with or without a PG, always perform stationary autuning for only line--line resistance before using speed searches based on estimated speeds. When using open-loop vecr control, always perform rotational autuning before using speed searches based on estimated speeds. If the cable length between the mor and Drive is changed after autuning has been performed, perform stationary autuning for only line--line resistance again. IMPORTANT The mor will not operate when stationary autuning or stationary autuning only for line--line resistance is performed. 6-6

279 Speed Search Selection Set whether enable or disable speed search at startup, and set the type of speed search (estimated speed or current detection) using setting b3-0. To perform speed search when inputting the run command, set b3-0 or 3. Search Name Estimated Speed Current Detection Search Method External Speed Search Command Application Precautions Estimates the mor speed when the search starts, and accelerates and decelerates from the estimated speed the set frequency. You can also search including direction of mor rotation. External search command and external search command become the same operation, estimating the mor speed and starting the search from the estimated speed. Cannot be used multi-mor drives, mors two or more frames smaller than the Drive capacity, and high-speed mors (30Hz min.) Starts speed search from the frequency when the temporary power loss was detected, or from the highest frequency, and performs speed detection at the current level during the search. External speed search command : Starts speed search from the maximum output frequency. External speed search command : Starts speed search from the frequency reference set before the search command. In control method without PG, the mor may accelerate suddenly with light loads. Estimated Speed Search The time chart for estimated speed searches is shown below. Search at Startup The time chart for when speed search at startup and speed search multi-function input terminals us shown below. Run command Output frequency OFF ON Start using speed detected Set frequency reference b3-0 Output current.0 s * Lower limit set using Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05). Minimum baseblock time (L-03) 0.7* Note: If the spping method is set coast sp, and the run command turns ON in a short time, the operation may be the same as the search in case. Fig 6.4 Speed Search at Startup (Estimated Speed) 6-6

280 Continuing Operation Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.) Loss Time Shorter Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L-03) AC power supply ON OFF Start using speed detected Set frequency reference Output frequency Output current 0 ms Minimum baseblock time (L-03) x 0.75* * * Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency immediately before the baseblock. * After AC power supply recovery, mor waits for the minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05). Fig 6.43 Speed Search after Baseblock (When Estimated Speed: Loss Time Is Set in L-03) Loss Time Longer Than the Minimum Baseblock Time (L-03) AC power supply Output frequency ON OFF Start using speed detected Set frequency reference Output current 0 ms Minimum baseblock time (L-03) Speed Search Wait Time (b3-05) Fig 6.44 Speed Search After Baseblock (Estimated Speed: Loss Time > L-03) Current Detection Speed Search The time charts for current detection speed search is shown below. Speed Search at Startup The time chart when speed search at startup or external speed search command is selected is shown below. 6-63

281 Run command Output frequency OFF ON Maximum output frequency or set frequency Deceleration time set in b3-03 Set frequency reference b3-0 Output current Minimum baseblock time (L-03) * * Lower limit is set using Speed Search Time (b3-05). Fig 6.45 Speed Search at Startup (Using Current Detection) Speed Search after Short Baseblock (during Power Loss Recovery, etc.) Loss Time Shorter Than Minimum Baseblock Time AC power supply Output frequency ON OFF Output frequency before power loss Set frequency Deceleration reference time set in b3-03 b3-0 speed search operating current Output current Minimum baseblock time (L-03) * * * Baseblock time may be reduced by the output frequency immediately before baseblock. * After AC power supply recovery, mor waits for the minimum Speed Search Wait Time (b-03). Fig 6.46 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time < L-03) Loss Time Longer Than Minimum Baseblock Time AC power supply ON OFF Output frequency before power loss Set frequency Deceleration speed set in b3-03 reference Output frequency b3-0 Speed search operating time Output current Speed search wait time (b3-05) Minimum baseblock time (L-03) Fig 6.47 Speed Search After Baseblock (Current Detection: Loss Time > L-03) 6-64

282 Continuing Operation Continuing Operation at Constant Speed When Frequency Reference Is Lost The frequency reference loss detection function continues operation using 80% speed of the frequency reference before loss when the frequency reference using an analog input is reduced 90% or more in 400ms. When the error signal during frequency reference loss is output externally, set H-0 H-05 (multi-function contact output terminal M-M, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) C (frequency reference lost). Related Parameters Parameter Number L4-05 Name Display Frequency Reference Loss Detection Selection Ref Loss Sel Description Determines how the Drive will react when the frequency reference is lost. The frequency reference is considered lost when reference drops 90% or more of its current value for 400ms. 0: Sp - Drive will sp. : Run at L4-06 PrevRef - Drive will run at the percentage set in L4-06 of the frequency reference level at the time frequency reference was lost. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 0 No A A A A A 6-65

283 Restarting Operation After Transient Error (Au Restart Function) If a Drive error occurs during operation, the Drive will perform self-diagnosis. If no error is detected, the Drive will aumatically restart. This is called the au restart function. Set the number of au restarts in parameter L5-0. The au restart function can be applied the following errors. If an error not listed below occurs, the protection function will operate and the au restart function will not. OC (Overcurrent) RH (Braking resisr overheated) GF (Ground fault) PUF (Fuse blown) OV (Main circuit overvoltage) UV (Main Circuit Undervoltage, Main Circuit MC Operation Failure) * PF (Main circuit voltage fault) LF (Output phase failure) RR (Braking transisr error) OL (Mor overload) OL (Drive overload) OH (Mor overheat) OL3 (Overrque) OL4 (Overrque) * When L-0 is set or (continue operation during momentary power loss) Au Restart External Outputs To output au restart signals externally, set H-0 H-05 (multi-function contact output terminals M-M, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) E (au restart). Related Parameters Parameter Number L5-0 Name Display Number of Au Restart Attempts Num of Restarts Description Sets the counter for the number of times the Drive will perform an aumatic restart on the following faults: GF, LF, OC, OV, PF, PUF, RH, RR, OL, OL, OL3, OL4, UV. Au restart will check see if the fault has cleared every 5ms. When no fault is present, the Drive will attempt an au restart. If the Drive faults after an au restart attempt, the counter is incremented. When the Drive operates without fault for 0 minutes, the counter will reset the value set in L5-0. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux No A A A A A 6-66 L5-0 Au Restart Operation Selection Restart Sel Determines if the fault contact activates during an aumatic restart attempt. 0: No Fault Relay - fault contact will not activate during an aumatic restart attempt. : Fault Relay Active - fault contact will activate during an aumatic restart attempt. 0 0 No A A A A A Application Precautions The number of au restarts count is reset under the following conditions: After au restart, normal operation has continued for 0 minutes. After the protection operation has been performed, and the error has been verified, and an fault reset has been input. After the power supply is turned OFF, and then ON again. Do not use the au restart function with variable loads.

284 Drive Protection Drive Protection This section explains the functions for protecting the Drive and the braking resisr. Performing Overheating Protection on Mounted Braking Resisrs Perform overheating protection on Drive-mounted braking resisrs (Model: ERF-50WJ ). When overheating in a mounted braking resisr is detected, an alarm RH (Mounted braking resisr overheating) is displayed on the Digital Operar, and the mor coasts a sp. Related Parameters Parameter Number L8-0 Name Display Internal Dynamic Braking Resisr Protection Selection DB Resisr Prot Description Selects the DB protection only when using 3% duty cycle heatsink mount Yaskawa braking resisr. This parameter does not enable or disable the DB function of the Drive. 0: Not Provided : Provided Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 0 No A A A A A Multi-function Contact Outputs (H-0 H-05) Value Function Control Methods with PG Flux D Braking resisr fault (ON: Resisr overheat or braking transisr fault) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes INFO The most likely causes of RH (Mounted braking resisr overheating) being detected are that the deceleration time is o short or that the mor regeneration energy is o large. In these cases, lengthen the deceleration time or replace the Braking Resisr Unit with one with a higher breaking capacity. 6-67

285 Reducing Drive Overheating Pre-Alarm Warning Levels The Drive detects the temperature of the cooling fins using the thermisr, and protects the Drive from overheating. You can receive Drive overheating pre-alarms in units of 0 C. The following overheating pre-alarm warnings are available: Spping the Drive as error protection, and continuing operation, with the alarm OH (Radiation fins overheating) on the Digital Operar flashing. Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux L8-0 Overheat Alarm Level OH Pre-Alarm Lvl When the cooling fin temperature exceeds the value set in this parameter, an Overheat Alarm (OH) will occur C* No A A A A A L8-03 Overheat Pre-Alarm Operation Selection OH Pre-Alarm Sel Selects the Drive operation upon an OH pre-alarm detection. 0: Ramp Sp : Coast Sp : Fast-Sp 3: Alarm Only No A A A A A * Facry settings will vary based on drive capacity. 6-68

286 Input Terminal Functions Input Terminal Functions This section explains input terminal functions, which set operating methods by switching functions for the multi-function contact input terminals (S3 S). Temporarily Switching Operation between Digital Operar and Control Circuit Terminals You can switch the Drive run command inputs and frequency reference inputs between local (i.e., Digital Operar) and remote (input method using b-0 and b-0). You can switch between local and remote by turning ON and OFF the terminals if an output from H-0 H-0 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 S function selection) has been set (local/remote selection). To set the control circuit terminals remote, set b-0 and b-0 (Control circuit terminals). Related Parameters Parameter Number b-0 Name Display Frequency Reference Selection Reference Source Description Selects the frequency reference input source. 0: Operar - Digital preset speed U-0 or d-0 d-7. : Terminals - Analog input terminal A (or terminal A based on parameter H3-09). : Serial Com - Modbus RS-4/ 485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-. 3: Option PCB - Option board connected on CN. 4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP) Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 4 No Q Q Q Q Q b-0 Run Command Selection Run Source Selects the run command input source. 0: Operar - RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operar. : Terminals - Contact closure on terminals S or S. : Serial Com - Modbus RS-4/ 485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-. 3: Option PCB - Option board connected on CN. 0 3 No Q Q Q Q Q INFO You can also perform local/remote switching using the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operar. When the local/remote function has been set in the external terminals, the LOCAL/REMOTE Key function on the Digital Operar will be disabled. 6-69

287 Blocking Drive Outputs (Baseblock Commands) Set 8 or 9 (Baseblock command NO/NC) in one of the parameters H-0 H-0 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 S function selection) perform baseblock commands using the terminal's ON/OFF operation, and prohibit Drive output using the baseblock commands. Clear the baseblock command restart the operating using speed search from frequency references from the previous baseblock command input. Multi-function Contact Inputs (H-0 H-0) Value Function Control Methods with PG Flux 8 External baseblock NO (NO contact: Baseblock at ON) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 9 External baseblock NC (NC contact: Baseblock at OFF) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Time Chart The time chart when using baseblock commands is shown below. Forward operation/sp Baseblock command Input Cleared Frequency reference Search from sred frequency reference Output frequency Coast a sp Fig 6.48 Baseblock Commands If using baseblock commands with a variable load, do not frequently input baseblock commands during operation, as this may cause the mor suddenly start coasting, and may result in the mor falling or slipping. IMPORTANT 6-70

288 Input Terminal Functions Spping Acceleration and Deceleration (Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold) The acceleration/deceleration ramp hold function sps acceleration and deceleration, sres the output frequency at that point in time, and then continues operation. Set one of the parameters H-0 H-0 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 S function selection) A (acceleration/deceleration ramp hold) sp acceleration and deceleration when the terminal is turned ON and sre the output frequency at that point in time. Acceleration and deceleration will restart when the terminal is turned OFF. If d4-0 is set and the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command is input, the output frequency is still sred even after the power supply is turned OFF. Related Parameters Parameter Number d4-0 Name Display Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection MOP Ref Memory Description This parameter is used retain the held frequency reference in U-0 (d-0) when power is removed. This function is available when the multi-function inputs accel/decel ramp hold or up/down commands are selected (H-XX = A or 0 and ). 0: Disabled : Enabled Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 0 No A A A A A Time Chart The time chart when using Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold commands is given below. Power supply Forward/Sp Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold Frequency reference Output frequency Hold Hold Fig 6.49 Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold 6-7

289 Application Precautions When d4-0 is set, the output frequency on hold is sred even after the power supply is turned OFF. If performing operations using this frequency after the Drive has also been turned OFF, input the run command with the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold turned ON. When d4-0 is set 0 and a run command is input while the Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold is turned ON, the output frequency will be set zero. If you input an Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command by error when decelerating during positioning, deceleration may be canceled. Raising and Lowering Frequency References Using Contact Signals (UP/ DOWN) The UP and DOWN commands raise and lower Drive frequency references by turning ON and OFF a multifunction contact input terminal S3 S7. To use this function, set one of the parameters H-0 H-0 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 S function selection) 0 (UP command) and (DOWN command). Be sure allocate two terminals so that the UP and DOWN commands can be used as a pair. The output frequency depends on the acceleration and deceleration time. Be sure set b-0 (Run command selection) (Control circuit terminal). Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux d-0 d-0 d-03 Frequency Reference Upper Limit Ref Upper Limit Frequency Reference Lower Limit Ref Lower Limit Master Speed Reference Lower Limit Ref Lower Limit Determines maximum frequency reference, set as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E-04). If the frequency reference is above this value, actual Drive speed will be limited this value. This parameter applies all frequency reference sources % No A A A A A 0.0% No A A A A A 0.0% No A A A A A 6-7

290 Input Terminal Functions Precautions When setting and using UP and DOWN commands, observe the following precautions. Precautions If multi-function input terminals S3 S are set as follows, operation error OPE03 (Invalid multi-function input selection) will occur: Only either the UP command or DOWN command has been set. UP/DOWN commands and Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold have been allocated at the same time. Application Precautions Frequency outputs using UP/DOWN commands are limited by the frequency reference upper and lower limits set in parameters d-0 d-03. Here, frequency references from analog frequency reference terminal A becomes the frequency reference lower limit. If using a combination of the frequency reference from terminal A and the frequency reference lower limit set in either parameter d-0 or d-03, the larger lower limit will become the frequency reference lower limit. If inputting the run command when using UP/DOWN commands, the output frequency accelerates the frequency reference lower limit. When using UP/DOWN commands, multi-step operations are disabled. When d4-0 (Frequency Reference Hold Function Selection) is set, the frequency reference held using the UP/DOWN functions is sred even after the power supply is turned OFF. When the power supply is turned ON and the run command is input, the mor accelerates the frequency reference that has been sred. To reset (i.e., 0Hz) the sred frequency reference, turn ON the UP or DOWN command while the run command is ON. Connection Example and Time Chart The time chart and settings example when the UP command is allocated the multi-function contact input terminal S3, and the DOWN command is allocated terminal S4, are shown below. Parameter Name Set Value H-0 Multi-function input (terminal S3) 0 H-0 Multi-function input (terminal S4) Inverter Forward operation/sp Reverse operation/sp Up command Down command 0 0 V analog signal Sequence common Frequency reference lower limit Fig 6.50 Connection Example when UP/DOWN Commands Are Allocated 6-73

291 Output frequency Upper limit Lower limit Accelerates lower limit Same frequency Forward operation/sp UP command DOWN command Reference frequency reset Frequency matching signal* Power supply * The frequency matching signal turns ON when the mor is not accelerating/ decelerating while the run command is ON. Fig 6.5 UP/DOWN Commands Time Chart 6-74

292 Input Terminal Functions Accelerating and Decelerating Constant Frequencies in the Analog References (+/- Speed) The +/- speed function increments or decrements the frequency set in analog frequency reference d4-0 (+/- Speed Limit) using two contact signal inputs. To use this function, set One of the parameters H-0 H-0 (multi-function contact terminal inputs S3 S function selection) C (Trim Control Increase command) and D (Trim Control Decrease command). Be sure allocate two terminals so that the Trim Control Increase command and Trim Control Decrease command can be used as a pair. Related Parameters Parameter Number d4-0 Name Display Trim Control Level Trim Control Lvl Description Sets the amount of frequency reference be added or subtracted as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E-04) when multi-function inputs trim control increase and trim control decrease are selected (H-XX = C and D). Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux % No A A A A A Trim Control Increase/Decrease Command and Frequency Reference The frequency references using Trim Control Increase/Decrease command ON/OFF operations are shown below. Frequency Reference Trim Control Increase Command Terminal Trim Control Decrease Command Terminal Set Frequency Reference + d4-0 Set Frequency Reference - d4-0 Set Frequency Command ON OFF ON OFF OFF ON ON OFF Application Precautions Trim Control Increase/Decrease command is enabled when speed reference > 0 and the speed reference is from an analog input. When the analog frequency reference value - d4-0 < 0, the frequency reference is set 0. If only the Trim Control Increase command or Trim Control Decrease command has been set for a multifunction contact input terminal S3 S, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selected) will occur. 6-75

293 Hold Analog Frequency Using User-set Timing When one of H-0 H-0 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 S function selection) is set E (sample/hold analog frequency command), the analog frequency reference will be held from 00ms after the terminal is turned ON, and operation will continue thereafter at that frequency. The analog value 00ms after the command is turned ON is used as the frequency reference. Sample/hold command Analog input Frequency reference Fig 6.5 Sample/Hold Analog Frequency Precautions When setting and executing sample and hold for analog frequency references, observe the following precautions. Precautions When using sample/hold of analog frequency reference, you cannot use the following commands at the same time. If these commands are used at the same time, operation error OPE03 (invalid multi-function input selection) will occur. Acceleration/Deceleration Ramp Hold command UP/DOWN command Trim Control Increase/Decrease command Application Precautions When performing sample/hold of analog frequency references, be sure sre references of 00ms minimum. If the reference time is less than 00ms, the frequency reference will not be held. The analog frequency reference that is held will be deleted when the power supply is turned OFF. Switching Operations between a Communications Option Card and Control Circuit Terminals You can switch reference input between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals. Set one of the parameters H-0 H-0 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 S function selection) (Option/Drive selection) enable switching reference input using the terminal ON/OFF status when the Drive is spped. 6-76

294 Input Terminal Functions Precautions To switch command inputs between the Communications Option Card and the control circuit terminals, set the following parameters. Set b-0 (Reference Selection) (Control circuit terminal [analog input]) Set b-0 (Operation Method Selection (Control circuit terminal (sequence inputs]) Set one of the parameters H-0 H-0 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 S function selection) (Option/Drive selection). Terminal Status OFF ON Frequency Reference and Run Command Selection Drive (Can be operated from frequency reference or control circuit terminal from analog input terminal.) Communications Option Card (Frequency reference and run command are enabled from communications Option Card.) Jog Frequency Operation without Forward and Reverse Commands (FJOG/RJOG) The FJOG/RJOG command functions operate the Drive using jog frequencies by using the terminal ON/OFF operation. When using the FJOG/RJOG commands, there is no need input the run command. To use this function, set one of the parameters H-0 H-0 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 S function selection) (FJOG command) or 3 (RJOG command). Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux d-7 Jog Frequency Reference Jog Reference Frequency reference when: "Jog frequency reference" is selected via multi-function input terminals. "Jog frequency reference" has priority over "multi-step speed reference 4". Parameter d-7 is also the reference for the JOG key on the Digital Operar, and the multifunction inputs "forward jog" and "reverse jog". units are affected by o * 6.00Hz Yes Q Q Q Q Q * range changes 0 thru 66.0 when operating in wo/pg.. The upper limit for the setting range also depends on the upper limit in E- 04. The max setting is Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H-0 H-0) Value Function Control Methods with PG Flux FJOG command (ON: Forward run at jog frequency d-7) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 RJOG command (ON: Reverse run at jog frequency d-7) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Application Precautions Jog frequencies using FJOG and RJOG commands are given priority over other frequency references. When both FJOG command and RJOG commands are ON for 500ms or longer at the same time, the Drive sps according the setting in b-03 (spping method selection). 6-77

295 Spping the Drive by Notifying Programming Device Errors the Drive (External Fault Function) The external fault function performs the error contact output, and sps the Drive operation if the Drive peripheral devices break down or an error occurs. The digital operar will display EFx (External fault [input terminal Sx]). The x in EFx shows the terminal number of the terminal that input the external fault signal. For example, if an external fault signal is input terminal S3, EF3 will be displayed. To use the external fault function, set one of the values 0 F in one of the parameters H-0 H-0 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 S function selection). Select the value be set in H-0 H-0 from a combination of any of the following three conditions. Signal input level from peripheral devices External fault detection method Operation during external fault detection The following table shows the relationship between the combinations of conditions and the set value in H-. Set Value Input Level (See Note.) NO Contact NC Contact Error Detection Method (See Note.) Detection Constant During Detection Operation Decelerate Sp (Error) 0 Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 Yes Yes Yes Operation During Error Detection Coast Sp (Error) 4 Yes Yes Yes 5 Yes Yes Yes 6 Yes Yes Yes 7 Yes Yes Yes Emergency Sp (Error) 8 Yes Yes Yes 9 Yes Yes Yes A Yes Yes Yes B Yes Yes Yes Continue Operation (Warning) C Yes Yes Yes D Yes Yes Yes E Yes Yes Yes F Yes Yes Yes Note. Set the input level detect errors using either signal ON or signal OFF. (NO contact: External fault when ON; NC contact: External fault when OFF).. Set the detection method detect errors using either constant detection or detection during operation. Constant detection: Detects while power is supplied the Drive. Detection during operation: Detects only during Drive operation. 6-78

296 Monir Parameters Monir Parameters This section explains the analog monir and pulse monir parameters. Using the Analog Monir Parameters This section explains the analog monir parameters. Related Parameters Parameter Number H4-0 Name Display Terminal FM Monir Selection Terminal FM Sel Description Selects the monir output (U-xx) function for terminals FM and FC. Refer "U-xx" monirs for available settings. Unavailable settings: 4, 0,,, 3, 4, 5, 8, 9, 30, 3, 34, 35, 39, 40, 4, 4, 47, 49, 50 Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 48 No A A A A A H4-0 Terminal FM Gain Terminal FM Gain Sets terminal FM output level when selected monir is at 00%.* % Yes Q Q Q Q Q H4-03 Terminal FM Bias Terminal FM Bias Sets terminal FM output level when selected monir is at 0%.* % Yes A A A A A H4-04 Terminal AM Monir Selection Terminal AM Sel Selects which monir will be the output on terminals AM and FC. Same function choices as H No A A A A A H4-05 Terminal AM Gain Terminal AM Gain Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 0Vdc) when selected monir is at 00% output.* % Yes Q Q Q Q Q H4-06 Terminal AM Bias Terminal AM Bias Sets terminal AM output voltage (in percent of 0Vdc) when selected monir is at 0% output.* % Yes A A A A A H4-07 Terminal FM Signal Level Selection AO Level Select Selects the signal level of terminal FM. 0: 0 0Vdc : -0 +0Vdc : 4 0mA* *Set the analog output jumper CN5 in the proper position. 0 0 No A A A A A 6-79

297 Parameter Number F4-0 Name Display AO-08/AO- Channel Monir Selection AO Ch Select Description Sets the number of the monir item be output. (U-oo) The following settings cannot be used: 4, 0 4, 5, 8, 9, 30, 34, 35, 39, 40, 4. Range Facry Change during Operation 45 No A A A A A Control Methods with PG Flux F4-0 AO-08/AO- Channel Gain AO Ch Gain Sets the channel gain. Ex: Set F4-0 = 50% output 00% at 5.0V output % Yes A A A A A F4-03 AO-08/AO- Channel Monir Selection AO Ch Select Sets the number of the monir item be output. (U-xx) The following settings cannot be set: 4, 0 4, 5, 8, 9, 30, 34, 39, 40, No A A A A A F4-04 AO-08/AO- Channel Gain AO Ch Gain Sets the channel gain. * 3 Ex: Set F4-04 = 50% output 00% at 5.0V output % Yes A A A A A F4-05 AO Ch Bias AO Ch Bias Sets the channel bias (00%/0V). Ex: Set F4-05 = 50% output 0% at 5.0V output % Yes A A A A A F4-06 AO Ch Bias AO Ch Bias Sets the channel bias (00%/0V). Ex: Set F4-06 = 50% output 0% at 5.0V output % Yes A A A A A F4-07 AO- Channel Signal Level AO Opt Level Sel Sets the range of the voltage output. 0: 0 0Vdc : -0 +0Vdc 0 0 No A A A A A F4-08 AO- Channel Signal Level AO Opt Level Sel Sets the range of the voltage output. 0: 0 0Vdc : -0 +0Vdc 0 0 No A A A A A * In order adjust the meter, 00% of the appropriate output is multiplied for the gain setting, the bias amount is added and then output. See H4-0 when spped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 03 appears on the setting screen, then terminal FM is used. See H4-04 when spped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 06 appears on the setting screen, then terminal AM is used. * ": 4 0mA" is not available in F7A * 3 In order adjust the meter, 00% of the appropriate output is multiplied for the gain setting, and the bias amount is added and then output. See F4-0 when spped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 05 appears on the setting screen, then CH is used. See F4-04 when spped in Quick, Advanced, or Verify mode. If 06 appears on the setting screen, then CH is used. 6-80

298 Monir Parameters Selecting Analog Monir Items The digital operar monir items (U- [status monir]) are output from multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC. Refer Chapter 5 User Parameters, and set the values for the part of U- (status monir). Alternatively, you can output monir items (U- [status monir]) from analog output option terminal channels and on analog monir cards AO-08 and AO-. Refer the table of parameters, and set the values. Adjusting the Analog Monir Items Adjust the output voltage for multi-function analog output terminals FM-AC and AM-AC using the gain and bias in H4-0, H4-03, H4-05, and H4-06. Also, adjust the output voltage for output channels and of Analog Output Option Cards AO-08 and AO- using the gain and bias in F4-0, F4-04, and F4-06. Adjusting the Meter Display the data setting display for the gain and bias parameters corresponding the output channel of the Drive Unit and the AO Option Card while the Drive is spped output the following voltages the analog monir terminal, enable meter adjusting while the Drive is spped. 0 V/00% monir output output gain + output bias Output voltage Gain x 0 V Bias x 0/00 V Monir item Fig 6.53 Monir Output Adjustment Switching Analog Monir Signal Levels Monir items corresponding 0 ±0Voutput 0 0Vsignals when the monir value is positive (+), and 0-0Vsignals when the monir value is negative (-). For monir items corresponding 0 ±0 V, refer Chapter 5 User Parameters. You can select the signal levels separately for multi-function analog output terminals and analog output option terminals. INFO 6-8

299 Using Pulse Train Monir Contents This section explains pulse monir parameters. Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux H6-06 Terminal MP Pulse Train Monir Selection Pulse Output Sel Select the pulse train monir output terminal MP function (value of the xx part of U-xx). See Table A for the list of U monirs.,, 5, 0, 4, 3, 36 only Yes A A A A A H6-07 Pulse Train Monir Scaling PO Scaling Sets the number of output pulses when the monir is 00% (inhz). Set H6-06, and H6-07 0, make the pulse train monir output synchronous the output frequency Hz Yes A A A A A Selecting Pulse Monir Items Output digital operar monir items (U- [status monir]) from pulse monir terminal MP-SC. Refer Chapter 5 User Parameters, and set the part of U- (Status monir). The possible monir selections are limited as follows: U-0, 0, 05, 0, 4, 36. Adjusting the Pulse Monir Items Adjust the pulse frequency output from pulse monir terminal MP-SC. Set the pulse frequency output when 00% frequency is output H6-07. Set H6-06, and H6-07 0, output the frequency synchronous with the Drive's U-phase output. Application Precautions When using a pulse monir parameter, connect a peripheral device according the following load conditions. If the load conditions are different, there is a risk of characteristic insufficiency or damage the machinery. Using a Sourcing Output Output Voltage (Isolated) Load Impedance (kω) VRL (V) +5V min..5 kω min. +8V min. 3.5 kω min. +0V min. 0 kω min. MP AC VRL Load impedance 6-8

300 Monir Parameters Using a Sinking Input External power supply External Power Supply (V) Sink Current (ma) VDC±0%, 5 VDC±0% 6mA Max MP Load impedance Sinking current AC 6-83

301 Individual Functions This section explains the individual functions used in special applications. Using MODBUS Communications You can perform serial communications with MEMOCON-series Programmable Controllers (PLCs) or similar devices using the MODBUS procol. MODBUS Communications Configuration MODBUS communications are configured using master (PLC) and a maximum of 3 slaves. Serial communications between master and slave are normally started by the master, and the slave responds. The master performs signal communications with one slave at a time. Consequently, you must set the address of each slave beforehand, so the master can perform signal communications using that address. Slaves receiving commands from the master perform the specified function, and send a response the master. MEMOCON-series PLC Drive Drive Drive RS-485 example connections Fig 6.54 Example of Connections between PLC and Drive Communications Specifications The MODBUS communications specifications are shown in the following table. Item Interface Communications Cycle Communications Parameters Communications Procol Number of Connectable Units Specifications RS-4, RS-485 Asynchronous (Start-sp synchronization) Baud rate: Select from,00,,400, 4,800, 9,600, and 9,00 bps. Data length: 8 bits fixed Parity: Select from even, odd, or none. Sp bits: bit fixed MODBUS (RTU mode only) 3 units max. (when using RS-485) 6-84

302 Individual Functions Communications Connection Terminal MODBUS communications use the following terminals: S+, S-, R+, and R-. Set the terminating resistance by turning ON pin of switch S for the last Drive only, as seen from the PLC. S+ + S- RS-4A or RS-485 R+ R- Switch - O F F S OFF ON Terminating resistance Terminating resistance (/ W, 0 Ohms) Fig 6.55 Communications Connection Terminal IMPORTANT. Separate the communications cables from the main circuit cables and other wiring and power cables.. Use shielded cables for the communications cables, connect the shield cover the Drive earth terminal, and arrange the terminals so that the other end is not connected prevent operating errors due noise. 3. When using RS-485 communications, connect S+ R+, and S- R-, on the Drive exterior. R+ S+ Procedure for Communicating with the PLC Use the following procedure perform communications with the PLC.. Turn OFF the power supply turned and connect the communications cable between the PLC and the Drive.. Turn ON the power supply. 3. Set the required communications parameters (H5-0 H5-07) using the Digital Operar. 4. Turn OFF the power supply, and check that the Digital Operar display has completely disappeared. 5. Turn ON the power supply once again. 6. Perform communications with the PLC. INFO Set the timer on the master monir response time from the slave. Set the master so that if the slave does not respond the master within the set time, the same command message will be sent from the master again. 6-85

303 Related Parameters Parameter Number b-0 b-0 H5-0 H5-0 H5-03 H5-04 Name Display Frequency Reference Selection Reference Source Run Command Selection Run Source Drive Node Address Serial Comm Adr Communicati on Speed Selection Serial Baud Rate Communicati on Parity Selection Serial Com Sel Spping Method After Communicati on Error Serial Fault Sel Description Selects the frequency reference input source. 0: Operar - Digital preset speed U-0 or d-0 d-7. : Terminals - Analog input terminal A (or terminal A based on parameter H3-09). : Serial Com - Modbus RS-4/ 485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-. 3: Option PCB - Option board connected on CN. 4: Pulse Input (Terminal RP) Selects the run command input source. 0: Operar - RUN and STOP keys on Digital Operar. : Terminals - Contact closure on terminals S or S. : Serial Com - Modbus RS-4/ 485 terminals R+, R-, S+, and S-. 3: Option PCB - Option board connected on CN. Selects Drive station node number (address) for Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+, S-. The Drive's power must be cycled for the setting take effect. Selects the baud rate for Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-. The Drive's power must be cycled for the setting take effect. 0: 00 bps : 400 bps : 4800 bps 3: 9600 bps 4: 900 bps Selects the communication parity for Modbus terminals R+, R-, S+ and S-. The Drive's power must be cycled for the setting take effect. 0: No Parity : Even Parity : Odd Parity Selects the spping method when a communication timeout fault (CE) is detected. 0: Ramp Sp : Coast Sp : Fast-Sp 3: Alarm Only Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 4 No Q Q Q Q Q 0 3 No Q Q Q Q Q 0 0 * F No A A A A A No A A A A A 0 0 No A A A A A No A A A A A 6-86

304 Individual Functions Parameter Number H5-05 H5-06 H5-07 Name Display Communicati on Fault Detection Selection Serial Flt Dtct Drive Transmit Wait Time Transmit WaitTIM RTS Control Selection RTS Control Sel Description Enables or disables the communications timeout fault (CE). 0: Disabled - A communication loss will not cause a communication fault. : Enabled - If communication is lost for more than seconds, a CE fault will occur. Set the delay time from when the Drive receives data when the Drive sends data. Enables or disables "request send" (RTS) control: 0: Disabled - RTS is always on : Enabled - RTS turns on only when sending Range Facry Change during Operation 0 or No A A A A A ms No A A A A A 0 or No A A A A A Control Methods with PG Flux * If H5-0 is set zero, then the drive will be unable respond Modbus communication. 6-87

305 MODBUS communications can perform the following operations regardless of the settings in b-0 and b-0. Moniring operation status from the PLC and reading parameters Resetting errors Inputting multi-function commands An OR operation is performed between the multi-function commands input from the PLC and commands input from multi-function contact input terminals S3 S7. Message Format In MODBUS communications, the master sends commands the slave, and the slave responds. The message format is configured for both sending and receiving as shown below, and the length of data packets is changed by the command (function) contents. Slave address Function code Data Error check The space between messages must support the following. PLC Inverter Inverter PLC PLC Inverter Command message Response message Command message Time (Seconds) 4 bits long H5-06 setting 4 bits long 5 ms min. Fig 6.56 Message Spacing Slave Address Set the Drive address from 0 3. If you set 0, commands from the master will be broadcast (i.e., the Drive will not return responses). Function Code The function code specifies commands. There are three function codes, as shown below. Function Code (Hexadecimal) Function Command Message Min. (Bytes) Max. (Bytes) Response Message Min. (Bytes) Max. (Bytes) 03H Read srage register contents H back test H Write multiple srage registers Data Configure consecutive data by combining the srage register address (test code for a loopback address) and the data the register contains. The data length changes depending on the command details.

306 Individual Functions Error Check Errors are detected during communications using CRC-6. Perform calculations using the following method.. The facry setting for CRC-6 communications is usually 0, but when using the MODBUS system, set the facry setting (i.e., set all 6 bits ).. Calculate CRC-6 using MSB as slave address LSB, and LSB as the MSB of the final data. 3. Also calculate CRC-6 for response messages from the slaves, and compare them the CRC-6 in the response messages. MODBUS Message Example An example of MODBUS command/response messages is given below. Reading Srage Register Contents Read the contents of the srage register only for specified quantities whose addresses are consecutive, starting from a specified address. The contents of the srage register are separated in higher place 8 bits and lower place 8 bits, and comprise the data within response messages in address order. The following table shows message examples when reading status signals, error details, data link status, and frequency references from the slave Drive. Command Message Response Message (During Normal Operation) Response Message (During Error) Slave Address 0H Slave Address 0H Slave Address 0H Function Code 03H Function Code 03H Function Code 83H Start Address Quantity CRC-6 Higher place Lower place Higher place Lower place Higher place Lower place 00H Data quantity 08H Error code 03H 0H 00H 04H 45H F0H Lead srage register Next srage register Next srage register Next srage register CRC-6 Higher place Lower place Higher place Lower place Higher place Lower place Higher place Lower place Higher place Lower place 00H 65H 00H 00H 00H 00H 0H F4H AFH 8H CRC-6 Higher place Lower place FH 3H 6-89

307 back Test The loopback test returns command messages directly as response messages without changing the contents check the communications between the master and slave. You can set user-defined test code and data values. The following table shows a message example when performing a loopback test with the slave Drive. Command Message Response Message Response Message (During Normal Operation) (During Error) Slave address 0H Slave address 0H Slave address 0H Function code 08H Function code 08H Function code 89H Higher Higher 00H 00H Error Code 0H place place Test Code Test Code Lower Lower Higher 00H 00H 86H place place place CRC-6 Higher Higher Lower A5H A5H 50H place place place Data Data Lower Lower 37H 37H place place CRC-6 Higher Higher DAH DAH place place CRC-6 Lower Lower 8DH 8DH place place Writing Multiple Srage Registers Write the specified data each specified srage register from the specified addresses. The written data must be in the following order in the command message: Higher place 8 bits, then lower place 8 bits, in srage register address order. The following table shows an example of a message when forward operation has been set at a frequency reference of 60.0Hz in the slave Drive by the PLC. Command Message Response Message Response Message (During Normal Operation) (During Error) Slave Address 0H Slave Address 0H Slave Address 0H Function Code 0H Function Code 0H Function Code 90H Higher Higher 00H Start place Start place 00H Error code 0H Address Lower Address Lower Higher 0H 0H CDH place place place CRC-6 Higher Higher Lower 00H 00H CH place place place Quantity Quantity Lower Lower 0H 0H place place Higher No. of data 04H 0H place CRC-6 Higher Lower 00H 08H place place Lead data Lower 0H place Next data Higher place 0H Lower place 58H CRC-6 Higher place 63H Lower place 39H 6-90

308 Individual Functions Set the number of data specified using command messages as quantity of specified messages x. Handle response messages in the same way. INFO Data Tables The data tables are shown below. The types of data are as follows: Reference data, monir data, and broadcast data. Reference Data The reference data table is shown below. You can both read and write reference data. Register No. 0000H 000H 000H 0003H 0004H 0005H 0006H 0007H 0008H Contents Not used Frequency reference Bit 0 Run/sp command : Run 0: Sp Bit Forward/reverse operation : Reverse 0: Forward Bit External fault : Error (EFO) Bit 3 Fault reset : Reset command Bit 4 ComNet Bit 5 ComCtrl Bit 6 Multi-function input command 3 Bit 7 Multi-function input command 4 Bit 8 Multi-function input command 5 Bit 9 Multi-function input command 6 Bit A Multi-function input command 7 Bit B Multi-function input command 8 Bit C Multi-function input command 9 Bit D Multi-function input command 0 Bit E Multi-function input command Bit F Multi-function input command Frequency reference (Set units using parameter o-03) Not used Torque reference Torque compensation PID target value Analog output setting (- V/ V/540) Analog output setting (- V/-540 V/540) Multi-function contact output setting Bit 0 Contact output (terminal M-M) : ON 0: OFF Bit Contact output (terminal M3-M4) : ON 0: OFF Bit Contact output (terminal M5-M6) : ON 0: OFF 0009H Bit 3 PHC3(Contact P3-C3) : ON 0: OFF Bit 4 PHC4(Contact P4-C4) : ON 0: OFF Bit 5 Not used Bit 6 Set error contact (terminal MA-MC) output using bit 7. : ON 0: OFF Bit 7 Error contact (terminal MA-MC) : ON 0: OFF Bits 8 F Not used 000AH 000EH Not used 6-9

309 Register No. Contents Reference selection settings Bit 0 Not used Bit Use MODBUS 0006H PID target value Bits B Not used 000FH C Broadcast data terminal S5 input : Enabled 0: Disabled D Broadcast data terminal S6 input : Enabled 0: Disabled E Broadcast data terminal S7 input : Enabled 0: Disabled F Broadcast data terminal S8 input : Enabled 0: Disabled Note Write 0 all unused bits. Also, do not write data reserved registers. Monir Data The following table shows the monir data. Monir data can only be read. 6-9 Register No. 000H 00H 00H 003H 004H 005H 006H 007H 008H Contents Drive status Bit 0 Operation : Operating 0: Spped Bit Reverse operation : Reverse operation 0: Forward operation Bit Drive startup complete : Completed : Not completed Bit 3 Error : Error Bit 4 Data setting error : Error Bit 5 Multi-function contact output (terminal M - M) : ON 0: OFF Bit 6 Multi-function contact output (terminal M3 - M4) : ON 0: OFF Bit 7 Multi-function contact output 3 (terminal M5 - M6) : ON 0: OFF Bit 8 Multi-function PHC output 3 (terminal P3 - C3) : ON 0: OFF Bit 9 Multi-function PHC output 4 (terminal P4 - C4) : ON 0: OFF Bits A and B Not used Error details Bit 0 Overcurrent (OC) Ground fault (GF) Bit Main circuit overvoltage (OV) Bit Drive overload (OL) Bit 3 Drive overheat (OH, OH) Bit 4 Injection brake transisr resistance overheat (rr, rh) Bit 5 Fuse blown (PUF) Bit 6 PID feedback reference lost (FbL) Bit 7 External fault (EF, EFO) Bit 8 Hardware error (CPF) Bit 9 Mor overload (OL), overrque (OL3) detected, or overrque (OL4) detected Bit A PG broken wire detected (PGO), Overspeed (OS), Speed deviation (DEV) Bit B Main circuit undervoltage (UV) detected Bit C Main circuit undervoltage (UV), control power supply error (UV), inrush prevention circuit error (UV3), power loss Bit D SPO output phase open, SPI output phase open Bit E MODBUS communications error (CE) Bit F Operar disconnected (OPR) Data link status Bit 0 Writing data Bit Not used Bit Not used Bit 3 Upper and lower limit errors Bit 4 Data integrity error Bits 5 F Not used Frequency reference (U-0) Output frequency (U-0) Output voltage reference (U-06) Output current (U-03) Output power (U-08) Torque reference (U-09)

310 Individual Functions Register No. 009H 00AH 00BH 00CH 00DH 00EH H 003H 003H 0033H 0034H H 0038H 0039H 003AH 003BH 003CH Contents Not used Not used Sequence input status Bit 0 : Control circuit terminal S ON Bit : Control circuit terminal S ON Bit : Control circuit terminal S3 ON Bit 3 : Control circuit terminal S4 ON Bit 4 : Control circuit terminal S5 ON Bit 5 : Control circuit terminal S6 ON Bit 6 : Control circuit terminal S7 ON Bit 7 : Control circuit terminal S8 ON Bit 8 : Control circuit terminal S9 ON Bit 9 : Control circuit terminal S0 ON Bit A : Control circuit terminal S ON Bit B : Control circuit terminal S ON Bits C F Not used Drive status Bit 0 Operation : Operating Bit Zero speed : Zero speed Bit Frequency matching : Matched Bit 3 User-defined speed matching : Matched Bit 4 Frequency detection Bit 5 Frequency detection Bit 6 Drive startup completed : Startup completed Bit 7 Low voltage detection : Detected Bit 8 Baseblock : Drive output baseblock Bit 9 Frequency reference mode : Not communications 0: Communications Bit A Run command mode : Not communications 0: Communications Bit B Overrque detection : Detected Bit C Frequency reference lost : Lost Bit D Retrying error : Retrying Bit E Error (including MODBUS communications time-out) :Error occurred Bit F MODBUS communications time-out : Timed out Multi-function contact output status Bit 0 Multi-function contact output (terminal M - M) : ON 0: OFF Bit Multi-function contact output (terminal M3 - M4) : ON 0: OFF Bit Multi-function contact output 3 (terminal M5 - M6) : ON 0: OFF Bit 3 Multi-function PHC output 3 (terminal P3 - C3) : ON 0: OFF Bit 4 Multi-function PHC output 4 (terminal P4 - C4) : ON 0: OFF Bits 5 F Not used Not used Main circuit DC voltage Torque monir Output power (U-08) Not used PID feedback quantity (Input equivalent 00%/Max. output frequency; 0/%; without sign) PID input quantity (±00%/±Max. output frequency; 0/%; with sign) PID output quantity (±00%/±Max. output frequency; 0/%; with sign) CPU software number Flash software number 6-93

311 Register No. Contents Communications error details Bit 0 CRC error Bit Invalid data length Bit Not used 003DH Bit 3 Parity error Bit 4 Overrun error Bit 5 Framing error Bit 6 Time-out Bits 7 F Not used 003EH kva setting 003FH Control method Note Communications error details are sred until an fault reset is input (you can also reset while the Unit is operating). Broadcast Data The following table shows the broadcast data. You can also write this data. Register Address 000H 000H Contents Operation signal Bit 0 Run command : Operating 0: Spped Bit Reverse operation command : Reverse 0: Forward Bits and 3 Not used Bit 4 External fault : Error (set using H-0) Bit 5 Fault reset : Reset command (set using H-0) Bits 6 B Not used Bit C Multi-function contact input terminal S5 input Bit D Multi-function contact input terminal S6 input Bit E Multi-function contact input terminal S7 input Bit F Multi-function contact input terminal S8 input Frequency reference 30000/00% Note Bit signals not defined in the broadcast operation signals use local node data signals continuously. ENTER Command When writing parameters the Drive from the PLC using MODBUS communications, the parameters are temporarily sred in the parameter data area in the Drive. To enable these parameters in the parameter data area, use the ENTER command. There are two types of ENTER commands: ENTER commands that enable parameter data in RAM, and ENTER commands that write data EEPROM (non-volatile memory) in the Drive at the same time as enabling data in RAM. The following table shows the ENTER command data. ENTER command data can only be written. The ENTER command is enabled by writing 0 register number 0900H or 090H. Register No. 0900H 090H Contents Write parameter data EEPROM Parameter data is not written EEPROM, but refreshed in RAM only. INFO The maximum number of times you can write EEPROM using the Drive is 00 thousand. Do not frequently execute ENTER commands (0900H) written EEPROM. The ENTER command registers are write-only. Consequently, if reading these registers, the register address will become invalid (Error code: 0H). 6-94

312 Individual Functions Error Codes The following table shows MODBUS communications error codes. Error Code 0H 0H 03H H H 3H 4H Contents Function code error A function code other than 03H, 08H, or 0H has been set by the PLC. Invalid register number error The register address you are attempting access is not recorded anywhere. With broadcast sending, a start address other than 0000H, 000H, or 000H has been set. Invalid quantity error The number of data packets being read or written is outside the range 6. In write mode, the number of data packets in the message is not No. of packets x. Data setting error A simple upper limit or lower limit error has occurred in the control data or when writing parameters. When writing parameters, the parameter setting is invalid. Write mode error Attempting write parameters from the PLC during operation. Attempting write via ENTER commands from the PLC during operation. Attempting write parameters other than A-00 A-05, E-03, or 0-04 when warning alarm CPF03 (defective EEPROM) has occurred. Attempting write read-only data. Writing during main circuit undervoltage (UV) error Writing parameters from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm. Writing via ENTER commands from the PLC during UV (main circuit undervoltage) alarm. Writing error during parameter processing Attempting write parameters from the PLC while processing parameters in the Drive. Slave Not Responding In the following cases, the slave will ignore the write function. If the slave address specified in the command message is 0, all slaves execute the write function, but do not return response messages the master. When a communications error (overrun, framing, parity, or CRC-6) is detected in the command message. When the slave address in the command message and the slave address in the Drive do not agree. When the data that configures the message and the data time length exceeds 4 bits. When the command message data length is invalid. Application Precautions Set a timer in the master monir response time from the slaves. Make the setting so that if no response is sent the master from the slave within the set time, the same command message is sent again from the master. 6-95

313 Self-Diagnosis The Drive has a built-in function for self-diagnosing the operations of serial communications interface circuits. This function is called the self-diagnosis function. The self-diagnosis function connects the communications parts of the send and receive terminals, receives the data sent by the Drive, and checks if communications are being performed normally. Perform the self-diagnosis function using the following procedure.. Turn ON the power supply the Drive, and set 67 (communications test mode) in parameter H-05 (Terminal S7 Function Selection).. Turn OFF the power supply the Drive. 3. Perform wiring according the following diagram while the power supply is turned OFF. 4. Turn ON the terminating resistance. (Turn ON pin on DIP switch.) 5. Turn ON the power supply the Drive again. SC S S S3 S4 S5 S6 S7 Fig 6.57 Details of Communications Terminals Pass will be displayed if self-diagnosis is completed without an error occurring. If an error occurs, a CE (MODBUS communications error) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operar, the error contact output will be turned ON, and the Drive operation ready signal will be turned OFF. 6-96

314 Individual Functions Using the Timer Function Multi-function contact input terminals S3 S7 can be designated as timer function input terminals, and multifunction output terminals M-M, M3-M4, and M5-M6 can be designated as timer function output terminals. By setting the delay time, you can erase chattering from the sensors and switches. Set one of the parameters H-0 H-0 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 S) 8 (timer function input). Set H-0 H-03 (multi-function output terminals M-M, M3-M4, M5-M6, P3-C3, and P4-C4 function selection) (timer function output). Related Parameters Parameter Number b4-0 Name Display Timer Function ON-Delay Time Delay-ON Timer Description Used in conjunction with a multifunction digital input and a multifunction digital output programmed for the timer function. This sets the amount of time between when the digital input is closed, and the digital output is energized. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0.0sec No A A A A A b4-0 Timer Function OFF-Delay Time Delay-OFF Timer Used in conjunction with a multifunction digital input and a multifunction digital output programmed for the timer function. This sets the amount of time the output stays energized after the digital input is opened sec No A A A A A Example When the timer function input ON time is longer than the value set in b4-0, the timer output function is turned ON. When the timer function input OFF time is longer than the value set in b4-0, the timer output function is turned OFF. An example of timer function operation is given in the following diagram. Timer function input Timer function output Fig 6.58 Timer Function Operation Example 6-97

315 Using PID Control PID control is a method of making the feedback value (detection value) match the set target value. By combining proportional control (P), integral control (I), and derivative control (D), you can even control targets (machinery) with play time. The characteristics of the PID control operations are given below. P control I control D control Outputs the amount of operation proportional the deviation. You cannot, however, set the deviation zero using P control alone. Outputs the amount of operation that integrates the deviation. Used for matching feedback value the target value. I control is not suited, however, rapid variations. Outputs the amount of operation derived from the deviation. Can respond promptly rapid variations. PID Control Operation To understand the differences between each PID control operation (P, I, and D, the variation in the amount of operation (output frequency) is as shown in the following diagram when the deviation (i.e., the difference between the target value and feedback value) is fixed. Deviation Time Amount of operation D control PID control I control P control Time Fig 6.59 PID Control Operation PID Control Applications The following table shows examples of PID control applications using the Drive. Application Speed Control Pressure Control Flow Rate Control Tachometer generar Temperature Control Control Details Feeds back machinery speed information, and matches speed the target value. Inputs speed information from other machinery as the target value, and performs synchronous control using the actual speed feedback. Feeds back pressure information, and performs constant pressure control. Feeds back flow rate information, and controls the flow rate highly accurately. Feeds back temperature information, and performs temperature adjustment control by rotating the fan. Example of Sensor Used Pressure sensor Flow rate sensor Thermocouple Thermisr 6-98

316 Individual Functions Related Parameters Parameter Number b5-0 Name Display PID Function PID Mode Description This parameter determines the function of the PID control. 0: Disabled : D= Feedback : D= Feed-Forward 3: Freq. Ref. + PID output (D = Feedback) 4: Freq. Ref. + PID output (D = Feed-Forward) Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux No A A A A A b5-0 Proportional Gain PID Gain Sets the proportional gain of the PID controller Yes A A A A A b5-03 Intregral Time PID I Time Sets the integral time for the PID controller. A setting of zero disables integral control sec Yes A A A A A b5-04 Intregral Limit PID I Limit Sets the maximum output possible from the integrar. Set as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency % Yes A A A A A b5-05 Derivative Time PID D Time Sets D control derivative time. A setting of 0.00 disables derivative control sec Yes A A A A A b5-06 PID Output Limit PID Limit Sets the maximum output possible from the entire PID controller. Set as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency % Yes A A A A A b5-07 PID Offset Adjustment PID Offset Sets the amount of offset of the output of the PID controller. Set as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency. The offset is summed with the PID output. This can be used artificially kick-start a slow starting PID loop % Yes A A A A A b5-08 PID Primary Delay Time Constant PID Delay Time Sets the amount of time for the filter on the output of the PID controller. Note: The offset is summed with the PID output. This can be used artifically kick-start a slow starting PID loop. Note: Normally, change is not required sec Yes A A A A A b5-09 PID Output Level Selection Output Level Sel Determines whether the PID controller will be direct or reverse acting. 0: Normal Output (direct acting) : Reverse Output (reverse acting) 0 0 No A A A A A 6-99

317 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux b5-0 PID Output Gain Output Gain Sets the output gain of the PID controller No A A A A A b5- PID Output Reverse Selection Output Rev Sel 0: Zero Limit (when PID output goes negative, Drive sps). Zero Limit is aumatic when reverse prohibit is selected using b-04. : Reverse (when PID goes negative, Drive reverses). 0 0 No A A A A A b5- PID Feedback Reference Missing Detection Selection Fb los Det Sel 0: Disabled (no detection of loss of PID feedback) : Alarm (detection of loss of PID feedback, operation continues during detection with the fault contact not energized) : Fault (detection of loss of PID feeedback, coast sp during detection and fault contact energizes) 0 0 No A A A A A b5-3 PID Feedback Loss Detection Level Fb los Det Lvl Sets the PID feedback loss detection level as a percentage (%) of maximum frequency (E-04) % No A A A A A b5-4 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Fb los Det Time Sets the PID feedback loss detection delay time in terms of seconds sec No A A A A A b5-5 PID Sleep Function Start Level PID Sleep Level Sets the sleep function start frequency. Note: Enabled even when PID control mode has not been selected Hz No A A A A A b5-6 PID Sleep Delay Time PID Sleep Time Sets the sleep function delay time in terms of 0. seconds sec No A A A A A b5-7 PID Accel/ Decel Time PID SFS Time Applies an accel/decel time the PID setpoint reference. The Drive's standard softstarter (C-xx and S-curve) still affects the output of the PID algorithm sec No A A A A A H6-0 Terminal RP Pulse Train Input Function Selection Pulse Input Sel Selects the function of pulse train terminal RP. 0: Frequency reference : PID feedback value : PID setpoint value 0 0 No A A A A A 6-00

318 Individual Functions Parameter Number Name Display Description Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output Min. Unit Control Methods with PG Flux U-4 PI Feedback Value PID Feedback Feedback signal level when PID control is used. 0V: Maximum Frequency (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0.0 % A A A A A U-36 PID Input PID Input Input error the PID regular (PID Setpoint - PID Feedback). 0V: Maximum Frequency (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0.0 % A A A A A U-37 PID Output PID Output Output of the PID regular as a percentage of maximum frequency (E-04). 0V: Maximum Frequency (possible for -0V thru +0V) 0.0 % A A A A A U-38 PID Setpoint PID Setpoint Setpoint of the PID regular (PID reference + PID bias). 0V: Maximum Frequency 0.0 % A A A A A Multi-Function Contact Inputs (H-0 H-0) Value Function Control Methods with PG Flux 9 PID control disable (ON: PID control disabled) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 30 PID control integral reset (reset when reset command is input or when spped during PID control) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 PID control integral hold (ON: Hold) Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 34 PID soft starter Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 35 PID input characteristics switch Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes Multi-Function Analog Input (H3-05, H3-09) Value Function Contents (00%) Control Methods with PG Flux B PID feedback Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes C PID target value Maximum output frequency Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 6-0

319 PID Control Methods There are four PID control methods. Select the method by setting parameter b5-0. Set Value Control Method PID output becomes the Drive output frequency, and D control is used in the difference between PID target value and feedback value. PID output becomes the Drive output frequency, and D control is used in the PID feedback value. 3 4 PID output is added as compensation value of the Drive output frequency, and D control is used in the difference between PID target value and feedback value. PID output is added as compensation value of the Drive output frequency, and D control is used in the PID feedback value. PID Input Methods Enable PID control using parameter b5-0, and set the PID target value and PID feedback value. PID Target Value Input Methods Select the PID control target value input method according the setting in b-0 (Reference Selection). Normally, the frequency reference selected in b-0 is the PID target value, but you can also set the PID target value as shown in the following table. PID Target Input Method Multi-Function Analog Terminal A Input MODBUS register 0006H Pulse train input Conditions Set H3-05 or H3-09 C (PID target value). Also, be sure set H6-0 (pulse train input function selection) (PID feedback value). Set MODBUS bit in register address 000FH be able use register number 0006H as the PID target value. Set H6-0 (PID target value). PID Feedback Input Methods Select one of the following PID control feedback input methods. Input Method Multi-function analog input Pulse train input Conditions Set H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A Selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Function Selection) B (PID feedback). Set H6-0 (PID feedback). INFO Adjust PID target value and PID feedback value using the following items. Analog input: Adjust using the analog input terminal gain and bias. Pulse train input: Adjust using pulse train scaling, pulse train input gain, and pulse train input bias. 6-0

320 Individual Functions PID Adjustment Methods Use the following procedure adjust PID while performing PID control and measuring the response waveform.. Set b5-0 (PID Control Mode Selection) or (PID control enabled).. Increase b5-0 (Proportional Gain (P)) within a range that does not vibrate. 3. Reduce b5-03 (Integral (I) time) within a range that does not vibrate. 4. Increase b5-05 (Derivative (D) time) within a range that does not vibrate. PID Fine Adjustment Methods This section explains the fine adjustment of PID after setting the PID control parameters. Suppressing Overshoot If overshoot occurs, reduce derivative time (D), and increase integral time (I). Response Before adjustment After adjustment Time Set a Rapidly Stabilizing Control Condition To rapidly stabilize the control even if overshoot occurs, reduce integral time (I), and lengthen derivative time (D). Response Before adjustment After adjustment Time Suppressing Long-cycle Vibration If vibration occurs with a longer cycle than the integral time (I) set value, the integral operation is o strong. Lengthen the integral time (I) suppress the vibration. Response Before adjustment After adjustment Time 6-03

321 Suppressing Short Cycle Vibration If vibration occurs when the vibration cycle is short, and the cycle is almost identical the derivative time (D) set value, the differential operation is o strong. Shorten the derivative time (D) suppress the vibration. If vibration continues even when the derivative time (D) is set 0.00 (D control disabled), reduce the proportional gain (P), or increase the PID primary delay time constant. Response Before adjustment After adjustment Time Precautions In PID control, the b5-04 parameter is used prevent the calculated integral control value from exceeding a specified amount. When the load varies rapidly, Drive response is delayed, and the machine may be damaged or the mor may stall. In this case, reduce the set value speed up Drive response. The b5-06 parameter is used prevent the arithmetic operation following the PID control calculation from exceeding a specified amount. Set taking the maximum output frequency be 00%. The b5-07 parameter is used adjust PID control offset. Set in increments of 0.%, taking the maximum output frequency be 00%. Set the low pass filter time constant for the PID control output in b5-08. Enable this parameter prevent machinery resonance from occurring when machinery adhesive abrasion is great, or rigidity is poor. In this case, set the parameter be greater than the resonance frequency cycle. Increase this time constant reduce Drive responsiveness. Using b5-09, you can invert the PID output polarity. Consequently, if you increase the PID target value, you can apply this parameter applications lower the Drive output frequency. Using b5-0, you can apply gain the PID control output. Enable this parameter adjust the amount of compensation if adding PID control output the frequency reference as compensation. When PID control output is negative, you can use parameter b5- invert the Drive. When b-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set (enabled), however, PID output limit is 0. With the Drive, by setting an independent acceleration/deceleration time in parameter b5-7, you can increase or decrease the PID target value using the acceleration/deceleration time. The acceleration/ deceleration function (parameter C) used normally, however, is allocated after PID control, so depending on the settings, resonance with PID control and hunting in the machinery may occur. If this happens, reduce parameter C until hunting does not occur, and maintain the acceleration/deceleration time using b5-7. Also, you can disable the set value in b5-7 from the external terminals during operation using multi-function input set value 34 (PID soft starter). 6-04

322 Individual Functions PID Control Block The following diagram shows the PID control block in the Drive. b-0 Option Card 3,4 Serial Com Terminal A D-0 D-0 0 Frequency reference using multi-step command b5-7 0 PID SFS Cancel Frequency reference (U-0) b5-0=0 b5-0=, b5-0=3,4 PID OFF Multi-function input PID control cancel signal is ON. PID is OFF under the following conditions: b5-0 = 0 During JDG command input + PID ON + Enable/disable reverse operation when PI output is negative Upper limit Fmax x09% b5-= b5-=0 Lower limit 0 Uppwer limit Fmax x09% Output frequency D-6 Lower limit -(Fmaxx09%) Pulse input terminal RP MEMOBUS communications register 06 H PID target value Terminal A or A3 PID target value Frequency reference terminal A3 PID feedback Pulse input terminal RP H6-0= Set PID target value in multi-function analog input Set bit of MEMOBUS register 0FH H6-0= H3-05 or H3-09=B PID input volume (U-36) PID command (U-38) PID output monir (U-37) PID output gain (b5-0) + Z - b5-0=,4 b5-03 b5-0=, P Proportional gain (P) b5-0 - Select multi-function inputs PID input characteristics Sre integral using multi-function inputs + Z - Integral (I) time b5-03 T + + b5-0=,3 b5-05 Derivative time Integral rset using multi-function inputs I limit Z - PID Limit T Z - b5-0=,4 PID limit b5-06 PID primary delay time constant b Select PID output characteristics selection (b5-09) PID offset adjustment (b5-07) Fig 6.60 PID Control Block 6-05

323 PID Feedback Loss Detection When performing PID control, be sure use the PID feedback loss detection function. If PID feedback is lost, the Drive output frequency may accelerate the maximum output frequency. When setting b5- and the status of the PID feedback value detection level in b5-3 is insufficient and continues for the time set in b5-4, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operar and Drive operation will continue. When b5- is set, an FbL (PID feedback reference lost) error alarm will be displayed on the Digital Operar, the error contact will operate, and Drive operation will be spped. The time chart for PID feedback loss detection (set b5- ) is shown below. PID feedback value Loss detection level (b5-3) Loss detection time (b5-4) No FbL detection Loss detection time (b5-4) Fig 6.6 PID Feedback Loss Detection Time Chart FbL detection Time PID Sleep The PID sleep function sps the Drive when the PID sleep function delay time continues while the PID control target value is at an insufficient level operate the PID sleep function. When the PID sleep delay time continues and the PID control target value is above the PID sleep function operation level, Drive operation will aumatically resume. When PID control is disabled, the PID sleep function is also disabled. When using the PID sleep function, select decelerate sp or coast sp as the spping method. The PID sleep time chart is shown below. PID target value Sleep operation level b5-5 Sleep operation delay time Sleep operation delay time b5-6 b5-6 Internal run command Operation Spped Run command has been input External run command Operation status output Operating Fig 6.6 PID Sleep Time Chart 6-06

324 Individual Functions Energy-saving To perform energy saving, set b8-0 (Energy Saving Mode Selection). Energy-saving control can be performed using both control and open-loop vecr control. The parameters be adjusted are different for each. In control, adjust b8-04 b8-06, and in vecr control, adjust b8-0 and b8-03. Related Parameters Parameter Number b8-0 Name Display Energy Saving Control Selection Energy Save Sel Description Energy Savings function enable/ disable selection. 0: Disabled : Enabled Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 or 0 No A A A A A b8-0 Energy Saving Gain Energy Save Gain Sets energy savings control gain when in vecr control mode * Yes No No A A A b8-03 Energy Saving Control Filter Time Constant Energy Save F.T Sets energy saving control filter time constant when in vecr control mode sec * Yes No No A A A b8-04 Energy Saving Coefficient Value Energy Save COEF Used fine-tune the energy savings function when in Control Mode *3 *4 No A A No No No b8-05 Power Detection Filter Time kw Filter Time Used fine-tune the energy savings function when in Control Mode ms No A A No No No b8-06 Search Operation Voltage Limit Search V Limit Used fine-tune the energy savings function when in Control Mode % No A A No No No E-0 Mor Rated Slip Mor Rated Slip Sets the mor rated slip in hertz (Hz). This value is aumatically set during rotational Au-Tuning Hz *4 No A A A A A E- Mor Rated Output Mtr Rated Power Sets the mor rated power in kilowatts (kw). This value is aumatically set during Au-Tuning. HP = 0.746kW kW *3 No Q Q Q Q Q *. Set.0 in Control Mode with PG. *. Initial settings vary based on drive capacity and control mode. * 3. Caution: Initial settings will vary based on mor capacity * 4. Initial/Default settings vary based on drive capacity. Values shown here are for 00-40V class 0.4kW drives. 6-07

325 Adjusting Energy-saving Control The method of adjustment during energy-saving control operations differs depending on the control method. Refer the following when making adjustments. Control In control method, the voltage for optimum mor efficiency is calculated and becomes the output voltage reference. b8-04 (Energy-saving Coefficient) is set at the facry for mor use applied the Drive. If the mor capacity differs from the mor applied the Drive, set the mor capacity in E- (Mor Rated Output). Also, adjust the output voltage in steps of 5 until it reaches minimum. The larger the energy-saving coefficient, the greater the output voltage. To improve response when the load fluctuates, reduce the power detection filter time constant b8-05. If b8-05 is set o small, however, mor rotations when the load is light may become unstable. Mor efficiency varies due temperature fluctuations and differences in mor characteristics. Consequently, control mor efficiency online optimize efficiency by causing minute variations in voltage using the search operation. Parameter b8-06 (Search Operation Voltage Limiter) controls the range that control the voltage using the search operation. For 00-40V Class Drives, set the range 00%/00 V, and for V Class Drives, set the range 00%/ V. Set 0 disable the search operation. Control In vecr control method, control the slip frequency so that mor efficiency is maximized. Taking the mor rated slip for the base frequency as optimum slip, calculate the optimum slip for mor efficiency for each frequency. In vecr control, be sure perform autuning, and set the mor rated slip. If the mor performs hunting when using energy-saving control in vecr control, reduce the set value in b8-0 (Energy-saving Gain), or increase the set value in b8-03 (Energy-saving Filter Time Constant). Mor Parameters In vecr control method, the mor parameters are set aumatically using autuning. If autuning does not complete normally, set them manually. Related Parameters Parameter Number E-0 Name Display Mor Rated Current Mor Rated FLA Mor Rated Slip Mor Rated Slip Description Sets the mor nameplate full load current in amperes (A). This value is aumatically set during Au-Tuning. Sets the mor rated slip in hertz (Hz). This value is aumatically set during rotational Au-Tuning. Range * Facry.90 A * Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux No Q Q Q Q Q E Hz * No A A A A A 6-08

326 Individual Functions Parameter Number E-03 E-04 E-05 E-06 E-07 E-08 E-0 Name Display Mor No-Load Current No-Load Current Number of Mor Poles Number of Poles Mor Line-- Line Resistance Term Resistance Mor Leakage Inductance Leak Inductance Mor Iron-core Saturation Coefficient Saturation Comp Mor Iron-core Saturation Coefficient Saturation Comp Mor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation Tcomp Iron Loss Description Sets the magnetizing current of the mor as a percentage of full load amps (E-0). This value is aumatically set during rotational Au-Tuning. Sets the number of mor poles. This value is aumatically set during Au-Tuning. Sets the phase--phase mor resistance in ohms. This value is aumatically set by Au-Tuning. Sets the voltage drop due mor leakage inductance as a percentage of mor rated voltage. This value is aumatically set during Au-Tuning. Sets the mor iron saturation coefficient at 50% of magnetic flux. This value is aumatically set during rotational Au-Tuning. Sets the mor iron saturation coefficient at 75% of magnetic flux. This value is aumatically set during rotational Au-Tuning. Sets the mor iron loss in watts (W). Range *3.0 A * No A A A A A 48 4 poles No No Q No Q Q Facry 9.84 Ω * 8.% * No A A A A A No No No A A A 0.50 No No No A A A 0.75 No No No A A A 4 W * Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux No A A No No No *. Initial/Default settings vary based on drive capacity. Values shown here are for 00-40V class 0.4kW drives. *. The setting range is 0% 00% of the drive's rated current. Values shown here are for 00-40V class 0.4kW drives. * 3. The setting range will vary based on drive capacity. Values shown here are for 00-40V class 0.4kW drives. 6-09

327 Manual Mor Parameter Methods The mor parameter settings methods are given below. Make (enter) settings referring the mor test report. Mor Rated Voltage Set E-0 the rated current on the mor nameplate. Mor Rated Slip Set E-0 the mor rated slip calculated from the number of rated rotations on the mor nameplate. Amount of mor rated slip = Mor rated frequency (Hz) - No. of rated rotations (min ) x No. of mor poles/0. Mor No-Load Current Set E-03 the mor no-load current using the rated voltage and rated frequency. The mor no-load current is not normally written on the mor nameplate. Consult the mor manufacturer. Facry setting is the no-load current value for a standard Yaskawa 4-pole mor. Number of Mor Poles E-04 is displayed only when control method with PG is selected. Set the number of mor poles (number of poles) as written on the mor nameplate. Mor Line--Line Resistance E-05 is set aumatically when performing mor line--line resistance autuning. When you cannot perform tuning, consult the mor manufacturer for the line--line resistance value. Calculate the resistance from the line--line resistance value in the mor test report using the following formula, and then make the setting accordingly. E-type isolation: [Line- line resistance (Ω) at 75 C of test report] 0.9 (Ω) B-type isolation: [Line- line resistance (Ω) at 75 C of test report] 0.9 (Ω) F-type isolation: [Line- line resistance (Ω) at 5 C of test report] 0.87 (Ω) Mor Leak Inductance Set the amount of voltage drop due mor leak inductance in E-06 using the percentage over the mor rated voltage. Make this setting when the high-speed mor inductance is small. If the inductance is not written on the mor nameplate, consult the mor manufacturer. Mor Iron Saturation Coefficients and s E-07 and E-08 are set aumatically using autuning. Mor Iron Loss for Torque Compensation E-0 is displayed only when in control method. To increase the rque compensation accuracy when in control method, set the mor iron loss in Watts. 6-0 Mor Mechanical Loss When using flux vecr control, adjust mechanical loss in the following cases. (There is normally no reason make this adjustment.) The mechanical loss setting is used compensate the rque. There is excessive rque loss from the mor bearings. There is excessive rque loss from a fan, pump, etc.

328 Individual Functions the Pattern In control method, you can set the Drive input voltage and the pattern as the need arises. Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux E-0 Input voltage setting Input Voltage Set the Drive input voltage in volt. This setting is used as a reference value in protection functions (40V) (480V)* 30.0V or 460.0V * No Q Q Q Q Q E-03 pattern selection V/F Selection 0 E: Select from the 5 preset patterns. F: Cusm user-set patterns (Applicable for settings E-04 E-0.) 0 F F No Q Q No No No E-04 Max. output frequency Max Frequency Hz *5 * No Q Q Q Q Q E-05 Max. voltage Max Voltage * 30.0V or 460.0V* * No Q Q Q Q Q E-06 Base frequency Base Frequency Output voltage (V) Hz *5 * No Q Q Q Q Q E-07 E-08 E-09 Mid. output frequency Mid Frequency A Mid. output frequency voltage Mid Voltage A Min. output frequency Min Frequency Frequency (Hz) To set characteristics in a straight line, set the same values for E-07 and E-09. In this case, the setting for E-08 will be disregarded. Always ensure that the four frequencies are set in the following manner: E-04 (FMAX) E-06 (FA) > E-07 (FB) E-09 (FMIN) * 3.0Hz *.6Vac or 5.3 * * Hz *5 * No A A A No No No A A A No No No Q Q Q A Q E-0 Min. output frequency voltage Min Voltage *.3Vac or 4.6Vac * * No A A A No No 6-

329 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux E- Mid. output frequency Mid Frequency B Hz *5 *3 No A A A A A E- Mid. output frequency voltage Mid Voltage B Set only fine-adjust for the output range. Normally, this setting is not required * 0.0 V *3 No A A A A A E-3 Base voltage Base Voltage * 0.0 V *4 No A A Q Q Q *. These are values for a 00-40V Class Drive. Values for a V Class Drive are double. *. The facry setting will change when the control method is changed. (-loop vecr control facry settings are given.) * 3. The contents of parameters E- and E- are ignored when set * 4. E-3 is set the same value as E-05 by autuning. * 5. The setting range is for open-loop vecr control. 6-

330 Individual Functions Drive Input Voltage E-0 Range: 55.0V 55.0V (00-40V Models) 30.0V 50.0V ( V Models) Facry Defaults: 40.0V (00-40V Models) 480.0V ( V Models) Set the Input Voltage parameter (E-0) the nominal voltage of the connected AC power supply. This parameter adjusts the levels of some protective features of the Drive (i.e. Overvoltage, Stall Prevention, etc.). E-0 also serves as the Maximum/Base Voltage used by the Preset V/Hz curves (E-03= 0 E). WARNING DRIVE INPUT VOLTAGE (NOT MOTOR VOLTAGE) MUST BE SET IN E-0 FOR THE PROTECTIVE FEATURES OF THE DRIVE TO FUNCTION PROPERLY. FAILURE TO DO SO MAY RESULT IN EQUIPMENT DAMAGE AND/OR PERSONAL INJURY. E-03 Pattern Selection Description 0 50 Hz 60 Hz Saturation 50 Hz Saturation 3 7 Hz 4 50 Hz VT 5 50 Hz VT 6 60 Hz VT 7 60 Hz VT 8 50 Hz HST 9 50 Hz HST A 60 Hz HST B 60 Hz HST C 90 Hz D 0 Hz E 80 Hz F Cusm (facry default, with parameter values per setting ) FF Cusm w/o limit The Drive operates utilizing a set pattern determine the appropriate output voltage level for each commanded speed. There are 5 different preset patterns select from with varying voltage profiles, saturation levels (frequency at which maximum voltage is reached), and maximum frequencies. There are also settings for Cusm patterns that will allow the programmer manually set ( Cusmize ) the pattern using parameters E-04 through E-3. Using parameter E-03, the programmer can select one of the preset patterns or chose between a cusm pattern with an upper voltage limit (E-03= F: Cusm V/F ) and a cusm pattern without a voltage limit (E-03= FF: Cusm w/o limit ). 6-3

331 E-04 Maximum Output Frequency Range: Hz Facry Default: 60.0Hz E-05 Maximum Output Voltage Range: V (00-40V Models) V ( V Models) Facry Defaults: 30.0V (00-40V Models) 480.0V ( V Models) E-06 Base Frequency Range: Hz Facry Default: 60.0Hz E-07 Mid Output Frequency A Range: Hz Facry Default: 3.0Hz E-08 Mid Output Voltage A Range: V (00-40V Models) V ( V Models) Facry Defaults:.6V (00-40V Models) 5.V ( V Models) E-09 Minimum Output Frequency Range: Hz Facry Default: 0.5Hz E-0 Minimum Output Voltage Range: V (00-40V Models) V ( V Models) Facry Defaults:.3V (00-40V Models) 4.6V ( V Models) E- Mid Output Frequency B Range: Hz Facry Default: 0.0Hz E- Mid Output Voltage B E-3 Base Voltage Range: V (00-40V Models) V ( V Models) Facry Defaults: 0.0V (00-40V Models) 0.0V ( V Models) 6-4 To set up a cusm pattern, program the points shown in the diagram below using parameters E-04 through E-3. Be sure that the following condition is true:: E-09 E-07 E-06 E- E-04

332 Individual Functions Max Voltage E-05 Mid Voltage B E- Base Voltage E-3 Mid Voltage A E-08 Min Voltage E-0 E-09 E-07 E-06 E- E-04 Min Freq Mid Freq Freq A A Base Freq Mid Freq B Max Freq Frequency Fig.38 Cusm Pattern Programming Curve Increasing the voltage in the pattern increases the available mor rque. However, when setting a cusm pattern, increase the voltage gradually while moniring the mor current, prevent: Drive faults as a result of mor over-excitation Mor overheating or excessive vibration Table 9 Pattern Default s for Drive Capacity 0.4~.5kW for 40V Class Parameter No. Name Unit Facry E-03 Pattern Selection E-04 Max Output Frequency Hz E-05 Max Output Voltage V E-06 Base Frequency Hz E-07 Mid Output Frequency A V E-08 Mid Output Voltage A V E-09 Min Output Frequency Hz E-0 Mid Output Voltage V E- Mid Output Frequency B Hz E- Mid Output Voltage B V E-3 Base Voltage V For 480V class units, the value is twice that of 40V class units. 6-5

333 Table 9 Pattern Default s for Drive Capacity 0.4~.5kW for 40V Class (Continued) Parameter No. Name Unit Facry E-03 Pattern Selection 8 9 A B C D E F E-04 Max. Output Frequency Hz E-05 Max. Output Voltage V E-06 Base Frequency Hz E-07 Mid. Output Frequency A V E-08 Mid. Output Voltage A V E-09 Min. Output Frequency Hz E-0 Mid. Output Voltage V E- Mid Output Frequency B Hz E- Mid Output Voltage B V E-3 Base Voltage V For 480V class units, the value is twice that of 40V class units. Table 0 Pattern Default s for Drive Capacity.~45kW for 40V Class Parameter No. Name Unit Facry E-03 Pattern Selection E-04 Max. Output Frequency Hz E-05 Max. Output Voltage V E-06 Base Frequency Hz E-07 Mid. Output Frequency A V E-08 Mid. Output Voltage A V E-09 Min. Output Frequency Hz E-0 Mid. Output Voltage V E- Mid Output Frequency B Hz E- Mid Output Voltage B V E-3 Base Voltage V For 480V class units, the value is twice that of 40V class units. 6-6

334 Individual Functions Table 0 Pattern Default s for Drive Capacity.~45kW for 40V Class (Continued) Parameter No. Name Unit Facry E-03 Pattern Selection 8 9 A B C D E F E-04 Max. Output Frequency Hz E-05 Max. Output Voltage V E-06 Base Frequency Hz E-07 Mid. Output Frequency A V E-08 Mid. Output Voltage A V E-09 Min. Output Frequency Hz E-0 Mid. Output Voltage V E- Mid Output Frequency B Hz E- Mid Output Voltage B V E-3 Base Voltage V For 480V class units, the value is twice that of 40V class units. Table Pattern Default s for Drive Capacity 55~300kW for 40V Class Parameter No. Name Unit Facry E-03 Pattern Selection E-04 Max. Output Frequency Hz E-05 Max. Output Voltage V E-06 Max. Voltage Frequency Hz E-07 Mid. Output Frequency A V E-08 Mid. Output Voltage A V E-09 Min. Output Frequency Hz E-0 Mid. Output Voltage V E- Mid Output Frequency B Hz E- Mid Output Voltage B V E-3 Base Voltage V For 480V class units, the value is twice that of 40V class units. 6-7

335 Table Pattern Default s for Drive Capacity 55~300kW for 40V Class (Continued) Parameter No. Name Unit Facry E-03 Pattern Selection 8 9 A B C D E F E-04 Max. Output Frequency Hz E-05 Max. Output Voltage V E-06 Base Frequency Hz E-07 E-08 E-09 E-0 E- E- Mid. Output Frequency A Mid. Output Voltage A Min. Output Frequency Mid. Output Voltage Mid Output Frequency B Mid Output Voltage B V V Hz V Hz V E-3 Base Voltage V For 480V class units, the value is twice that of 40V class units. 6-8

336 Individual Functions Table 8 Preset Patterns Specifications E-03 Pattern * Specifications E-03 Pattern * General-purpose 50Hz 0 60Hz Saturation F 50Hz Saturation (V) (Hz) High Starting Torque * 50Hz 60Hz High Starting Torque High Starting Torque High Starting Torque (V) (V) F 7 0 (Hz) High Starting Torque 8 9 A B (V) (Hz) B A (Hz) 60 (V) 30 (V) 30 7Hz Hz C C 7 0 (Hz) (Hz) Variable Torque 50Hz 60Hz Variable Torque Variable Torque Variable Torque Variable Torque (V) (Hz) (V) (Hz) High Speed Operation 0Hz 80Hz D E (V) (Hz) 0 (V) 30 D E (Hz) 80 Fig 6.63 User-Set Pattern If one of the cusm patterns is selected, then parameters E-04 through E-3 will determine the pattern. IMPORTANT When a facry Initialization is performed, the setting of E-03 is unaffected but the settings of E-04 through E-3 are returned their facry default settings. Precautions When the setting is user-defined pattern, beware of the following points. When changing control method, parameters E-07 E-0 will change the facry settings for that control method. Be sure set the four frequencies as follows: E-04 (FMAX) E-06 (FA) > E-07 (FB) E-09 (FMIN) 6-9

337 Torque Control With flux vecr control or open-loop vecr control, the mor's output rque can be controlled by a rque reference from an analog input. Set d5-0 control rque. Related Parameters Parameter Number d5-0 d5-0 d5-03 d5-04 Name Display Torque Control Selection Torq Control Sel Torque Reference Delay Time Torq Ref Filter Speed Limit Selection Speed Limit Sel Speed Limit Speed Lmt Value Description Selects speed or rque control. The rque reference is set via analog input A or A3 when it is set for "rque reference" (H3-05 or H3-09 = 3). Torque reference is set as a percentage of mor rated rque. To use this function for switching between speed and rque control, set 0 and set a multi-function input "speed/ rque control change" (H-xx = 7). 0: Speed Control (controlled by C5-0 C5-07) : Torque Control Sets the rque reference delay time in milliseconds. This function can be used correct for noise in the rque control signal or the responsiveness with the host controller. When oscillation occurs during rque control, increase the set value. Sets the speed limit command method for the rque control method. : Analog Input - Limited by the output of the soft starter (b-0 selection and active acceleration/ deceleration and S-curve settings). : Program - Limited by d5-04 setting value. Sets the speed limit during rque control as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E-04). This function is enabled when d5-03 is set. Directions are as follows. +: run command direction -: run command opposite direction Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 0 No No No No A A ms * No No No No A A or No No No No A A % No No No No A A 6-0

338 Individual Functions Parameter Number d5-05 d5-06 H3-04 H3-05 H3-06 H3-07 H3-08 H3-09 Name Display Speed Limit Bias Speed Lmt Bias Speed/Torque Control Switchover Timer Ref Hold Time Terminal A3 Signal Level Selection Term A3 Signal Terminal A3 Function Selection Terminal A3 Sel Terminal A3 Gain Terminal A3 Gain Terminal A3 Bias Terminal A3 Bias Terminal A Signal Level Selection Term A Signal Terminal A Function Selection Terminal A Sel Description Sets the speed limit bias as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E-04). Bias is given the specified speed limit. It can be used adjust the margin for the speed limit. Sets the delay time from inputting the multi-function input "speed/ rque control change" (from On OFF or OFF ON) until the control is actually changed. This function is enabled when the multi-function input "speed/ rque control change" (H-xx= 7) is set. While in the speed/rque control switching timer, the analog inputs hold the value present when the "speed/ rque control change" is received. Sets the signal level of terminal A3. 0: 0 0Vdc : -0 +0Vdc [Refer table "H3-05, H3-09 s" for multi-function selections] Sets the output level when 0V is input. Sets the frequency reference when 0V is input. Selects the signal level of terminal A. 0: 0 0Vdc (switch S- must be in the OFF position). : -0 +0Vdc (switch S- must be in the OFF position). : 4 0mA (switch S- must be in the ON position) Note: Switch between current or voltage inputs by using (S-) switch on the terminal board. Selects the function of terminal A. Same choices as Terminal A3 Function Selection (H3-05). Range 0 0 0% No No No No A A ms No No No No A A 0 0 No A A A A A 0 F No A A A A A Facry Change during Operation Control Methods 00.0% Yes A A A A A 0.0% Yes A A A A A 0 No A A A A A 0 F 0 No A A A A A with PG Flux 6-

339 Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux H3-0 Terminal A Gain Terminal A Gain Sets the output level when 0V is input % Yes A A A A A H3- Terminal A Bias Terminal A Bias Sets the output level when 0V is input % Yes A A A A A * Facry setting will change according the control mode (facry settings for Flux Control are shown here). Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H-0 H-0) Value Function Control Methods with PG Flux 7 Speed/rque control change (ON: Torque control) No No No Yes Yes 78 Polarity reverse command for external rque reference No No No Yes Yes Multi-function Contact Output Functions (H-0 H-05) Value 3 Function Speed control circuit operating for rque control (except when spped). The external rque reference will be limited if rque control is selected. Output when the mor is rotating at the speed limit. Control Methods with PG Flux No No No Yes Yes Multi-function Analog Inputs (H3-05, H3-09) Value Function Control Methods with PG Flux 0 Add terminal A Yes Yes Yes Yes Yes 3 Torque reference/rque limit at speed control No No No Yes Yes 4 Torque compensation No No No Yes Yes Monir Function Parameter Number Name Display Description Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output Min. Unit Control Methods with PG Flux U-09 Torque reference Torque Reference Monir in internal rque reference value for vecr control. 0 V: Mor rated rque (0 ± 0V possible) 0.% No No A A A 6-

340 Individual Functions Inputting Torque References and Torque Reference Directions The rque reference can be changed according an analog input by setting H3-09 (Multi-function analog input terminal A selection) or H3-05 (Multi-function analog input terminal A3 selection) 3 (rque reference) or 4 (rque compensation). The rque reference input methods are listed in the following table. Torque Reference Input Method Voltage input (0 ±0 V) Current input (4 0mA) Option Card (AI-4B) (0 ±0 V) The direction of the rque output from the mor will be determined by the sign of the analog signal input. It does not depend on the direction of the run command. The direction of rque will be as follows: Positive analog reference: Torque reference for forward mor rotation (counterclockwise as viewed from the mor output axis). Negative analog reference: Torque reference for reverse mor rotation (clockwise as viewed from the mor output axis). Application Precautions Reference Location Between A3 and AC Between A and AC (Turn OFF pin of SW.) Between A and AC (Turn ON pin of SW.) Between TC and TC4 Selection Method H3-04 = H3-05 = 3 H3-08 = H3-09 = 3 H3-08 = H3-09 = 3 F-0 = 0 H3-08 = H3-09 = 3 Remarks Set H for a 0 0-V rque reference. To switch the rque reference between positive and negative rque, set a multifunction analog input 78. Set H for a 0 0-V rque reference. To switch the rque reference between positive and negative rque, set a multifunction analog input 78. The input can be used for rque compensation by setting H To switch the rque reference between positive and negative rque, set a multifunction analog input 78. The input can be used for rque compensation by setting H The input can be used for rque compensation by setting H If the analog signal input level is 0 0V or 4 0mA, a forward rque reference will not be applied. To apply reverse rque, use an input level of -0V 0V or switch the direction using a multi-function input set 78 (polarity reverse command for external rque reference). Torque compensation from analog input Torque reference from analog input Torque primary delay filter d5-0 + Speed limit from analog input from terminal A Speed limit d5-04 d Speed controller (ASR) Priority circuit + + Torque limit Refer rque limit setting via constants and analog input Internal rque reference Speed limit bias d5-05 Speed feedback Speed limiter Fig 6.64 Torque Control Block Diagram 6-3

341 Speed Limiter and Priority Circuit (Speed Limit Function) If the external rque reference and load are not balanced during rque control, the mor will accelerate in either the forward or reverse direction. The speed limit function is used limit the speed a specified value and it consists of the speed limiter circuit and priority circuit. Application Precautions There are two ways set a speed limit: using an input from an analog input terminal and setting a speed limit in d5-04. The inputs methods for a speed limit are listed in the following table. Speed Limit Input Method Location of Reference Parameter s Remarks Set in d5-04 d5-03 = - Between A and AC b-0 = H3-0 = Set H3-0 0 if the speed limit is always be positive. Voltage input (0 ±0 V) Between A and AC b-0 = 0 H3-08 = H3-09 = The value will be added the value input on A determine the speed limit. Set H if the speed limit input on A is always be positive. Turn OFF (V side) pin of DIP switch S on the terminal board. Current input (4 0mA) Between A and AC b-0 = 0 H3-08 = H3-09 = The value will be added the value input on A determine the speed limit. Turn ON (I side) pin of DIP switch S on the terminal board. Option Card (AI-4B) (0 ±0 V) Between TC and TC4 b-0 = 3 F-0 = 0 If H3-09 is set 0, the sum of the input between TC and TC4 will be added the input between TC and TC4 determine the speed limit. IMPORTANT The direction in which speed is controlled is determined by the sign of the speed limit signal and the direction of the run command. Positive voltage applied: The speed in the forward direction will be limited for forward operation. Negative voltage applied: The speed in the reverse direction will be limited for reverse operation. If the direction of mor rotation and the command direction are not the same, speed will be limited 0 as long as b5-05 is set 0. Speed Limit Bias The speed limit bias can be set limit both the forward and reverse speed the same value. This differs from the operation of the speed limit setting. To use the speed limit bias, set d and set the bias in d5-05 as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. To set 50% forward and reverse speed limits, set the speed limit setting 0 (d5-03 =, d5-04 = 0, and d5-05 = 50). The range of rque control will be from -50% 50% of the maximum output speed. When using both the speed limit and the speed limit bias, the range of rque control will be positive and negative speed limits with the speed limit bias added each. The range of rque control when the forward speed limit is 50% and the speed limit bias is 0% is shown in the following figure. This figure does not take the priority circuit in account. 6-4

342 Individual Functions Positive rque Speed limit bias d5-05 Reverse operation Forward operation Forward speed limit 50% Negative rque Fig 6.65 Speed Limit Bias Torque Limit Operation Examples Operation examples will be described separately for winding operation, in which the speed and mor rque are in the same directions, and rewinding operation, in which the speed and mor rque are in opposite directions. Winding Operation In a winding operation, the line (speed) and rque generated by the mor are in the same direction. For the winding operation, both the speed limit and the rque reference input are positive. The mor will accelerate when the rque reference input is larger than the load and will decelerate when it is smaller than the load. If the mor turns faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit. When the speed then drops below the speed limit, a positive compensation value is output. The rque compensation is proportional the ASR proportional gain. When the sum of the rque reference and the rque compensation output by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the mor will sp accelerating and run at a constant speed. Rewinding Operation In a rewinding operation, the line (speed) and rque generated by the mor are in the opposite directions. (In this example, we ll assume that the line speed is positive and the rque reference input is negative.) For the rewinding operation, the speed limit is positive and the rque reference input is negative. If the mor turns faster than the speed limit, a negative compensation value is output from the speed limiter circuit. If the mor is rotating in reverse, a negative compensation value is output. If the speed is 0 or is below the speed limit, a 0 compensation value is output. In this way, the output from the speed limiter is used maintain the mor speed between 0 and the speed limit. When the sum of the rque reference and the rque compensation output by the speed limiter is the same as the actual load, the mor will sp accelerating and run at a constant speed. 6-5

343 Winding Operation Rewinding Operation N T T Configuration Line direction X N X Line direction M Mor M Normal Rotation Direction Torque Reference Polarity (TREF) Speed Limit Polarity (SLIM) Forward Reverse Forward Reverse Torque limit Torque TREF Torque limit Torque Torque limit Torque Torque limit Torque TREF Generated Torque -(d5-05) 0 SLIM Torque limit Speed SLIM TREF (d5-05) 0 Torque limit Speed -(d5-05) 0 TREF SLIM Speed Torque limit SLIM 0 (d5-05) Torque limit Speed TREF(%) C5-0 TREF(%) C5-0 TREF(%) C5-0 d5-05(%) The smaller of these TREF(%) The smaller of these C5-0 d5-05(%) Torque Reference Adjustment Consider the following information when adjusting the rque. Torque Reference Delay Time: d5-0 The time constant of the primary filter in the rque reference section can be adjusted. This parameter is used eliminate noise in the rque reference signal and adjust the responsiveness the host controller. Increase the setting if oscillation occurs during rque control. the Torque Compensation Set multi-function analog input A or A3 rque compensation (setting 4). When the amount of rque loss for mechanical loss or other facr at the load is input one of these terminals, it is added the rque reference compensate for the loss. The direction of rque will be as follows: Positive voltage (current): Torque compensation reference for forward mor rotation (counterclockwise as viewed from the mor output axis). Negative voltage: Torque compensation reference for reverse mor rotation (clockwise as viewed from the mor output axis). Since the polarity of the voltage input determines the direction, only forward rque compensation can be input when the 0 0V or 4 0mA signal level has been selected. If you want input reverse rque compensation, be sure select the 0 ±0V signal level. 6-6

344 Individual Functions Speed/Torque Control Switching Function It is possible switch between speed control and rque control when one of the multi-function inputs (H-0 H-0) is set 7 (Speed/Torque Control Change). Speed control is performed when the input is OFF and rque control is performed when the input is ON. Set d5-0 switch speed/rque control. the Speed/Torque Control Switching Timer The delay between a change in the speed/control switching function input (ON OFF or OFF ON) and the corresponding change in the control mode can be set in d5-06. During the timer delay, the value of the 3 analog inputs will retain the values they had when the ON/OFF status of speed/rque control switching signal was changed. Use this delay complete any changes required in external signals. Application Precautions The frequency reference (during speed control) is set in b-0. The speed limit during rque control is set in d5-03. If the rque reference has been assigned a multi-function analog input, terminal A, or terminal A3, the input function changes when the control mode is switched between rque control and speed control. During speed control: The analog input terminal is used as the rque limit input. During rque control: The analog input terminal is used as the rque reference input. When the run command turns OFF, the control method when spped will be for speed control. Even from the rque control mode, the system will aumatically change speed control and decelerate a sp when the run command turns OFF. When A-0 (control method selection) is set 3 (flux vecr control), the speed/rque change command (a setting of 7) can be set for a multi-function input (H-0 H-0) switch between speed and rque control during operation. An example is shown below. Terminal No. User Parameter No. Facry Function 8 H Speed/rque control change A b-0 Frequency reference selection (terminals A, A) C5-03 Speed limit (terminals A, A) A3 H Torque reference/rque limit 6-7

345 A timing chart for switching between speed and rque control is shown in the following figure. CLOSED CLOSED Speed/rque change signal (terminal S8 input) OPEN Run OPEN Run command Sp Control mode Speed Torque Speed Torque Speed (decel sp) Terminal A input Speed reference Speed limit Speed reference Speed limit Terminal A3 input Torque limit Torque reference Torque limit Torque reference Fig 6.66 Speed/Torque Control Switching Time Chart. Speed Control (ASR) Structure Speed control (ASR) during vecr control adjusts the rque reference so that the deviation between the speed reference and the estimated speed (PG feedback or speed estimar) is 0. Speed control (ASR) during V/ f control with a PG adjusts the output frequency so that the deviation between the speed reference and the estimated speed (PG feedback or speed estimar) is 0. The following block diagram shows the structure of the speed control for vecr or control with a PG. Frequency reference Detected speed Estimated speed + C5-0, C5-03 P I C5-0, C5-04 I limit C Primary filter C5-06 Torque limits L7-0 L7-04 Speed Control Block Diagram for Control Torque reference Frequency reference + Output frequency + Limit Detected speed + Change rate limiter P C5-0 C5-03 I C5-0, C C5-05 Speed Control Block Diagram for Control with a PG Fig 6.67 Speed Control Block Diagrams 6-8

346 Individual Functions Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation with PG Control Methods Flux C5-0 ASR Proportional Gain ASR P Gain Sets the proportional gain of the speed control loop (ASR) * 0.00 * Yes No A No A A C5-0 ASR Integral Time ASR I Time Sets the integral time of the speed control loop (ASR) sec * Yes No A No A A C5-03 C5-04 ASR Proportional Gain ASR P Gain Sets the speed control gain and integral time of the speed control loop (ASR). Note: Adjustment is not normally required * ASR Integral Time ASR I Time * sec * Yes No A No A A Yes No A No A A C5-05 ASR Limit ASR Limit Sets the upper limit for the speed control loop (ASR) as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E-04) % No No A No No No C5-06 ASR Primary Delay Time Constant ASR Delay Time Sets the filter time constant for the time from the speed loop the rque command output * No No No No A A C5-07 ASR Gain Switching Frequency ASR Gain SW Freq Sets the frequency for switching between Proportional Gain, and Integral Time, No No No No A A C5-08 ASR Integral Limit ASR I Limit Sets the ASR integral upper limit and rated load as a percentage of maximum output frequency (E-04) No No No No A A *. Facry settings will change depending on the control mode. *. The setting range becomes when using controls modes Flux or. 6-9

347 Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H-0 H-0) Value D E 77 Function Speed control disable setting for control with PG OFF: Use speed control control with PG ON: Do not use speed control for control with PG Speed control integral reset Enables switching between PI and P control for the speed control loop. Speed control (ASR) proportional gain switch (switching between C5-0 and C5-03) OFF: Use proportional gain in C5-0 ON: Use proportional gain in C5-03 Control Methods with PG Flux No Yes No No No No No No Yes Yes No No No Yes Yes Speed Control (ASR) Gain Adjustment for Control Use the following procedure adjust C5-0 and C5-03 with the mechanical system and actual load connected. At zero-speed, increase C5-0 (ASR P Gain ) until there is no oscillation. At zero-speed, decrease C5-0 (ASR I Time ) until there is no oscillation. Does oscillation develop when the mor operates at the maximum normal operating speed? YES Decrease C5-0 (ASR P Gain ). NO Adjustment completed. (When there is higher-level position control, adjust the position loop gain so that overshooting/undershooting doesn t occur.) Increase C5-0 (ASR I Time ). 6-30

348 Individual Functions Fine Adjustments When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform. Parameter settings like those shown in the following table will be necessary monir the speed waveform. Parameter No. H4-0 Multi-function analog output terminal FM monir selection Name Explanation H4-0 Multi-function analog output terminal FM output gain.00 H4-03 Multi-function analog output terminal FM bias 0.0 H4-04 Multi-function analog output terminal AM monir selection 5 H4-05 Multi-function analog output terminal AM output gain.00 H4-06 Multi-function analog output terminal AM bias selection 0.00 s that allow multi-function analog output be used monir the output frequency. s that allow multi-function analog output be used monir the mor speed. H4-07 Multi-function analog output terminal signal level selection s that allow a 0 ±0V H4-08 Multi-function analog output terminal signal level selection signal range be monired. The multi-function analog outputs have the following functions with these parameter settings. Multi-function analog output (terminal FM): Outputs Drive's output frequency (0 ±0 V). Multi-function analog output (terminal AM): Outputs actual mor speed (0 ±0 V). Terminal AC is the multi-function analog output common. We recommend moniring both the output frequency and the mor speed monir the response delay or deviations from the reference value, as shown in the following diagram. Adjusting ASR Proportional Gain (C5-0) This gain setting adjusts the responsiveness of the speed control (ASR). The responsiveness is increased when this setting is increased. Usually this setting is higher for larger loads. Oscillation will occur if this setting is increased o much. The following diagram shows the type of changes that can occur in the response when the ASR proportional gain is changed. Mor speed The proportional gain is high. (Oscillation occurs when the gain is o high.) The proportional gain is low. Fig 6.68 Responsiveness for Proportional Gain Time 6-3

349 Adjusting ASR Integral Time (C5-0) This parameter sets the speed control (ASR) integral time. Lengthening the integral time lowers the responsiveness, and weakens the resistance external influences. Oscillation will occur if this setting is o short. The following diagram shows the type of changes that can occur in the response when the ASR integral time is changed. Mor speed Short integral time Long integral time Fig 6.69 Responsiveness for Integral Time Time Different Gain s for Low-speed and High-speed Switch between low-speed and high-speed gain when oscillation occurs because of resonance with the mechanical system at low speed or high speed. The proportional gain P and integral time I can be switched according the mor speed, as shown below. P, I P = C5-0 I = C5-0 P = C5-03 I = C5-04 (Low speed) 0 C5-07 If C5-07 is set 0, P = C5-0 and I = C5-0. Mor speed (Hz) Fig 6.70 Low-speed and High-speed Gain s the Gain Switching Frequency (C5-07) Set the switching frequency about 80% of the mor operating frequency or the frequency at which oscillation occurs. Low-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-03, C5-04) Connect the actual load and adjust these parameters at zero-speed. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain ) until there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time ) until there is no oscillation. 6-3

350 Individual Functions High-speed Gain Adjustments (C5-0, C5-0) Adjust these parameters at normal operating speed. Increase C5-0 (ASR proportional gain ) until there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-0 (ASR integral time ) until there is no oscillation. Refer Fine Adjustments on page 6-3 for details on making fine adjustments of high-speed operation. ASR Proportional Gain Switch When one of the multi-function inputs (H-0 H-0) is set 77, the input can be used switch between C5-0 (proportional gain ) and C5-03 (proportional gain ). Proportional gain is used when the multi-function input is ON. This input has higher priority than the ASR switching frequency set in C5-07. ASR Gain Switch signal (a multi-function input) OFF ON Proportional gain (P) Proportional gain determined by mor speed. C5-03 gain setting C5-0 C5-0 The gain is changed linearly in integral time (C5-0). Fig 6.7 ASR Proportional Gain Switch Gain Adjustment for Speed Control during Control with PG When using control with PG, set the proportional gain (P) and the integral time (I) at E-09 (minimum output frequency) and E-04 (maximum output frequency). Fig 6.7 Speed Control Gain Integral Time Adjustment for Control with PG shows how the proportional gain and integral time change in linear fashion based on the speed. P and I setting P = C5-0 I = C5-0 P = C5-03 I = C E-09 Min. output frequency Mor speed (Hz) E-04 Max. output frequency Fig 6.7 Speed Control Gain Integral Time Adjustment for Control with PG 6-33

351 Gain Adjustments at Minimum Output Frequency Operate the mor at the minimum output frequency. Increase C5-03 (ASR proportional gain ) a level where there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-04 (ASR integral time ) a level where there is no oscillation. Monir the Drive's output current and verify that it is less than 50% of the Drive rated current. If the output current exceeds 50% of the Drive's rated current, decrease C5-03 and increase C5-04. Gain Adjustments at Maximum Output Frequency Operate the mor at the maximum output frequency. Increase C5-0 (ASR proportional gain ) a level where there is no oscillation. Decrease C5-0 (ASR integral time ) a level where there is no oscillation. Fine Adjustments When you want even finer gain adjustment, adjust the gain while observing the speed waveform. The adjustment method is the same as that for vecr control. Enable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration (by setting F-07 ) when you want the mor speed closely follow the frequency reference during acceleration and deceleration. Reduce the setting of C5-0 if overshooting occurs during acceleration, and reduce the setting of C5-03 and increase the setting of C5-04 if undershooting occurs when spping. If overshooting and undershooting cannot be eliminated by adjusting only the gain, reduce the value of C5-05 speed control and reduce the limit of the frequency reference compensation value. Droop Control Function Droop control is a function that allows the user set the amount of mor slip. When a single load is operated with two mors (such as in a crane conveyor), a high-resistance mor is normally used. This is use rque characteristics that exhibit proportion movements due changes in the secondary resisr maintain rque balance with the load and overall speed balance with the load. If droop control is used, a high-resistance mor characteristics can be set for a general-purpose mor. Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux b7-0 Droop Control Level Droop Quantity Sets the speed decrease as a percentage of mor base speed (E-06) when the mor is at 00% load rque. of 0.0 disables droop control Yes No No No A A b7-0 Droop Control Delay Time Droop Delay Time Determines the droop control delay time in response a load change sec No A A A A A 6-34

352 Individual Functions Precautions Droop control is disabled if b7-0 is set 0.0. Set b7-0 the amount of slip as the percentage of slip when the maximum output frequency is input and the rated rque is generated. Parameter b7-0 is used adjust the responsiveness of droop control. Increase this setting if oscillation or hunting occur. the Droop Control Gain Set the droop control gain as the speed reduction at a 00% mor rque, as a percentage of the maximum output frequency. Torque b7-0 00% 0 Speed reference Fig 6.73 Droop Control Gain Speed Zero-servo Function The zero-servo function holds the mor when the mor is spped in what is call a zero-servo status. This function can be used sp the mor even with an external force acts on the mor or the analog reference input is offset. The zero-servo function is enabled when one of the multi-function inputs (H-0 H-0) is set 7 (zero servo command). If the zero servo command is ON when the frequency (speed) reference falls below the zero speed level, a zero-servo status is implemented. 6-35

353 Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation with PG Control Methods Flux b-0 DC Injection Braking Start Frequency DCInj Start Freq Sets the frequency at which DC injection braking starts when ramp sp (b-03 = 0) is selected. If b-0< E-09, DC Injection braking starts at E-09. Note: Zero Speed restrictions are active in Flux Mode Hz No A A A A A b9-0 Zero Servo Gain Zero Servo Gain Sets the position loop gain for Zero Servo command. This function is effective when multi-function input "zero servo command" is set No No No No A No b9-0 Zero Servo Completion Width Zero Servo Count Sets number of pulses used for the multi-function output of "zero servo completion" No No No No A No 6-36

354 Individual Functions Multi-function Contact Input Functions (H-0 H-0) Value Function Control Methods with PG Flux 7 Zero-servo command (ON: Zero-servo) No No No Yes No Multi-function Contact Output Functions (H-0 H-03) Value 33 Function Zero-servo end ON: Current position is within zero-servo start position ± the zero-servo end width. Control Methods with PG Flux No No No Yes No To output the zero-servo status externally, assign the Zero Servo End signal (setting 33) one of the multifunction outputs (H-0 H-03). Monir Function Parameter Number Name Display Description Output Signal Level During Multi-Function Analog Output Min. Unit Control Methods with PG Flux U-35 Zero-servo movement pulses Zero Servo Pulse Shows the number of PG pulses times 4 for the movement range when spped at zero. (Cannot be output.) No No No A No 6-37

355 Time Chart A time chart for the zero servo function is given in Fig 6.74 Time Chart for Zero Servo. Run command ON OFF Zero servo command ON OFF Frequency (speed) reference Excitation level b-0 Mor speed Zero Servo End signal Zero-servo status Fig 6.74 Time Chart for Zero Servo Application Precautions Be sure leave the run command input ON. If the run command is turned OFF, the output will be interrupted and the zero-servo function will become ineffective. The holding force of the zero-servo is adjusted in b9-0. The holding force will increase if the value of the setting is increased, but oscillation and hunting will occur if the setting is o large. Adjust b9-0 after adjusting the speed control gain. The zero-servo detection width is set as the allowable position offset from the zero-servo start position. Set 4 times the number of pulses from the PG. The Zero Servo End signal will go OFF when the zero servo command is turned OFF. IMPORTANT Do not lock the servo for extended periods of time at 00% when using the zero servo function. Drive errors may result. Extended periods of servo lock can be achieved by ensuring that the current during the servolock is 50% or less or by increasing the Drive capacity. 6-38

356 Digital Operar Functions Digital Operar Functions This section explains the Digital Operar functions. Digital Operar Functions You can set Digital Operar-related parameters such as selecting the Digital Operar display, multi-function selections, and copy functions. Related Parameters Parameter Number o-0 Name Display User Monir Selection After Power-Up Power-On Monir Description Selects which monir will be displayed upon power-up. : Frequency Reference (U-0) : Output Frequency (U-0) 3: Output Current (U-03) 4: User Monir (set by o-0) Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 4 Yes A A A A A o-03 Digital Operar Display Selection Display Scaling Sets the units of the Frequency References (d-0 d-7), the Frequency Reference Monirs (U-0, U-0, U-05), and the Modbus communication frequency reference. 0: Hz : % (00% = E-04) 39: RPM (Enter the number of mor poles) : User display. Set the number desired at maximum output frequency. 4 digit number Number of digits from the right of the decimal point No A A A A A Example : o-03 = 000, will result in frequency reference from (00.0 = Fmax). Example : o-03 = 34, will result in frequency reference from (.34 = Fmax). o-04 unit for frequency parameters related V/F characteristics Display Units Sets the setting units related V/F pattern frequency related parameters (E-04, -06, -09, -) 0: Hertz : RPM 0 0 No No No No A A 6-39

357 Parameter Number o-0 Name Display Local/Remote Key Function Selection Local/Remote Key Description Determines if the Digital Operar Local/Remote key is functional. 0: Disabled : Enabled Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 No A A A A A o-0 STOP Key Function Selection Oper STOP Key Determines if the STOP key on the Digital Operar will sp the Drive when Drive is operating from external terminals or serial communication. 0: Disabled : Enabled 0 No A A A A A o-03 User Parameter Default Value User Defaults Allows sring of parameter settings as a User Initialization Selection. 0: No Change : Set Defaults - Saves current parameter settings as user initialization. A-03 now allows selecting <0> for user initialization and returns o-03 zero. : Clear All - Clears the currently saved user initialization. A-03 no longer allows selecting <0> and returns o-03 zero. 0 0 No A A A A A o-05 Frequency Reference Method Selection Operar M.O.P. Determines if the Data/Enter key must be used input a frequency reference from the Digital Operar. 0: Disabled - Data/Enter key must be pressed enter a frequency reference. : Enabled - Data/Enter key is not required. The frequency reference is adjusted by the up and down arrow keys on the Digital Operar without having press the data/enter key. 0 0 No A A A A A o-07 Cumulative Operation Time Elapsed Time Set Sets the initial value of the elapsed operation timer U hr No A A A A A o-0 Cumulative Cooling Fan Operation Time Fan ON Time Set Sets the initial value of the heatsink fan operation time monir U hr No A A A A A 6-40

358 Digital Operar Functions Changing Frequency Reference and Display Units Set the Digital Operar frequency reference and display units using parameter o-03. You can change the units for the following parameters using o-03. U-0 (Frequency Reference) U-0 (Output Frequency) U-05 (Mor Speed) U-0 (Output Frequency after Soft Start) d-0 d-7 (Frequency references) Switching Monirs when the Power Supply Is ON Using parameter o-0, select the monir item (U- [status monir]) be displayed on the Digital Operar when the power supply is turned ON. For monirs that can be displayed, refer U- in Chapter 5 User Parameters. Precautions If selecting monir parameters other than U-0 (Frequency Reference), U-0 (Output Frequency), and U- 03 (Output Current), first select the monir items be displayed in o-0, and then set o-0 4. Disabling the STOP Key If b-0 (Operation Method Selection) is set,, or 3, the sp command from the STOP Key on the Digital Operar is an emergency sp command. Set o-0 0 disable emergency sp commands from the STOP Key on the Digital Operar. Disabling the LOCAL/REMOTE Key Set o-0 0 disable the LOCAL/REMOTE Key on the Digital Operar. You cannot switch Drive reference inputs set using reference inputs from the Digital Operar, b-0 (Reference Selection), or b-0 (Operation Method Selection). 6-4

359 Initializing Changed Parameter Values You can save the Drive parameter set values that you have changed as parameter initial values. Change the set values from the Drive facry settings, and then set o-03. Set A-03 (Initialize) 0 initialize the Drive parameters using the user-set initial values in memory. To clear the user-set initial values in memory, set o-03. the Frequency Reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without Using the Enter Key Use this function when inputting frequency references from the Digital Operar. When o-05 is set, you can increment and decrement the frequency reference using the UP and DOWN Keys without using the Enter Key. For example, enter the Run command using a 0 Hz reference, and then continuously press the UP Key increment the frequency reference by 0.0Hz only for the first 0.5 s, and then by 0.0Hz every 80ms for 3 s thereafter. Press and hold down the UP Key for 3 s minimum reach the maximum output frequency 0 s after that. The frequency reference that has been set will be sred in memory 5 s after the UP or DOWN Keys are released. Clearing Cumulative Operation Time Set the cumulative operation time initial value in time units in parameter o-07. Set o-07 0 clear U-3 (drive Operating Time). Clearing Drive Cooling Fan Operation Time Set the fan operation time initial value in time units in parameter o-0. Set o-0 0 clear U-40 (Cooling Fan Operating Time). 6-4

360 Digital Operar Functions Copying Parameters The Digital Operar can perform the following three functions using the built-in EEPROM (non-volatile memory). Sre Drive parameter set values in the Digital Operar (READ) Write parameter set values sred in the Digital Operar the Drive (COPY) Compare parameter set values sred in the Digital Operar with Drive parameters (VERIFY) Related Parameters Parameter Number o3-0 Name Display Copy Function Selection Copy Function Sel Description This parameter controls the copying of parameters and from the Digital Operar. 0: COPY SELECT (no function) : INV --> OP READ - All parameters are copied from the Drive the Digital Operar. : OP --> INV WRITE - All parameters are copied from the Digital Operar the Drive. 3: OP<-->INV VERIFY - Parameter settings in the Drive are compared those in the Digital Operar. Note: When using the copy function, the Drive model number (o-04), software number (U-4), and control method (A-0) must match or an error will occur. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux No A A A A A o3-0 Copy Allowed Selection Read Allowable Enables and disables the Digital Operar copy functions. 0: Disabled - No Digital Operar copy functions are allowed. : Enabled - Copying allowed. 0 0 No A A A A A 6-43

361 Sring Drive Set Values in the Digital Operar (READ) To sre Drive set values in the Digital Operar, make the settings using the following method. Table 6. READ Function Procedure Step No. Digital Operar Display Explanation -ADV- ** Main Menu ** Programming Press the Menu Key, and select advanced programming mode. -ADV- Initialization Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the parameter monir display. A - 00= Select Language 3 -ADVo3-0=0 COPY Function Copy Funtion Sel Display o3-0 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement Key. -ADVo3-0= 4 0 *0* Copy Funtion Sel Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the parameter setting display. COPY SELECT -ADVo3-0= Copy Funtion Sel 5 Change the set value using the Increment Key. *0* READ 6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The READ function will start. INV OP READING -ADV- -ADV- READ 7 READ COMPLETE If the READ function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operar. -ADV- 8 Copy Funtion Sel The display returns o3-0 when a key is pressed. o3-0=0 COPY SELECT *0* An error may occur while saving memory. If an error is displayed, press any key cancel the error display and return the o3-0 display. 6-44

362 Digital Operar Functions Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer Chapter 7 Errors when Using the Digital Operar Copy Function.) Error Display Meaning PRE READ IMPOSSIBLE You are attempting set o3-0 while o3-0 is set 0. IFE READ DATA ERROR Read data length mismatch or read data error. RDE DATA ERROR Tried write parameters EEPROM on the Digital Operar, but unable perform write operation. Select READ Permitted Prevent overwriting the data sred in EEPROM in the Digital Operar by mistake. With o3-0 set 0, if you set o3-0, and perform the write operation, PrE will be displayed on the Digital Operar, and the write operation will be spped. Writing Parameter Set Values Sred in the Digital Operar the Drive (COPY) To write parameter set values sred in the Digital Operar the Drive, make the settings using the following method. Table 6. COPY Function Procedure Step No. Digital Operar Display Explanation -ADV- ** Main Menu ** Programming Press the MENU Key, and select advanced programming mode. -ADV- Initialization Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the parameter monir display. A - 00= Select Language 3 -ADVo3-0=0 COPY Function Copy Funtion Sel Display o3-0 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement Key. -ADVo3-0= 0 *0* Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the parameter setting display. Copy Funtion Sel 4 COPY SELECT 6-45

363 Step No. Digital Operar Display Table 6. COPY Function Procedure Explanation -ADVo3-0= *0* Change the set value using the Increment Key. Copy Funtion Sel 5 OP INV WRITE COPY 6 Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The COPY function will start. OP INV COPYING -ADV- -ADV- COPY 7 COPY COMPLETE If the COPY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operar. -ADV- 8 Copy Funtion Sel The display returns o3-0 when a key is pressed. o3-0=0 COPY SELECT *0* During the copy operation, errors may occur. If an error is displayed, press any key cancel the error display and return the 03-0 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operar Copy Function.) Error Display Meaning CPE ID UNMATCH Drive product code and Drive software number are different. VAE INV. KVA UNMATC Drive capacity with which you are trying copy, and the Drive capacity sred in the Digital Operar are different. CRE CONTROL UNMATCH The Drive control method in which you are trying copy, and the Drive control method sred in the Digital Operar are different. CYE COPY ERROR Comparison between the parameter written the Drive and the parameter in the Digital Operar shows they are different. CSE SUM CHECK ERROR After copying has ended, comparison between the sum value of the Drive parameter area and the sum value of the Digital Operar parameter area shows they are different. 6-46

364 Digital Operar Functions Comparing Drive Parameters and Digital Operar Parameter Set Values (VERIFY) To compare Drive parameters and Digital Operar parameter set values, make the settings using the following method. Table 6.3 VERIFY Function Procedure Step No. Digital Operar Display Explanation -ADV- ** Main Menu ** Programming Press the MENU Key. and select advanced programming mode. -ADV- Initialization Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the parameter monir display. A - 00= Select Language 3 -ADVo3-0=0 COPY Function Copy Funtion Sel Display o3-0 (Copy Function Selection) using the Increment Key and Decrement Key. -ADVo3-0= 0 *0* Press the DATA/ENTER Key, and select the function setting display. Copy Funtion Sel 4 COPY SELECT -ADVo3-0= 3 *0* Change the set value 3 using the Increment Copy Funtion Sel 5 Key. 6 -ADV- VERIFY DATA VERIFYING Set the changed data using the DATA/ENTER Key. The VERIFY function will start. -ADV- 7 VERIFY VERIFY COMPLETE If the VERIFY function ends normally, End is displayed on the Digital Operar. -ADV- 8 Copy Funtion Sel The display returns o3-0 when a key is pressed. o3-0=0 COPY SELECT *0* 6-47

365 An error may occur during the comparison. If an error is displayed, press any key cancel the error display and return the o3-0 display. Error displays and their meanings are shown below. (Refer Chapter 7 Errors when Using Digital Operar Copy Function.) Error Display Meaning VYE VERIFY ERROR Verify error (s in the Digital Operar and the Drive do not match). Application Precautions When using the copy function, check that the following settings are the same between the Drive and the Digital Operar. Drive product and type Drive capacity and voltage Software number Control method Prohibiting Writing Parameters from the Digital Operar If you set A-0 0, you can refer and set the A and A parameter groups, and refer drive mode, using the Digital Operar. If you set one of the parameters H-0 H-05 (multi-function contact input terminal S3 S7 function selection) B (write parameters permitted), you can write parameters from the digital operar when the terminal that has been set is ON. When the set terminal is OFF, writing parameters other than the frequency reference is prohibited. You can, however, reference parameters. Parameter Number A-0 Name Display Access Level Selection Access Level Description Selects which parameters are accessible via the Digital Operar. 0: Operation Only : User Level (only available if A parameters have been set) : Advanced Level Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 Yes A A A A A 6-48

366 Digital Operar Functions a Password When a password is set in A-05, if the set values in A-04 and A-05 do not match, you cannot refer or change the settings of parameters A-0 A-03, or A-0 A-3. You can prohibit the setting and referencing of all parameters except A-00 by using the password function in combination with setting A-0 0 (Monir only). Related Parameters Parameter Number A-0 Name Display Access Level Selection Access Level Description Selects which parameters are accessible via the Digital Operar. 0: Operation Only : User Level (only available if A parameters have been set) : Advanced Level Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 Yes A A A A A A-04 Password When the value set in A-04 does NOT match the value set in A-05, parameters A-0 thru A- 03 and A-0 thru A-3 cannot Enter Password be changed. All other parameters as determined by A-0 can be changed. Parameter A-05 can be accessed by pressing the MENU key while holding the RESET key No A A A A A A-05 Password When the value set in A-04 does NOT match the value set in A-05, parameters A-0 thru A- 03 and A-0 thru A-3 cannot Select Password be changed. All other parameters as determined by A-0 can be changed. Parameter A-05 can be accessed by pressing the MENU key while holding the RESET key No A A A A A Precautions Parameter A-05 cannot be displayed using normal key operations. To display A-05, hold down the RESET Key and press the MENU Key while A-04 is displayed. Displaying User-set Parameters Only You can set and refer parameters necessary the Drive only, using the A parameters (user-set parameters) and A-0 (Parameters Access Level). Set the number of the parameter which you want refer in A-0 A-3, and then set A-0. You can set and refer parameters set in A-0 A-03 and A-0 A-3 only, using advanced programming mode. 6-49

367 Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux A-0 A-3 User setting parameters User Param 3 Used set the parameter numbers that can be set/read. Maximum 3. Effective when the Parameter Access Level (A-0) is set User Program (). Parameters set in parameters A-0 A-3 can be set/read in programming mode. b-0 o3-0 - No A A A A A 6-50

368 Options Options This section explains the Drive option functions. Performing Speed Control with PG This section explains functions with control with PG. Related Parameters Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux F-0 PG parameter PG Pulses/Rev Sets the number of pulses per revolution (PPM) of the encoder (pulse generar) No No Q No Q No F-0 Operation selection at PG open circuit (PGO) PG Fdbk Loss Sel Sets spping method when a PG open circuit fault (PGO) occurs. See parameter F-4. 0: Ramp sp - Decelerate sp using the active deceleration time. : Coast sp : Fast - Sp - Decelerate sp using the deceleration time in C-09. 3: Alarm Only - Drive continues operation. 0 3 No No A No A No F-03 Operation selection at overspeed (OS) PG Overspeed Sel Sets the spping method when an overspeed (OS) fault occurs. See F-08 and F-09. 0: Ramp sp - Decelerate sp using the active deceleration time. : Coast sp : Fast - Sp - Decelerate sp using the deceleration time in C-09. 3: Alarm Only - Drive continues operation. 0 3 No No A No A A F-04 Operation Selection at Deviation PG Deviation Sel Sets the spping method when a speed deviation (DEV) fault occurs. 0: Ramp sp (Deceleration sp using Deceleration Time, C-0.) : Coast sp : Fast sp (Emergency sp using the deceleration time in C-09.) 3: Continue operation (DEV is displayed and operation continued.) No No A No A A 6-5

369 Parameter Number F-05 Name Display PG Rotation Selection PG Rotation Sel Description 0: Fwd=C.C.W. - Phase A leads with forward run command. (Phase B leads with reverse run command.) : Fwd=C.W. - Phase B leads with forward run command. (Phase A leads with reverse run command.) Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 or 0 No No A No A No F-06 PG Division Rate (PG Pulse Monir) PG Output Ratio Sets the division ratio for the pulse monir of the PG-B encoder feedback option board. This function is not available with the PG- X option board. Division ratio = [( + n) / m] (n = 0, m = 3) The first digit of the value of F-06 stands for n, the second and the third stand for m. (from left right). The possible division ratio settings are: /3 F-06 3 No No A No A No F-07 Integral Function during Accel/Decel Selection PG Ramp PI/I Sel Sets integral control during acceleration/deceleration either enabled or disabled. 0: Disabled - The integral function is not used while accelerating or decelerating. : Enabled - The integral function is used at all times. 0 or 0 No No A No No No F-08 F-09 F-0 F- Overspeed Detection Level PG Overspd Level Overspeed Detection Delay Time PG Overspd Time Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Level PG Deviate Level Excessive Speed Deviation Detection Delay Time PG Deviate Time Configures the overspeed fault (OS) detection. OS fault will occur, if the mor speed feedback is greater than the F-08 setting for a time longer than F-09. F-08 is set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E-04). See F-03. Configures the speed deviation fault (DEV) detection. DEV fault will occur if the speed deviation is greater than the F-0 setting for a time longer than F-. F-0 is set as a percentage of the maximum output frequency (E-04). Speed deviation is the difference between actual mor speed and the frequency reference command. See F % No No A No A A sec * No No A No A A % No No A No A A sec No No A No A A 6-5

370 Options Parameter Number Name Display Description Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux F- F-3 Number of PG Gear Teeth PG # Gear Teeth Number of PG Gear Teeth PG # Gear Teeth Sets the gear ratio between the mor shaft and the encoder (PG). A gear ratio of will be used if either of these parameters is set 0. This function is not available in flux vecr control No No A No No No 0 No No A No No No F-4 PG -Circuit Detection Time PGO Detect Time Configures the PG open (PGO) function. PGO will be detected if no PG pulses are detected for a time longer than F-4. See F sec No No A No A No * Facry setting will change according the control mode (facry settings for Control w/pg are shown here). Using PG Speed Control Card There are four types of PG Speed Control Card that can be used in control with PG. PG-A: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with open collecr or complimentary outputs. PG-B: A/B-phase pulse input, compatible with complimentary outputs. PG-D: A-phase (single) pulse input, compatible with line drivers. PG-X: A/B/Z-phase pulse input, compatible with line drivers. There are two types of PG Speed Control Cards that can be used for flux vecr control. PG-B: A/B phase pulse inputs, complementary outputs PG-X: A/B/Z phase pulse inputs, line driver outputs For the connection diagram, refer page -36. Number of PG Pulses Set the number of PG (Pulse Generar/Encoder) pulses in pulses/rotation. Set the number of A-phase or B- phase pulses per mor rotation in F-0. Matching PG Rotation Direction and Mor Rotation Direction Parameter F-05 matches the PG rotation direction and the mor rotation direction. If the mor is rotating forwards, set whether it is A-phase driven or B-phase driven. Make this setting when using PG-B or PG-X. 6-53

371 Drive Forward command Mor PG (encoder) Pulse output A-phase driven when set value = 0 B-phase driven when set value = A-phase B-phase A-phase B-phase Example: Forward rotation of standard Yaskawa mor (PG used: Samtack (KK)) Forward command Mor output axis rotates counter-clockwise during Drive forward command. Rotation (CCW) A-phase B-phase Yaskawa standard PG used is A-phase driven (CCW) when mor rotation is forward. Fig 6.75 PG Rotation Direction Generally, PG is A-phase driven when rotation is clockwise (CW) see from the input axis. Also, mor rotation is counter-clockwise (CCW) seen from the output side when forward commands are output. Consequently, when mor rotation is forward, PG is normally A-phase driven when a load is applied, and B-phase driven when a load is not applied. Number of Gear Teeth Between PG and Mor Set the number of PG gear teeth in F- and F-3. If there are gears between the mor and PG, you can operate the mor by setting the number of gear teeth. When the number of gear teeth has been set, the number of mor rotations within the Drive is calculated using the following formula. No. of mor rotations (min.) = No. of input pulses from PC 60 / F-0 F-3 (No. of gear teeth on load side) / F- (No. of gear teeth on mor side) Matching Mor Speed During Acceleration and Deceleration Frequency Reference You can select whether enable or disable integral operation during acceleration and deceleration when using flux vecr control. To match the mor speed as closely as possible the frequency reference even during acceleration and deceleration, set F-07. If F-0 is set, overshoot or undershoot may occur easily immediately after acceleration and deceleration. To minimize the possibility of overshoot or undershoot occurring, set F-0 0. IMPORTANT 6-54

372 Options PG Pulse Monir Output Dividing Ratio This function is enabled only when using PG speed control card PG-B. Set the dividing ratio for the PG pulse monir output. The set value is expressed as n for the higher place digit, and m for the lower place digits. The dividing ratio is calculated as follows: Dividing ratio = ( + n)/m ( range) n: 0 or, m: 3 F-06 = n m The dividing ratio can be set within the following range: /3 F-06. For example, if the dividing ratio is / (set value ), half of the number of pulses from the PG are monir outputs. Detecting PG Circuit Select the spping method when PG cable disconnected is detected and the PG open circuit (PGO) detection time. When the Drive is operating with the frequency reference set % minimum (except when operating on direct current), if the speed feedback from PG is greater than the time setting in F-4, PGO is detected. Detecting Mor Overspeed An error is detected when the number of mor rotations exceeds the regulated limit. An overspeed (OS) is detected when a frequency that exceeds the set value in F-08 continues for longer than the time set in F-09. After detecting an overspeed (OS), the Drive sps according the setting in F-03. Detecting Speed Difference between the Mor and Speed Reference An error is detected when the speed deviation (i.e., the difference between the designated speed and the actual mor speed) is o great. Speed deviation (DEV) is detected after a speed agreement is detected and when the speed reference and actual workpiece speed are within the setting of L4-0, if a speed deviation great than the set value in F-0 continues for longer than the time set in F-. After a speed deviation is detected, the Drive sps according the setting in F

373 Using Digital Output Cards There are two types of Drive digital output cards: DO-0C Relay contact output (DPDT contact) DO-08 6 phocoupler output channels (shared commons) (independent) relay contact output channels (NC contact) Inverter control panel 3CN 3CN +4 V NC NC DO-0C Digital Output Card NO NO TD CH CH Relay contact Inverter control panel 3CN 3CN Phocoupler TD5 TD6 TD7 TD8 TD9 TD0 TD TD TD TD3 TD4 DO-08 Digital Output Card CH Phocoupler CH CH3 CH4 CH5 CH6 COM (0 V common) CH7 Relay contact CH8 Fig 6.76 Digital Output Cards Related Parameters Parameter Number F5-0 Name Display DO-0/DO-08 Channel Output Selection DO Ch Select Description Sets the digital output function number for channel. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux No A A A A A F5-0 DO-0/DO-08 Channel Output Selection DO Ch Select Sets the digital output function number for channel. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used No A A A A A F5-03 DO-08 Channel 3 Output Selection DO Ch3 Select Sets the digital output function number for channel 3. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used No A A A A A F5-04 DO-08 Channel 4 Output Selection DO Ch4 Select Sets the digital output function number for channel 4. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used No A A A A A 6-56

374 Options Parameter Number F5-05 Name Display DO-08 Channel 5 Output Selection DO Ch5 Select Description Sets the digital output function number for channel 5. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used. Range Facry Change during Operation No A A A A A Control Methods with PG Flux F5-06 F5-07 DO-08 Channel 6 Output Selection DO Ch6 Select DO-08 Channel 7 Output Selection DO Ch7 Select Sets the digital output function number for channel 6. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used. Sets the digital output function number for channel 7. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used No A A A A A 0 37 F No A A A A A F5-08 DO-08 Channel 8 Output Selection DO Ch8 Select Sets the digital output function number for channel 8. See the H parameter group for possible selections. Enabled when digital output card DO-0 or DO-08 is used F No A A A A A F5-09 DO-08 Output Mode Selection DO-08 Selection Sets the function of the DO-08 digital output option board. 0: 8-channel individual outputs. : Binary code output. : 8-channel Selected - Output according F5-0 F5-08 settings. 0 0 No A A A A A Output Items for the DO-0C Digital Output Card If using DO-0C Digital Output Card, set the output items using F5-0 and F5-0. Output Items for the DO-08 Digital Output Card If using DO-08 Digital Output Card, select one of the following three output modes according the setting in F

375 F5-09 Set 0 Set Value 0: 8 separate outputs Terminal Number TD5-TD TD6-TD TD7-TD TD8-TD TD9-TD TD0-TD TD-TD TD3-TD4 Output Details Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF) Overvoltage (OV) Drive overload (OL) Fuse blown (PUF) Overspeed (OS) Drive overheated (OH) or mor overload (OL) Zero speed detected Speed agreement F5-09 Set Set Value : Binary code output Terminal Number TD5-TD bit 0 TD6-TD bit TD7-TD bit TD8-TD bit 3 TD9-TD TD0-TD TD-TD TD3-TD4 Zero speed detected Speed agreement Operating Minor fault Output Details Encoded output (Refer table below) The following table shows the code outputs. Bits 3,,, and 0 Output Details Bits 3,,, and No error 000 External fault (EFxx) Output Details 000 Overcurrent (SC, OC, GF) 00 Controller error (CPFxx) 000 Overvoltage (OV) 00 Mor overload (OL) 00 Drive overload (OL) 0 Not used 000 Drive overheated (OH, OH) 00 Power loss (UV, UV, or UV3) 00 Overspeed (OS) 0 Speed deviation (DEV) 00 Fuse blown (PUF) 0 PG open circuit (PGO) 0 Dynamic braking resisr (RH) Injection brake transisr error (RR) Not used F5-09 Set Output depends on the settings in F5-0 F

376 Options Using an Analog Reference Card When using a AI-4B or A-4U Analog Reference Card, set parameter b-0 (Reference selection) 3 (Option Card). AI-4B provides 3 channels of bi-polar inputs with 4-bit A/D conversion accuracy (and a sign bit). The function of each channel is determined by the setting of F-0. AI-4U provides channels of bi-polar inputs with 4-bit A/D conversion accuracy. Channel is a voltage input and channel is a current input. The sum of channels and is a frequency input. F-0 does not need be set for the AI-4U. Related Parameters Parameter Number F-0 Name Display AI-4 Input Selection AI-4 Input Sel Description Sets the function for channel 3 of the AI-4B analog input reference option board. 0: 3-channel individual (Channel : terminal A, Channel : terminal A, Channel 3: terminal A3) : 3-channel addition (Summed values of channels 3 is the frequency reference) When set 0, select for b-0. In this case, the multi-function input "Option/Drive selection" cannot be used. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux 0 0 No A A A A A Precautions Always set b-0 (Reference selection) (control circuit terminal) when using the AI-4B for three channels of independent inputs. When this is done, H-0 H-0 (multi-function contact inputs) cannot be set (Option/Drive selection). Using a Digital Reference Card When using a DI-08 or DI-6H Digital Reference Card, set b-0 (Reference selection) 3 (Option Card). The DI-6H can be used set a frequency using a 6-bit digital reference. The DI-08 can be used set a frequency using a 8-bit digital reference. 6-59

377 Related Parameters Parameter Number F3-0 Name Display DI-08 / DI- 6H Input Selection DI Input Description Sets the function of the DI-08 or the DI-6H digital input option board. 0: BCD % unit : BCD 0.% unit : BCD 0.0% unit 3: BCD Hz unit 4: BCD 0.Hz unit 5: BCD 0.0Hz unit 6: BCD (5-digit) 0.0Hz unit (only effective when DI-6H is used.) 7: Binary input When o-03 is set or higher, the input will be BCD, and the units will change the o-03 setting. Range Facry Change during Operation Control Methods with PG Flux No A A A A A o-03 Digital Operar Display Selection Display Scaling Sets the units of the Frequency References (d-0 d-7), the Frequency Reference Monirs (U-0, U-0, U-05), and the Modbus communication frequency reference. 0: Hz : % (00% = E-04) 39: RPM (Enter the number of mor poles) : User display. Set the number desired at maximum output frequency. 4 digit number Number of digits from the right of the decimal point No A A A A A Example : o-03 = 000, will result in frequency reference from (00.0 = Fmax). Example : o-03 = 34, will result in frequency reference from (.34 = Fmax). 6-60

378 Options Selecting Input Terminal Functions for the DI-6H Digital Reference Card The frequency reference from the DI-6H Card is determined by the setting of F3-0 and the /6-bit switch on the Option card. The possible settings are listed in the following table. Terminal Pin No. -bit Binary with Sign F3-0 = 7 S: bit 6-bit Binary with Sign F3-0 = 7 S: 6 bit Bit ( 0 ) Bit ( 0 ) 3-digit BCD with Sign F3-0 = 0 5 S: bit 4-digit BCD with Sign F3-0 = 0 5 S: 6 bit Bit ( ) Bit ( ) BDC digit BDC digit 4 3 Bit ( ) Bit ( ) 4 (0 9) 4 (0 9) 8 4-digit BCD without Sign F3-0 = 6 S: 6 bit BDC digit ( 9) TC TC 4 Bit ( 3 ) Bit ( 3 ) Bit ( 4 ) Bit ( 4 ) 6 Bit ( 5 ) Bit ( 5 ) BDC digit BDC digit 4 7 Bit ( 6 ) Bit ( 6 ) 4 (0 9) 4 (0 9) 8 8 Bit ( 7 ) Bit ( 7 ) Bit ( 8 ) Bit ( 8 ) 0 Bit ( 9 ) Bit ( 9 ) BDC digit 3 BDC digit 3 4 Bit ( 0 ) Bit ( 0 ) 4 (0 9) 4 (0 9) 8 Bit ( ) Bit ( ) Bit ( ) Bit ( 3 ) - BDC digit Bit ( 4 ) - 4 (0 9) 8 BDC digit (0 9) BDC digit 3 (0 9) BDC digit 4 (0 9) 6 - Bit ( 5 ) - 8 BDC digit 5 (0 3) 7 Sign signal (0: Forward, : Reverse) 8 SET (read) signal (: Read) 9 Input signal common (0 V) TC3 Shield wire connection terminal Application Precautions The maximum frequency (00% speed) reference will be used when the binary input is set (setting: 6 or 7) and all bits are. F3-0 6 is valid only when the D-6H is used. Using this setting, a frequency from Hz can be set in BCD. The sign bit is used as a data bit, so only positive (plus) data can be set. Also, the digit starts from 0, so the minimum setting is 0.0Hz. Selecting the Input Terminal Function for a DI-08 Digital Reference Card The frequency reference from a DI-08 Card is determined by the setting of F3-0, as shown in the following table. 6-6

379 Terminal 8-bit Binary with Sign -digit BCD with Sign Pin No. F3-0 = 7 F3-0 = 0 5 Bit ( 0 ) Bit ( ) 3 Bit ( ) 4 BDC digit (0 9) TC 4 Bit ( 3 ) 8 5 Bit ( 4 ) 6 Bit ( 5 ) 7 Bit ( 6 ) 4 8 Bit ( 7 ) 8 9 Sign signal 0 SET (read) signal Reference common signal (0 V) BDC digit (0 5) Application Precautions The DI-08 will not function if F3-0 is set 6 Selecting the Digital Reference The range of the digital references is determined by the combination of the settings of o-03 and F3-0. The information monired in U-0 (Frequency reference) will also change. DI-6H Reference Ranges When using the DI-6H, the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the parameters. 6-6

380 Options o-03 F3-0 0 or x = 3 Switch S Reference Input Mode Reference Range bits 3-digit BCD with sign, % -0 0% 6 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, % -0 0% bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.% % 6 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.% % bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.0% % 6 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.0% % bits 3-digit BCD with sign, Hz Hz 6 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, Hz Hz bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.Hz Hz 6 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.Hz Hz bits 3-digit BCD with sign, 0.0Hz Hz 6 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 0.0Hz Hz 6 6 bits 5-digit BCD without sign, 0.0Hz Hz bits -bit binary with sign, 00%/ bits 6-bit binary with sign, 00%/ bits - 6 bits U-0 Monir Unit o-03 = 0 o-03 = 0.0Hz 0.0% bits 3-digit BCD with sign, rpm rpm rpm 6 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, rpm rpm rpm 3-digit BCD with sign, 00%/(- 4- digit setting of o-03) 4-digit BCD with sign, 00%/(- 4- digit setting of o-03) (when o-03 = 9999) - 6 bits 4-digit BCD with sign, 00%/ th digit of o-03 setting: X = 0, unit: X =, unit: 0. X =, unit: 0.0 X = 3, unit: 0.00 DI-08 Reference Ranges When using the DI-08, the following ranges can be set depending on the settings of the parameters. F3-0 Reference Input Mode Reference Range 0 -digit BCD with sign, % -0 0% -digit BCD with sign, 0.% % -digit BCD with sign, 0.0% % 3 -digit BCD with sign, Hz Hz 4 -digit BCD with sign, 0.Hz Hz 5 -digit BCD with sign, 0.0Hz Hz 6 - -bit binary with sign, 00%/ U-0 Monir Unit o-03 = 0 o-03 = 0.0Hz 0.0% 6-63

381 6-64

382 7 Troubleshooting This chapter describes the fault displays and countermeasure for the Drive and mor problems and countermeasures. Protective and Diagnostic Functions...7- Troubleshooting...7-8

383 Protective and Diagnostic Functions This section describes the alarm functions of the Drive. The alarm functions include fault detection, alarm detection, operation error detection, and autuning error detection. Fault Detection When the Drive detects a fault, the fault contact output operates, and the Drive output is shut OFF causing the mor coast a sp. (The spping method can be selected for some faults, and the selected spping method will be used with these faults.) A fault code is displayed on the Digital Operar. When a fault has occurred, refer the following table identify and correct the cause of the fault. Use one of the following methods reset the fault after restarting the Drive: Set a multi-function contact input (H-0 H-05) 4 (Fault Reset) and turn ON the fault reset signal. Press the RESET Key on the Digital Operar. Turn the main circuit power supply OFF and then ON again. Table 7. Fault Displays and Processing Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions OC Over Current Overcurrent The Drive output current exceeded the overcurrent detection level. (00% of rated current) A short-circuit or ground fault occurred at the Drive output. (A short or ground fault can be caused by mor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.) The load is o large or the acceleration/deceleration time is o short. A special-purpose mor or mor with a capacity o large for the Drive is being used. A magnetic switch was switched at the Drive output. Reset the fault after correcting its cause. GF Ground Fault Ground Fault The ground fault current at the Drive output exceeded approximately 50% of the Drive rated output current. A ground fault occurred at the Drive output. (A ground fault can be caused by mor burn damage, worn insulation, or a damaged cable.) Reset the fault after correcting its cause. PUF Main IBGT Fuse Blown Fuse Blown The fuse in the main circuit is blown. The output transisr has failed because of a short-circuit or ground fault at the Drive output. Check whether there is a short-circuit between the following terminals. A short-circuit will damage the output transisr: B ( 3) U/T, V/T, W/T3 U/T, V/T, W/T3 Replace the Drive after correcting the cause. OV DC Bus Fuse Main Circuit Overvoltage The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level V class: Approx. 40 V V class: Approx. 80 V The deceleration time is o short and the regenerative energy from the mor is o large. The power supply voltage is o high. Increase the deceleration time or connect a braking resisr (or Braking Resisr Unit). Decrease the voltage so it's within specifications. 7-

384 Protective and Diagnostic Functions UV DC Bus Undervolt Main Circuit Undervoltage The main circuit DC voltage is below the Undervoltage Detection Level (L-05) V class: Approx. 90 V V class: Approx. 380 V Table 7. Fault Displays and Processing (Continued) Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions An open-phase occurred with the input power supply. A momentary power loss occurred. The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose. The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are o large. Reset the fault after correcting its cause. UV CTL PS Undervolt Control Power Fault The control power supply voltage dropped. - Try turning the power supply off and on. Replace the Drive if the fault continues occur. UV3 MC Answerback Inrush Prevention Circuit Fault A fault occurred in the surge prevention circuit. - Try turning the power supply off and on. Replace the Drive if the fault continues occur. PF Input Pha Loss Main Circuit Voltage Fault The main circuit DC voltage oscillates unusually (not when regenerating). This fault is detected when L8-05 is set Enabled. An open-phase occurred in the input power supply. A momentary power loss occurred. The wiring terminals for the input power supply are loose. The voltage fluctuations in the input power supply are o large. The voltage balance between phases is bad. Reset the fault after correcting its cause. LF Output Pha Loss Output -phase An open-phase occurred at the Drive output. This fault is detected when L8-07 is set Enabled. There is a broken wire in the output cable. There is a broken wire in the mor winding. The output terminals are loose. The mor being used has a capacity less than 5% of the Drive's maximum mor capacity. Reset the fault after correcting its cause. Check the mor and Drive capacity. OH (OH) Heatsnk Overtemp (Heatsnk MAX Temp) Cooling Fin Overheating The temperature of the Drive's cooling fins exceeded the setting in L8-0 or 05 C. Drive's Cooling Fan Spped (8.5 kw or higher) The ambient temperature is o high. There is a heat source nearby. The Drive's cooling fan has spped. The Drive's cooling fan has spped. Install a cooling unit. Remove the heat source. Replace the cooling fan. (Contact our sales representative.) OH3 Mor Overheat Mor Overheating Alarm The Drive will sp or will continue operate according the setting of L- 03. The mor has overheated. Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times. Check the characteristics. Check the Mor Rated Current (E-0). 7-3

385 OH4 Mor Overheat Mor Overheating Fault The Drive will sp according the setting of L-04. Table 7. Fault Displays and Processing (Continued) Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions The mor has overheated. Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times. Check the characteristics. Check the Mor Rated Current (E-0). RH DynBrk Resisr Installed Braking Resisr Overheating Braking resisr protection function set in L8-0 has operated. The deceleration time is o short and the regenerative energy from the mor is o large. Reduce the load, increase the deceleration time, or reduce the mor speed. Change a Braking Resisr Unit. RR DynBrk Transistr Internal Braking Transisr Fault The braking transisr is not operating properly. - Try turning the power supply off and on. Replace the Drive if the fault continues occur. OL Mor Overloaded Mor Overload The mor overload protection function has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value. The load is o heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time, and cycle time are o short. The characteristics voltage is o high. The Mor Rated Current (E-0) is incorrect. Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times. Check the characteristics. Check the Mor Rated Current (E-0). OL Inv Overloaded Drive Overload The Drive overload protection function has operated based on the internal electronic thermal value. The load is o heavy. The acceleration time, deceleration time and cycle time are o short. The characteristics voltage is o high. The Drive capacity is o low. Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times. Check the characteristics. Replace the Drive with one that has a larger capacity. OL3 Overrque Det OL4 Overrque Det Overrque Detected There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-0 for longer than the setting in L6-03. Overrque Detected There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-05 for longer than the setting in L Make sure that the settings in L6-0 and L6-03 are appropriate. Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overrque. Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are appropriate. Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overrque. OL7 HSB-OL High-slip Braking OL The output frequency did not change for longer than the time set in n3-04. The inertia returned the load is o large. Make sure the load is an inertial load. Set the system so that the deceleration time that does not produce 0 V is 0 s or less. 7-4

386 Protective and Diagnostic Functions UL3 Underrq Det Underrque Detected There has been a current less than the setting in L6-0 for longer than the setting in L6-03. Table 7. Fault Displays and Processing (Continued) Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions - Make sure that the settings in L6-0 and L6-03 are appropriate. Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overrque. UL4 Underrq Det Underrque Detected There has been a current less than the setting in L6-05 for longer than the setting in L Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are appropriate. Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overrque. OS Overspeed Det Overspeed The speed has been greater than the setting in F-08 for longer than the setting in F-09. Overshooting/Undershooting are occurring. The reference speed is o high. The settings in F-08 and F-09 aren't appropriate. Adjust the gain again. Check the reference circuit and reference gain. Check the settings in F-08 and F-09. There is a break in the PG wiring. Fix the broken/disconnected wiring. PGO PG PG Disconnection Detected PG pulses were input when the Drive was outputting a frequency. The PG is wired incorrectly. Power isn't being supplied the PG. Fix the wiring. Supply power the PG properly. - Check for open circuit when using brake (mor). The load is o heavy. Reduce the load. DEV Speed Deviation Excessive Speed Deviation The speed deviation has been greater than the setting in F-0 for longer than the setting in F-. The acceleration time and deceleration time are o short. The load is locked. The settings in F-0 and F- aren't appropriate. Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time. Check the mechanical system. Check the settings in F-0 and F-. - Check for open circuit when using brake (mor). Control Fault The rque limit was reached continuously for 3 seconds or longer during a deceleration sp during open-loop vecr control. Mor parameter settings are not correct. Check the mor parameters. Perform autuning. CF Out of Control An error occurred in the speed estimation calculation for open-loop vecr control. Mor parameter settings are not correct. Run command was received when the mor was coasting. Perform autuning. Input the run command after the mor sps. Set b3-0 (Speed search selection) or 3 (speed search enabled at startup). Refer Precautions When Using -loop Control on page

387 Table 7. Fault Displays and Processing (Continued) Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions FBL Feedback Loss PID Feedback Reference Lost A PID feedback reference loss was detected (b5- = ) and the PID feedback input was less than b5-3 (PID feedback loss detection level) for longer than the time set in b5-4 (PID feedback loss detection time). - - EF0 Opt External Flt External fault input from Communications Option Card - Check the Communications Option Card and communications signals. EF3 Ext Fault S3 External fault (Input terminal 3) EF4 Ext Fault S4 External fault (Input terminal 4) EF5 Ext Fault S5 External fault (Input terminal 5) EF6 Ext Fault S6 External fault (Input terminal 6) EF7 Ext Fault S7 EF8 Ext Fault S8 External fault (Input terminal 7) External fault (Input terminal 8) An external fault was input from a multi-function input terminal. Reset external fault inputs the multi-function inputs. Remove the cause of the external fault. EF9 Ext Fault S9 External fault (Input terminal 9) EF0 Ext Fault S0 External fault (Input terminal 0) EF Ext Fault S External fault (Input terminal ) EF Ext Fault S External fault (Input terminal ) SVE Zero Servo Fault Zero Servo Fault The rotation position moved during zero servo operation. The rque limit is o small. Increase the limit. The load rque is o large. Reduce the load rque. - Check for signal noise. 7-6

388 Protective and Diagnostic Functions OPR Oper Disconnect Digital Operar Connection Fault The connection the Digital Operar was broken during operation for a RUN command from the Digital Operar. Table 7. Fault Displays and Processing (Continued) Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions - Check the connection the Digital Operar. CE Modbus Com Err MODBUS Communications Error A normal reception was not possible for s or longer after control data was received once. - Check the communications devices and communications signals. BUS Option Com Err Option Communications Error A communications error was detected during a run command or while setting a frequency reference from a Communications Option Card. - Check the communications devices and communications signals. E-5 SI-F/G Com Err SI-F/G Communications Error Detected A communications error was detected when a run command or frequency reference was set from an Option Card and continuous operation was set for the E-5 operation selection. - Check the communications signals. E-0 SI-F/G CPU down SI-F/G Option Card CPU Failure SI-F/G Option Card operation failed. Digital Operar connection is faulty. Drive control circuit is faulty. Disconnect and then reconnect the Digital Operar. Replace the Drive. CPF00 CPF Digital Operar Communications Error Communications with the Digital Operar were not established within 5 seconds after the power was turned on. CPU External RAM Fault The Digital Operar's connecr isn't connected properly. The Drive's control circuits are faulty. The control circuits were destroyed. - Disconnect the Digital Operar and then connect it again. Replace the Drive. Try turning the power supply off and on again. Replace the Drive. CPF0 CPF0 Digital Operar Communications Error After communications were established, there was a communications error with the Digital Operar for more than seconds. The Digital Operar isn't connected properly. The Drive's control circuits are faulty. Disconnect the Digital Operar and then connect it again. Replace the Drive. CPF0 BB Circuit Err Baseblock circuit error The control circuit is damaged. - Try turning the power supply off and on again. Replace the Drive. CPF03 EEPROM Error EEPROM error The control circuit is damaged. - Try turning the power supply off and on again. Replace the Drive. 7-7

389 CPF04 Internal A/D Err CPU internal A/D converter error Table 7. Fault Displays and Processing (Continued) Display Meaning Probable Causes Corrective Actions The control circuit is damaged. - Try turning the power supply off and on again. Replace the Drive. CPF05 External A/D Err CPU internal A/D converter error The control circuit is damaged. - Try turning the power supply off and on again. Replace the Drive. CPF06 Option error Option Card connection error The Option Card is not connected properly. The Drive or Option Card is faulty. Turn off the power and insert the Card again. Replace the Option Card or the Drive. CPF07 RAM-Err ASIC internal RAM fault The control circuit is damaged. - Try turning the power supply off and on again. Replace the Drive. CPF08 WAT-Err Watchdog timer fault The control circuit is damaged. - Try turning the power supply off and on again. Replace the Drive. CPF09 CPU-Err CPU-ASIC mutual diagnosis fault The control circuit is damaged. - Try turning the power supply off and on again. Replace the Drive. CPF0 ASIC-Err ASIC version fault The Drive control circuit is faulty Replace the Drive. CPF0 Option A/D error Communications Option Card A/D converter error The Option Card is not connected properly. The Option Card's A/D converter is faulty. Turn off the power and insert the Card again. Replace the Communications Option Card. CPF Option CPU down Communications Option Card self diagnostic error CPF Option Type Err Communications Option Card model code error Communications Option Card fault. Replace the Option Card. CPF3 Option DPRAM Err Communications Option Card DPRAM error 7-8

390 Protective and Diagnostic Functions Alarm Detection Alarms are detected as a type of Drive protection function that do not operate the fault contact output. The system will aumatically returned its original status once the cause of the alarm has been removed. The Digital Operar display flashes and the alarm is output from the multi-function outputs (H-0 H- 03). When an alarm occurs, take appropriate countermeasures according the table below. Table 7. Alarm Displays and Processing Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions EF (blinking) External Fault Forward/Reverse Run Commands Input Together Both the forward and reverse run commands have been ON for more than 0.5 s. - Check the sequence of the forward and reverse run commands. Since the rotational direction is unknown, the mor will be decelerated a sp when this minor fault occurs. UV (blinking) DC Bus Undervolt Main Circuit Undervoltage The following conditions occurred when there was no Run signal. The main circuit DC voltage was below the Undervoltage Detection Level (L-05). The surge current limiting contacr opened. The control power supply voltage when below the CUV level. See causes for UV, UV, and UV3 faults in the previous table. See corrective actions for UV, UV, and UV3 faults in the previous table. OV (blinking) DC Bus Overvolt OH (blinking) Heatsink Overtemp OH (blinking) Over Heat OH3 (blinking) Mor Overheat Main Circuit Overvoltage The main circuit DC voltage exceeded the overvoltage detection level V class: Approx. 400 V V class: Approx. 800 V Cooling Fin Overheating The temperature of the Drive's cooling fins exceeded the setting in L8-0. Drive Overheating Pre-alarm An OH alarm signal (Drive overheating alarm signal) was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 S). Mor overheating E was set for H3-09 and the mor temperature thermisr input exceeded the alarm detection level. The power supply voltage is o high. The ambient temperature is o high. There is a heat source nearby. The Drive cooling fan has spped. - The mor has overheated. Decrease the voltage so it's within specifications. Install a cooling unit. Remove the heat source Replace the cooling fan. (Contact your Yaskawa representative.) Clear the multi-function input terminal's overheating alarm input. Check the size of the load and the length of the acceleration, deceleration, and cycle times. Check the characteristics. Check the mor temperature input on terminals A and A. 7-9

391 OL3 (blinking) Overrque Det Overrque There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-0 for longer than the setting in L6-03. Table 7. Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued) Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions - Make sure that the settings in L6-0 and L6-03 are appropriate. Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overrque. OL4 (blinking) Overrque Det UL3 (blinking) Underrq Det UL4 (blinking) Underrq Det OS (blinking) Overspeed Det PGO (blinking) PG DEV (blinking) Speed Deviation Overrque There has been a current greater than the setting in L6-05 for longer than the setting in L6-06. Underrque There has been a current less than the setting in L6-0 for longer than the setting in L6-03. Underrque There has been a current less than the setting in L6-05 for longer than the setting in L6-06. Overspeed The speed has been greater than the setting in F-08 for longer than the setting in F-09. The PG is disconnected The Drive is outputting a frequency, but PG pulses aren't being input. Excessive Speed Deviation The speed deviation has been greater than the setting in F-0 for longer than the setting in F-. Overshooting/undershooting are occurring. The reference speed is o high. The settings in F-08 and F-09 aren't appropriate. There is a break in the PG wiring. The PG is wired incorrectly. Power isn't being supplied the PG. The load is o large. The acceleration time and deceleration time are o short. The load is locked. The settings in F-0 and F- aren't appropriate Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are appropriate. Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overrque. Make sure that the settings in L6-0 and L6-03 are appropriate. Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overrque. Make sure that the current setting in L6-05 and time setting in L6-06 are appropriate. Check the mechanical system and correct the cause of the overrque. Adjust the gain again. Check the reference circuit and reference gain. Check the settings in F-08 and F-09. Fix the broken/disconnected wiring. Fix the wiring. Supply power the PG properly. Reduce the load. Lengthen the acceleration time and deceleration time. Check the mechanical system. Check the settings in F-0 and F-. EF0 Opt External Flt External fault detected for Communications Card other than SI-K Continuing operation was specified for EF0 (F6-03 = 3)and an external fault was input from the Option Card. - Remove the cause of the external fault. 7-0

392 Protective and Diagnostic Functions EF3 (blinking) Ext Fault S3 External fault (Input terminal S3) Table 7. Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued) Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions EF4 (blinking) Ext Fault S4 External fault (Input terminal S4) EF5 (blinking) Ext Fault S5 External fault (Input terminal S5) EF6 (blinking) Ext Fault S6 External fault (Input terminal S6) EF7 (blinking) Ext Fault S7 EF8 (blinking) Ext Fault S8 External fault (Input terminal S7) External fault (Input terminal S8) An external fault was input from a multi-function input terminal (S3 S). Reset external fault inputs the multi-function inputs. Remove the cause of the external fault. EF9 (blinking) Ext Fault S9 External fault (Input terminal S9) EF0 (blinking) Ext Fault S0 External fault (Input terminal S0) EF (blinking) Ext Fault S External fault (Input terminal S) EF (blinking) Ext Fault S External fault (Input terminal S) FBL (blinking) Feedback Loss PID Feedback Reference Lost A PID feedback reference loss was detected (b5- = ) and the PID feedback input was less than b5-3 (PID feedback loss detection level) for longer than the time set in b5-4 (PID feedback loss detection time)

393 CE (blinking) modbus Com Err MODBUS Communications Error Normal reception was not possible for s or longer after received control data. Table 7. Alarm Displays and Processing (Continued) Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions - Check the communications devices and signals. BUS (blinking) Option Com Err CALL (blinking) Com Call Option Card Communications Error A communications error occurred in a mode where the run command or a frequency reference is set from an Communications Option Card. Communications on Standby Control data was not normally received when power was turned ON. - - Check the communications devices and signals. Check the communications devices and signals. E-5 SI-F/G Com Err SI-F/G Communications Error Detected A communications error was detected when a run command or frequency reference was set from an Option Card and continuous operation was set for the E-5 operation selection. - Check the communications signals. 7-

394 Protective and Diagnostic Functions Operation Errors An operation error will occur if there is an invalid setting or a contradiction between two parameter settings. It won't be possible start the Drive until the parameters have been set correctly. (The alarm output and fault contact outputs will not operate either.) When an operation error has occurred, refer the following table identify and correct the cause of the errors. Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect s Display Meaning Incorrect settings OPE0 kva Selection Incorrect Drive capacity setting The Drive capacity setting doesn't match the Unit. (Contact your Yaskawa representative.) OPE0 Limit OPE03 Terminal OPE05 Sequence Select Parameter setting range error Multi-function input selection error Option Card selection error The parameter setting is outside of the valid setting range. When this error is displayed, press the ENTER Key display U-34 (OPE fault parameter). One of the following errors has been made in the multi-function input (H-0 H- 0) settings: The same setting has been selected for two or more multi-function inputs. An up or down command was selected independently. (They must be used gether.) The up/down commands (0 and ) and Accel/Decel Ramp Hold (A) were selected at the same time. Speed Search (6, maximum output frequency) and Speed Search (6. set frequency) were selected at the same time. The up/down commands (0 and ) were selected while PID Control Mode Selection (b5-0) was enabled. Positive and negative speed commands have not been set at the same time. The emergency sp command NO and NC have been set at the same time. The Option Card was selected as the frequency reference source by setting b-0 3, but an Option Card isn't connected (C option). OPE06 PG Opt Missing Control method selection error control with PG feedback was selected by setting A-0, but a PG Speed Control Card isn't connected. OPE07 Analog Selection OPE08 OPE09 Multi-function analog input selection error Parameter selection error PID control selection error The same setting has been selected for the analog input selection and the PID function selection. H3-09 = B and H6-0 = H3-09 = C and H6-0 = b-0 (Reference Selection) is set 4 (pulse input) and H6-0 (Pulse Train Input Function Selection) is set a value other than 0 (frequency reference). A setting has been made that is not required in the current control method. Ex.: A function used only with open-loop vecr control was selected for control. When this error is displayed, press the ENTER Key display U-34 (OPE fault parameter). The following settings have been made at the same time. b5-0 (PID Control Mode Selection) has been set a value other than 0. b5-5 (PID Sleep Function Operation Level) has been set a value other than 0. b-03 (Spping Method Selection) has been set or

395 OPE0 Ptrn Table 7.3 Operation Error Displays and Incorrect s (Continued) Display Meaning Incorrect settings data setting error Parameters E-04, E-06, E-07, and E-09 do not satisfy the following conditions: E-04 (FMAX) E-06 (FA) > E-07 (FB) E-09 (FMIN) E3-0 (FMAX) E3-04 (FA) > E3-05 (FB) E3-07 (FMIN) OPE Carr Freq/ On-Delay ERR EEPROM R/W Err Parameter setting error EEPROM write error One of the following parameter setting errors exists. C6-05 (Carrier Frequency Gain) > 6, the Carrier Frequency Lower Limit (C6-04) > the Carrier Frequency Gain(C6-05) Upper/lower limit error in C C6-0 is 0 and C6-0 is E. C6-0 is and C6-0 is 7 E. A verification error occurred when writing EEPROM. Try turning the power supply off and on again. Try setting the parameters again. 7-4

396 Protective and Diagnostic Functions Errors During Autuning The errors that can occur during autuning are given in the following table. If an error is detected, the mor will coast a sp and an error code will be displayed on the Digital Operar. The error contact output and alarm output will not function. Table 7.4 Errors During Autuning Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions Data Invalid Mor data error There is an error in the data input for autuning. There is an error in the relationship between the mor output and the mor rated current. The is an error between the no-load current setting and the input mor rated current (when autuning for only line-line resistance is performed for vecr control). Check the input data. Check the capacity of the Drive and mor. Check the mor rated current and noload current. Minor Fault STOP key Alarm STOP key input A minor fault occurred during autuning (xxx). The STOP Key was pressed cancel autuning. Check the input data. Check wiring and the machine. Check the load. Resistance No-Load Current Rated Slip Line--line resistance error No-load current error Rated slip error Autuning was not completed in the specified time. The results of autuning has exceeded the setting range for a user parameter. Check the input data. Check mor wiring. If the mor is connected the machine, disconnect it. Accelerate Mor Speed Acceleration error (detected only for rotational autuning) Mor speed error (detected only for rotational autuning) The mor did not accelerate in the specified time. The rque reference was o high (00%) during acceleration (for openloop vecr control only). Increase C-0 (Acceleration Time ). Increase L7-0 and L7-0 (Reverse Torque Limits) if they are low. If the mor is connected the machine, disconnect it. If the mor is connected the machine, disconnect it. Increase C-0 (Acceleration Time ). Check the input data (particularly the number of PG pulses and the number of mor poles). I-det. Circuit Current detection error The current flow exceeded the mor rated current. The detected current sign was the opposite of what it should be. There is a phase fault for U/T, V/T, W/T3. Check the current detection circuit, mor wiring, current detecr, and installation methods. Leak Inductance Leakage inductance error Autuning was not completed in the specified time. Check mor wiring. 7-5

397 Over Table 7.4 Errors During Autuning (Continued) Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions The rque reference exceeded 00% settings excessive * during and the no-load rque exceeded 70% autuning. Check and correct the settings. Disconnect the load from the mor. Saturation Mor core saturation error (detected only for rotational autuning) * The results of autuning has exceeded the setting range for a user parameter so a temporary setting was made for the mor core saturation coefficient. Check the input data. Check mor wiring. If the mor is connected the machine, disconnect it. Rated FLA Alm Rated current setting alarm * The rated current is set high. Check the input data (particularly the mor output current and mor rated current). * Displayed after autuning has been completed. 7-6

398 Protective and Diagnostic Functions Errors when Using the Digital Operar Copy Function The errors that can occur when using the copy function from the Digital Operar are given in the following table. An error code will be displayed on the Digital Operar. If a Digital Operar key is pressed when an error code is being displayed, the display will be cleared and 03-0 will be displayed. The error contact output and alarm output will not function. Table 7.5 Errors during Copy Function Function Display Meaning Probable causes Corrective Actions PRE READ IMPOSSIBLE Digital Operar write-protected o3-0 was set write a parameter when the Digital Operar was writeprotected (o3-0 = 0). Set o3-0 enable writing parameters with the Digital Operar. Read IFE READ DATA ERROR Illegal read data The read data length does not agree. The write data is incorrect. Repeat the read. Check the Digital Operar cable. Replace the Digital Operar. RDE DATA ERROR Illegal write status An attempted write of a parameter EEPROM on the Digital Writer failed. A low Drive voltage has been detected. Repeat the read. Replace the Digital Operar. CPE ID UNMATCH ID not matched The Drive product code or software number is different. Use the copy function for the same product code and software number. VAE INV. KVA UNMATCH Drive capacity matched The capacity of the Drive being copied and the capacity in the Digital Operar are different. Use the copy function for the same Drive capacity. Copy CRE CONTROL UNMATCH CYE COPY ERROR Control method matched Verify error The control method of the Drive being copied and the control method in the Digital Operar are different. The parameter written the Drive was compared with the parameter in the Digital Operar and they were different. Use the copy function for the same control method. Retry the copy. CSE SUM CHECK ERROR Checksum error The checksum in the Drive parameter area was compared with the checksum in the Digital Operar parameter area and they were different. Retry the copy. Verify VYE VERIFY ERROR Verify error The Digital Operar and Drive settings do not agree. Retry the copy and verify again. 7-7

399 Troubleshooting Due parameter setting errors, faulty wiring, and so on, the Drive and mor may not operate as expected when the system is started up. If that should occur, use this section as a reference and apply the appropriate measures. If the contents of the fault are displayed, refer Protective and Diagnostic Functions. If Parameters Cannot Be Set Use the following information if an Drive parameter cannot be set. The display does not change when the Increment and Decrement Keys are pressed. The following causes are possible. The Drive is operating (drive mode). There are some parameters that cannot be set during operation. Turn the Drive off and then make the settings. Parameter write enable is input. This occurs when parameter write enable (set value: B) is set for a multi-function input terminal (H-0 H-0). If the parameter write enable input is OFF, the parameters cannot be changed. Turn it ON and then set the parameters. Passwords do not match. (Only when a password is set.) If the parameter A-04 (Password) and A-05 (Password ) numbers are different, the parameters for the initialize mode cannot be changed. Reset the password. If you cannot remember the password, display A-05 (Password ) by pressing the Reset/Select Key and the Menu Key simultaneously while in the A-04 display. Then reset the password. (Input the reset password in parameter A-04.) OPE0 through OPE is displayed. The set value for the parameter is wrong. Refer Operation Errors in this chapter and correct the setting. CPF00 or CPF0 is displayed. This is a Digital Operar communications error. The connection between the Digital Operar and the Drive may be faulty. Remove the Digital Operar and then re-install it. 7-8

400 Troubleshooting If the Mor Does Not Operate Use the following information if the mor does not operate. The mor does not operate when the RUN Key on the Digital Operar is pressed. The following causes are possible. IMPORTANT If the Drive is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the Menu Key display the drive mode, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. -Rdy- will be displayed when drive mode is entered. The operation method setting is wrong. If parameter b-0 (Operation Method Selection) is set (control circuit terminal), the mor will not operate when the Run Key is pressed. Either press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* switch Digital Operar operation or set b-0 0 (Digital Operar). The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o-0 and disabled by setting o-0. It is enabled when the drive mode is entered. INFO The frequency reference is o low. If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Drive will not operate. Raise the frequency reference at least the minimum output frequency. There is a multi-function analog input setting error. If multi-function analog input H3-09 is set (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct. The mor does not operate when an external operation signal is input. The following causes are possible. The Drive is not in drive mode. If the Drive is not in drive mode, it will remain in ready status and will not start. Press the MENU Key display the drive mode, and enter the drive mode by pressing the DATA/ENTER Key. -Rdy- will be displayed when drive mode is entered. 7-9

401 The operation method selection is wrong. If parameter b-0 (reference selection) is set 0 (Digital Operar), the mor will not operate when an external operation signal is input. Set b-0 (control circuit terminal) and try again. Similarly, the mor will also not operate if the LOCAL/REMOTE Key has been pressed switch Digital Operar operation. In that case press the LOCAL/REMOTE Key* again return the original setting. The LOCAL/REMOTE Key is enabled by setting o-0 and disabled by setting o-0. It is enabled when the drive mode is entered. INFO A 3-wire sequence is in effect. The input method for a 3-wire sequence is different than when operating by forward/sp and reverse/sp (- wire sequence). When 3-wire sequence is set, the mor will not operate even when an input terminal suitable for forward run/sp and reverse run/sp is turned ON. When using a 3-wire sequence, refer the timing chart and input the proper signals. When using a -wire sequence, set the multi-function input terminal (H-0 through H-0, terminals S3 S) a value other than 0. The frequency reference is o low. If the frequency reference is set below the frequency set in E-09 (Minimum Output Frequency), the Drive will not operate. Raise the frequency reference at least the minimum output frequency. There is a multi-function analog input setting error. If multi-function analog inputs H3-05 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A3 Selection) and H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A Selection) are set (frequency gain), and if no voltage (current) is input, then the frequency reference will be zero. Check be sure that the set value and analog input value are correct. The mor sps during acceleration or when a load is connected. The load may be o heavy. The Drive has a stall prevention function and an aumatic rque boost function, but the mor responsiveness limit may be exceeded if acceleration is o rapid or if the load is o heavy. Lengthen the acceleration time or reduce the load. Also consider increasing the mor capacity. The mor only rotates in one direction. Reverse run prohibited is selected. If b-04 (Prohibition of Reverse Operation) is set (reverse run prohibited), the Drive will not receive reverse run commands. To use both forward and reverse operation, set b

402 Troubleshooting If the Direction of the Mor Rotation is Reversed If the mor operates in the wrong direction, the mor output wiring is faulty. When the Drive T(U), T(V), and T3(W) are properly connected the mor T(U), T(V), and T3(W), the mor operates in a forward direction when a forward run command is executed. The forward direction depends on the manufacturer and the mor type, so be sure check the specifications. The direction of rotation can be reversed by switching two wires among U, V, and W. If the Mor Does Not Put Out Torque or If Acceleration is Slow Use the following information is the mor does not output rque or if acceleration is o slow. The rque limit has been reached. When a rque limit has been set in parameters L7-0 L7-04, no rque will be output beyond that limit. This can cause the rque be insufficient, or the acceleration time be o long. Check be sure that the value set for the rque limit is suitable. If rque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input (H3-05 or H3-09 = 0 or 5), check be sure that the analog input value is suitable. The stall prevention level during acceleration is o low. If the value set for L3-0 (Stall Prevention Level during Acceleration) is o low, the acceleration time will be o long. Check be sure that the set value is suitable. The stall prevention level during running is o low. If the value set for L3-06 (Stall Prevention Level during Running) is o low, the speed will drop before outputting rque. Check be sure that the set value is suitable. Autuning has not been performed for vecr control control will not be perform if autuning has not been performed. Perform autuning separately for the mor, or set the mor parameters through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A-0) control (0 or ). 7-

403 If the Mor Operates Higher Than the Reference Use the following information if the mor operates higher than the reference. The analog frequency reference bias setting is wrong (the gain setting is wrong). The frequency reference bias set in parameter H3-03 is added the frequency reference. Check be sure that the set value is suitable. A signal is being input the frequency reference (current) terminal A. When F (frequency reference) is set for parameter H3-09 (Multi-function Analog Input Terminal A Function Selection), a frequency corresponding the terminal A input voltage (current) is added the frequency reference. Check be sure that the set value and analog input value are suitable. If the Slip Compensation Function Has Low Speed Precision If speed control accuracy is low for the slip compensation function, the slip compensation limit has been reached. With the slip compensation function, compensation cannot be carried out beyond the slip compensation limit set in parameter C3-03. Check be sure that the set value is suitable. If There is Low Speed Control Accuracy at High-speed Rotation in loop Control Mode The mor's rated voltage is high. The Drive's maximum output voltage is determined by its input voltage. (For example, if 00 Vac is input, then the maximum output voltage will be 00 Vac.) If, as a result of vecr control, the output voltage reference value exceeds the Drive output voltage maximum value, the speed control accuracy will decrease. Use a mor with a low rated voltage (i.e., a special mor for use with vecr control), or change flux vecr control. 7-

404 Troubleshooting If Mor Deceleration is Slow Use the following information when the mor deceleration is slow. The deceleration time is long even when braking resisr is connected. The following causes are possible. Stall prevention during deceleration enabled is set. When braking resisr is connected, set parameter L3-04 (Stall Prevention Selection during Deceleration) 0 (disabled) or 3 (with braking resisr). When this parameter is set (enabled, the facry setting), braking resisr does not fully function. The deceleration time setting is o long. Check the deceleration time setting (parameters C-0, C-04, C-06, and C-08). Mor rque is insufficient. If the parameters are correct and there is no overvoltage fault, then the mor's power is limited. Consider increasing the mor capacity. The rque limit has been reached. When a rque limit has been set in parameters L7-0 L7-04, no rque will be output beyond that limit. This can cause the deceleration time be o long. Check be sure that the value set for the rque limit is suitable. If rque limits have been set for the multi-function analog input terminal A Function H3-09 (set value: 0 or 5), check be sure that the analog input value is suitable. If the Vertical-axis Load Drops When Brake is Applied The sequence is incorrect. The Drive goes in DC injection braking status for 0.5 seconds after deceleration is completed. (This is the facry-set default.) To ensure that the brake holds, set frequency detection (H-0 = 5) for the multi-function contact output terminals (M and M) so that the contacts will turn OFF when the output frequency is greater than L4-0 ( Hz). (The contacts will turn ON below L4-0.) There is hysteresis in frequency detection (i.e., a frequency detection width, L4-0 =.0 Hz). Change the setting approximately 0.5 Hz if there are drops during sp. Do not use the multi-function contact output run signal (H-0 = 0) for the brake ON/OFF signal. 7-3

405 If the Mor Overheats Take the following steps if the mor overheats. The load is o big. If the mor load is o heavy and the mor is used with the effective rque exceeding the mor's rated rque, the mor will overheat. Some mor rating are given for short period performance and are not continuous ratings. Reduce the load amount by either lightening the load or lengthening the acceleration/deceleration time. Also consider increasing the mor capacity. The ambient temperature is o high. The mor rating is determined within a particular ambient operating temperature range. The mor will burn out if it is run continuously at the rated rque in an environment in which the maximum ambient operating temperature is exceeded. Lower the mor's ambient temperature within the acceptable ambient operating temperature range. The withstand voltage between the mor phases is insufficient. When the mor is connected the Drive output, a surge is generated between the Drive switching and the mor coil. Normally the maximum surge voltage is three times the Drive's input power supply voltage. Be sure use a mor with a withstand voltage between the mor phases that is greater than the maximum surge voltage. In particular, when using a V class Drive, use a special mor for Drives. Autuning has not been performed for vecr control control will not perform if autuning has not been performed. Perform autuning, or set the mor parameters through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A-0) control (0 or ). If There is Noise When the Drive is Started or From an AM Radio If noise is generated by Drive switching, implement the following countermeasures: Change the Drive's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-0) lower the carrier frequency. This will help some extent by reducing the amount of internal switching. Install an Input Noise Filter at the Drive's power supply input area. Install an Output Noise Filter at the Drive's power supply output area. Use metal tubing. Electric waves can be shielded by metal, so encase the Drive with metal (steel). Ground the Drive and mor. Separate main circuit wiring from control wiring. 7-4

406 Troubleshooting If the Ground Fault Interrupter Operates When the Drive is Run The Drive performs internal switching, so there is a certain amount of leakage current. This may cause the ground fault interrupter operate and cut off the power supply. Change a ground fault interrupter with a high leakage detection level (i.e., a sensitivity current of 00 ma or greater per Unit, with an operating time of 0. s or more), or one that incorporates high frequency countermeasures (i.e., one designed for use with Drives). It will also help some extent change the Drive's Carrier Frequency Selection (C6-0) lower the carrier frequency. In addition, remember that the leakage current increases as the cable is lengthened. If There is Mechanical Oscillation Use the following information when there is mechanical oscillation. The machinery is making unusual sounds. The following causes are possible. There may be resonance between the mechanical system's characteristic frequency and the carrier frequency. If the mor is running with no problems and the machinery is oscillating with a high-pitched whine, it may indicate that this is occurring. To prevent this type of resonance, adjust the carrier frequency with parameters C6-0 C6-05. There may be resonance between a machine's characteristic frequency and the output frequency of the Drive. To prevent this from occurring, either use the jump frequency functions in parameters d3-0 d3-04 or install rubber padding on the mor base reduce oscillation. Oscillation and hunting are occurring with open-loop vecr control. The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain a more effective level by adjusting parameters C4-0 (rque compensation time parameter), C-0 (S-curve Characteristic Time at Acceleration Start), and C3-0 (Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting. control will not perform if autuning has not been performed. Perform autuning separately for the mor, or set the mor parameters through calculations. Alternatively, change the control method selection (A-0) control (0 or ). Oscillation and hunting are occurring with control. The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Reset the gain a more effective level by adjusting parameters C4-0 (Torque Compensation Primary Delay Time Constant), n-0 (Hunting Prevention Gain), and C3-0 (Slip Compensation Primary Delay Time) in order. Lower the gain setting and raise the primary delay time setting. 7-5

407 Oscillation and hunting are occurring with w/pg control. The gain adjustment may be insufficient. Adjust the various types of speed control loop (ASR) gain. If the oscillation cannot be eliminated in this way, set the hunting prevention selection (parameter n-0) 0 (disabled) and then try adjusting the gain again. Oscillation and hunting are occurring with flux vecr control. The gain adjustment is insufficient. Adjust the various gains for speed control (ASR). If the oscillation points overlap with those of the machine and cannot be eliminated, increase the primary delay time constant for speed control (ASR) in C5-06 and then readjust the gains. If autuning is not performed, proper performance cannot be achieved for vecr control. Perform autuning or set the mor parameters according calculations. Oscillation and hunting are occurring with PID control. If there is oscillation or hunting during PID control, check the oscillation cycle and individually adjust P, I, and D parameters. (Refer page 6-0.) Autuning has not been performed with vecr control. control will not perform if autuning has not been performed. Perform autuning separately for the mor, or set the mor parameters through calculations. Alternatively, change the Control Method Selection (A-0) control. If the Mor Rotates Even When Drive Output is Spped If the mor rotates even when the Drive output is spped, the DC injection braking is insufficient. If the mor continues operating at low speed, without completely spping, and after a deceleration sp has been executed, it means that the DC injection braking is not decelerating enough. Adjust the DC injection braking as follows: Increase the parameter b-0 (DC Injection Braking Current) setting. Increase the parameter b-04 (DC Injection Braking (initial excitation) Time at Sp) setting. If 0 V is Detected When the Fan is Started, or Fan Stalls Generation of 0 V (main circuit voltage) and stalling can occur if the fan is turning when it is started. The DC injection braking is insufficient when starting. This can be prevented by slowing fan rotation by DC injection braking before starting the fan. Increase the parameter b-03 (DC injection braking time (initial excitation) at start) setting. 7-6

408 Troubleshooting If Output Frequency Does Not Rise Frequency Reference Use the following information if the output frequency does not rise the frequency reference. The frequency reference is within the jump frequency range. When the jump frequency function is used, the output frequency does not change within the jump frequency range. Check be sure that the Jump Frequency (parameters d3-0 d3-03) and Jump Frequency Width (parameter d3-04) settings are suitable. The frequency reference upper limit has been reached. The output frequency upper limit is determined by the following formula: Maximum Output Frequency (E-04) Frequency Reference Upper Limit (d-0) / 00 Check be sure that the parameter E-04 and d-0 settings are suitable. 7-7

409 7-8

410 8 Maintenance and Inspection This chapter describes basic maintenance and inspection for the Drive. Maintenance and Inspection...8-

411 Maintenance and Inspection Outline of Maintenance The maintenance period of the Drive is as follows: Maintenance Period: Within 8 months of shipping from the facry or within months of being delivered the final user, whichever comes first. Daily Inspection Check the following items with the system in operation. The mor should not be vibrating or making unusual noises. There should be no abnormal heat generation. The ambient temperature should not be o high. The output current value shown on the monir displays should not be higher than normal. The cooling fan on the botm of the Drive should be operating normally. Periodic Inspection Check the following items during periodic maintenance. Always turn OFF the power supply before beginning inspection. Confirm that the LCD and LED indicars on the front cover have all turned OFF, and then wait until at least five minutes has elapsed before beginning the inspection. Be sure not uch terminals right after the power has been turned off. Doing so can result in electric shock. Table 8. Periodic Inspections 8- Item Inspection Corrective Procedure External terminals, Are all screws and bolts tight? Tighten loose screws and bolts firmly. mounting bolts, connecrs, etc. Are connecrs tight? Reconnect the loose connecrs. Cooling fins Are the fins dirty or dusty? Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39. x x 0 4 Pa (4 6 kg cm ). Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using PCBs Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on dry air at a pressure of 39. x x 0 4 Pa the PCBs? (4 6 kg cm ). Replace the boards if they cannot be made clean. Cooling fan Is there any abnormal noise or vibration or has the tal operating time exceeded 0,000 hours? Replace the cooling fan. Power elements Smoothing capacir Is there any conductive dirt or oil mist on the elements? Are there any irregularities, such as discoloration or odor? Clean off any dirt and dust with an air gun using dry air at a pressure of 39. x x 0 4 Pa (4 6 kg cm ). Replace the capacir or Drive.

412 Maintenance and Inspection Periodic Maintenance of Parts The Drive is configured of many parts, and these parts must be operating properly in order make full use of the Drive functions. Among the electronic components, there are some that require maintenance depending on their usage conditions. In order keep the Drive operating normally over a long period of time, it is necessary perform period inspections and replace parts according their service life. Periodic inspection standards vary depending the Drive's installation environment and usage conditions. The Drive's maintenance periods are noted below. Keep them as reference. Table 8. Part Replacement Guidelines Part Standard Replacement Period Replacement Method Cooling fan 3 years Replace with new part. Smoothing capacir 5 years Replace with new part. (Determine need by inspection.) Breaker relays - Determine need by inspection. Fuses 0 years Replace with new part. Aluminum capacirs on PCBs 5 years Note The standard replacement period is based on the following usage conditions: Ambient temperature:yearly average of 30 C Load facr: 80% max. Operating rate: hours max. per day Replace with new board. (Determine need by inspection.) 8-3

413 Cooling Fan Replacement Outline V and V Class Drives of 5 kw or Less A cooling fan is attached the botm of the Drive. If the Drive is installed using the mounting holes on the back of the Drive, the cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Drive from the installation panel. Removing the Cooling Fan. Press in on the right and left sides of the fan cover in the direction of arrows and when pull the fan out in the direction of arrow.. Pull out the cable connected the fan from the fan cover and disconnect the relay connecr. 3. the fan cover on the left and right sides and remove the fan cover from the fan. Air flow direction Fan cover Fig 8. Cooling Fan Replacement (Drives of 5 kw or Less) Mounting the Cooling Fan. Attach the fan cover the cooling fan. Be sure that the air flow direction indicated by the arrows above faces in the Drive.. Connect the relay connecr securely and place the relay connecr and cable in the fan cover. 3. Mount the fan cover on the Drive. Be sure that the tabs on the sides of the fan cover click in place on the Drive. 8-4

414 Maintenance and Inspection V and V Class Drives of 8.5 kw or More A cooling fan is attached the p panel inside the Drive. The cooling fan can be replaced without removing the Drive from the installation panel. Removing the Cooling Fan. Remove the terminal cover, Drive cover, Digital Operar, and front cover from the front of the Drive.. Remove the controller bracket which the cards are mounted. Remove all cables connected the controller. 3. Remove the cooling fan power cable connecr (CN6 and CN7) from the gate driver positioned at the back of the controller. 4. Remove the fan cover screws and pull out the fan cover from the Drive. 5. Remove the cooling fan from the fan cover. Mounting the Cooling Fan After attaching a new cooling fan, reverse the above procedure attach all of the components. When attaching the cooling fan the mounting bracket, be sure that the air flow faces the p of the Drive. Air flow direction Controller bracket Fan cover Controller Connecr Gate driver Fig 8. Cooling Fan Replacement (Drives of 8.5 kw or More) 8-5

415 Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card The control circuit terminal card can be removed and mounted without disconnecting the cables. Always confirm that the charge indicar is not lit before removing or mounting the control circuit terminal card. IMPORTANT Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card. Remove the Digital Operar and front cover.. Remove the connecting line connecrs connected FE and NC on the control circuit terminal card. 3. Loosen the mounting screws () on the left and right sides of the control terminals until they are free. (It is not necessary remove these screws completely. They are self-rising.) 4. Pull the terminal card out sideways (in direction ) with the screws sticking out from the card. Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card Reverse the removal procedure mount the terminal card. Confirm that the terminal circuit card and the controller properly meet at connecr CN5 before pressing in on the card. The connecr pins may be bent if the card is forced in place, possibly preventing correct Drive operation. Removing and Mounting the Control Circuit Terminal Card FE NC Fig 8.3 Removing the Control Circuit Terminal Card 8-6

416 9 Specifications This chapter describes the basic specifications of the Drive and specifications for options and peripheral devices. Standard Drive Specifications...9- Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices...9-5

417 Standard Drive Specifications The standard Drive specifications are listed by capacity in the following tables. Specifications by Model Specifications are given by model in the following tables V Class Table V Class Drives Model Number CIMR-G7U 0P4 0P7 P5 P 3P7 5P5 7P Max. applicable mor output (kw) Rated output capacity (kva) Rated output current (A) Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase; 00, 08, 0, 30, or 40 Vac (Proportional input voltage.) Max. output frequency (Hz) Frequencies supported up 400 Hz using parameter setting Rated voltage (V) Rated frequency (Hz) 3-phase, 00/08/0/30/40 Vac, 50/60 Hz * Allowable voltage fluctuation + 0%, - 5% Output ratings Power supply characteristics Allowable frequency fluctuation Measures for power supply harmonics DClink choke Optional Built in -phase rectification Not possible Possible *3 *. The maximum applicable mor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa mor. When selecting the actual mor and Drive, be sure that the Drive's rated current is applicable for the mor's rated current. *. The voltage of the cooling fan for V Class Drives of 30 kw is three-phase, 00, 08, or 0 V at 50 Hz or 00, 08, 0, or 30 V at 60 Hz. * 3. A 3-wire transformer is required on the power supply for -phase rectification. ±5% 9-

418 Standard Drive Specifications V Class Table V Class Drives Model Number CIMR-G7U 40P4 40P7 4P5 4P 43P7 44P0 45P5 47P Max. applicable mor output (kw) * Rated output capacity (kva) Rated output current (A) Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase; 380, 400, 45, 440, 460, or 480 Vac (Proportional input voltage.) Max. output frequency Frequencies supported up 400 Hz using parameter setting (Hz) Output ratings Power supply characteristics Rated voltage (V) Rated frequency (Hz) Allowable voltage fluctuation Allowable frequency fluctuation 3-phase, 380, 400, 45, 440, 460 or 480 Vac, 50/60 Hz + 0%, - 5% ±5% Measures for power supply harmonics DC link choke -phase rectification Optional Built in Not possible Possible * Model Number CIMR-G7U Max. applicable mor output (kw) * Rated output capacity (kva) Rated output current (A) Max. output voltage (V) 3-phase, 380, 400, 45, 440, 460, or 480 Vac (Proportional input voltage.) Max. output frequency Frequencies supported up 400 Hz using parameter setting (Hz) Output ratings Power supply characteristics Max. voltage (V) Rated frequency (Hz) Allowable voltage fluctuation Allowable frequency fluctuation 3-phase, 380, 400, 45, 440, 460, or 480 Vac, 50/60 Hz + 0%, - 5% ±5% Measures for power supply harmonics DC link choke -phase rectification *. The maximum applicable mor output is given for a standard 4-pole Yaskawa mor. When selecting the actual mor and Drive, be sure that the Drive's rated current is applicable for the mor's rated current. *. A 3-wire transformer (optional) is required on the power supply for -phase rectification. Built in Possible * 9-3

419 Common Specifications The following specifications apply both V and V Class Drives. Table 9.3 Common Specifications 9-4 Control characteristics Protective functions Environment Model Number CIMR-G7U Control method Specification Sine wave PWM Flux vecr control, open-loop vecr control or, control without PG, control with PG (switched by parameter setting) Torque characteristics 50%/0.3 Hz (-loop vecr control ), 50%/0 min (Flux vecr control) * Speed control range :00 (-loop vecr control ), :000 (Flux vecr control) * Speed control accuracy Speed control response Torque limits ±0.% (-loop vecr control, 5 C ± 0 C), ±0.0% (Flux vecr control, 5 C ± 0 C) 0 Hz (-loop vecr control ), 30 Hz (Flux vecr control) Provided for vecr control only (4 quadrant steps can be changed by parameter settings.) Torque accuracy ±5% Frequency control range Hz *3 Frequency accuracy (temperature characteristics) Frequency setting resolution Output frequency resolution Overload capacity and maximum current * Frequency setting signal Acceleration/Deceleration time Braking rque Main control functions Mor protection Instantaneous overcurrent protection Fuse blown protection Overload protection Overvoltage protection Undervoltage protection Momentary power loss ridethrough Cooling fin overheating Stall prevention Grounding protection Charge indicar Ambient operating temperature Ambient operating humidity Srage temperature Application site Altitude Vibration Digital references: ± 0.0% (-0 C +40 C) Analog references: ±0.% (5 C ±0 C) Digital references: 0.0 Hz, Analog references: 0.03 Hz/60 Hz ( bit with no sign) 0.00 Hz 50% of rated output current per minute, 00% for 5 s -0 0 V, 0 0 V, 4 0 ma, pulse train s (4 selectable combinations of independent acceleration and deceleration settings) Approximately 0% (Approximately 5% with Braking Resisr option, braking transformer built in V and V Class Drives for 5 kw or less.) * Restarting for momentary power loss, speed searches, overrque detection, rque limits, 7-speed control (maximum), acceleration/deceleration time changes, S-curve acceleration/deceleration, 3-wire sequence, autuning (rotational or stationary), dwell functions, cooling fan ON/OFF control, slip compensation, rque compensation, jump frequencies, upper and lower limits for frequency references, DC braking for starting and spping, high-slip braking, PID control (with sleep function), energy-saving control, MODBUS communications (RS-485/4, 9. kbps maximum), fault reset, function copying, droop control, rque control, speed/rque control switching, etc. UL recognized protection by electronic thermal overload relay. Sps at approx. 00% of rated output current. Sps for fuse blown. 50% of rated output current per minute, 00% for 5 s Class Drive: Sps when main-circuit DC voltage is above 40 V Class Drive: Sps when main-circuit DC voltage is above 80 V Class Drive: Sps when main-circuit DC voltage is below 90 V Class Drive: Sps when main-circuit DC voltage is below 380 V. Sps for 5ms or more. By selecting the momentary power loss method, operation can be continued if power is resred within s. Protection by thermisr. Stall prevention during acceleration, deceleration, or running. Protection by electronic circuits. Lit when the main circuit DC voltage is approx. 50 V or more. -0 C 40 C (Enclosed wall-mounted type) 0 C 45 C ( chassis type) 95% max. (with no condensation) - 0 C + 60 C (short-term temperature during transportation) Indoor (no corrosive gas, dust, etc.) 000 m max. Tolerance for vibration frequency less than 0 Hz, 9.8 m/s max.; 0 50 Hz, m/s max *. Rotational autuning must be performed ensure obtaining the specifications given for flux vecr control and open-loop vecr control and. *. When connecting a Braking Resisr or Braking Resisr Unit, set L3-04 (Stall prevention selection during deceleration) 0 (disabled). Spping may not be possible in the specified deceleration time if this function is not disabled. * 3. The maximum output frequency for open-loop vecr control is 60 Hz.

420 Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices Specifications of Options and Peripheral Devices The following options and peripheral devices can be used for the Drive. Select them according the application. Table 9.4 Options and Peripheral Devices Purpose Name Model (Code) Descriptions Protect Drive wiring Prevents burning when a Braking Resisr is used. Contains switching surge MCCB or Ground Fault Interrupter * Magnetic Contacr Surge Absorber NF HI- J DCR- Isolates I/O signals Isolar DGP Improve the input power facr of the Drive Reduce the affects of radio and control device noise Enable spping the machine in a set time Operates the Drive externally Controls Drive system Provides Drive momentary power loss recovery time Set/monir frequencies and voltages externally. Correct frequency reference input, frequency meter, ammeter scales DC Reacr AC Reacr Input Noise Filter Finemet zerophase reacr reduce radio noise * Output Noise Filter Braking Resisr Braking Resisr Unit Braking Unit VS Operar (small plastic Operar) VS Operar (Standard steelplate Operar) Digital Operar Connection Cable VS System Module Momentary Power Loss Recovery Unit Frequency Meter Frequency Setter Frequency Setter Knob Output Voltmeter Variable Resisr Board for Frequency Reference Frequency Meter Scale Correction Resisr UZDA- UZBA- (Single phase) LNFB- (3 phase) LNFD- HF F6045GB (FIL00098) F080GB (FIL00097) LF-o ERF-50WJ (R00 ) LKEB- (75600-K 0) CDBR- (7600-R 0) JVOP-95 ( X- ) JVOP-96 ( X- ) m cable: (7606- WV00) 3 m cable: (7606- WV003) JGSM- P00 0 (73600-P00 0) DCF-6A RV30YN0S ( kω) CM-3S SCF-NH kω (ETX00370) 0 kω (ETX0030) (RH000850) Always connect a breaker the power supply line protect Drive wiring. Use a ground fault interrupter suitable for high frequencies. Install prevent the braking resisr from burning out when one is used. Always attach a surge absorber the coil. Absorbs surge from the magnetic contacr and control relays. Connect surge absorbers all magnetic contacrs and relays near the Drive. Isolates the I/O signals of the Drive and is effective against inductive noise. Used improve the input power facr of the Drive. All Drives of 8.5 kw or higher contain built-in DC reacrs. These are optional for Drives of 5 kw or less. Install DC and AC reacrs for applications with a large power supply capacity (600 kva or higher). Reduces noise coming in the Drive from the power supply line and reduce noise flowing from the Drive in the power supply line. Connect as close the Drive as possible. Reduces noise from the line that sneaks in the Drive input power system. Insert as close the Drive as possible. Can be use on both the input side and output side. Reduces noise generated by the Drive. Connect as close the Drive as possible. Consumes the regenerative mor energy with a resisr reduce deceleration time (use rate: 3% ED). Consumes the regenerative mor energy with a resisr reduce deceleration time (use rate: 0% ED). Used with a Braking Resisr Unit reduce the deceleration time of the mor. Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control be performed by analog references from a remote location (50 m max.). Frequency counter specifications: 60/0 Hz, 90/80Hz Allows frequency reference settings and ON/OFF operation control be performed by analog references from a remote location (50 m max.). Frequency counter specifications: 75 Hz, 50 Hz, 0 Hz Extension cable use a Digital Operar remotely. Cable length: m or 3 m A system controller that can be match the aumatic control system produce an optimum system configuration. Handles momentary power losses for the control power supply for models. kw or less (maintains power for s). Devices set or monir frequencies externally. Measures the output voltage externally and designed for use with a PWM Drive. Connected the control circuit terminals input a frequency reference. Calibrates the scale of frequency meters and ammeters. Power supply MCCB or ground fault interrupter Magnetic contacr AC reacr improve power facr *. Use a ground fault interrupter with a current sensitivity of 00 ma minimum and an operating time of 0. s minimum prevent operating errors. The interrupter must be suitable for high-frequency operation. Example: NV series by Mitsubishi Electric Corporation (manufactured in or after 988) EG, SG series by Fuji Electric Co., Ltd. (manufactured in or after 984) *. The finement zero-phase reacr is manufactured by Hitachi Metals. Drive Frequency meter Zero phase reacr Input-line noise filter VS Operar Ground Output-line noise filter Ground Braking resisr DC reacr Mor 9-5